Promis-E User Guide

promis•e V8i ®
User Guide
November 2008
Copyright Notice ©2008 Bentley Systems, Inc. All rights reserved
Printed in the United States of America
Trademark promis•e, Bentley and MicroStation are registered or licensed trademarks of Bentley Systems,
Notices Inc.
PLC, PLC-2, PLC-3, and PLC-5 are registered trademarks of Allen–Bradley Company, Inc.
SLC and SLC 500 are trademarks of Allen–Bradley Company, Inc.
AutoCAD and AutoCAD LT are registered trademarks of Autodesk, Inc.
Microsoft, MS-DOS, and Windows are registered trademarks, and Windows NT is a trademark
of the Microsoft Corporation.
All other trademarks are the property of their respective holders and are hereby acknowledged.
Cover Photo of Helix Nebula courtesy of NASA and STScI.
Important User This Bentley Systems product is warranted in accord with the product license. The product’s
Information performance will be affected by system configuration, the application being performed, operator
control and other related factors.
The product’s implementation may vary among users.
This manual is as up-to-date as possible at the time of printing; however, the accompanying
software may have changed since that time. Bentley Systems reserves the right to change any
information contained in this manual or the software at any time without prior notice.
The instructions in this manual do not claim to cover all the details of variations in the
equipment, procedure, or process described, nor to provide directions for meeting every possible
contingency during installation, operation, or maintenance.
Technical Support:
Bentley Systems provides technical support to promis•e users currently under
warranty or support contracts. Technical Support is available Monday
through Friday from 8 am to 5 pm Central Standard Time.
Phone (800) 778-4277
When you call, please have available your software revision number and a
brief description of your problem.
World Wide Web: www.bentley.com
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
Table of Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Downloading the Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Starting promis•e . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Activating the Software License . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
License Activation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Checking Out a License . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Introduction and Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
The promis•e Concept . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Software Functionality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Using promis•e . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Using This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Manual Conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Toolbars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Command Line / Text Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Help Screens and User Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Dialog Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Engineering Design Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Sample Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Project Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Project Organization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Drawing Sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Installations and Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Project Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Favorites Project Folder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Search Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
See Page Pending Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Save Project As . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Create New Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Copy Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Rename Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Modify Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Delete Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Project Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Address File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
5
Table of Contents
Balloon Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Default Grid Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Default Project Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Display Formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Display Languages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Drawing Standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
PLC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Region Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Revision Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Text Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Wiring Diagram Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Wire Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Project Backup / Restore . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Make a Backup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Restore a Backup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Rebuild Project Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Migration Wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Starting the Migration Wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Migrate from Legacy promis•e . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Migrate from Version 2.0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Migrate Catalog from AutoCAD to MicroStation Version . . . . . 137
Data Data Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
BOM Explorer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
BOM Explorer - Edit Parts Data in Existing Project . . . . . . . . . . 144
BOM Explorer - Assign Parts Data to New Project . . . . . . . . . . 145
BOM Explorer - Using the Parts List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Page Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Page Organization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Page Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Displaying Pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Open Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Close Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Next Page, Previous Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
New Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Save Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Automatic Page Save . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Save As Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Export Page to DWG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Copy Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Modify Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
6
Table of Contents
Rename Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170

Move Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Clear Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Refresh Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Update Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Validate Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Viewing Pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Navigate Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Search Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Page Format Designer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Using Drawing Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Drawing Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Lines vs. Wires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Wires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
To Draw a Single Wire: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
To Draw Continuous Wires or Lines: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
To Draw 3-Phase Wires: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
To Draw Wires Using 90 Degree Up / Down: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Wire Connector Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Draw Ladder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Wire Stretch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
Edit Wire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Wire Layers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Insert Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
Insert Symbol by Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
Insert Symbol by Part Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Insert Symbol By Device ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Device ID Assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Symbol Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
I/O Text Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
Multiple Placement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
Symbol Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
Device Families (Parent and Child Symbols) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
Symbol On the Fly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
Update Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
Hyperlinks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
Insert Macro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
Entering Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
7
Table of Contents
Single Line Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248

Multiline Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
Editing Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
Language Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
Assigning Wires to a Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
Cable Cross Reference Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
Cable Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
Field . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
Wire Link Cross References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
Types of Wire Links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
Wire Link Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
Placing a Wire Link Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
Search and Link Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
Wire Link Notation Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
Re-sequence Wire Link Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
Wire/Device Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
Connection Search Priorities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
Wire Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
Wire Number Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
Automatic Wire Number Assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
Manual Wire Number Assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
Modify Wire Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
Delete Wire Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
Find and Replace Wire Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
Align Wire Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
Part Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
Drawing Mode Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
Edit an Existing Drawing Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
Create a New Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
Rename a Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
Edit Drawing Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
Delete (Erase) Drawing Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
Copy Drawing Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
Move Drawing Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
Replace Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
Replace Device ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
Replace Part Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
Replace Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
Replace Symbol Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
Replace Title Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
8
Table of Contents
Replace Page Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313

Align Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
Edit Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
Wiring Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
Wiring Diagram Symbols vs. Wiring Diagram Charts . . . . . . . . 318
Create Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319
Creating Drawing Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
Managing Symbols and Symbol Catalogs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
Symbol Catalogs and Directories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
Catalog Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
Create Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
Symbol Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
Symbol Creation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
Modify an Existing Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350
Creating an Example PLC Parent Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351
Create Wiring Diagram Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360
Create Panel Layout Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375
Create Macro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385
Macro Creation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385
Create Title Block Macro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387
Create Family . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396
Modify Family . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404
Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407
promis•e Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407
System Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418
Command Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418
Symbol Texts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422
User Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423
Language On Dialogs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423
Startup Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424
User Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424
Validation Prompts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425
View Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427
Plug-in Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428
Plotting and Publishing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429
Plot Page Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429
Plot Current Page (AutoCAD Version) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431
Plot Device tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431
Layout Settings tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433
9
Table of Contents
Plot Current Page (MircroStation Version) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435

Project Publisher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 437
Starting Project Publisher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 438
File Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439
Manage External File Links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440
Configure Publisher - Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443
Configure Publisher - Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 452
Publish - Create Package . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 455
Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 457
Generate Reports Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 457
Selecting and running a report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 458
Select the output type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 459
Sorting report contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 460
Filtering report contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 461
Report Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 462
Creating a Report Output Configuration File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 463
Compile Connection Information function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 464
Standard Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 465
Report Template Designer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 466
Report Template Designer Toolbars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 474
Report Template Designer Controls (Toolbox) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 474
Report Configuration Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 475
Engineering Design Considerations Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 482
Graphical Parts List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 484
Create page macro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 485
Create graphical parts list macro and cross reference macro . . 485
Edit parts database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 488
Run the Graphical Parts List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 489
Forced Routing Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 491
Arrangement View tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 492
Wire List View tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 498
Split View tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 501
Import Legacy Connection List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 501
Panduit Labels Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 503
Terminal and Pin-Plug Plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 507
Terminal Plan Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 507
Steps of Terminal Plan Creation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 507
Connection Point Designations and Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 508
Terminal Plan Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 511
Terminal/Pin-Plug Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 512
10
Table of Contents
Terminal Editing Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 516

Graphical Terminal Plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 531
Graphical Terminal Plan Generation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 532
How the software generates a graphical plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 535
Graphical Plan Template Designer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 537
Graphical Plan Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 541
Panel Layout and Wire Routing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 543
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 543
Create Panel Layout First . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 544
Create Panel Layout Later . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 545
Balloons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 551
Create Balloons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 551
Assign Balloon Number in Device Properties Dialog . . . . . . . . 553
Modify or Delete Balloons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 554
Set Balloon Appearance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 554
Clear All Balloons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 554
Panel Layout Design Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 555
Insert DIN Rail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 555
Snap to DIN Rail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 558
Mounting Accessories Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 558
Panduit Wire Containment Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 560
Panduit Wire Containment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 560
Panduit Auto Size-Space . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 571
Configuration File Formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 575
Gauge Table Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 576
Shortest Distance Routing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 579
Shortest Distance Procedure - Standard Method . . . . . . . . . . . 580
Shortest Distance Procedure - Wiring Rules Method . . . . . . . . 594
Direct Wiring (Wiring Rules Method) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 600
Grouping and Sequencing Terminal Connections - Wiring Rules Method 601
Guidelines and Routing Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 603
Panduit Wire Terminations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 608
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 608
Create or Edit a Class with the Panduit Termination Editor . . . 609
Edit Parts Database with Panduit Data Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 612
Creating an Export File with the Wire Terminations Utility . . . . 615
Parts Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 629
Parts Database Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 630
Database Data Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 630
11
Table of Contents
Parts Database Editor Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 634

Structure of a promis•e parts database Data Record . . . . . . . . 640
Panduit Part Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 642
Project API Builder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 653
Project API Command File Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 654
Legacy File Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 654
Standard File Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 654
Available Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 655
Running the Project API Builder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 662
Appendices
Engineering Design Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 663
Wiring Rules XML File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 671
Structure of Wiring Rules File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 671
How to define a new rule set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 673
Defining Panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 673
Defining Available Terminals For Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 674
Defining Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 675
Specifying Direct Wire Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 678
Shipping Splits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 678
Section and Compartment ID Format in EctRway.xml . . . . . . . . . . 680
ProjectWise Plug-in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 683
Using ProjectWise with promis•e . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 684
Logging in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 684
Creating new projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 684
Checking in a project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 685
Checking out a project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 687
Copy In . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 688
Copy Out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 688
Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 688
Plant Exchange Plug-in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 695
Importing Data from Plant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 696
Using the Imported Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 703
Synchronizing Data to Plant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 704
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 711
12
Installation and Start-up
1 Installation and Start-up
Downloading the Software

After you purchase the software, you will be sent instructions for logging on to the
Bentley web site and downloading the software.
You will have the choice of downloading an executable installation file to your
computer or having the files burned to CD and shipped to you.
After installing promis•e you will need to run the software and activate your license
(does not apply to evaluation systems).
Installation
To install the software, follow the instructions in the promis•e Installation Guide.
Most of the program files for promis•e are installed by default in the Program
Files\Bentley\promis-e directory.
Symbols, drawing templates and configurations files for promis•e are stored by
default in the directory promis-e Data.
13
Starting promis•e
Use this procedure to start promis•e.
1. In Windows you can run promis•e from the Start button menu or, if you have
created an icon (shortcut) for promis•e on the desktop, you can double click on
the icon.
2. The software will start and the following promis•e welcome dialog will be
displayed.
This screen allows you to choose a variety of functions:

To browse through the projects on your system, select the Project Manager
link. If you wish to always start in the Project Manager, select the Always Start
With Project Manager checkbox.
To open a recently used page, select one from the list in the Project
Management section of the dialog.
To create a new project, select the New Project link.
14
To restore sample projects, select the Restore Sample Projects link. This will
give you a variety of drawings to look at or edit.
To access the promis•e Setup function (see page 407), select the Setup link.
For information about the software, go to the Getting Started section of the
dialog and select:
• ANSI-IEEE or IEC Tutorial - for a product tutorial
• User Manual - to access the User Guide
• Product Videos - To see a Web page with videos of the product in use
Note: If you prefer, you can set the software to start in the Project Manager rather than in
the Welcome dialog. Use the Startup Interface function in the Options dialog to make
this setting (see page 424).
15
Activating the Software License

Product activation is the act of authenticating a product for entitled use. promis•e
uses SELECT Server licensing, which is Bentley’s system for organizing and
managing software licenses. SELECT Server offers many advantages including
pooled licensing, license usage reports, and flexibility in how license servers are
deployed.
V8 XM Edition applications, including promis•e, are equipped by default with three
behavioral states - Evaluation, Activated, and Deactivated.
The Evaluation period (also called the Pre-Activated period) begins with installation
and ends after 30 days or with Activation, which ever comes first. During this
Evaluation period, most applications run in full-functioning mode, with no limitations
applied to their activated state.
An application is Activated when it is licensed, which is most commonly achieved by
connecting to a valid SELECT Server. An application can return to Evaluation mode
if its licensing server cannot be found. In this case, the Evaluation period begins
again, providing a 30-day window during which to resolve any unintended
disconnection.
An application will reach its Deactivated state only when the Evaluation period has
lapsed and the product has not been activated. In its Deactivated state, promis•e will
not run.
16
License Activation Procedure
Use the following procedure to activate the software:
1. After installing promis•e, start it (see page 14).

2. Select Manage > License Manager to display the Product Activation Wizard:
You have the following choices:

• SELECT subscriber activating against a hosted (Bentley) SELECT
Server - Select this option if your licenses will be stored on a server at
Bentley. Select Next and go to step 3.
• SELECT subscriber with a deployed (local) SELECT Server - Select
this option if your licenses will be stored on a server at your site. Select
Next and go to step 3.
• NON-SELECT user - Select this option if your license will not be
available on a server. This option is mainly for the LT and Express levels
of promis•e which are used only on one computer. This condition is also
referred to as “node-locked.” A node-locked license in XM is a
CHECKED OUT license from the Bentley Hosted SELECT Server. With
promis•e, you will be supplyed with a XML License file that you can
place on the user’s machine. Select Next and go to step 4.
• Evaluation Only - No license information - Select this option if you are
evaluating the software and have not purchased it. You will have a 30 day
period in which to use the software. Select Next and the software will start
in evaluation mode.
17
3. If you selected either of the SELECT Subscriber options, the following dialog
will appear and prompt you for a server name and a site activation key.
If you selected the hosted (Bentley) server option in the previous step, you will
see the entry selectserver.bentley.com in the Server Name field as shown above,
and the field will be grayed out.
If you selected the deployed (local) server option in the previous step, enter the
name of your SELECT server in the Server Name field.
If you selected NON-SELECT user in the previous step, you will see the entry
productactivation.bentley.com in the Server Name field, and the field will be
grayed out.
The key is sent from Bentley in the form of a fulfillment document to the site
administrator. The site administrator may then distribute the key at his/her
discretion. The user just needs to simply copy and paste the key (an
alpha-numeric code) into the space provided in the activation dialog.
The user may then choose to Test Connection. This test simply pings the server
to verify a connection can be made.
Select Next to continue. A dialog will appear that allows you to check out a
license (commuter license) which will allow you to work disconnected from the
network for more than 30 days. If you don’t wish to check out a license, you can
close the Product Activation Wizard at this point. For instructions on how to
check out a license, go to page 21.
18
4. If you selected NON-SELECT User in the first step, the following dialog will
appear.
A. Select the I have a license file ready to import option. (You should have
been supplied with a license file. This file should be stored on the computer
on which you will run promis•e.
B. Select Next. The License Information dialog will appear.
19
C. Select the Browse button and browse to the location where the license file is
stored. Select the license file so that it is displayed in the Activation Wizard.
D. Select Next.
E. A dialog will appear listing the file you selected. Select the Finish button.
F. A message will appear indicating that your product activation is complete.

Select the Close button to close the Product Activation Wizard.
20
Checking Out a License
The Bentley SELECT Server licenses are network-based. You may use a license
while disconnected from the network for up to 30 days. However, there may be times
when you must use a promis•e license off the network for more than 30 days, for
example, when working at a remote site.
For these situations, you may “check out” a license for use on a computer that is not
on the network. (This is sometimes referred to as a “commuter license.”) This feature
does not apply to the NON-Select or node-locked users, as these licenses are
considered to be checked out already.
Note: While a license is checked out it will it will be tracked in the license server usage logs
as being continuously used (i.e., 24 hours a day).
To check out a license:
1. The computer on which you wish to use the checked-out license must be
connected to the network. On this computer, start promis•e and select the
Manage > License Manager function. The Product Activation Wizard dialog
will appear.
2. Select one of the SELECT subscriber radio buttons that applies to your license
server (either hosted at Bentley or deployed locally).
21
3. Select Next to continue. The License Checkout dialog will appear. This dialog
lists the available Bentley SELECT Server licenses on your system.
4. Select the Use a checked out license checkbox.

5. Enter your email address in the Email Address field.
6. Select the desired promis•e license from the list in the Product Name field.
7. Select the Next button to check out the file.
While a license is checked out, it will not be available to other users on the network.
At the end of the check-out period, the checked-out license will expire and it will
again be available to users on the network.
To check a license back in:
1. Connect the computer with the checked out license to your network.
2. On this computer, start promis•e and select the Manage > License Manager
function. The Product Activation Wizard dialog will appear.
3. Select one of the SELECT subscriber radio buttons that applies to your license
server (either hosted at Bentley or deployed locally).
22
4. Select Next to continue. The License Management Tool dialog will appear. The
checked out license will be listed at the bottom of the dialog.
Note: If the checked out license has expired, you may get a message dialog indicating
this with OK and Cancel buttons. Clicking the OK button here will cause the
temporary license string in the local license file to be deleted and the client will
then query the server for a license in the normal manner. The Cancel button will
cause the local license file to be left alone and promis•e will exit. There is no
grace period for checked out licenses.
5. Select the license that you checked out at the bottom of the dialog and select the
Check In button.
23
24
Introduction and Overview
2 Introduction and Overview

This section gives an overview of the promis•e software and explains the use and
conventions of this user guide.
The promis•e Concept

promis•e is an advanced productivity tool for designers of electrical control systems.
Because of its customizable, open architecture, promis•e can also be adapted to other
applications such as hydraulics, pneumatics, and process control.
promis•e allows schematic diagrams to be rapidly constructed using pre-defined
symbols and macros. Wires are automatically broken at symbol connection points and
sections of drawings can be copied and pasted to save time. Many functions are
performed automatically by the software including the generation of unique device
IDs for each symbol, cross referencing of related symbols (such as contacts and
coils), and numbering of wires.
The software recognizes logical interconnections between devices in a schematic. A
wire is recognized as a wire and not just a graphic line. The system can check for
errors such as duplicate device IDs while a schematic is being created. The software
can perform automatic cross referencing and wire numbering. In combination with a
parts database, the software can automatically generate a variety of support
documentation such as terminal diagrams, cable plans, panel layouts, bills of material,
and a job costing analysis. Because work is divided into projects, all related drawing
pages can be included in these automatic functions.
The add-on version of promis•e runs as an application on top of a CAD program to
take advantage of that software’s drawing capabilities. There are add-on versions for
AutoCAD, AutoCAD LT and MicroStation.
25
Software Functionality
This chart shows the interrelationship of promis•e functions.
In addition, there are plug-in applications for promis•e that perform various
specialized functions. See page 428.
26
Using promis•e
Generally, doing a job with promis•e involves the following stages:
1. If the parts database is to be used to allow the automatic generation of support

documentation, component (parts) information must be entered or imported into
the database. This information includes catalog numbers, manufacturer, price,
dimensions, etc. If the same database is to be used for all jobs, this data entry
step will not be necessary for subsequent projects unless new components are to
be included. Part numbers can be assigned to symbols in the schematics.
Note: Parts databases for many leading component manufacturers are available from
Bentley.
2. Create the schematic drawings. For the first project, most promis•e users create
custom page formats, title blocks, symbols, etc., to match existing company
standards. This customization is not necessary for subsequent projects.
You also have the option of creating a parts list or panel layout before creating
the schematic drawings. In this case, you select parts from the parts database and
place them in a parts list or in a panel layout. This allows you to quote on a job or
layout the hardware before designing the control circuits. When you are ready to
do the schematics, you can take parts from the previously selected list and place
them in the drawings.
3. Generate panel layout drawings. promis•e has an optional semi-automatic panel
layout mode that will prompt the user for each component in the schematic
diagram. The user then positions the component as desired in the layout drawing.
4. Generate terminal plan. promis•e automatically places terminal connection
information on a graphical diagram page. The user can edit this plan as desired,
for example, to assign cables and conduits.
5. Generate documentation lists. Using information in the schematics and in the
database, promis•e can automatically generate other useful lists such as bills of
material, wire lists, wire labels, component labels, job cost analysis,
programmable controller lists, and so on.
27
Using This Manual
Purpose
This manual is a reference for the operation of the promis•e system. Information
provided in this manual is sufficient for learning how to use the majority of the
software’s operating functions and advanced customization capabilities. However, to
realize the full potential of promis•e it is recommended that you participate in the
training programs offered by Bentley. These training programs are accelerated
learning courses designed to ensure quick startup for users, and mastery of the
software’s advanced customizing and interfacing features for system administrators
and key operators.
Manual Conventions
promis•e Functions
Functions in promis•e are organized in groups. These groups are displayed somewhat
differently depending on which CAD software promis•e is running with. In
AutoCAD, various functions are available from pull-down menus or icon ribbon
menus at the top of the screen. In MicroStation, functions are selected from a menu on
the left side of the screen. In this manual, the first reference to a promis•e function is
shown as a series of commands in bold type separated by arrows that indicate the
function group followed by the function itself. For example:
Design > Insert Symbol > Insert Symbol by Name
The above command indicates that one should go to the Design function menu, select
the Insert Symbol function and then select the Insert Symbol by Name function on
the submenu.
28
Keyboard Use
If a specific key on the keyboard is to be pressed. The name of the key will be shown
enclosed in < > characters. For example:
<Enter> (press the Enter key)
Menus
After installing promis•e, new menu selections are added to the existing CAD
software menus. These will vary in appearance depending on the CAD software you
are using:
AutoCAD 2009
AutoCAD 2009 uses ribbon menus. These contain a number of ribbon tabs. When
you select a ribbon tab, a group of icons are displayed that represent the functions in
that tab. The following figure shows the menus as added to AutoCAD.
promis-e ribbon menu tabs
29
AutoCAD 2006 - 2008

In AutoCAD 2006 - 2008, promis•e uses pull-down menus. These contain a number
of ribbon tabs. When you select a ribbon tab, a group of icons are displayed that
represent the functions in that tab. The following figure shows the menus as added to
AutoCAD.
promis-e menu tabs
MicroStation and MicroStation PowerDraft

When running on MicroStation and MicroStation PowerDraft, promis•e functions are
accessed on the left side of the window.
The menu groups are collapsed to begin with, but when you select a group or
sub-group, the functions in that group are displayed.
30
The following is a list of functions under each menu group. Note: the Design menu
changes depending on which drawing mode you are in (schematic, hydraulic, etc.).
Design menu group (Schematic mode)

Project Manager
New Project
----------------------------
New Page
Page Next
Page Previous
----------------------------
Catalog Manager
----------------------------
Insert Macro
Insert Symbol > Insert Symbol by Name
Insert Symbol by Part Number
Insert Symbol by Device ID*
Symbol on the Fly > Draw Symbol on the Fly
Insert Connection Point
Delete Connection Point
Insert Field
Insert Balloon
--------------------------
Align Components
Edit Components
--------------------------
Wiring > Wire (Continuous)
Wire (Dashed)
Wire (Center)
3 Phase Wire
Multi-wire
Polywire
Multi-polywire
Wire 90 Degree Up
Wire 90 Degree Down
Draw Ladder
Edit Wires
Select Wire Layer
Wire Connector Type
Insert Wire Link
Insert Cable
31
Design menu group (Schematic mode continued)

Wire Numbering > Automatic Wire Number
Manual Wire Number
Align Wire Numbers
Delete Wire Number
Multi-Line Text
Display Options > Grid Snap Setting
Show Grid
Display Connection Points
Display Connection Point Texts
Display Terminal Connection Point Texts
Display Insertion Point
Display Part Numbers
Display Wire Numbers
Design menu group (Panel Layout mode)

Project Manager
New Project
----------------------------
New Page
Page Next
Page Previous
----------------------------
Catalog Manager
----------------------------
Insert Macro
Insert Field
Insert Balloon
--------------------------
Align Components
Edit Components
--------------------------
Panduit Wire Containment
Panduit Auto Size
Edit Wire Path Properties
--------------------------------------
32
Design menu group (Panel Layout mode continued)

Insert DIN Rail
Snap to DIN Rail
Mounting Accessories
--------------------------------------
Shortest Distance > Insert Region
Edit Region
Edit Region Connections
Multi-Line Text
Show Grid
Display Wire Numbers
Design menu group (Hydraulic and Pneumatic modes)

Project Manager
New Project
----------------------------
New Page
Page Next
Page Previous
----------------------------
Catalog Manager
----------------------------
Insert Macro
Insert Field
Insert Balloon
--------------------------
Align Components
Edit Components
--------------------------
33
Design menu group (Hydraulic and Pneumatic modes continued)

Piping/Hosing > Draw Pipe/Hose
Pipe/Hose (Continuous)
Pipe/Hose (Dashed)
Pipe/Hose (Center)
3 Pipe/Hose
Multi-Pipe/Hose
PolyPipe/Hose
Multi-PolyPipe/Hose
Pipe/Hose 90 Degree Up
Pipe/Hose 90 Degree Down
Edit Pipe/Hose
Select Pipe/Hose Layer
Pipe/Hose Connector Type
Insert Pipe/Hose Link
Pipe/Hose Numbering
Multi-Line Text
Show Grid
Display Pipe/Hose Numbers
34
Review / Revise menu group

Navigate
Search
Data Manager
Forced Routing Manager
Shortest Distance
Wire Terminations
Terminal/Pin-Plug Manager
Re-sequence Wire Links
Cable Manager
Replace Symbol
Replace Device ID
Replace Part Number
Replace Text
Replace Symbol Text
Find/Replace Wire Property
Update Symbol
Update Family
Replace Title Block
Replace Page Format
Engineering Design Considerations
promis-e Output menu group

PLC Generator
Project API Builder
Project Builder > Template Manager
Project Builder
---------------------------------------
Update Wiring Diagram
Run Reports
Graphical Parts List
Run Graphical Plan
Panduit Labels
---------------------------------------
Plot
Project Publisher
35
Manage menu group

Create Macro
Create Symbol
Create Family
Family on the Fly
---------------------------------------
Plant Exchange
---------------------------------------
Language Database Manager
License Manager
Mode Manager
Parts Database Manager
Plug-in Manager
---------------------------------------
Compile Connections
Rebuild Project Database
Refresh Page
Validate Page
Update Page
Configure menu group

Options
Setup
---------------------------------------
Page Format Designer
Title Block Designer
---------------------------------------
Graphical Plan Designer
Report Template Designer
---------------------------------------
Gauge Table Editor
Index Table Editor
Button Table Editor
Termination Editor
Panduit Data Editor
36
promis-e Help menu group

Help
Tutorial > ANSI/IEEE
IEC
Show Welcome Dialog
--------------------------------
Check For Updates
---------------------------------
About
37
Toolbars
In AutoCAD 2006-2008, many promis•e functions can be accessed through toolbars
(tool boxes in the MicroStation version) with a single click. You can see a tooltip
label that describes the function of each button by resting the cursor on the button for
a moment. The toolbars correspond to the menu function groups listed on the
previous pages. In some cases as large menu function group was split between two
toolbars.
You can move the toolbar by pointing at the “handle” on the left side of the toolbar
and dragging it to the desired location either floating above the drawing or docked to
the edge of the window.
To display or hide toolbars in AutoCAD, use the View > Toolbars function. In the
dialog that appears, select the ECADMenu_promis•e menu group and select or
de-select the checkbox for a toolbar to display it or hide it.
38
To display or hide toolbars (tool boxes) in MicroStation, use the Tools > Tool Boxes
function. Select or de-select the checkbox for a toolbar to display it or hide it.
In the MicroStation version, the Main Tools toolframe combines the other promis•e
toolboxes.
39
Command Line / Text Window

In the AutoCAD version of the software, the command line is an area at the bottom of
the drawing screen where the most recently executed commands are displayed. The
software also displays prompts here for certain functions. You can also enter
commands on the command line.
By placing the cursor on its border, the command line area can be dragged to the top
of the drawing screen or out onto the desktop to become a floating text window. The
floating window can display more lines and therefore is useful for such functions as
View > List. You can drag the floating window back to the drawing screen to reattach
it. You can also display a floating text window without moving the command line by
pressing the <F2> key.
Text
Window
Command
Line
In the MicroStation version, prompts appear in the Status Bar located at the lower left
corner of the drawing screen.
If you need to enter (type) a command in the MicroStation version, select Utilities >
Key-in to display the Key-in dialog where you can enter commands.
40
Help Screens and User Guide

Online help information is available to describe promis•e functions. Many of the
dialog boxes displayed by promis•e have a Help button which can be selected to
display relevant information from the User Guide.
The complete User Guide can be accessed by selecting the menu function promis•e
Help > Help.
The User Guide in PDF format can be accessed from the Welcome screen (see page
14). This PDF version of the User Guide is also included on the promis•e disc in the
Documentation folder. The PDF User Guide is preferable if you wish to make
printouts or if you need to zoom in on a figure.
41
Dialog Boxes
When the software requires you to make selections or enter information, it will
display a dialog box.
Buttons are provided in the dialog boxes to confirm information that has been
entered, or to provide additional selections. Generally, selecting the OK button will
confirm the information that has been entered, load it into the system and close the
dialog box. In many (but not all) dialog boxes, pressing the <Enter> key has the same
effect as selecting OK. Selecting the Cancel button will abandon the information that
was entered and will exit the current function. In many (but not all) dialog boxes,
pressing the <Esc> (Escape) key has the same effect as selecting Cancel. Selecting
the Help button will display descriptive text about the functions in the current dialog
box. A button with three dots on it [...] is a browse button that will display an
additional dialog so that you can select a folder or file on your system or search a
database.
Required entry
marker
Browse button
Fields that require an entry before you can continue are marked with a red asterisk (*)
until you make an entry.
42
Engineering Design Considerations
As you work, the software may display an Engineering Design Consideration dialog.
These dialogs call attention to conditions in your project that may cause errors or
other undesirable results. You then have an opportunity to take an appropriate action.
See Appendix A for more information.
Sample Projects
Several sample projects are provided with the software as backup files. These projects
are automatically restored when you install the software.
The sample projects are placed in your default project folder and will be available for
viewing or editing using the Project Manager.
43
44
Project Management
3 Project Management
This section explains the concept of projects, which is how work is organized in
promis•e. Project organization is presented first followed by sections on how to
create, delete, copy, modify, rename and back up projects.
45
Project Management
Project Organization
A project is a collection of work done in promis•e, all of which relates to the same
job. This work includes both graphical drawings (schematics, layouts, etc.) and
support documentation (part lists, labels, connection information).
By associating every drawing and list with a specific project, the software is able to
recognize which information to use when performing automatic functions such as list
generation, cross referencing, wire numbering, cost analysis, and so on.
PROJECT
Drawings Documentation
Schematic diagrams Bill of materials

Panel layouts Wire list
Graphical terminal plans Terminal list
Wiring diagrams Purchase order list
Wire and device labels
Job cost analysis
etc.
46
Project Management
Drawing Sets
Drawing sets are used to organize pages within a project into meaningful groups. You
can arrange the drawing sets into any order you wish. For example, you may want to
have all schematic pages in one drawing set and all panel layout pages in another set.
In the Project Manager you can change the order of the sets, which affects the order in
which the software indexes the pages. This has an effect on page navigation, cross
referencing and print/plot order.
PROJECT
DRAWING SET 1 DRAWING SET 2
4 4
3 3
2 2
1 1
INST NAME
LOC NAME
PAGE 1 Each page has a page number
and can have a default installation and location
47
Project Management
Installations and Locations
Projects optionally can be subdivided into installations and locations. These usually
correspond to physical locations. For example, the project could consist of an entire
production facility while each production line within the facility is designated as an
installation and each control cabinet on a line is a location.
PROJECT
INSTALLATION INSTALLATION
LOCATION LOCATION LOCATION LOCATION
When graphical (drawing) pages are created, they can be assigned a default
installation and location. (If the entered installation or location name does not yet
exist, it will be created.) When support documentation is generated, it can also be
sorted by installation and location.
PROJECT 1 PROJECT 2
INSTALLATION 1 INSTALLATION 2
(NO
INSTALLATION
OR LOCATION)
LOCATION LOCATION LOCATION
4 8 12 4
3 7 11 3
2 6 10 2
1 5 9 DRAWING 1
PAGES
48
Project Management
Project Manager
The Project Manager is a central interface similar to Windows Explorer where you
can access all project and page management functions. You can create, modify and
organize your projects and pages using the pull-down menus, right-click menus and
toolbars. Various other project-based features are also available in this interface and
are covered in other sections of this manual.
To open the Project Manager, select Design > Project Manager.
You can also select the Project Manager toolbar button.
The Project Manager window will open.
Menu Bars
Folder/Project
Browser
Data Section
Page Preview
Feature Tabs
The Project Manager is divided into the following sections:

• Menu Bars
• Folder/Project Browser
• Data Section
• Page Preview
• Feature Tabs
49
Project Management
In the Folder/Project browser area you can select a project to view or edit. The active
project will be marked with a special icon. You can have pages from different projects
open at the same time. The open page that was most recently selected (i.e., the one
that is “on top”) determines the active project.
Active project icon
The type of information shown in the data area can be changed by making selections
in the View menu or by clicking on the feature tabs at the bottom of the data area. The
following “views” are available:
Details - Drawings are listed in columns of text information. You can customize
the columns that are displayed by right clicking in the column heading area and
selecting the checkbox for the page information that you wish to appear as
shown in the following figure. The order of column headings can be changed by
dragging the heading for a column to the left or right. You can also click on a
column to sort by the entries in that column.
50
Project Management
One of the columns in the detailed view is labeled User. This field identifies the
name of the person who has that page currently open. This name comes from the
entry made in the User Options - User Name function (see page 424). This is a
useful feature for a multi-user environment because it allows you to see which
users have which pages open in the same project. Sometimes you might need to
have the other users exit the project so that you can run a project-wide function.
Thumbnails - Pages are shown as thumbnail images.
51
Project Management
Drawing Sets - A list of drawing sets in the selected project is shown. By

clicking on the “+” or “-” character next to the drawing set name you can display
or hide fields that allow you to enter up to five descriptive texts for the drawing
set. Select the Save button to save any descriptions that are entered.
You can also change the order of drawing sets in the project by highlighting the
drawing set name and then selecting the Up or Down button.
Installation - A list of installations in the project. As with drawing sets, you can
enter and save up to five descriptive texts for each installation. The descriptive
texts can be displayed in reports and title blocks by including the appropriate
variables.
Location - A list of locations in the project. As with drawing sets, you can enter
and save up to five descriptive texts for each location. The descriptive texts can
be displayed in reports and title blocks by including the appropriate variables.
- Allows you to view, modify and add to the part numbers assigned in the
project. See page 142.
52
Project Management
Spare Parts - Shows the spare parts that are included in the project. Only part
numbers used in the project that have spares assigned will be shown in this tab.
The parts database contains a Percent_Spare field (see page 630) that allows
you to automatically add a percentage of spares to the parts that are actually
used. This percentage is shown in the Project Manager Spare Parts tab in the
Percent Spare column. You can also assign additional spares by making an entry
in the Added Spares column. In the above example, 8 parts are actually used in
the project. There is a spare percentage of 10 making 0.8 spares which the
software rounds up to 1. In addition, there is 1 added spare assigned making a
total of 2 spares.
Note: As you work in promis•e you can leave the Project Manager open in the background
and quickly return to it by selecting the Project Manager toolbar button.
53
Project Management
Favorites Project Folder
There is a function in the Project Manager that allows you to set up a “Favorites”
folder where you can create links to projects even if they exist in different places on
your system.
To set up the Favorites folder:
1. Select the Favorites function on the left side of the Project Manager.
Favorites function
Note: After you select the Favorites function, the function name changes to “Folders”
which you can select to return to the normal view of folders on your system.
2. The display will show a Favorites folder. To configure the content of this folder,
select the Organize link.
Organize function
54
Project Management
3. The Favorites dialog will appear. This dialog allows you to create and name
subfolders of the Favorites folder. The creation of subfolders is optional.
To create a subfolder, select the Create Folder button. A folder named Folder1
will appear. Create additional subfolders as needed. Each subfolder can hold
multiple projects.
To rename a subfolder, highlight the desired folder and select the Rename
button. To delete a subfolder, highlight the desired folder and select the Delete
button.
4. When you have created the desired subfolders, select the Close button to close
the Favorites dialog.
55
Project Management
5. To add projects your Favorites folder(s), select the Folders function on the left
side of the Project Manager to return to the folders view of your system.
Right click on the desired project name and select Add to Favorites from the
popup menu.
6. The Favorites dialog will reappear. Select the desired folder and select the Add it
button to add the project to that folder. You can add projects to subfolders or to
the Favorites folder itself.
56
Project Management
Note: Once you have added a project to a favorites folder, when you highlight that
project, its path is displayed on the lower left side of the Favorites dialog.
7. After you have added links to projects, they are listed in the Favorites view of
the Project Manager.
57
Project Management
Search Project
The Search Project function in the Project Manager helps you to locate promis•e
projects on your system.
1. In the Project Manager, select Tools > Search Project or select the Search
Project toolbar button .
2. The Search dialog will appear.
3. If you wish to search for a particular project, enter its name in the Name field.
You can make wildcard entries such as D* to search for all projects beginning
with “D.” If you leave the field blank the software will search for and list any
projects it finds in the selected path.
4. In the Look in field, select the path that you wish to search on your system. By
default, the path to the current project is entered. You can click inside the field
and make changes to the path.
58
Project Management
5. Select the Search Now button to begin the search. As the software searches, it
lists any projects that it finds in the lower part of the dialog.
6. You can select one of the listed projects and then the Switch to Project Manager
button to display the selected project in the Project Manager.
See Page Pending Status
The See Page Pending Status function in the Project Manager flags pages that have
changes that will occur the next time they are opened due to changes elsewhere in the
project.
Select the See Page Pending Status toolbar button in the Project Manager.
The same icon on the button will appear next to any page in the project manager that
has pending changes in the database that have not yet been updated on the drawing.
This handy visual aid lets the user know that certain drawing files are not up to date
yet because they were never reopened after changes were made to the project that
affect those pages.
59
Project Management
Save Project As
You can use the Project Manager to save a copy of a project under another name.
1. In the Project Manager highlight the name of the project you wish to copy.
2. Select File > Save Project As. You can also right-click on the project name and
select Save Project As from the pop-up menu. The Save Project As dialog will
appear.
3. Enter a new name for the project in the New Name field.
4. Enter or browse to the desired folder for the copy in the Save Path field.
5. Select OK.
60
Project Management
Create New Project

To create a new project:
1. There are two ways to open the New Project dialog:

A. From the main screen select the Design > New Project icon.
B. Or, in the Project Manager select File > New > New Project (or select the
“New” icon and then the New Project function from the menu that appears).
2. The New Project dialog will appear.
Enter a name for the project in the Project Name field. The name size follows
Windows guidelines, i.e., 255 characters maximum. Do not use the following
characters: \ / : * ? " < > |
Note: Keep in mind that Windows restricts the total path to a file to 259 characters. So
the deeper your folders are nested, the fewer characters will be available for the
project name.
61
Project Management
3. In the Save in field, enter the name of the directory (folder) where you wish to
store the project. Use the browse button to locate and select a folder.
Note: If you highlight the name of the desired folder in the Project Manager before
selecting the New Project function, this folder will be entered in the Save in field
automatically.
4. If you wish to use the same project settings as an existing project, you can select
that project in the Use Project Options From field. Use the browse button to
select an existing project (click on the folder name) or a template (xml) file.
Sample ANSI-IEEE and IEC project template files are provided in the folder
Documents and Settings\All Users\ECT\promis•e\Config\Options.
5. To set project options, select the Options button. See page 67.
6. To enter a description for the project that will appear in title blocks, reports and
elsewhere, select the Description button. The following dialog will appear.
In the Entry column, enter the various descriptive texts identified in the Name
column. Select OK when finished.
When you have finished making entries in the New Project dialog, select the OK
button to create the new project.
62
Project Management
Copy Project
To copy a project:
1. Open the Project Manager.

2. Select (highlight) the name of the project you wish to copy.
3. Select Edit > Copy from the Project Manager menu or right click on the project
name and select Copy from the popup menu.
4. The Copy Project dialog will appear. The project you selected in step 2 will be
listed in the Project field. If desired, you can use the browse button to select a
different project.
5. In the New Path field, use the browse button to select or create the folder where
you wish to save the copy.
6. In the New Name field, enter the name of the new copy of the project.
7. Select OK to create the copy.
Note: You can also use the File > Save Project As function to save a copy of a project. See
page 60.
63
Project Management
Rename Project
To copy a project:

2. Select (highlight) the name of the project you wish to rename.
3. Select Edit > Rename from the Project Manager menu or right click on the
project name and select Rename from the popup menu.
4. The Rename Project dialog will appear. In the New Name field, enter a new
name for the project you selected in step 2.
5. Select OK to rename the project.
64
Project Management
Modify Project
To modify the settings of a project:

2. Select (highlight) the name of the project you wish to modify.
3. Select Edit > Modify from the Project Manager menu or right click on the
project name and select Modify from the popup menu.
4. The Modify Project dialog will appear.
To change project settings, select the Options button. The Project Options dialog
will appear (see page 67). Select the desired option, make the desired changes
and select OK.
5. To change the project description, select the Description button. The Project
Description dialog will appear. Make the desired changes and select OK.
65
Project Management
Delete Project
To delete a project:

2. Select (highlight) the name of the project you wish to delete.
3. Select Edit > Delete from the Project Manager menu or right click on the project
name and select Delete from the popup menu.
4. The Delete Project dialog will appear.
Select Yes to delete the project or select No to cancel the deletion.
66
Project Management
Project Options
The Options dialog for projects allows you to make a variety of global settings for a
project.
You can access the project Options dialog in several ways:
• Select the Options button in the New Project dialog
• Select Configure > Options in promis•e (a drawing page must be open)
• Select Tools > Options in the Project Manager.
• Select the Options toolbar button in the Project Manager.
Select
project options
here
Note: Project Options functions are only available when a project name is selected
(highlighted) in the Project Manager or when a page in the desired project is open.
Initially a selection of functions will appear on the right side of the dialog. You can
also select functions in the column on the left side of the dialog. Once you select a
function, the entry fields for that function appear on the right side of the dialog.
The project option settings are described in the following sections.
67
Project Management
Address File
The address file is a text file containing information such as the user’s street address
which the software can automatically place in title blocks, report headings, and so on.
You can select, edit and create address files in the Project Options mode.
Select the Address File function in the Project Options dialog. The following fields
will appear.
The Address File field allows you to select an existing address file.
To edit an existing file, select the address file, make any changes in the Address field
and select the Save button.
To create a new file, select the New button, enter the name of the new file in the
dialog that appears. Enter the new information in the Address field. Select the Save
button.
To delete an address file, select the address file name and then select the Delete
button.
68
Project Management
Balloon Settings
In the project Options dialog, select Balloon. The following fields will appear.
This dialog allows you to make settings that determine how balloons appear in
various drawing types. A balloon is a numbered circle that marks an item in a panel
layout or other type of drawing. The number corresponds to that item’s position in the
bill of materials list.
In the Balloon Numbering By field, select whether the balloon numbering will be
unique across the entire project, across each installation or across each location. There
is also a selection “installation+location” which allows balloon numbers to be
duplicated if either the installation or location is different.
Select the Clear All Balloons button to remove all assigned balloon numbers in the
project. This will delete the balloons in the drawings and remove the item numbers
from the project database.
Select the Display Quantity Number checkbox if you wish a part number quantity
value to appear next to each balloon.
For each drawing type you can set:
Radius - the radius of the balloon circle.
Text Height - the text height of the number inside the balloon.
Quantity Height - the text height of the quantity number.
Text Style - the text style of the balloon and quantity text.
Select the OK button when you have made the desired settings.
69
Project Management
Default Grid Settings
Most promis•e drawing modes utilize a grid that causes objects to be aligned
properly. For example, the grid ensures that wires make contact with symbol
connection points so that the software can recognize these connections.
Snap mode causes the cursor to limit its movements to set increments. In the
AutoCAD version of the software you can turn the snap mode off and on by pressing
the <F9> key or by clicking on SNAP button at the bottom edge of the AutoCAD
window.
You can adjust the spacing of the grid and snap mode to suit your requirements.
In the project Options dialog, select Default Grid & Snap Settings. The following
fields will appear.
Note: The Snap Spacing columns are not available in the MicroStation version of promis•e.
This function allows you to set the X and Y grid line spacing and snap mode intervals
for various types of drawings. Enter the desired value for each drawing mode. Select
Apply or OK to load the new values.
Note: There is also a Grid Snap toolbar that you can use to make grid settings as you work
on drawings.
70
Project Management
Default Project Properties
In the project Options dialog, select Default Project Properties. The following fields
will appear.
Note: Project Options functions are only available when a project name is selected
(highlighted) in the Project Manager or when a page in the desired project is open.
This function allows you to make global settings that determine what will appear
automatically on newly created pages. The following fields are provided:
Page Macro - This field sets the default page macro that appears in the New Page
dialog. A page macro is any macro that you wish to be placed on every newly created
page. An entry made here will not affect any existing pages. Use the browse button to
select a macro file.
Title Block - This field sets the default title block macro that will be prompted in the
New Page dialog. Changing the default title block will not update existing pages. To
change the title block on existing pages use the Search > Replace Title Block
function.
Scale - This field specifies the scale to be used for the page format. Scales other than
1:1 are mainly used for panel layouts so that symbols will appear at less than full size.
71
Project Management
Default Parts Database - In the Default Parts Database field you can select a default
parts database for the project. The software will then look at this database instead of
the database specified in the setup configuration (see page 407) when searching for
part numbers. The available databases are listed in the drop-down menu. (You can add
new databases in the promis•e Setup dialog.)
You can use the Edit Filter button to create a project filter for the database. This
filter restricts the displayed parts selection in the Select Part Number dialog for
the project to those that match user-defined criteria (select the Apply Project
Filter checkbox in the Select Part Number dialog). For example, you could limit
the parts for the project to certain manufacturers. When you select the Edit Filter
button, the Filtering dialog appears.
Use the following procedure to create a filter:
1. In the Field column, select the parts database field whose value you wish to use
for filtering.
2. In the Relationship column, select the comparison function to be used in the
filter. The available comparisons are:
like
equals
is greater than
is greater than or equal to
is less than
is less than or equal to
3. In the Value column, enter the field content value that you wish to use in the
filter.
72
Project Management
4. Select OK to create the filter.

To remove the filter, select the Clear Filter link in the Filtering dialog.
Page Format Options - This group of settings affects the page formats used in the
project:
Use the Page Format field to select the page format that will be the default
format when creating a new page. Use the browse button to select a format file.
Formats are stored by default in the promis•e PageFormat directory.
The # of Digits in Line Number field sets the number of digits that will be
displayed for line numbers on the page. Extra zeroes will be added to the line
number as needed. For example, if you enter a value of 3, then line number 1
will be displayed as 001.
If you wish to include the page number at the beginning of each line number,
select the Include Page Number as a Line Number Prefix checkbox. For
example, line number 001 on page 2 will be displayed as 2001.
If you wish line numbering to continue on following pages rather than starting
over, select the Continuous Line Numbers checkbox.
Existing pages will be updated when these page format options are changed.
Project and Page Descriptions - The descriptions are parameters that are associated
with and stored with the page. These descriptions can appear in title blocks and
reports. To add another description, use the “+” button. To rename an existing
description, place the cursor in the field of the existing description and then click the
“R” button. To delete a description, place the cursor in the field of the existing
description and then click the “X” button. Use the Reset button to return the
descriptions to the state they were in when you entered the dialog.
73
Project Management
Display Formats
In the project Options dialog, select Display Formats. The following fields will
appear. This function allows you to set the format of device IDs, cross references and
part numbers. There are tabs for ID & Cross Reference and Part Number.
Expand/Contract
button
Items that can be formatted are divided into groups:

• Device ID Formats
• Device Cross References
• Wire Link Cross References
• Part Numbers
The Device ID Formats group has an expand/contract (double arrow) button that
allows you to collapse or display the items in that group. Part Number formatting is
accessed through a separate tab.
74
Project Management
General Device ID Settings

At the top of the Display Formats dialog (ID & Cross Reference tab) is a group of
settings that affect how device IDs are handled by the software.
Select the Adjust device ID when symbol(s) is moved checkbox if you wish a
symbol’s ID to be updated when the symbol is moved, for example when the ID
format includes the line number and the symbol is moved to a different line.
Select the Make Device ID Uniqueness Case Sensitive checkbox if you wish the case
of letters in an ID to make a difference. For example, if you select this checkbox then
LS2 and Ls2 will be considered two different IDs. If you do not select the checkbox,
then two radio button options are available for making the case of IDs consistent: you
can choose to Convert lowercase to uppercase or Convert uppercase to lowercase.
Select the Enable Device ID Nesting to allow nested devices IDs. This applies only
to symbols that are inside symbols created with the “symbol on the fly” function.
Nested IDs allow these symbols to have a device ID that combines the ID of the
“symbol on the fly” with the ID of the nested symbol. One application of this feature
would be to use the box to represent a circuit board and then insert pin/plug symbols
to represent the connectors on the board. The box could also represent a special
controller module with terminal symbols inside that are related to that module.
Selecting the Partial Tag radio button will display only the device ID of the nested
symbol. Selecting the Complete Tag button will display the entire, combined device
ID.
Device ID Format
For each format type, the dialog shows the name of the format that defines what the
ID is currently based on (page and line number, sequential number, etc.).
Edit
button
If you wish to change the elements that make up an ID, select the Edit button inside
the field for a given format type to access the Device ID Format dialog.
75
Project Management
Note: The Schematic (PLC Wired Device ID) and Schematic (PLC Wired Terminal ID)
device ID formats will only be applied when the Replace Device ID function is used.
The PLC Wired Device ID will assign the PLC address to the first non-terminal
device connected to the PLC. The PLC Wired Terminal ID will assign the PLC
address to the first terminal connected to the PLC.
Load or save profiles
Profile name
Parts of ID that
will be displayed
Available elements
Currently selected
elements
Example of current
elements
The Profile Name field in the Device ID Format dialog displays the name of the
current device ID profile. The profile is a saved device ID format. You can create new
profiles, save them and reload them as your project needs require.
Use the Save Profile button to save changes to the current profile. If desired, you can
change the entry in the Profile Name field and save the changed profile under a
different name. Use the Load Profile button to load a previously saved profile.
76
Project Management
The Complete Device ID area of the dialog allows you to define the elements of the
complete device ID for symbols in a drawing. The list box displays the available
elements in a complete device ID: Installation, Location, and Device Tag. To add one
of these elements to the device ID, select it and click on the Add to Expression
button. It will then appear on the right side of the dialog. (also see the figure on page
77). To remove an element from the device ID, select (highlight) it, then either press
the <Delete> key or right click on the element and select Delete from the popup
menu. Use the Clear button to empty the field of all selected elements. Use the Reset
button to reload the combination of variables that you had when you entered the
dialog.
The Identifiers area of the dialog allows you to define the characters that separate the
device ID elements when displayed in a drawing or report (also see the figure on page
77). The default is “=” for Installations, “+” for locations, and “-” for the device tag.
The Display fields allow you to select whether installation and location names will be
displayed in device IDs always or only when the installation or location is different
from that of the current drawing page.
Use the Device Tag Format area of the dialog to configure the device tag. The
“device tag” is that part of the device ID that does not include the installation and
location (see the following figure). The device tag consists of a “tag mnemonic” that
is applied to every symbol of a given type (such as “K” or “CR” for a relay) and items
that are assigned by the software individually for each instance of a symbol (such as
page/line numbers and sequential numbers). The tag mnemonic is defined when a
symbol is created.
Device ID Tag Mnemonic
=LINE1+CAB1-PB120 PB120
Installation Location Device Tag Device Tag
On the left side of the dialog is a list of available elements that can be added to the
device tag. To add an element, select (highlight) it, and then click the Add to
Expression button. It will then be shown on the right side of the dialog as part of the
device tag. The following elements are available:
Sequential Number [project based] - A number incrementing from 1.
Numbering is unique across the entire project.
Sequential Number [installation/location based] - A number incrementing
from 1. Numbering is unique within each installation/location.
77
Project Management
Sequential Number [installation based] - A number incrementing from 1.

Numbering is unique within each installation.
Sequential Number [location based] - A number incrementing from 1.
Numbering is unique within each location name. If you have two locations with
the same name in different installations, the numbering will extend across both
locations. Use installation/location based numbering if you want locations with
the same name to be numbered separately.
Sequential Number [page based] - A number incrementing from 1. Numbering
is unique within the same page.
Sequential Number [line based] - A number incrementing from 1. Numbering
is unique for each line number.
Tag Mnemonic - A group of alphanumeric characters that indicate the type of
device that the device ID represents, such as CR or K for control relay or PB for
pushbutton. On the drawing, the mnemonic that appears in the device tag will be
taken from that which is defined in the symbol.
Page Number - The page number where the device ID is first used.
Line Number - The line number where the device ID is first used.
Zone Number - The drawing zone number where the device ID is first used.
PLC Address - (Available for PLC Wired Device ID and PLC Wired Terminal
ID) The PLC I/O address to which the item is connected will be used in the
device tag.
The right side of the dialog displays the currently selected device tag elements. Below
this is an example of what the device tag will look like in an actual drawing. To
remove an element from the device tag, select (highlight) it, then either press the
<Delete> key or right click on the element and select Delete from the popup menu.
Use the Clear button to empty the field of all selected elements. Use the Reset button
to reload the combination of elements that you had when you entered the dialog.
You can further format the device tag by selecting (highlighting) one of the selected
elements. When you do this, additional fields become active.
78
Project Management
Select element
Additional fields
become active
The Prefix and Suffix fields allow you to define a character string that will be placed
at the beginning (Prefix) or end (Suffix) of the label element.
The Width and Fill with fields allow you to set the number and type of characters that
will be used for the selected tag element. These fields become available when you
select a tag element and then select the Fixed number of characters checkbox. (If
you do not select this checkbox the software will use as many characters as necessary
for a given value.) The entry in the Width field sets the number of digits that will be
used for the value (more will be used if necessary). The Fill with field defines the
character that will be used if necessary to fill out the value to match the width value.
Example: Page Number set to width 3, fill with 0. Device tags on page 2 will use the
value 002. Device tags on page 13 will use the value 013. Device tags on page 3333
will use the value 3333.
The Duplicate Character area of the dialog allows you to format how tags will be
labeled when more than one symbol of the same type are placed on the same line. The
First number/character field defines how the symbols will be labeled, numbers or
letters, and what the first value will be. The Separator field defines the character that
will divide the value from the rest of the device tag. If you select the Suppress first
occurrence checkbox, then the first item on the line will not have the additional
value, but succeeding items will. For example: PB123, PB123.1, PB123.2.
When you have made the desired changes to the device ID format, use the Save
Profile button to save the changes for all future projects using the profile. If you
select the OK button (without saving) the changes will only apply to the current
project.
Device Cross Reference

A device cross reference is a cross reference that links two or more symbols in the
schematic drawings. Examples would be the cross references between the coil and
contacts of a relay or between a PLC parent and its child symbols.
79
Project Management
To configure device cross references, go to the project Options dialog, select Display
Formats. Select the Device Cross Reference line. The Edit button will appear. Select
the Edit button and the following dialog will appear.
There are tabs near the top of this dialog to select between layout for the cross
reference and format (content) of the cross reference.
Cross Reference Layout tab
The Profile Name field displays the name of the current device cross reference
profile. The profile is a saved format. You can create new profiles, save them and
reload them as your project needs require.
Cross Ref Type - In this column, various types of devices are listed: NO (Normally
Open), NC (Normally Closed), IN (Input), OUT (Output) and None (no cross
reference prefix). You can select whether or not cross references for each type of
device will appear on the drawing with an underscore. Select the Underscore
checkbox for each cross ref type that you wish to be underlined. Note: the cross ref
type for each symbol is defined by the cross reference prefix text that is chosen when
the symbol is created (see page 337).
80
Project Management
In the Parent Cross Reference Position fields, enter coordinates to determine the
position of the cross reference. Enter the X offset from the insertion point of the
symbol. Then enter the Y offset value and select whether this value is from the
symbol insertion point or from the origin (0).
In the Child/Duplicate Cross Reference Position fields, set the position of cross
reference that appear at child or duplicate symbols. Enter an X offset value in the X
Offset field. In the Y Offset Multiplier field, enter a value that will be multiplied
times the ID text height to yield the Y offset value. Negative numbers can be entered.
There is also a checkbox Display Child Symbol Cross-referencing which you can
select or de-select to show or hide cross references at child symbols.
Graphic style selection - There are several examples of graphic presentations of the
cross reference in the dialog. You can click on the style that you prefer to select it.
Show CP Text - Select this checkbox if you wish the connection point text of the
cross-referenced symbol to be included.
81
Project Management
Cross Reference Format tab

Select this tab in the Device Cross Referencing dialog to display the following fields.
cross reference. To add an element, select (highlight) it, and then click the Add to
cross reference.
The right side of the dialog displays the currently selected cross reference elements.
Below this is an example of what the cross reference will look like in an actual
drawing. To remove an element from the cross reference, select (highlight) it, then
either press the <Delete> key or right click on the element and select Delete from the
popup menu. Use the Clear button to empty the field of all selected elements. Use the
Reset button to reload the combination of elements that you had when you entered the
dialog.
at the beginning (Prefix) or end (Suffix) of the cross reference element. These fields
are active only when one of the cross reference elements is selected.
82
Project Management
will be used for the selected element. These fields appear when you select a tag
element and then select the Fixed number of characters checkbox. (If you do not
select this checkbox the software will use as many characters as necessary for a given
value.) The entry in the Width field sets the number of digits that will be used for the
value (more will be used if necessary). The Fill with field defines the character that
will be used if necessary to fill out the value to match the width value. Example:
Page Number set to width 3, fill with 0. Cross references to devices on page 2 will use
the value 002. Cross references to devices on page 13 will use the value 013. Cross
references to devices on page 3333 will use the value 3333.
When you have made the desired changes to the device cross reference format, use
the Save Profile button to save the changes for all future projects using the profile. If
you select the OK button (without saving) the changes will only apply to the current
project.
Wire Link Cross Reference

Under Project Options, select Display Formats and click in the field for Wire Link.
Select the Edit button to open the Wire Link Cross Reference Format dialog. This
dialog functions the same as the one described for device ID formats. See page 76.
When you have made the desired changes to the format, use the Save Profile button
to save the changes for all future projects using the profile. If you select the OK
button (without saving) the changes will only apply to the current project.
83
Project Management
Part Number Display Configuration

To configure the display of part numbers, go to the Project Options dialog, select
Display Formats and select the Part Number tab. The following fields will appear.
Delimiter For Part Number Quantity - This field allows you to specify characters
that are used to separate the quantity from the part number displayed at the symbol in
schematic drawings. (This applies when you use the Quantity field when assigning
part numbers.) Examples:
Separator: {} Result: {5} 800T-001
Separator: : Result: 5:800T-001.
Display Multiple Part Numbers On Drawing - When a part number is assigned to a
symbol it can be designated as the “primary” part number. If multiple part numbers
are assigned to one symbol only one of them will be the primary. See page 298. Select
the All radio button to display all the part numbers assigned to a symbol. Select the
Only the primary radio button to display only the primary part number. If the Only
the primary radio button is selected and there are additional part numbers assigned. a
comma and ellipsis will appear after the primary part number. Example: ABC1001, ...
Display Part Number - Select whether you wish the part number to be displayed
above the device ID or below the device ID.
Suppress Part Numbers On Child Symbol - Select the checkbox if you wish the part
number to be displayed only at the parent symbol. If the checkbox is not selected, the
part number will appear at both parent and child symbols.
Display Languages
This function sets which language text languages will be displayed on the drawing
and how multiple part numbers are displayed. In the project Options dialog, select
Display Languages. The following fields will appear.
84
Project Management
Certain descriptive text strings in a drawing can be displayed in up to three different

languages simultaneously. In the Language fields, the user selects which languages
will be used. By selecting the down arrow button the following list of languages can
be selected from: English, Chinese, German, French, Spanish, Italian, Russian.
85
Project Management
Drawing Standards
In the project Options dialog, select Drawing Standards. The following fields will
appear.
This function allows you to define drawing standards, units and naming format.
In the Drawing Naming Convention area you can set the naming format for drawing
files. Select a pre-defined profile or edit the elements of these profiles. (See below.)
In the Electrical Standard area, select whether the drawings will follow the
ANSI-IEEE or IEC standard.
In the Default Units of Measure area, select whether your drawings will use inch
units or metric (millimeter) units. These units will also be used for report templates.
In the Device Appending Setting area, select the Allow Devices To Be Appended To
Families checkbox if you wish to allow additional symbols to be assigned to a device
ID after the available spots have been filled. If you select this checkbox, two
additional checkboxes will be available, allowing you to select whether parent
symbols, child symbols or both can be appended. If you do not select the Allow
Devices To Be Appended To Families checkbox, the append option will not be
available when you attempt to assign too many items to a family (see page 231).
86
Project Management
In the Primary Mode field you can designate a drawing mode as “primary” which
means an ID assigned in that mode will replace a different ID assigned to the same
device in another mode. For more on drawing modes, see page 196.
If you wish to edit the naming convention profile for drawing files, select the Edit
button next to the Profile field. The following dialog will appear:
This function allows you to define the naming format for drawing files.
Available Variables - This area of the dialog lists the variables that are available for
inclusion in the device ID. To add one of these elements to the drawing name format,
select it and click on the Add to Expression button. It will then appear on the right
side of the dialog.
To remove an element from the format, select (highlight) it, then either press the
to reload the format that you had when you first entered the dialog.
The Example Result field shows the kind of filename that the selected variables will
produce using example values.
87
Project Management
PLC
In the project Options dialog, select PLC. The following fields will appear.
This function allows you to define the format of PLC card I/O addresses and import
PLC descriptive text from existing files.
PLC Import File – Specifies a text or spreadsheet file containing programmable
controller addresses and descriptive text. Once the file is selected, click the Replace
Text in Project button and the relevant text is automatically taken from the file and
placed in the drawing. Note: in order to use this function the PLC symbols in the
schematic must have the first address entered that matches the text in the file.
Use the Browse button to view and select available files.
The File Type field allows you to select the format of the programmable controller
file. The choices are Text file (txt) or Excel file (xls).
The format of the text file should be as follows:
1 6 (first and last column holding the PLC address)
8 60 (first and last column holding descriptive text)
I00100 CONVEYOR START PUSHBUTTON(first address and text)
I00101 CONVEYOR STOP PUSHBUTTON (second address and text)
etc.
The format of the Excel format file should be as follows:
88
Project Management
Address Descriptive text Installation Location
Addressing – This field selects I/O address numbering for programmable controller
symbols. The addressing will proceed in the selected numbering system from the
starting address entered by the user when the symbol is placed.
Automatic Addressing – This checkbox selects automatic or manual I/O addressing
of programmable controller module symbols. When the checkbox is selected,
automatic addressing is in effect; the system will take the beginning address number
entered by the user and assign consecutive addresses to the remaining I/O points on
the module. If the Automatic Addressing checkbox is de-selected, manual addressing
is in effect.
Input Card Format, Output Card Format - These fields allow you to define PLC
card input and output addresses. The available elements are listed on the left side of
the dialog. To add one of these elements to the PLC address format, select it and click
on the Add to Expression button. It will then appear on the right side of the dialog.
The Example field shows the kind of address that the selected variables will produce
using example values. To remove an element from the format, select (highlight) it,
then either press the <Delete> key or right click on the element and select Delete from
the popup menu. Use the Clear button to empty the field of all selected elements. Use
the Reset button to reload the format that you had when you first entered the dialog.
Select the OK button to load the settings for the current project.
89
Project Management
Region Settings
In the project Options dialog, select Region Settings. The following fields will
appear. There are two tabs: one for currency settings and one for date and time
settings.
Currency tab
In the Decimal Places field, select the number of decimal places that you wish
currency values to have.
In the Negative Numbers field, select whether or not you wish negative currency
values to be marked with a minus sign (-).
Date & Time tab
Select one of the available formats for Date Type and Time Type.
90
Project Management
Revision Control
In the project Options dialog, select Revision Control. The following fields will
appear.
This function allows you to make settings to the Revision Control function. The
following settings are available:
Revision Control On - Select this checkbox to activate the Revision Control function.
Use Page Prefix for Off-Page Revision Numbers - When you select this checkbox,
off-page revision numbers will prefixed in the title block with the page number of the
page where the edit occurred. (An “off-page” revision is a change that occurs on a
page due to an edit made on another page.)
Allow User to Increment Project Revision - Select Always to allow a user to create a
project revision at his or her discretion. Select Never to prevent users from creating a
revision.
Log Off-Page Changes to Title Blocks - Sets whether or not revision notations will
be made on pages that are affected by changes made by the user on another page. For
example if the user changes the ID of a relay, it will affect a contact of that relay on a
different page (an “Off-Page”). Select Always, Never or Prompt.
Cancel Making a Revision - Sets whether the user will have the option to cancel
making a revision. Select Never or Prompt.
Revise Previous Revisions - Sets whether the user can open a revision and make
changes. Select Never or Always.
91
Project Management
Log AutoCAD Revisions - Sets whether changes made using AutoCAD commands
and functions will be logged as revisions. Select Never or Always.
Backup Path for Revisions - Sets where revisions will be stored. Use the Browse
button to select or create a folder.
Creating New Revisions
When you first turn on the Revision Control On checkbox in the Project Options
Revision Control dialog and select OK, the Base Revision dialog will appear.
1. In the Base Revision Number field, enter the number that you wish the base
revision to have. If you leave this field blank, the software use the name of the
project as the name for the base revision. Note: the base revision that is saved is
the project up to the point when you first turn on revision control.
2. In the New Revision Number field, enter the name that will become the current
revision after you select OK.
3. If desired, enter short and long descriptions of the revision.
4. Select OK. The software will close all currently open pages and create a backup
of the project to the revision path and name it as: "ProjectName - BaseRevision"
where “ProjectName” is the name of the current project and “BaseRevision” is
the name that was in the Base Revision Number field.
5. Thereafter, when you wish to create a new project revision, go to the Project
Manager and select File > Revision Control > New Revision (the Revision
Control menu is only available when revision control is turned on). The Add
Project Revision dialog will appear.
92
Project Management
6. Enter a number for the new revision in the New Revision Number field. Select
OK to create the new revision. The previous current revision will be saved as a
backup and the newly created revision will become the current revision.
To edit project revision information
You can edit the descriptions for your page revisions. To do this, first you must have
the Revise Previous Revisions field in the project Options dialog Revision Control
screen set to Always (see page 91). This allows you to make changes.
Then, in the Project Manager, select File > Revision Control > Edit Project
Revisions function. The Edit Project Revisions dialog will appear.
The revisions are listed. You can display and edit the descriptions by clicking on the
document icons in the Short Description and Long Description columns. You can
also edit the User name.
Select the OK button to save the changes.
93
Project Management
Deleting a Revision
To delete a project revision:

In the Project Manager, select File > Revision Control > Delete Revision function.
The Delete Project Revision dialog will appear.
Select the revision you wish to delete. Then select the Delete button.
Check Out (Access) a Revision
If you wish to work with one of your saved project revisions, you can “check it out”
for this purpose. To check out a revision:
In the Project Manager, select File > Revision Control > Get Revision function. The
Revision List dialog will appear.
94
Project Management
Highlight the revision you wish to check out.

Select the Check Out button. The saved revision will be restored.
Page Revisions
When you have the revision control feature turned on, you will be prompted to save
page revisions when you close a page that has been edited. These page revisions are
descriptions of the changes that you have made to the page - they are not backup
copies of the page itself.
When you close an edited page, the Revision Control dialog will appear:
Select the Increment Page Revision radio button if you wish to save a page revision.
Then select the OK button. (If you do not wish to save page revision information,
select the No Revision button.)
The Add Page Revision dialog will appear:
95
Project Management
This dialog shows the page name and the project and project revision to which the
page belongs.
In the New Page Revision Number field, enter a number for the new revision you are
creating.
In the Short Description field, enter a brief description of the changes that were made
in this revision.
In the Long Description field, enter a more detailed description of the changes that
were made in this revision.
In the Related Pages area of the dialog, select the This page radio button.
Select the OK button to save the page revision.
To view page revision information:
You can use the Page Revisions report to view your page revisions.
Select the Elec-Tools > Run Reports function. Then open the Revision Report
(Page) category and select the Page Revision List report.
96
Project Management
The report shows each page revision in the current project along with their
descriptions.
To edit page revision information:

You can edit the descriptions for your page revisions. To do this, first you must have
the Revise Previous Revisions field in the project Options dialog Revision Control
screen set to Always (see page 91). This allows you to make changes.
Then, in the Project Manager, select File > Revision Control > Edit Page Revisions
function. The Edit Page Revisions dialog will appear.
The revisions are listed. You can display and edit the descriptions by clicking on the
document icons in the Short Description and Long Description columns. You can
also edit the User name.
Select the OK button to save the changes.
97
Project Management
Text Settings
In the project Options dialog, select Text Settings. The following fields will appear.
This function allows you to make settings for various kinds of text that appear in
drawings. Fields for different categories of text (IDs, wire numbers, cross references,
etc.) are provided. For each field, there are three checkboxes:
Use Text Style - If you select Use Text Style, the software will use the text values
defined in the text style for that type of text. If you de-select this checkbox, the
software will use the text settings that were defined in the symbol or in the wire
numbering function function for subsequently inserted symbols and assigned
wire numbers.
Use Text Height. If you select Use Text Height, the software will use the text
height defined in the text style for that type of text. If you de-select this
checkbox, the software will use the text height that was defined in the symbol or
in the wire numbering function for subsequently inserted symbols and assigned
wire numbers.
Scale Text By Page Scale - If you select Scale Text By Page Scale, the software
will scale the text size according to the page scale for the current page.
98
Project Management
If you wish to modify any of the text styles, select the Edit button for the desired text
type. The following dialog will appear.
You can make changes to the available values and save the changes using the Save
Profile button. You can change the profile name and save multiple profiles. Use the
Load Profile button to recall a saved profile.
The following fields are available:
Font Name - Select a font from the drop-down list.
Height - Sets the text height.
Preview - An example of how the current font settings will appear.
Width Factor - Sets character spacing. Entering a value of less than 1.0 condenses the
text. Values greater than 1.0 expand the text.
Rotate - Enter an angle value for placing text on a page.
Oblique - Sets the oblique angle (italicizing) of the text. Enter a value between -85
and 85.
Color - Select a color for the text from the drop-down list. Use the browse button to
open a color dialog for additional colors.
99
Project Management
Wiring Diagram Settings
In the project Options dialog, select Wiring Diagram Settings. The following fields
will appear.
This function allows you to make settings that define the appearance and content of
wire diagram drawings and cable cross reference drawings. There are separate tabs
for these two types of drawings.
Devices tab
The Devices tab of the Wire Diagram Settings dialog has settings for wire diagrams
that contain standard (non-cable) hardware devices.
At the top of the dialog is a graphical representation of a wire diagram symbol with
fields for defining the connection information on each side of the symbol. To
configure the information in these fields, select the Build Expressions button above
the desired field.
100
Project Management
The following Expression Builder dialog will appear.
The available variables are listed in two columns on the left side of the dialog.
To add one of these elements to the connection information, select it and click on
the Add to Expression button. It will then appear on the right side of the dialog.
The Example field shows how the selected variables will appear in the drawing.
If you select (highlight) one of the selected variables in the expression, the
Properties fields become active, allowing you to enter a Prefix or Suffix that will
be added to the variable value.
<Delete> key or right click on the element and select Delete from the popup
menu. Use the Clear button to empty the field of all selected elements. Use the
Reset button to reload the format that you had when you first entered the dialog.
Select OK to load the changes and close the Expression Builder dialog.
The Connection Options area of the wire diagram settings dialog has additional
functions that determine how the connection information will be displayed.
Display Multiple Connections on One Line - When this checkbox is checked,
connections that have multiple wires will display the information on one line rather
than on separate lines. The Connection Delimiter field allows you to choose a
character to separate the multiple connections.
Suppress Connections With Different Installation/Location - Connections that go
from/to different installations or locations will be ignored and not included.
101
Project Management
Only Display Installation/Location if Different Than Device - The

installation/location in the connection information will only be displayed if it is a
different installation/location than that of the device represented by the symbol.
Suppress Duplicate Wire Number - Do not display wire numbers that are duplicates.
Suppress Gauge/Color If - Allows you to suppress display of gauge and/or color
values if the values match those entered in the Gauge and Color fields.
Remove ‘?’ Character For Unterminated Connections - When selected, this
checkbox suppresses the question mark character that marks unterminated
connections.
Dynamically Update Connections - If you select this checkbox, connection
information on the wiring diagram will be updated automatically each time the page
is opened. If the checkbox is not selected, the page will only be updated when the
update command (Wiring > Update Wiring Diagram) is selected from the menu.
Terminal/Pin-Plug Options - These settings affect the display of terminal or pin/plug
information.
Suppress Clip Jumper Prefix - When selected, the prefix for clip jumpers
(“CLIP:”) will not be displayed.
Suppress Connection Point - When the checkbox is selected, the connection
point designation (“I”, “E”) will not be displayed with the terminal number.
Terminal Number Delimiter - Defines the character used to separate the
terminal block number from the terminal strip name.
102
Project Management
Cable Cross-References tab

The Cable Cross-References tab of the Wire Diagram Settings dialog has settings for
diagrams that show cable connection information.
At the top of the dialog is a graphical representation of a cable wiring diagram symbol
with fields for defining the connection information on each side of the symbol. To
configure the information in these fields, select the Build Expressions button above
the desired field. The Expression Builder dialog will appear (see page 100).
The Connection Options area of the dialog has additional functions that determine
how the connection information will be displayed.
Only Display Installation/Location if Different Than Device - The
installation/location in the connection information will only be displayed if it is a
different installation/location than that of the device represented by the symbol.
Suppress Gauge/Color If: - Selecting this checkbox will suppress the display of
gauge or color information if the value matches those entered in the Gauge or
Color fields.
Remove ‘?’ Character For Unterminated Connections - When selected, this
checkbox suppresses the question mark character that marks unterminated
connections.
Dynamically Update Connections - If you select this checkbox, connection
information on the wiring diagram will be updated automatically each time the
page is opened. If the checkbox is not selected, the page will only be updated
when the update command (promis-e Output > Update Wiring Diagram) is
selected.
103
Project Management
Terminal/Pin-Plug Options - These settings affect the display of terminal or pin/plug

information.
Suppress Connection Point - When the checkbox is selected, the connection
point designation (“I”, “E”) will not be displayed with the terminal number.
Terminal Number Delimiter - Defines the character used to separate the
terminal block number from the terminal strip name.
Wiring Diagram Charts tab

The Wiring Diagram Charts tab of the Wire Diagram Settings dialog has settings for
diagrams that show connections in a table format. You have the option of using this
format rather than using wiring diagram symbols to represent devices.
In the Text Styles area you can set the text style for the types of text that appear in the
chart. Select the Edit button for a text type to display the Edit Text Style dialog (see
page 99).
In the Include area, select the Include Function Text checkbox to include symbol
function text. Select the Include Headings checkbox to activate the fields that allow
you to enter column headings for connection points (CP Heading) and connection
information (Connection Heading).
In the Default Chart Settings area, enter width values (in default units) for the CP
Column Width (connection point column) and Connection Column Width
(connection information column). You can also select the Chart Color, which is the
color of the dividing lines in the table.
104
Project Management
Wire Options
In the project Options dialog, select Wire Options. The following fields will appear.
This function allows you to make settings that affect the appearance of wires and wire
labels in drawings.
Wire Crossing Preference

This setting determines how a wire will appear when it crosses another wire without
connecting. Choose Standard or Loop Over.
Standard Crossing Loop Over Crossing
If you select Loop Over, the Loop Over Radius field becomes active, allowing you to
enter a radius value for the loop.
105
Project Management
Wire Connector Type

This setting determines how the connection between two wires will appear by default.
Choose Node (connection point) or Diagonal.
Node Connector Diagonal Connector
Wire Property Display

Wire Property Display - This field determines the properties of the wire that will be
displayed in the drawing. To change the entry, select the Edit button. The Wire
Properties Display dialog will appear.
This dialog, accessed using the Edit button in the Wire Options dialog, allows you to
select the wire properties that will be displayed in the drawing and configure how
they will appear. You can combine other elements with the wire tag (wire number) to
create a more complex wire ID.
You can make changes to the available values and save the changes using the Save
Profile button. You can change the profile name and save multiple profiles. Use the
Load Profile button to recall a saved profile.
The Profile Name field displays the name of the currently selected profile.
106
Project Management
The left side of the dialog lists the variables that are available for inclusion in the
properties display. To add one of these elements to the displayed properties, select it
and click on the Add to Expression button. It will then appear on the right side of the
dialog.
to reload the format that you had when you first entered the dialog.
The Example field shows the kind of wire properties that the selected variables will
produce using example values.
Text & Position Options - Use these fields to set the position of the displayed wire
properties in relation to the wire.
Position Along Line - Sets where the wire tag will appear on a wire segment.
Select Left or Top, Middle, or Right or Bottom.
Wire Number On Wire - Select this checkbox if you wish the number to appear
on the wire itself.
22
Offset from Line - Sets the distance of the wire tag from the wire.
The Properties area of the dialog has two fields Prefix and Suffix that allow you to
add characters to the beginning or end of any of the elements in the format. These
fields become available when you select (highlight) one of the elements that has been
added to the expression.
Same Potential Over Terminal - This checkbox selects whether or not the same wire
number will be assigned before and after a terminal when wires are numbered. When
this checkbox is selected, the same wire number will appear before and after the
terminal symbol. If the checkbox is not selected, a different wire number will be
assigned after the terminal as shown below.
15 TB2
16
107
Project Management
Wire Layer Configuration

Wire Layer Configuration - Select the Wire Layer Configuration button in the Wire
Options dialog. The following dialog will appear.
This dialog is for making settings for drawing wires on two or more different
layers. (Layers correspond to MicroStation “levels.”) You can assign different
wire properties such as gauge, color and voltage to different layers. This will, for
example, allow you to draw power wires on one layer and signal wires on
another layer. The appropriate properties are then automatically assigned to each
wire type.
If the Allow Multiple Wires Per Mode radio button is set to On the software will
allow the user to define different types of logic line layers for each drawing
mode. If this feature is set to Off the software will only permit the user to define
one layer for logic lines for each mode.
Import Layers - Selects this button to open a file browser dialog and select a
.DWG or .DXF file. After the file is opened the software will extract all the layer
names used in the drawing and list them in the layer configuration dialog.
108
Project Management
New Layer - Select this button to enter the name of a new layer and add it to the
list.
Delete Layer - If the user selects this button the currently selected layer will be
deleted.
Rename Layer - If the user selects this button the software will allow the user to
enter a new name for the currently selected layer.
Use the drop-down list in the Drawing Mode column to assign a drawing mode
to each layer. (The drop-down list will appear when you place the cursor in a
field within the column).
The Use column allows you to assign a description to the logic line layer. When
you place the cursor in that column a drop-down list will appear that lists every
use that has already been defined.
The More Properties button will display a dialog that lists the other ten
user-definable attributes.
Select OK to load the layer configuration settings.
109
Project Management
Default Wire Properties

Select the Default Wire Properties button in the Wire Options dialog to display the
Default Wire Properties dialog. This dialog allows you to set the values that are
prompted when setting wire properties in a drawing or in the Force Routing Manager.
To enter values, first select the desired property in the Wire Property field. The
available selections are Gauge, Color, Type, Voltage and Current.
Select the “+” button to enter a new value. You will be prompted with the Add dialog
where you can enter the value. This value will then appear in the Default Value field.
You can add more values as needed.
You can set the order of the default values by selecting a value in the Default Value
field and then selecting the up or down arrow button to move it up or down the list.
You can delete a value by selecting it and then selecting the “X” button.
Wire Tag Formats

The Wire Tag Formats area of the Wire Options screen allows you to format wire
labels (wire numbers). \
There are settings that affect wire tag duplicate number checking:
The Labels Include Installation and Location radio buttons. When you select
the Installation, Location and Tag radio button, the installation and location of
the wire will be considered part of the wire tag (even though it may not be
110
Project Management
displayed). This means you could have two wires with the same number in
different installations or locations and they would not be considered duplicates
because the different installation or location in the tag makes each one unique.
If you select the Tag Only radio button, identical tags will be considered
duplicates even if they are in separate installations.
When you select the Duplicate Label Checking Between Modes the software
will not allow duplicate wire labels even if the drawings have different drawing
modes (schematic, pneumatic, etc.).
Four types of wire labels can be formatted:
• Standard - a typical wire.
• Terminal Number- a wire connected to a terminal symbol.
• PLC - a wire connected to a PLC input or output.
• Cable - a wire assigned to a cable.
For each format type, the dialog shows the name of the profile that the format is
currently based on (default, etc.). If you wish to change this setting, select the Edit
button for that field.
111
Project Management
Select the Edit button to access the Wire Tag Format area of the dialog.
Load or save profiles
Profile name
Available elements
Currently selected
elements
Example of current
elements
The Profile Name field displays the name of the current label profile. The profile is a
saved format. You can create new profiles, save them and reload them as your project
needs require.
wire label. To add an element, select (highlight) it, and then click the Add to
label. The following elements are available:
Line Number
Terminal Number, Terminal Strip - For terminal wire labels.
PLC Address - For PLC wire labels.
Zone Number - For pages that are divided into zones.
112
Project Management
Sequential Number - A number incrementing from 1. You can choose to have

this numbering extend across the entire project, an installation, a location, a page
or a single line.
Branch Label
Drawing Set
The right side of the dialog displays the currently selected label elements. Below this
is an example of what the label will look like in an actual drawing. To remove an
element from the label, select (highlight) it, then either press the <Delete> key or right
click on the element and select Delete from the popup menu. Use the Clear button to
empty the field of all selected elements. Use the Reset button to reload the
combination of elements that you had when you entered the dialog.
You can further format the label by selecting (highlighting) one of the selected
elements. When you do this, additional fields become active.
Select element
Additional fields
become active
at the beginning (Prefix) or end (Suffix) of the label element.
will be used for the selected label element. These fields become available when you
select a label element and then select the Fixed number of characters checkbox. (If
you do not select this checkbox the software will use as many characters as necessary
for a given value.) The entry in the Width field sets the number of digits that will be
used for the value (more will be used if necessary). The Fill with field defines the
character that will be used if necessary to fill out the value to match the width value.
Example: Page Number set to width 3, fill with 0. Labels on page 2 will use the value
002. Labels on page 13 will use the value 013. Labels on page 3333 will use the value
3333.
The Duplicate Character area of the dialog allows you to format how labels will be
distinguished when more than one label appears on the same line. The First
number/character field defines how the labels will be marked, numbers or letters,
and what the first value will be. The Separator field defines the character that will
113
Project Management
divide the value from the rest of the wire label. If you select the Suppress first
occurrence checkbox, then the first item on the line will not have the additional
value, but succeeding items will. For example: 102, 102.1, 102.2.
When you have made the desired changes to the wire label format, use the Save
Profile button to save the changes for all future projects using the profile. If you
select the OK button (without saving) the changes will only apply to the current
project.
114
Project Management
Project Backup / Restore

You can make a backup copy of a project for safekeeping or for sending to someone
else. The restore function allows a user to convert the backup file back into a project
that can be opened.
Make a Backup
Use the following procedure to make a backup:
1. Close any open drawing pages.

2. In the Project Manager, select Edit > Backup.
The Backup Project dialog will appear.
3. In the Project field, select the name of the project that you wish to back up.
4. In the Save In field, select the folder where you wish the backup copy to be
stored. Use the browse button to locate the desired folder.
5. In the Include in Backup File area of the dialog, make selections to determine
what information will be stored with the project in addition to the drawings. You
can select checkboxes to include Symbols used and Language phrases used.
6. If you wish to save the project in the MicroStation drawing format (.dgn), select
the Save files in MicroStation compatible format checkbox. (This checkbox is
not present in the MicroStation version of promis•e.)
7. Select OK to create the project backup file. This file will have the same name as
the project and a “.prj” extension.
115
Project Management
Restore a Backup
Use the following procedure to restore a project from a backup file:
1. In the Project Manager, select Edit > Restore.

The Restore Project dialog will appear.
In the Project File field, use the browse button to locate and select the backup
file that you wish to restore.
2. In the Path field, use the browse button to locate and select the folder where you
wish the restored project to be located.
3. In the Name field, enter the name that you wish the restored project to have. The
entry will default to the name of the selected backup file, but you can change
this.
4. Select the OK button to restore the project.
116
Project Management
Rebuild Project Database

Ordinarily, changes made to a drawing page are recorded in the project database so
that the software can perform cross referencing, keep track of device IDs and wire
numbers, etc.
However, if the information on the pages becomes out-of-sync with the project
database (for example if someone edits the DWG files outside of promis•e), you will
need to update the project database with the new information.
To re-sync the information on the pages with the project database, select the Manage
> Rebuild Project Database function. The software will examine the information on
each page in the project and update the project database.
This is similar to the Update Page function (see page 175) except that it includes all
pages in the project, not just one.
117
Project Management
Migration Wizard
The Migration Wizard is a function to convert projects and other data created in
earlier (legacy) versions of the software to the format used by promis•e 2007 version
3.0 and promis•e V8i.
Starting the Migration Wizard
To activate the Migration Wizard go to the Project Manager and select File >
Migration Wizard. The Migration dialog will appear:
In this dialog, select whether the project to be imported comes

From Legacy promis•e (a version of promis•e earlier than promis•e 2007) or
From promis•e Version 2.0 or
From promis•e (ACAD) to promis•e (MicroStation) (You will only see this choice in
MicroStation or PowerDraft versions of the software. It is for migrating catalogs
only.)
The remainder of the wizard steps will be affected by your choice here:
• If you select the From Legacy promis•e, go to Migrate from Legacy
promis•e on page 119.
• If you select From promis•e Version 2.0 go to Migrate from Version 2.0 on
page 133.
• If you select From promis•e (ACAD) to promis•e (MicroStation) go to
Migrate Catalog from AutoCAD to MicroStation Version on page 137.
Select OK to continue.
118
Project Management
Migrate from Legacy promis•e
(See the previous steps for starting the Migration Wizard on page 118.)
The Select Legacy Data Files dialog will appear:
If you have a legacy version of the software on your system, you can select the I have
a legacy version radio button and then use the browse button next to the Legacy
promis-e path field to locate and select where the legacy software is installed. This
will allow the software to prompt you in later steps with the appropriate path for
projects, symbols, etc.
If you don’t have the legacy software installed, select the I want to browse to my
legacy data files radio button.
119
Project Management
The Migration Wizard dialog will appear.
The dialog has five tabs across the top, each of which corresponds to a different type
of data (you may need to scroll to the right to see all the tabs). These are:
• Catalogs
• Page Formats
• Language Phrases
• Parts Databases
• Projects (drawings)
You can go directly to any of the tabs and skip those that you do not need. For each
tab there are a series of steps to be performed to import the data.
Import Legacy Catalog tab
In this tab of the Migration Wizard (see previous figure) you can import symbol
catalogs from earlier versions of the software. Use the following steps.
1. Identify the catalog. You can choose a radio button to import the catalog either
from a backup file or from an uncompressed folder.
If you choose to import from a backup file, use the browse button to locate and
select the desired backup file.
If you choose to import an uncompressed catalog, use the browse button to
browse to the directory where the legacy symbol catalog is installed.
120
Project Management
If you selected an existing legacy installation of the software when starting the
Migration Wizard (see page 118) you will be prompted with a drop-down list of
catalogs that exist in that version. Select the desired catalog from the list.
2. Click on Step 2: Select Title Block.
121
Project Management
All the macros in the selected catalog are listed. From this list, select the title
block macros by scrolling down the list and double-clicking on each title block
macro that you wish to convert. You can also select multiple items by holding
down the <Shift> or <Ctrl> keys and then selecting the Import Selected button.
Use the Import All button if you wish to select all the macros in the catalog.
(Macros that are not title blocks should be imported in step 4.) Selected macros
are listed at the bottom of the dialog.
To remove a macro from the selected list, highlight it and select the Remove
button. To clear the list of selected macros, select the Clear button.
Note: Some legacy versions of promis•e clearly defined which macros were title
blocks. If you are converting from one of these versions, the wizard will
automatically filter the list of macros and only list the title blocks in this step of
the wizard.
3. Select Step 3: Select Symbol.
The symbols in the selected catalog are listed. From this list, select symbols by
scrolling down the list and double-clicking on each one that you wish to convert.
You can also select multiple items by holding down the <Shift> or <Ctrl> keys
and then selecting the Import Selected button. Use the Import All button if you
want to select all of the symbols. Selected symbols are listed at the bottom of the
dialog.
122
Project Management
To remove a symbol from the selected list, highlight it and select the Remove
button. To clear the list of selected symbols, select the Clear button.
The software tries to determine the correct type of symbol to which each symbol
should be converted, but there may be times when the software cannot
automatically identify the correct symbol type (for example, panel layout
symbols). You can individually change the types in this dialog by clicking in the
Type field and selecting the correct type from the drop-down list. You can use
the <Shift> and <Ctrl> keys to select multiple records and change their type at
the same time.
4. Select Step 4: Select Macro.
The macros in the selected catalog are listed. From this list, select macros by
scrolling down the list and double-clicking on each one that you wish to convert.
You can also select multiple items by holding down the <Shift> or <Ctrl> keys
and then selecting the Import Selected button. Use the Import All button if you
want to select all of the macros. (You should de-select title block macros that
were selected in step 2.) Selected macros are listed at the bottom of the dialog.
123
Project Management
To remove a macro from the selected list, highlight it and select the Remove
button. To clear the list of selected macros, select the Clear button.
The software tries to determine the correct type (drawing mode) to which each
macro should be converted, but there may be times when the software cannot
automatically identify the correct type. You can individually change the types in
this dialog by clicking in the Type field and selecting the correct mode from the
drop-down list. You can use the <Shift> and <Ctrl> keys to select multiple
records and change their type at the same time.
5. Select Step 5: Select Device Type.
The device types in the selected catalog are listed. From this list, select device
types by scrolling down the list and double-clicking on each one that you wish to
convert. You can also select multiple items by holding down the <Shift> or
<Ctrl> keys and then selecting the Import Selected button. Use the Import All
button if you want to select all of the device types. Selected device types are
listed at the bottom of the dialog.
124
Project Management
To remove a device type from the selected list, highlight it and select the
Remove button. To clear the list of selected device types, select the Clear button.
The software tries to determine the correct type of device family to which each
device type should be converted, but there may be times when the software
cannot automatically identify the correct type. You can individually change the
types in this dialog by clicking in the Type field and selecting the correct type
from the drop-down list. You can use the <Shift> and <Ctrl> keys to select
multiple records and change their type at the same time.
6. Select Step 6: Save.
The Catalog Path field will default to your first promis•e V8i catalog path. If
desired, you can use the browse button to select a different path. The Catalog
Name field entry will default to the original name of the imported catalog. If
desired you can enter a different name. In the Catalog Type field, select Inch or
Metric to match the type of units to be used in the drawings where the imported
symbols will be used.
Select the Import button. A folder will be created for the imported catalog,
including sub-folders containing the imported title blocks, symbols, macros and
device families.
In the Progress area of the dialog a status bar indicates the percentage of the
catalog that has been imported. Select the Log button to view information about
the import process. It is recommended that you view this log data when the
import is complete to verify that no problems occurred.
125
Project Management
Import Legacy Page Formats tab
You can use this tab of the Migration Wizard to import drawing page formats from
earlier versions of the software. Use the following steps.
Note: If you are importing page formats that make use of line number macros or zone
macros, you must first import the symbol catalog(s) that contain those macros.
1. Select the page format folder. In the Select dwg .cfg file field, browse to the
directory where the legacy version of the software is installed and find the
dwg.cfg file (typically in the SYSCON\SYSTEM folder).
Note: If you selected an existing legacy installation of the software when starting the
Migration Wizard (see page 118) you will be prompted with a drop-down list of
the dwg.cfg files that exist for that version of the software. There is one for each
project and also one in the SYSCON\SYSTEM folder.
126
Project Management
2. Select Step 2: Select Page Format.
The page formats in the selected configuration are listed. From this list, select
page formats by scrolling down the list and double-clicking on each one that you
wish to convert. You can also select multiple items by holding down the <Shift>
or <Ctrl> keys and then selecting the Import Selected button. Use the Import All
button if you want to select all of the page formats. Selected page formats are
listed at the bottom of the dialog.
To remove a page format from the selected list, highlight it and select the
Remove button. To clear the list of selected page formats, select the Clear
button.
127
Project Management
3. Select Step 3: Save. In the field labeled Folder to store imported page formats,
browse to the folder where you wish the imported legacy formats to be stored. It
is recommended to use the default folder: promis•e Data\PageFormat.
Select the Import button. The formats will be stored in the selected folder. For
each format, a file with a “pgf” extension is created.
import process that is completed. Select the Log button to view information
about the import process. It is recommended that you view this log data when the
import is complete to verify that no problems occurred.
128
Project Management
Import Legacy Language Phrases tab
This tab of the Migration Wizard allows you to import language database from legacy
versions of the software. Use the following steps.
1. In the Select Legacy Language Database field, browse to the folder containing
the language database and select the database (mdb) file. Typically this is the
TDB.MDB file in the DB\LG folder.
Migration Wizard (see page 118) you will be prompted with the language
database file for that version of the software.
2. Select the Import button. A language database file will be created in your
“promis•e Data” folder in the Databases sub-folder.
import process that has been completed. Select the Log button to view
information about the import process. It is recommended that you view this log
data when the import is complete to verify that no problems occurred.
129
Project Management
Import Legacy Parts Database tab
You can use this tab of the Migration Wizard to import parts database files from
earlier versions of the software. Use the following steps.
1. In the Legacy Parts Database field, browse to the folder where the legacy
database file is stored.
Migration Wizard (see page 118) you will be prompted with the parts database
file for that version of the software.
130
Project Management
2. In the Save New Parts Database field select a folder where the converted
database will be stored. When you select the browse button, the following dialog
will appear, automatically defaulting to the database folder for promis•e V8i.
You can select a different folder if you wish. Enter a name for the converted
database file in the Filename field.
Select the Save button to continue.

3. Select the Import button. The converted database will be stored in the designated
folder.
import process that has been completed. Select the Log button to view
information about the import process. It is recommended that you view this log
data when the import is complete to verify that no problems occurred.
Import Legacy Projects tab
You can use this tab of the Migration Wizard to import projects from earlier versions
of the software. Use the following steps.
1. In the Legacy Project(s) Path field, browse to the folder where the legacy
projects are stored. Typically, this is the ..\PROJECT\WORK folder.
Migration Wizard (see page 118) it will default to the project path for that
version of the software.
131
Project Management
2. If you select the Import Report checkbox, the software will convert the
MS-Access report formats from the legacy version so that they will run on
promis•e V8i. It will create a file called Reports.mdb in the folder for the
imported project. You can open this file in MS-Access and print reports from
there.
3. When you select the legacy project path, the projects stored in that folder are
listed. Select the Import checkbox for each project that you wish to import. Use
the Select All button to select all the projects.
4. The New Path column for the selected project(s), will default to your default
folder for storing projects. If desired, you can click inside this field to display a
browse button and use the browse button to select a folder for the converted
projects.
5. By default, symbol attribute text will be converted using the default values that
were delivered with the legacy version. However, if you have customized these
values and wish to use your values instead, click inside the Attributes File
column and browse to your edited att_eng.txt file.
132
Project Management
6. Select the Start button to start the conversion process. The selected projects are
converted page by page. Status bars at the bottom of the dialog show how much
of the current project and the total job have been converted. The log file stores
information about the conversion including any errors that were encountered.
Migrate from Version 2.0
(See the previous steps for starting the Migration Wizard on page 118.)
The Migration Wizard dialog will appear.
The dialog has tabs across the top, each of which corresponds to a different type of
data. These are:
• Catalogs
• Page Formats
• Parts Database
Note: You import projects from version 2.0 by making a backup of the project in version 2.0
and restoring it in version 3.0.
You can go directly to any of the tabs and skip those that you do not need. For each
tab there are a series of steps to be performed to import the data.
133
Project Management
Import Catalogs tab
In this tab of the Migration Wizard (see previous figure) you can import symbol
catalogs from Version 2.0 of the software. Use the following steps.
1. Select a radio button to choose whether you wish to Import uncompressed

catalog or Import catalog from a backup file.
2. If you are importing an uncompressed catalog, use the browse button to locate
and select the Catalogs folder for the Version 2.0 software. If you are importing
from a backup file, use the browse button to locate and select the backup file.
Existing catalogs in the Catalogs folder or in the backup file will be listed.
3. In the Convert column, select the checkbox for each catalog that you wish to
import into the latest version of the software. You can also use the Select All or
Deselect All buttons rather than clicking on individual checkboxes.
4. Select the Update button to import the selected catalogs.
When the importation is complete, an “update successful” message is displayed.
134
Project Management
Import Page Formats tab
In this tab of the Migration Wizard you can import page formats from Version 2.0 of
the software. Use the following steps.
1. Use the browse button to locate and select the PageFormat folder for the Version
2.0 software.
2. The page formats in the selected folder will be listed. Select the checkbox for
each format that you wish to import (all formats are selected by default).
3. Select the Update button to import the formats.
135
Project Management
Import Parts Database tab
In this tab of the Migration Wizard you can import the parts database from Version
2.0 of the software. Use the following steps.
1. Use the browse button to locate and select the desired database file (in the
Databases folder) for the Version 2.0 software.
2. Select the Update button to import the selected database.

136
Project Management
Migrate Catalog from AutoCAD to MicroStation Version
If you are migrating from an AutoCAD-based version of promis•e to one that is

based on MicroStation or PowerDraft, you can migrate your symbol catalogs by
selecting the From promis•e (ACAD) to promis•e (MicroStation) radio button in the
first Migration Wizard dialog. This option is only available in the MicroStation or
PowerDraft versions of the software.
The following dialog will appear:
In the Standard of the catalog to convert field, select ANSI-IEEE if the catalog you
are migrating uses inch units, or select IEC if the catalog uses metric units.
In the Source catalog (ACAD) area of the dialog:
Select Import uncompressed catalog if the catalog exists in a standard catalog
folder. Then use the browse button in the adjoining field to select the catalog
folder.
Select Import catalog from a backup file if the catalog exists in a compressed
backup file. Then use the browse button in the adjoining field to select the
backup file.
137
Project Management
In the Target catalog(MS) area of the dialog:

Select Export to an uncompressed catalog if you wish to migrate the catalog to
a standard catalog folder. Then use the browse button in the adjoining field to
select the destination catalog folder.
Select Export to backup catalog file if you wish to migrate the catalog to a
compressed backup file. Then use the browse button in the adjoining field to
select the folder and enter the name of the backup file.
138
Project Management
Data Manager
The Data Manager is a feature that allows you to access data from the project in one
window with tabs for different categories of data such as device IDs, symbol text and
more. The Data Manager is a convenient way to globally search, sort and edit project
data without opening drawing pages.
To access the Data Manager, select Revise/Review > Data Manager. (A project must
be active.) The Data Manager dialog will appear.
The dialog has a series of tabs along the bottom that allow you to select the category
of data that you are accessing. There are tabs for the following:
Cable
Device ID
Wire
Logical Field
Page Description
Page Number
Plug
Symbol Text
Terminal
Wire Link
Wire Number
When you select a tab, a set of data columns that are relevant to that category of data
will appear. The white columns are available for editing; the shaded columns cannot
be altered.
139
Project Management
To sort the data, you can click on the column headings.

In the Select Page(s) area of the dialog, you can restrict the data display to certain
drawing sets and pages within the project. When an item is selected, a checkmark will
appear beside it.
In the Find & Replace area of the dialog you can search for specific data values and
replace them with new values.
To search for values:
1. Select the tab for the desired category of data.

2. Use the Look in field to select the data column that you wish to include in the
search. The data columns of the current data category are available in the
drop-down list.
3. Enter the value that you wish to search for in the Find what field. You can enter
an exact value or use wildcard (*) strings.
4. Select the Find button. The software will highlight the first item in the list of
displayed values that matches the entered value. If you select Find again, it will
go to the next value that matches the value, if there is one.
To replace values:
1. Select the tab for the desired category of data.

2. Use the Look in field to select the data column that you wish to include in the
replacement. The data columns of the current data category are available in the
drop-down list.
3. Enter the value that you wish to replace in the Find what field. You can enter an
exact value or use wildcard (*) strings.
4. Select the Replace button. The software will highlight the first item in the list of
displayed values that matches the entered value and change the value. If you
select Replace again, it will go to the next value that matches the value and
change it.
You can also select the Replace All button to change all the items that match the
entered value in one step.
5. Save the changes you have made by selecting the Save toolbar button (disk
icon). If you exit the Data Editor without saving your changes, you will be
prompted to save them. Select Yes to save the changes. Select No to cancel the
changes.
140
Project Management
There are two checkboxes that you can select to limit or expand the search and
replace functions. Select Match Case to limit the function to values that exactly
match the case of the entered value. Select Whole Words Only to limit the function to
find only entries that match the complete word. For example, if you search for “volt”
the software will not include “voltage” in the results.
141
Project Management
BOM Explorer
The BOM Explorer is a feature of the Project Manager that allows you to view and
edit the part numbers that are assigned to a project. You can see part numbers that
have been assigned to items in a drawing and assign part numbers to items that don’t
yet have them.
The BOM Explorer also allows you to assign part numbers to a project before
drawings are created. You can then generate a bill of materials to make a quote before
a project is designed or as a pick list when creating schematic or panel layout
drawings via the Design > Insert Symbol > Insert Symbol By Device ID function
(see page 219).
To access the BOM Explorer, open the Project Manager and select the BOM Explorer
tab at the bottom of the dialog.
In the left column you can select the project that you wish to access.
142
Project Management
In the center column (BOM Tree) you can select viewing options. Select the Device
radio button to show items with device IDs assigned. Select Wire to show wires (with
assigned wire numbers). Select Both to show both devices and wires. The BOM Tree
lists installations and locations in the project and the device IDs and part numbers that
are assigned within them.
Any existing device IDs are listed under each installation and location. You can click
on the box beside each installation and location name to show or hide the contents.
Device IDs are identified in the tree view by the letters “ID” to the left of each ID. If a
part number is assigned to the ID, it is listed just below the ID.
Part number information is displayed on the right side of the BOM Explorer. There is
a filter function that allows you to narrow the range of part numbers displayed.There
is a drop-down list for selecting the parts database field to which you wish the
filtering to apply. In the Like field enter the value by which you wish to filter. This
can include wildcard (*) entries such as *700* for any part numbers containing the
number 700. Select the Apply Filter button to list the part numbers that match the
filter. Select the Clear Filter button to remove the filter.
143
Project Management
BOM Explorer - Edit Parts Data in Existing Project
To edit parts data in the BOM Explorer, use the following procedure:
1. Select the desired project in the left column.
2. In the BOM Tree area, select the radio buttons for the items in the project you
wish to view: Device, Wire or Both.
3. In the BOM Tree area, select the installation and location containing the part
number information you wish to modify.
144
Project Management
4. Right click on the part number you wish to change. The popup menu contains
the following options:
Edit Quantity - Change the quantity of the part number assigned to this ID. The
Edit Part Number Quantity dialog will appear, allowing you to change the
quantity value.
Remove - Remove this part number from the ID.

5. If the device ID currently has no part assigned, you can assign one:
A. Right click on the ID.
B. Select Add Part Number from the popup menu.
C. Select the part number in the Select Part Number dialog and click on OK.
BOM Explorer - Assign Parts Data to New Project
You can assign parts data to a new project (one that does not yet contain any
drawings). This allows you to make a quote or a purchase order list for an upcoming
job. Later, you can use this parts list as a pick list when placing symbols using the
Design > Insert Symbol > Insert Symbol By Device ID function. You can also right
click on an existing symbol and select Device BOM Assign to replace the existing ID
with one created in the BOM Explorer.
To assign parts data in a new project:
1. Open the project manager and create a new project. See page 61.
2. Select the new project name in the Project Manager and select the BOM
Explorer tab at the bottom of the dialog.
145
Project Management
3. In the center column (BOM Tree), right click and select Add Installation from
the popup menu. The Add dialog will appear.
4. Enter the name of the new installation in the Add dialog and select OK. You can
change the name of this installation later, if necessary.
5. Right click on the name of the new installation and select Add Location from
the popup menu.
146
Project Management
6. Enter the name of the new location in the Add dialog and select OK. You can
change the name later, if necessary.
7. If you need additional installations or locations, create them in the same way.
8. If you decide you don’t need an installation or location that you created, right
click on the name and select Remove from the popup menu.
9. Assign part numbers to the locations you have created. Any part numbers that
are assigned to the project must be associated with a device ID. You can
manually create device IDs and then assign parts to them or you can allow the
software to assign IDs automatically as you add parts to the project.
147
Project Management
A. If you wish to have device IDs assigned automatically, simply drag the part
numbers from the right side of the dialog and drop them on top of the desired
location name. A “+” character will appear at the cursor when it is posi-
tioned over a location or ID to which you can assign a part number.
The software will create a device ID for the part number based on the device
tag mnemonic (defined during symbol creation for the schematic symbol
specified in the parts record) and a sequential number. The ID and part num-
ber will appear below the location name (you may have to click on the “+”
icon beside the ID to display the part number).
Note: The “ID” icon that appears beside the ID is bold if no symbol has been placed in
the project, and it is grey if a symbol has been placed. When you place one of
these “bold” IDs in the primary drawing mode, the ID will be renamed to
conform to the project ID format. These bold IDs are also referred to as
“temporary IDs.”
B. If you wish to manually create device IDs, right click on the desired location
and select Add Device ID from the popup menu. Enter the ID in the Add
dialog and select OK.
To assign a part number to a device ID, you can either drag a part number
from the right side of the dialog and drop it on top of the ID, or you can right
click on the ID and select Add Part Number from the popup menu. The
148
Project Management
Select Part Number dialog will appear from which you can select parts.
You can assign attributes to the device IDs in the BOM Explorer by
right-clicking on the ID and selecting Attribute from the pop-up menu. The
BOM Attribute dialog will appear:
When you elect the Add Attribute link, the Attribute List dialog will appear.
Here you can select one or more attributes followed by the OK button to add
these to the BOM Attribute dialog. Then you can enter the desired value in
the Value field. Select OK to finish assigning the attributes.
149
Project Management
BOM Explorer - Using the Parts List
Once you have created a parts list using the BOM Explorer, you can use it generate
reports such as a Bill of Materials or Purchase Order List.
In order to generate reports, you must make the project active, which requires that you
open a page. Therefore, before you can generate reports you must create at least one
page in the project. This page can be blank.
You can also use the parts list as a pick list when creating drawings. Once you have
created a drawing page, use the Design > Insert Symbol > Insert Symbol By Device
ID function to place items in the drawing. See page 219.
As you place items into drawings from the pick list, the ID for each item that is not
yet associated with a symbol will be renamed according to the default project ID
format. This occurs only if you are placing the items in the project’s primary drawing
mode.
You can also assign items in the parts list to existing symbols in a drawing using the
Device BOM Assign function (see page 224).
150
Page Management
4 Page Management
This section describes functions related to promis•e drawing pages. The first section
covers how pages are organized within the project. Other sections describe how to
display (open), create, delete and copy pages.
151
Page Management
Page Organization
As described in Section 3, drawing sets are used to organize pages within a project
into meaningful groups. You can arrange the drawing sets into any order you wish.
For example, you may want to have all schematic pages in one drawing set and all
panel layout pages in another set. In the Project Manager you can change the order of
the sets, which affects the order in which the software indexes the pages. This has an
effect on page navigation, cross referencing and print/plot order.
PROJECT
DRAWING SET 1 DRAWING SET 2
4 4
3 3
2 2
1 1
INST NAME
LOC NAME
PAGE 1 Each page has a page number
and can have a default installation and location
152
Page Management
Projects can be (optionally) subdivided into installations and locations. An

installation or location does not exist until a drawing page is created and assigned to
that installation and location. A page need not be assigned to an installation or
location, but it must be associated with an existing project.
PROJECT 1 PROJECT 2
INSTALLATION 1 INSTALLATION 2
(NO
INSTALLATION
OR LOCATION)
LOCATION LOCATION LOCATION
4 8 12 4
3 7 11 3
2 6 10 2
1 5 9 DRAWING 1
PAGES
Page numbering need not be continuous; there can be “gaps.”

Note: Two pages cannot have the same number unless they are assigned to different
drawing sets.
153
Page Management
Page Storage
When a promis•e drawing page is created and stored, graphical information is stored
in a DWG file (AutoCAD version) or DGN file (MicroStation version) while the
logical information is stored in the project database.
.DWG file (graphics)

stored as or
Drawing Page .DGN file (graphics)
Project database
(project logical data)
The DWG or DGN file contains the graphical information for the drawing: everything
that is seen when the drawing is plotted.
The logical information for all the drawings in all the projects is stored in the project
database which is an SQL/MSDE or Oracle database. This data includes device IDs,
wire coordinates, connection information, and much more, and is used by various
software functions. By having this information in the database, the software is able to
perform project-wide operations such as cross referencing and report generation
without having to open and analyze every DWG or DGN file.
When changes are made in the currently open page that affect another page in the
project, the software will place the change in the project database. The next time the
user opens the second drawing page, the DWG or DGN file is updated from the
information in the project database.
Within the DWG or DGN file, the software follows a layering standard that places
different types of information on separate layers.
DWG and DGN files are stored in the directory for the project to which they belong.
As each page is created, the software assigns a name to the DWG or DGN files
according to the naming format that was defined for the project. See page 86.
154
Page Management
Displaying Pages
Open Page
To open a drawing page:
1. Start promis•e and open the Project Manager (see page 49).
Select
Project
Select page
Page preview
2. Select the desired project from the browse window on the left side of the Project
Manager. The pages in the selected project are then listed on the right side of the
Project Manager.
When you select (highlight) a page name, a thumbnail preview of the page
appears in the lower left corner of the Project Manager.
3. To open a page, you can:
• Double click on the page name, or
• Right click on the page name and then select Open from the popup menu, or
• Select the page name and select Edit > Open
Pages that are currently open are marked with a pencil icon in the project
manager.
155
Page Management
Close Page
AutoCAD version - You can close a page by clicking on the close (“X”) button in the
window for the page, or you can right click on the page name in the Project Manager
and select Close from the popup menu.
MicroStation version - Pages are considered open until you close them by right
clicking on the page name in the Project Manager and selecting Close from the popup
menu.
Next Page, Previous Page
You can open the next page or the previous page in numerical order in the current
project by using the Design > Page Next or the Design > Page Previous functions (in
the promis•e drawing window).
There are also toolbar buttons for these functions.
156
Page Management
New Page
To create a new page:
1. Start promis•e and open the Project Manager (see page 49).
Select
Project
2. (Optional) In the browse window on the left side of the Project Manager, select
the project to which the new page will belong. If you don’t select a project here,
you can do so later in the New Page dialog.
3. To create the new page, you can:
• Select File > New > New Page, or
• Select the New toolbar button and then New Page from the menu that
appears.
157
Page Management
4. The New Page dialog will appear.
Enter the desired values and select OK to create the page.

Project - Use the drop-down list or the browse button to select the name of an
existing project to which the page will belong.
Drawing Set - Enter the name of a drawing set to which the page will belong.
See page 47 for an explanation of drawing sets. Use the drop-down list to select
an existing drawing set or enter the name of a new drawing set that will be
created when you create the page.
Note: If you wish to re-assign the page to a different drawing set later, use the Rename
Page function. See page 170.
Installation - Enter the name of an installation that will be assigned to this page.
See page 48 for an explanation of installations. Use the drop-down list to select
an existing installation or enter the name of a new installation that will be created
when you create the page.
Location - Enter the name of the location that will be assigned to this page. See
page 48 for an explanation of locations. Use the drop-down list to select an
existing location or enter the name of a new location that will be created when
you create the page.
Page Name - Enter the name of the page.
Note: Two pages cannot have the same number (name) unless they are assigned to
different drawing sets.
158
Page Management
Initial Mode - Select the drawing mode that the software will default to when
the page is opened. You can change the drawing mode later if necessary, i.e.,
you can have more than one type of drawing on a page. The available modes are
that are delivered with the software are:
Schematic Mode
Panel Layout Mode
Wiring Diagram Mode
Hydraulic Mode
Pneumatic Mode
Single Line Mode
Graphical Plan Mode
Title Block -This optional field specifies the title block macro to be used only on
the page being created. A title block named on the New Page dialog box will
override the title block specified in the Default Project Properties for the current
project (see page 105). A drop-down list and browse button allow you to select
from existing title block macros.
Page Format - This field selects the page size format. A drop-down list and
browse button allow you to select from existing page formats. Various ANSI and
IEC formats are provided with the software, with single or multiple columns.
There is also a wizard for creating custom page formats. When you select the
browse button, the Select Page Format dialog will appear. Select the desired
format and select OK to continue.
159
Page Management
Page Macro - This optional field allows a macro to be placed on the page
automatically. Unlike the Page Macro specified in the Default Project Properties
for the current project (see page 105), the Page Macro here only applies to the
page currently being created.
Scale Factor - This field specifies the drawing scale to be used for the page
being defined. Scales other than 1:1 are mainly used for panel layout drawings
so that symbols can be placed at full size.
Page Descriptions - These fields allow you to enter descriptive information
about the page that will appear in title blocks and on reports.
Set Page Online - This checkbox determines whether or not logical functions are
active on the page. When the Set Page Online checkbox is selected, the page is
online, meaning that automatic functions such as error checking and cross
referencing will be performed on the drawing. When the Set Page Online box is
not selected, the page is not online (it is “offline”). The Set Page Online
checkbox should be turned off only when no logically connected control devices
will be placed on the page, such as for general mechanical CAD work where no
error checking or cross referencing is required.
After you have entered all the values for the new page, select the OK button and the
newly created page will appear on screen.
160
Page Management
Save Page
To save a drawing page, select File > Save from the menu, or select the Save (disk)
toolbar button.
If you attempt to close promis•e without saving a page that you have changed, the
following prompt will appear:
Select Yes to save the changes. Select No to discard the changes. Select Cancel to
continue working on the page.
Note: The Undo function will only undo changes that have been made up to the last save.
Automatic Page Save
You can set the software to save the currently open page automatically at a regular
time interval. Use the following procedure:
AutoCAD Version
1. Select the Tools > Options function.
2. Select the Open and Save tab.
3. Select the Automatic save checkbox.
4. Enter a time interval value in the Minutes between saves field.
Drawings will be saved automatically after the entered number of minutes.
MicroStation Version
1. Select Workspace > Preferences. The Preferences dialog will open.
2. In the Preferences dialog select the Operation category.
3. Select the Automatically Save Design Changes checkbox.
4. Select the OK button to close the Preferences dialog.
Drawings will be saved automatically after two seconds of inactivity.
Note: The Undo function will only undo changes that have been made up to the last save
operation.
161
Page Management
Save As Page
Use the File > Save As function to save a promis•e drawing as a separate file under
another name for use outside of promis•e. The logical information for the file that is
created with this function will not be saved in the project database and therefore will
not work with the promis•e logical functions (error checking, cross referencing, etc.).
It will only be a graphical view of the drawing page.
Therefore, do not use the Save As function to create files that you wish to use later in
promis•e. Use the page copy function in the Project Manager to make copies of pages
for use inside promis•e (see page 166).
The AutoCAD version of promis•e allows you to save files as DWG, DXF, DWT or
DWS format files. The MicroStation version allows you to save files as DGN, DWG,
DXF or RDL format files.
You can also use the Export to DWG function for this purpose (see page 164). It is
limited to the DWG format, but allows you to export multiple pages in one step.
Warning: Use the Save As functions only for DWG/DGN files that will be used
outside of promis•e. The logical information for the DWG/DGN file that is created
with this function will not be saved and therefore will not work with the promis•e
logical functions if you attempt to use this new file later in promis•e.
1. To use this function, first display the promis•e drawing page that you wish to
save.
2. Then, select File > Save As.
162
Page Management
The Save Drawing As dialog box will appear.
AutoCAD
MicroStation
3. In the Save in field (AutoCAD) or Directories field (MicroStation), select the

path and folder in which you want to save the drawing.
4. The drawing’s current name is indicated in the File Name field (AutoCAD) or
Files field (MicroStation). Enter the new name under which you wish to save the
drawing in this field. Do not enter the filename extension; it will be added
automatically.
163
Page Management
5. In the Files of type field (AutoCAD) or Select Format to Save field

(MicroStation), select the file type that you want the file saved as, from the
drop-down list.
6. Select the Save button (AutoCAD) or OK button (MicroStation) to save the new
file.
Export Page to DWG

You can save a promis•e drawing as a DWG file for use outside of promis•e. The
logical information for the DWG file that is created with this function will not be
saved in the project database and therefore will not work with the promis•e logical
functions (error checking, cross referencing, etc.). It will only be a graphical view of
the drawing page. This exported file could be used, for example, to show a drawing to
someone who is not directly working on the project.
Therefore, do not use the Export to DWG function to create files that you wish to use
later in promis•e. Use the Copy Page function to make copies of pages for use inside
promis•e (see page 166).
The Export to DWG function is similar to the page Save As function (see page 162)
except that it is limited to the DWG format. The Export to DWG function also allows
you to export multiple pages in one step.
Warning: Use the Export to DWG function only for DWG files that will be used
outside of promis•e. The logical information for the DWG file that is created with
this function will not be saved and therefore will not work with the promis•e
logical functions if you attempt to use this new file later in promis•e.
To export a page to DWG:

2. Select (highlight) the name of the project containing the page you wish to export.
The pages in the selected project will be listed.
3. Select (highlight) the name of the pages that you wish to export.
4. Select File > Export to DWG from the Project Manager menu.
5. The DExportToDWG dialog will appear.
164
Page Management
6. Use the browse button to select the folder where you wish the exported
drawing(s) to be stored.
7. In the DWG Version field, select the DWG format that you wish to use.
8. Select OK. The exported DWG file(s) will be created in the selected folder.
165
Page Management
Copy Page
To copy a drawing page:

2. Select (highlight) the name of the project containing the page you wish to copy.
The pages in the selected project will be listed.
3. Select (highlight) the name of the pages that you wish to copy.
4. Select Edit > Copy from the Project Manager menu or right click on the page
name and select Copy from the popup menu.
5. The Copy Page(s) dialog will appear.
The Source Page(s) field displays the name of the page or pages to be copied.
In the Copy to area of the dialog, you can make the following entries.
Project - The current project name is listed. If desired you can use the
browse button to select a different project for the copied pages to reside in.
Drawing Set - You can select Keep Existing, enter a new drawing set name,
or select one from the drop-down list.
Installation - You can select Keep Existing, enter a new installation name,
or select one from the drop-down list.
Location - You can select Keep Existing, enter a new location name, or
166
Page Management
select one from the drop-down list.

Page Mode - You can select Keep Existing or select a different one from the
drop-down list.
Description - If you wish to change the page description, select the Descrip-
tion button and make the desired changes in the Page Description dialog.
In the Page Options area of the dialog, you can make the following settings:
Maintain Device ID - This checkbox determines whether or not device IDs
on the copied pages will be changed automatically to match the new page
number. When the checkbox is selected, the device IDs will be left as they
are. When the checkbox is not selected, device IDs on the copied page will
reflect the new page/line number (assuming this is part of the device tag for-
mat you are using). When the checkbox is selected, you can use the
drop-down list beside this field to select:
Complete - The full device ID including installation and location will be
maintained on the new page.
Tag Only - Only the device tag will be maintained on the new page, the
installation and location portion of the device ID will be changed to match
the new page.
Maintain Terminal Numbers - This checkbox determines whether or not
terminals in the copied page will be renumbered automatically to avoid
duplication. If the checkbox is selected, you will be prompted to enter a new
ID for each terminal that is duplicated within the same installation. De-select
the checkbox to automatically renumber terminals.
Set Pages Online - This checkbox determines whether the copied pages will
be online or offline. Select the checkbox to make the copied pages online
pages. If the pages are offline no error checking or cross referencing will be
performed.
Change Field Settings - This checkbox determines whether or not field set-
tings of the existing page will be duplicated into the copied page. If the
checkbox is selected, you will be prompted with a dialog box to make modi-
fications to the field settings of the copied page. If the checkbox is not
selected, existing field settings will be used on the copied page.
In the Wire Number Options area of the dialog, you can make the following
settings:
Maintain Wire Number - This checkbox determines whether or not wire
numbers will be copied. If you do not select the Maintain Wire Number
checkbox, wire numbers will not be copied. If you do select the Maintain
Wire Number checkbox, wire numbers will be copied under the following
rules:
A. If the copied wire numbers do not exist in the destination project/installation,
167
Page Management
the wire numbers will be maintained without changes.

B. If copied wire numbers are connected to a wire link connecting to an existing
wire number, the existing wire number will be used on the copied portion.
C. If copied wire numbers duplicate existing wire numbers in the destination
project, the system will add a question mark (?) to any copied wire number
that duplicates an existing wire number. For example, if wire number 100 is
copied to a project that already has a wire number 100, the copied wire num-
ber will be changed to 100?. (This can be avoided by adding a prefix or suf-
fix to the copied numbers. See the following paragraph.)
The Add Prefix and Add Suffix fields allow you to specify a prefix or suffix
that will be added to all copied wire numbers. The added prefix and/or suffix
will make the copied wire numbers unique, thus avoiding duplicate numbers
(unless the prefix or suffix is already used in the destination project.)
Maintain Wire Link IDs - When this checkbox is selected the device ID of
signal cross references will be the same on the copied pages as on the origi-
nal. If the checkbox is unchecked, the next available number will be
assigned to signal IDs on the copied pages.
6. Once the settings are made, select the OK button to create the copied pages.
If you try to copy a page that is currently open with unsaved changes, the software
will prompt you to save it first.
168
Page Management
Modify Page
The Modify Page function allows you to change the title block and page format used
on an existing drawing page and also change the page descriptions and turn the
Online function off and on.
To modify a drawing page:

2. Select (highlight) the page you wish to modify.
3. Select Edit > Modify from the Project Manager menu or right click on the page
name and select Modify from the popup menu.
The Modify Page dialog box will appear. This dialog box is similar to the New
Page dialog box (see page 157) except that only the Initial Mode, Title Block,
Page Format, Set Page Online (where applicable), Scale Factor and Page
Descriptions fields are accessible for modification.
If you wish to update the device IDs and wire numbers on the page to reflect the
new page format (for example, if the line numbers change), select the Rename
existing Device IDs checkbox. If you do not select this checkbox, the device IDs
and wire numbers will remain unchanged.
4. After making the desired entries and settings, select the OK button to modify the
page.
169
Page Management
Rename Page
To copy a drawing page:

2. Select (highlight) the name of the project containing the page you wish to
rename. The pages in the selected project will be listed.
3. Select (highlight) the name of the page that you wish to rename.
4. Select Edit > Rename from the Project Manager menu or right click on the page
name and select Rename from the popup menu.
5. The Rename Page dialog will appear.
6. In the appropriate fields, enter the drawing set, installation, location and page
number that the renamed page is to have.
7. If you wish to update the device IDs and wire numbers on the page to reflect the
new page name, select the Rename existing Device IDs checkbox. If you do not
select this checkbox, the device IDs and wire numbers will remain unchanged.
8. Select OK to rename the page.
170
Page Management
Move Page
The page move function allows you to move drawing pages within an installation.
You may wish to move pages to rearrange the page order or to make room for
inserting new pages. Or, you may wish to move pages to close gaps in the page order.
Note: If you wish to move a page to another installation, or to another project, use the Copy
Page function in the Project Manager and then delete the original page.
To move a page:
1. Go to the Project Manager and select the desired project.

2. Select one or more pages to move, then right click on the page(s) and select
Move from the popup menu that appears.
The Move Page(s) dialog box will appear.
3. Use the Drawing Set, Installation and Location fields to determine where the
moved page(s) will reside in the project. You can also change the Page Mode of
the moved pages.
4. In the Page Name field, enter the page number that the moved page is to have. If
you are moving more than one page, this will be the number of the first (lowest
numbered) page that you are moving.
171
Page Management
5. In the Page Options area, the following settings are available:

Maintain Device ID - This checkbox determines whether or not device IDs on
the moved pages will be changed automatically to match the new page number.
When the checkbox is selected, the device IDs will be left as they are. When the
checkbox is not selected, device IDs on the moved page will reflect the new
page/line number (assuming this is part of the device tag format you are using).
When the checkbox is selected, you can use the drop-down list beside this field
to select:
Complete - The full device ID including installation and location will be
maintained on the new page.
Tag Only - Only the device tag will be maintained on the new page, the
installation and location portion of the device ID will be changed to match the
new page.
Maintain Terminal Numbers - This checkbox determines whether or not
terminals in the moved page will be renumbered automatically to avoid
duplication. If the checkbox is selected, you will be prompted to enter a new ID
for each terminal that is duplicated within the same installation. De-select the
checkbox to automatically renumber terminals.
Set Pages Online - This checkbox determines whether the moved pages will
be online or offline. Select the checkbox to make the copied pages online
pages. If the pages are offline no error checking or cross referencing will be
performed.
Change Field Settings - This checkbox determines whether or not field set-
tings of the existing page will be duplicated into the moved page. If the
checkbox is selected, you will be prompted with a dialog box to make modi-
fications to the field settings of the moved page. If the checkbox is not
selected, existing field settings will be used on the moved page.
6. In the Wire Number Options area of the dialog, you can make the following
settings:
Maintain Wire Number - This checkbox determines whether or not wire
numbers will remain on the moved page. If you do not select the Maintain
Wire Number checkbox, wire numbers will be deleted. If you do select the
Maintain Wire Number checkbox, wire numbers will not be changed.
The Add Prefix and Add Suffix fields allow you to specify a prefix or suffix
that will be added to all wire numbers on the moved page.
172
Page Management
Maintain Wire Link IDs - When this checkbox is selected the device ID of
wire links will be the same on the moved pages as on the original. If the
checkbox is unchecked, the next available number will be assigned to wire
link IDs on the copied pages.
7. Once the settings are made, select the OK button to move the pages.
Rules for Page Move:

A page cannot be moved into a position already occupied by another page. This will
cause a “Page already exists” error message to appear. A page cannot be moved
backward to a page number of less than zero. If this is attempted, a dialog with the
message “Page cannot be moved” will appear.
The following illustration shows an installation containing five drawing pages,
numbered 1, 2, 4, 5, and 6. There is no page 3. Pages 1 and 2 could be moved forward
one position (+1) in which case they would become pages 2 and 3, respectively. They
could not be moved forward two positions (+2) because this would conflict with the
existing page 4. However, they could be moved ahead six positions (+6) where they
would become pages 7 and 8.
Pages
6 Move Pages 1 and 2:

5
+ 1 Allowed
4
+ 2 Not Allowed
2
+ 6 Allowed
1 - 1 Allowed
- 2 Not Allowed
(+ = forward, - = backward)
Pages 1 and 2 could also be moved backward one position (-1) where they would
become pages 0 and 1. They could not be moved back any further than this.
173
Page Management
Clear Page
The Clear Page function erases all drawing elements from the currently active
drawing page. The page becomes blank as if it had just been created. This function
therefore should be used with caution.
Warning: This function deletes all current page data completely.
To erase everything from the current drawing page:
1. Go to the Project Manager and select the desired project.

2. Right click on the page you wish to clear and select Clear from the popup menu
that appears.
3. The software will display a dialog box asking you to confirm the page clear.
Select the OK button to proceed. Select the Cancel button to cancel the clear
operation.
174
Page Management
Refresh Page
The Manage > Refresh Page function will update the currently open page with any
pending changes in the project database. This typically applies to a multi-user
environment where another user may have edited a page and saved it while you have
the same page open. This creates a pending change. The Refresh Page function will
retrieve this change so that it appears on your display.
Update Page
Ordinarily, changes made to a drawing page are recorded in the project database so
that the software can perform cross referencing, keep track of device IDs and wire
numbers, etc.
However, if the information on the page becomes out-of-sync with the project
database (for example if someone edits the DWG or DGN file outside of promis•e),
you will need to update the project database with the new information.
To re-sync the information on the currently open page with the project database,
select the Manage > Update Page function.
Validate Page
Use the Manage > Validate Page function to compare the information on the
currently active page with the information in the project database. If the software
finds any mismatches it will display a dialog box.
Note: Not all possible mismatches are currently validated, but if you should receive an error
it would be a good idea to run either the "Update Page" or "Rebuild Project
Database" commands in the Manage menu to attempt to correct the problem.
175
Page Management
Viewing Pages
The View menu contains a number of functions that control the user’s view of
drawing pages. Among the relevant functions for promis•e are:
Redraw – Redraws the current drawing, removing marker blips and display artifacts
(stray pixels) left by editing commands.
Regen – Regenerates the entire drawing and recomputes the screen coordinates for all
objects.
Regen All – Regenerates the entire drawing and recomputes the screen coordinates
for all objects in all viewports. It also re-indexes the drawing database for optimum
display and object selection performance.
Zoom – There are a number of zoom functions:
Real Time Zoom – This option is used for interactive zooming. With this Zoom
function, you can zoom in or out of the drawing by holding down the left button
of the pointing device and moving the cursor vertically up or down. Press <Esc>
to exit this mode.
Zoom Previous – Displays the previous zoom view of the drawing.
Zoom Window – Allows the user to enlarge (zoom) the view of a selected area
of the drawing. When selected, the software prompts you to select the first
corner followed by the opposite corner. This allows you to define a rectangular
area on the drawing which will be enlarged to fill the screen.
Zoom Dynamic – Allows the user to zoom out as well as in. Selecting the
function produces a reduced view of the entire drawing with a square area
window. Position the area window and click the left button. The window can
now be re-sized as desired by moving the mouse. Click the right button to zoom
to the selected area.
Zoom Scale – Allows you to zoom at a specified scale factor. When you select
this function you will be prompted on the command line to enter a scale factor.
Entering a value followed by “x” specifies a scale relative to the current view
(“2x” magnifies objects to twice their current size). Entering a value followed by
“xp” specifies a scale relative to paper space units (the first view is considered
1xp).
176
Page Management
Zoom Center – Zooms to display a window defined by a center point and a

magnification factor or height. When you select the function you will be
prompted to specify a center point and then enter a height or magnification
factor.
Zoom In – Zooms in to the drawing in 2X increments.
Zoom Out – Zooms out from the drawing in 0.5X increments.
Zoom All – Zooms to the smallest view that includes everything in the drawing.
Zoom Extents – Zooms to display the drawing extents.
If your mouse has a scroll wheel, turning the wheel will zoom in or out to the
point where the cursor is pointing. Pushing on the scroll wheel button twice will
zoom to the extents of the drawing.
Pan – The following Pan functions are available:
Real Time – This option is used for interactive panning. You can pan the
drawing image to a new location by holding down the left button of the pointing
device and moving the cursor. Press <Esc> to exit this mode.
Point – Moves the view of the drawing by the specified distance.
Left – Moves the drawing to the left.
Right – Moves the drawing to the right.
Up – Moves the drawing up.
Down – Moves the drawing down.
When you use the Real Time option of Zoom or Pan, you can right-click the pointing
device and use the cursor menu to move quickly between zooming and panning.
If your mouse has a scroll wheel, pressing and holding the wheel will allow you to
pan around the drawing.
Aerial View – Aerial View is a navigation tool that displays a view of the drawing in
a separate window so that you can quickly move to that area. If you keep the Aerial
View window open as you work, you can zoom and pan without selecting a
command. In the Mode menu you can choose Pan or Zoom. Pan mode allows you to
move a rectangle to the part of the drawing you wish to view. Zoom mode allows you
to define a window to move and resize the drawing at the same time.
Clean Screen - Hides borders and toolbars, leaving more room for the drawing area.
In MicroStation and PowerDraft versions of the software there is a View toolbar with
zoom functions including Zoom In, Zoom Out, Fit View and Pan View.
177
Page Management
Navigate Function
The Navigate function allows you to go from one place where a particular ID is used
to another place in the project where the same ID occurs. You can move quickly from
one drawing page to another by clicking on a device ID, a cross reference or a wire
link. You can also click on a part number and see detailed information for that part.
To activate the Navigate function, select Review/Revise > Navigate.
On the command line, you will be prompted to “Select symbol or cross reference
text.”
Click on the symbol, the device tag or any cross reference text that appears near the
symbol. If you select the cross reference at a parent symbol you will jump to a view of
the selected child symbol, wherever it exists, on the same or a different page.
Similarly, if you select the cross reference at the child symbol you will jump to a view
of the parent symbol. The view will zoom in according to the percentage setting made
in the View Options dialog (see page 427).
click on device tag
click on cross reference
click on wire link
When you click on a wire link, the view will shift to the cross-referenced wire link.
There is also a third method for activating the navigate function: right click on the
desired address and select Navigate from the popup menu. If the selected address is
used on more than one type of page, there will be a submenu to select the desired page
type.
178
Page Management
If the device tag is used at two or more other places (in the selected drawing type), a
dialog will appear listing the other places. Select the desired instance to navigate to
and then the OK button.
179
Page Management
Search Tool
The search tool allows you to locate items within the project by one or more
parameters. You can arrange the dialog to filter and sort the items in your project to
reduce the amount of scrolling you must do to locate a given item.
To activate the search tool, select Review/Revise > Search. The Search dialog will
appear, listing all the items in your project having a device ID.
Suppose you wish to see all the relays (symbol name CR) in location EN1. You can
start by dragging the Location column heading into the top of the dialog where it says,
“Drag a column header here.” This produces a list of locations in the project.
180
Page Management
At this point if you were to click on the “+” character next to location EN1, you
would see a list of all the items in that location.
However, you only wish to see the items using the CR symbol, so to further sort the
list you can drag the Symbol column heading into the upper area. This produces a list
within EN1 that is sorted by symbol.
181
Page Management
If you click on the “+” character beside the CR symbol name, you will see the list of
items using this symbol.
If you double-click on one of the items you will navigate to where that item is used.
Using this method, you can drag multiple column headings to create a “tree” that sorts
your project in any way that you wish.
To clear the current search criteria, right click in the upper part of the dialog and select
Clear Grouping from the pop-up menu.
There is a Wire Number tab in the Search tool that allows you to do similar sorting of
wire numbers.
182
Page Management
Page Format Designer

The Page Format Designer function allows you to create new drawing page formats
or modify existing formats. You can also extract page formats from project files that
you receive from someone else.
To use the Page Format Designer:
1. Select Configure > Page Format Designer. The Page Format Designer dialog
will appear.
Auto Hide button
Note: The Page Format Designer dialog consists of step buttons on the left and a
settings area on the right. There is an Auto Hide button in the lower left corner of
the dialog that sets whether or not the settings area will be hidden if you move
the cursor back to the drawing area (so it is not in the way). If auto hide is turned
on, you can click on the desired step button to display the setting area again.
You have three options in this step:
• Create a new page format from scratch - select the New Page Format
radio button.
• Edit a page format that already exists - select the Modify Existing Page
Format radio button.
183
Page Management
• Extract a page format from a project - select the Extract Page Format
From Project button.
If you select the Extract Page Format From Project button, the Extract
Page Format dialog will appear.
A. Select the desired project in the Project field. The page formats in that
project will then be listed.
B. Select the page format you wish to extract. You can give the format a differ-
ent name in the Save as field, if desired.
C. Select OK to extract the page format and save it in your page format folder.
Select the Next button to continue to the next step of the page format designer.
184
Page Management
2. In this step you set the dimensions and orientation of the page format.
A. In the Page Size area of the dialog, define the page size. You can either select
the Predefined radio button and select one of the existing ANSI or IEC page
sizes or you can select the Custom radio button, select metric or inch units
and enter values in the Width and Height fields.
B. In the Page Layout area of the dialog, select either the Portrait or Land-
scape radio buttons to set the orientation of the page.
C. In the Select Title Block field, use the browse button to select one of the
existing title block macros to use as a reference. This title block appears on
the screen while you are creating the page format but is not stored with it
(you can select a different title block when using the format to create draw-
ing pages).
D. Select one of the Line Number Orientation radio buttons to set whether line
numbers will appear going down the page (Vertical) or across the page (Hor-
izontal). The Zone Number Orientation setting will be automatically set to
the opposite of the line number orientation.
Select the Next button to continue to the next step.
185
Page Management
3. In this step you can define the line number regions. A line number region is the
area of a page assigned to an individual line number. (At this point a
representation of the page format will appear in the drawing area.)
01
02
Line number regions
03
04
05
06
Line number text position
186
Page Management
The Measuring Tools area of the dialog is a utility that helps you to calculate the
region size you will enter in the lower part of the dialog. To use this function:
A. First, select the Measure Distance button. You will be taken to the drawing
area where you can click on a first point and a second point to define where
the first and last line numbers will appear. The distance between the two
points that you selected will be entered automatically in the field beside the
Measure Distance button.
B. Then, enter a value in either the # of Regions field or the Region Size field.
For example, if you wish the line numbers to be 0.5 inches apart, enter 0.5 in
the Region Size field.
C. Select the Calculate button. The software will calculate and enter an appro-
priate value in either the # of Regions field or the Region Size field, which-
ever one was previously empty.
Note: The values you calculate in the Measuring Tools area are not used automatically
- they are only intended to help you determine what settings to use when drawing
the region.
In Line Numbers area of the dialog, you make the actual settings that will be
used in your page format.
If you wish the page number to appear on a separate line, select the Page and
Line Number on Two Lines checkbox. (To determine whether or not a page
number is included with the line number, use the Include Page Number as a
Line Number Prefix checkbox in the Default Page Properties dialog. See page
71).
In the Enter (First) Line Number field, enter a value for the line number of the
region you are drawing. If you are using the array function (see below) enter the
first line number.
Use the Text Settings button to make text settings for the line numbers. The Edit
Text Format dialog will appear. This dialog is similar to the Edit Text Style dialog
(see page 99). One important difference is the Text Align field which allows you
to set in which direction the data will be placed from the variable’s insertion
point. Select OK when the desired settings are made.
Use the Region Size part of the dialog to draw each line number region:
A. Select your drawing method: you can either define an area on the screen
(select the Specify on Screen checkbox) or enter X and Y values in the
appropriate fields to set the size of the region.
B. Select the Draw Line Number Region button. You will be taken to the draw-
ing area where you will either define a box for the region or place the box
that was defined by the X and Y values.
187
Page Management
C. After drawing or placing the region you will be prompted on the command
line to “pick the line number text position.” Click on the desired position for
the line number. The line number must be placed inside the boundary of the
region.
D. To return to the Page Format Designer after you draw a region you can press
the <Esc> or <Enter> keys or click the right mouse button. Line number
regions appear in the drawing area as green boxes.
Note: While drawing the regions, you will probably need to use a smaller grid so that
the region borders can fall between your default drawing grid spacing.
01
02
Default drawing grid spacing
03
Region border
To delete a region you have placed, click on the region so that it has a dotted
border and then press the <Delete> key.
You can copy regions that you have placed using the standard copy function.
You will have to edit the number text of the copy so that it is different from the
original.
If you wish to draw a series of regions in one step:
A. Select the Array Region checkbox.
B. Enter a value for the first line number in the Enter (First) Line Number
field.
C. Select the Draw Line Number Region button.
D. Draw or place the first region and select the text position for that region.
E. You will then be prompted to “pick the last position of the array region.”
Click at the point where you wish the last region to end. The software will
draw as many regions as it can fit between the first region and the selected
point.
188
Page Management
4. In this step you can define zone regions. A zone region is the area of a page
assigned to an individual zone.
Zone number text position
A B C D E F
Zone regions
The Measuring Tools area of the dialog is a utility that helps you to calculate the
region size you will enter in the lower part of the dialog. To use this function:
A. First, select the Measure Distance button. You will be taken to the drawing
189
Page Management
area where you can click on a first point and a second point to define area of
the drawing that will be occupied by zones. The distance between the two
points that you selected will be entered automatically in the field beside the
Measure Distance button.
B. Then, enter a value in either the # of Regions field or the Region Size field.
C. Select the Calculate button. The software will calculate and enter an appro-
priate value in either the # of Regions field or the Region Size field, which-
ever one was previously empty.
Note: The values you calculate in the Measuring Tools area are not used automatically
- they are only intended to help you determine what settings to use when drawing
the region.
In Zone Numbers area of the dialog, you make the actual settings that will be
used in your page format.
In the Enter (First) Zone Number field, enter a number for the zone that you are
drawing. If you are using the array function (see below) enter the first zone
number.
Use the Text Settings button to make text settings for the zone numbers. The Edit
Text Format dialog will appear. This dialog is similar to the Edit Text Style dialog
(see page 99). One important difference is the Text Align field which allows you
to set in which direction the data will be placed from the variable’s insertion
point. Select OK when the desired settings are made.
Use the Region Size part of the dialog to draw each zone region:
A. Select your drawing method: you can either define an area on the screen
(select the Specify on Screen checkbox) or enter X and Y values in the
appropriate fields to set the size of the region.
B. Select the Draw Zone Region button. You will be taken to the drawing area
where you will either define a box for the region or place the box that was
defined by the X and Y values.
C. After drawing or placing the region you will be prompted on the command
line to “pick the text position.” Click on the desired position for the zone
number. The zone number must be placed inside the boundary of the region.
D. To return to the Page Format Designer after you draw a region you can press
the <Esc> or <Enter> keys or click the right mouse button. Zone regions
appear in the drawing area as yellow boxes.
To delete a region you have placed, click on the region so that it has a dotted
border and then press the <Delete> key.
190
Page Management
You can copy regions that you have placed using the standard copy function.
You will have to edit the number text of the copy so that it is different from the
original.
Note: While drawing the regions, you may need to use a smaller grid so that the region
borders can fall between your default drawing grid spacing.
If you wish to draw a series of regions in one step:
A. Select the Array Region checkbox.
B. Enter a value (number) for the first zone in the Enter (First) Zone Number
field.
C. Select the Draw Zone Region button.
D. Draw or place the first region and select the text position for that region.
E. You will then be prompted to “pick the last position of the array region.”
Click at the point where you wish the last region to end. The software will
draw as many regions as it can fit between the first region and the selected
point.
5. In this step you let the software check your format for possible problems.
191
Page Management
Select the Validate button. If no problems are encountered, the following

message will be displayed.
If errors are encountered, you can click on the error and the software will
navigate to and display the problem area. The software checks for the following
conditions:
• Overlapping line number regions. The software cannot function properly
if this condition exists.
• Overlapping zone number regions. The software cannot function properly
if this condition exists.
• Gaps between line number regions. (The software may not properly
calculate the correct line number of a device placed in such a gap.)
• Gaps between zone regions. (The software may not properly calculate the
correct zone number of a device placed in such a gap.)
• Line number region without a line number text. Each line number region
must have at least one line number text within its boundary. The software
cannot function properly if this condition exists. (There can be more than
one line number text within a region but these texts must have the same
value.)
• Zone number region without a zone number text. Every zone region must
have at least one zone number text within its boundary. The software
cannot function properly if this condition exists. (There can be more than
one zone number text within a region but these texts must have the same
value.)
• Line numbers and zone numbers outside of a region. The software cannot
function properly if this condition exists. Each line or zone number must
exist within the boundaries of a region.
• Duplicated line or zone numbers in different regions. (This may or may
not be a problem since you may intend to do this in certain page formats.)
192
Page Management
• Staggered line number regions - a line number region that spans across
two other line number regions. The software cannot function properly if
this condition exists.
01
02 03
• Staggered zone regions - a zone region that spans across two other zone
regions. The software cannot function properly if this condition exists.
Note: You can still proceed to the next step and save the format without correcting
these conditions, but some of the conditions may prevent the format from
working correctly or cause an error message when you attempt to use it.
6. In this step you save the completed page format.
Enter a name for the format in the Format Name field.

Enter a description for the format in the Description field.
Select the Finish button to save the format in your promis•e PageFormat folder.
193
Page Management
194
Using Drawing Elements
5 Using Drawing Elements

This section covers using various drawing elements (wires, symbols, macros, texts,
etc.) to make a drawing. Included are sections on the various types of elements as well
as sections on placing, deleting, copying, and moving the schematic elements.
See Section 6 for information on how to create custom drawing elements.
Overview
Before you can begin to create a schematic drawing, you must first:
1. Create a project. See page 61.

2. Create a drawing page within the project. See page 157.
3. Open the drawing page. See page 155.
Once you open a page, you create the drawing in the drawing area.
Toolbars
Drawing area
195
Most of the drawing functions can be found in the Design function group (for
inserting symbols, macros and fields) and the Wiring sub-group (for placing wires
and wire numbers). See page 29 for descriptions of the menus.
Drawing Modes
A drawing mode is a state that the software is in that enables the user to create a
particular type of drawing such as a schematic or a panel layout. The drawing mode
will determine both the appearance and the behavior of the software. By changing the
drawing mode as you work on a drawing it is possible to have more than one type of
drawing on the same page.
Schematic Drawing - A schematic drawing is a logical diagram that shows how
individual devices are connected together.
Panel Layout Drawing - A panel layout drawing is a physical layout of the actual
devices. This drawing is used to show what the devices really look like and where
they will actually be mounted. This drawing is typically drawn to scale.
Wiring Diagram - A wiring diagram is a drawing that shows each device and
identifies all the wire connections that are necessary to properly wire the devices.
Hydraulic Drawing - A hydraulic drawing is used to show electrical and mechanical
hydraulic devices and how they are connected together with pipes, etc.
Pneumatic Drawing - A pneumatic drawing is used to show electrical and
mechanical pneumatic devices and how they are connected together with tubes, etc.
Single Line Drawing - A single line drawing is similar to a schematic in that it shows
how individual devices are logically connected together, however, it does not show
each and every individual wire connection. Instead of showing each conductor of a
cable and what each conductor is connected to, you simply draw one line between the
two devices, which represents all the conductors.
Graphical Plan - A graphical representation of a terminal strip showing connections.
196
You select the current drawing mode from the drop-down list in the lower right corner
of the drawing window (AutoCAD version) or in the Page Management toolbar
(MicroStation version).
MicroStation version
Select
drawing mode
AutoCAD version
You can designate a mode as “primary” which means an ID assigned in that mode will
replace a different ID assigned to the same device in another mode. The primary
mode is defined in the project options Drawing Standards dialog (see page 86).
You can use the Mode Manager to edit the characteristics of existing modes and
create new modes. See page 299.
Lines vs. Wires

promis•e schematic drawings can have two types of lines: wires and drawing lines.
Wires - Wires are lines that have logical properties. (Wires are sometimes referred to
as “logical lines.”) Wires must be used to connect the symbols in schematic
drawings. Wires will break automatically at symbol connection points. Wires allow
the software to recognize the connections between symbols and perform other
functions such as automatic wire numbering.
Drawing Lines - Drawing lines are simple graphic lines with no logical properties.
They should only be used for borders or for drawing the graphical portion when you
create a new symbol. They should not be used to represent wires.
To create drawing lines: (AutoCAD version) Use the line drawing functions such as
those in the Draw menu or the Draw toolbar. (MicroStation version) Use the
functions in the Tools > Main > Linear Elements menu.
To create wires, use the functions in the Design > Wiring menu.
197
Wires
Use the Design > Wiring menu function to draw wires, pipes or other elements that
connect the symbols on a drawing. Wires are necessary for promis•e to recognize the
from/to connections between the symbols. When wires are drawn over symbols (or
when symbols are placed on a wire), the line is broken automatically at the symbol
connection points. When two wires are connected, the connection points are drawn
automatically.
Important: You must draw wires using the Wire functions in order for the software to recognize
connections and perform other automatic functions. Drawing lines will not work for
this purpose.
Design > Wiring >Wire (Continuous)
Wire (Center)
Wire (Dashed)
3 Phase Wire
Multiwire
Polywire
Multi-polywire
Draw Ladder
Wire 90 Degree Up
Wire 90 Degree Down
198
The following wire drawing functions are available:

The Wire (Continuous) function is used when you wish to create single wire
segments or two or more connected wire segments.
The Wire (Center) and Wire (Dashed) functions create dash-dot and dashed wires,
respectively.
The 3 Phase Wire function allows automatic drawing of three parallel wires.
With the 90 Degree Down and 90 Degree Up functions, you can connect two points
with wire segments at a 90 degree angle in one step. The angle is either above or
below the vertical wire.
The Multiwire function allows multiple parallel wires to be drawn in a single step.
Multiwires can have various combinations of solid, dashed and dotted lines in various
colors. These are called multiline styles. You can select and customize multiline styles
using the Format > Multiline Style function.
Polywires can overlap without joining together the way that standard wires do. This
is useful when you have draw multiple wires in a tight space on the drawing. You
cannot place symbols on an existing polywire (only at the ends). You cannot connect
a regular wire to a polywire.
Polywires
199
Multi-polywires are multiple polywires that are drawn in a single operation by

defining offset values after the first polywire is defined. To draw a multi-polywire:
1. Select Design > Wiring > Multi-polywire.

2. Following the prompts on the command line to “Select next point,” define a
polywire on the drawing. This will include the top line segments on both sides of
the polywire. When you have completed this part of the polywire press <Enter>
or click the right mouse button.
3. You will be prompted define the “Offset to first line segment.” Click on a point
below the top line segment on the left side to define the spacing between line
segments on the left side.
4. You will be prompted define the “Offset to last line segment.” Click on a point
below the top line segment on the right side to define the spacing between line
segments on the right side. In other words, you can have different line spacing on
the left and right sides of the multi-polywire.
200
5. You will be prompted to “Mark position of last line.” On the left side, click on a
point just below where you want the last line segment to begin. The software will
draw as many line segments on the left as it can, based on the spacing and the
last line position you selected. It will draw an equal number of line segments on
the right.
1. Beginning of
first polywire
3. Offset to first
line segment
5. Mark position
of last line
2. End of
first polywire
4. Offset to last
line segment
To Draw a Single Wire:
Select the Design > Wiring > (Wire) Continuous function.
1. Locate the starting point of the wire by clicking the left mouse button.
2. Locate the end point by clicking the left mouse button.
201
3. Click the right mouse button to complete the wire.
Click On Start And End Points

117
PB118.1
PB118 CR118
118
119 Symbol Connection Points

(Wire Broken Automatically)
Connection Points
(Drawn Automatically)
ANSI-IEEE Single Wires
Click On Start Point
21
13
-S5
-K1
22
/.6
14
21 21
-S4 -S6
22 22
3
-H4 -K1
4
13 14
Click On End Point /.4
21 22
IEC Single Wires
Adjusting Wire Length – You can extend an existing parallel wire by drawing another
wire and connecting it to the first. The system will treat the two wires as a single wire.
You can also adjust wire length by stretching the wire’s endpoint. (In the AutoCAD
version use the Modify > Stretch function. In the MicroStation version, select the
wire and drag the handle on its endpoint.)
Note: If a wire is drawn over one or more symbols, the wire will automatically break
between symbols.
202
Wire/Line Coordinates Display – While wires and lines are being drawn, x-y
coordinates of the line endpoint are displayed on the status line below the drawing
area.
Wire Line Style - In addition to the Wire (Continuous) function that produces a solid
line, the Wiring menu and toolbar also include the Wire (Center) and Wire (Dashed)
functions that produce a long/short dash pattern and an even dash pattern,
respectively. If you wish to change the line style of an existing wire, right-click on the
wire and select Line Settings from the popup menu. The dialog that appears has a
Line Style field for selecting a different style.
To Draw Continuous Wires or Lines:
The (Wire) Continuous function allows you to draw multiple, connected wire
segments.
Select the Design > Wiring > Wire (Continuous) function.
1. Locate starting point of the first wire by clicking the left mouse button.
2. Click on end point of first wire with the left mouse button.
3. Create second and all subsequent lines by clicking on the destination point of
each wire segment with the left mouse button.
4. Complete the last segment by clicking the right mouse button (or pressing the
<Enter> key).
Step 1 Step 2
First Segment
Step 3
Step 4
203
To Draw 3-Phase Wires:
Use the 3 Phase wire function to automatically draw 3 parallel wires spaced one grid
unit apart. 3-phase wires are used for power circuit diagrams.
Select the Design > Wiring > 3 Phase Wire function.
1. Locate starting point of wires by clicking left mouse button.

2. Click the left mouse button again on the desired end point.
101
Wire Starting Point 102 M1

T1
103 M
T2
104
T3
105
Wire End Point
106
107
Wire Starting Point

Wire End Point
101
102 M1
T1
103 M
T2
104
T3
3-Phase Connections 105
(Drawn Automatically)
106
ANSI-IEEE 3-Phase Wires
204
Wire Wire Wire 3-Phase Connections

Starting Point End Point End Point (Drawn Automatically)
Wire
Starting Point
U V W PE U V W PE
M M
-M1 3~ -M1 3~
PUMP PUMP
5 HP 5 HP
7.2 AMP 7.2 AMP
1000 RPM 1000 RPM
IEC 3-Phase Wires
Important: The software automatically connects two intersecting sets of 3 phase wires. However,
you must draw the second set of wires into the first set. See the above examples.
205
To Draw Wires Using 90 Degree Up / Down:
Use the Design > Wiring > Wire 90 Degree Up and Wire 90 Degree Down options
to draw right angles automatically. This allows a pair of wires to be drawn in one
operation. See examples below for procedure. “90 Degree Up” means the angle is
above the diagonal. “90 Degree Down” places the angle below the diagonal.
Wire 90 Degree Up Example:
3) Angle Drawn
1) Click On Automatically
Start Point
2) Click On
End Point
Wire 90 Degree Down Example:
1) Click On 2) Click On
Start Point End Point
3) Angle Drawn
Automatically
Wire Connector Type
When two wires intersect, the software will automatically create a connection point.
This can be either a circular connection point (node) or a diagonal connection.
Diagonal Connector Node Connector
To set the default wire connector type, use the Wire Options mode in the Project
Manager. See page 105. To select between the circular and diagonal wire connection
as you work on a drawing, you can use the Design > Wiring > Wire Connector Type
menu function to toggle the software between the node and diagonal connector type.
206
When the diagonal wire connection is selected and intersecting wires are drawn, the
following dialog box will appear.
The buttons in this dialog allow you to select the orientation of the diagonal
connection. Select the desired orientation and then the OK button. If you wish to
override the diagonal connection and use a circular connection, select the Connection
Node button followed by OK.
Draw Ladder
The Draw Ladder function allows you to create ladder wires quickly.
Note: For ANSI-IEEE drawings the “rung” wires will be drawn horizontally. For IEC
format drawings, these wires will be drawn vertically.
To use the Draw Ladder Tool:
1. Select the Design > Wiring > Draw Ladder function.

2. On the command line, the software will prompt you to “Select Ladder Top-Left
Point.” Click on the point that will be the top of the left-hand vertical wire
(ANSI) or the left end of the top horizontal wire (IEC).
3. The software will prompt you to “Select Ladder Bottom-Right Point.” Click on
the point that will be the bottom of the right-hand vertical wire (ANSI) or the
right end of the bottom horizontal wire (IEC). A box will appear on the screen to
indicate the area that will hold the wires.
207
4. The software will prompt you for “Space between ladder rungs <1>.” This is the
space between the rung wires. The default value is 1 inch (ANSI) or 5 mm.
(IEC). Enter a different value if desired. Then either right click or press the
<Enter> key.
The wires then will be drawn automatically.
Select top left point
Select bottom right

point
Enter value for

rung spacing
Wire Stretch
To stretch a wire or group of wires, use the following procedure:

AutoCAD version
1. Select Modify > Stretch.

2. As prompted on the command line select the wire or group of wires you wish to
stretch.
3. Select a base point, such as the existing wire end that you wish to extend.
4. Select a second point of displacement to define the new endpoint of the wire(s).
208
MicroStation version
To stretch a single wire, click on the wire so that handles appear. Drag one of the
handles to stretch the wire.
To stretch multiple wires:
1. Select the Stretch button in the Extend Tools tool box.

2. You will be prompted to “Place fence.” Click on two points to define the
opposite corners of the fenced area. This area should include the endpoints of the
wires.
3. You will be prompted to “Define origin.” Click on a reference point, usually one
of the wire endpoints.
4. You will be prompted to “Define distance.” Click on another point to define the
distance that the wire should be stretched. The wires will be extended by this
amount.
209
Edit Wire
If you wish to modify an existing wire or wires, you use two methods:
To edit multiple wires, select the Design > Wiring > Edit Wires function. Select the
desired wires in the drawing and then right click or press <Enter>.
To edit a single wire, right click on the desired wire.
In both cases, the following popup menu will appear.
Edit Wire Number - Select a wire and edit the wire number and related properties.
Same as the Manual Wire Number function (see page 286).
Delete Wire Number - Remove the wire number assigned to the selected wire.
Show Wire Number - Display or hide the wire number on the selected wire.
Duplicate - If a wire has multiple branches you can make the assigned wire number
label appear on a branch by right clicking on the branch and selecting this menu item.
Copy - You can copy a wire segment by right-clicking on the segment and selecting
this menu item. You will be prompted on the command line to select a base point and
a new reference point for the copied wire segment.
Delete - You can delete a wire segment by right-clicking on the segment and selecting
this menu item.
Move - You can move a wire segment by right-clicking on the segment and selecting
this menu item. You will be prompted on the command line to select a base point and
a new reference point for the moved wire segment.
210
Line Settings - If you wish to change the line style of an existing wire, right-click on
the wire and select this menu item. The dialog that appears has a Line Style field for
selecting a different style. You can also change the color of the wire and whether the
line is a logical line (wire) or a drawing line.
Force Connection - If you wish to override the default algorithm that determines the
order of connections on a wire, you can right-click on the wire and select this menu
item. The Force Connections dialog will appear, listing all the devices connected on
the wire. The devices are listed in the default connection order that will be used on
connection lists, etc.
To force a connection between two items, hold down the <Ctrl> key and select the
two devices so that they are highlighted. Then select the Force Connect button. The
order of items will be changed and the new connection will be marked by a line in the
leftmost column.
211
Edit Wire Properties
If you wish to edit the properties of a wire you can right click on the wire and select
Edit Wire Number from the popup menu. The Edit Wire Number dialog will appear.
You can change various wire property values in the fields of this dialog. For
descriptions of these fields see page 286.
If you wish to edit the properties of more than one wire at the same time, select the
Design > Wiring > Edit Wires function.
212
Wire Layers
Wires can be drawn on different layers allowing different types of wires (power,
signal, etc.) to be drawn on separate layers. A different set of properties (color, gauge,
etc.) can be assigned to each layer. This allows each type of wires to automatically
receive the correct properties.
You configure these wire layers in the Wire Options dialog under Project Options (see
page 105).
When working on a drawing, you can select the layer on which your wires will be
drawn:
1. Select the Design > Wiring > Select Wire Layer function. The Select Wire
Layer dialog will appear.
2. Select the desired wire layer.

3. Select the OK button to make the selected layer current.
Any wires you draw will now be placed on the selected layer.
213
Insert Symbol
To place a symbol in a drawing, use the Design > Insert Symbol functions. There are
three insert symbol functions: By Name, By Part Number and By Device ID.
Design> Insert Symbol > Insert Symbol By Name
> Insert Symbol By Part No.
> Insert Symbol By Device ID
214
Insert Symbol by Name
To insert a symbol by name:
1. Select Design > Insert Symbol > Insert Symbol By Name.

The Insert Symbol(s) dialog will appear (with the By Name mode selected).
2. If you know the name of the symbol that you wish to place in the drawing, you
can enter it in the Name field. As you enter the name of the symbol, any existing
symbols that match the entered characters will be listed in the Database area of
the dialog.
The symbols listed in the Database area come from any symbol libraries that are
included in the catalog path. (Use the Configure > Setup function to define the
catalog path. See page 407.) If you empty the Name field, all symbols in the
catalog path will be listed in the Database area.
215
Note: If you select the Display project catalog checkbox you will list the symbols that
are stored with the project.
In addition to entering the symbol name, you can search for a symbol by entering
part of its description in the Description field and selecting the Search button.
Any symbols with descriptions that contain the search term will be displayed.
3. Click on the name of the desired symbol to select it. A thumbnail view of the
symbol will appear in the Preview area of the dialog.
4. To place the selected symbol in the drawing, click on the Place Symbol(s) button
(or double-click the symbol name). The symbol will appear at the cursor.
Position the symbol by pointing the cursor at the desired location and pressing
the left mouse button. The symbol is then placed in the diagram. The insertion
point of the symbol will snap to the nearest grid point.
If the symbol is placed on a wire, the wire will break automatically at the symbol
connection points. If a symbol is placed first and a wire is drawn over the
symbol, the wire will also break automatically.
The symbol will be rotated automatically to match the horizontal or vertical
alignment of a wire. (For this to occur, symbol rotation must be set to 0 degrees
and the symbol insertion point must be on the wire. Also, the Auto Rotate
checkbox must be turned on in symbol settings, see page 228. Certain 3-phase
symbols will not be rotated automatically.)
Note: No more than one wire should be connected to a single symbol connection point.
PB118 PB118
Wrong Right
Once the symbol is placed, the Device Properties dialog will appear, allowing a
device ID, part number and other items to be assigned. See page 221.
Note: You can also right-click on any symbol in a drawing and select Place Symbol Again
from the pop-up menu to place the same symbol again.
216
Rather than selecting a symbol, you may wish to select a part number and let the
software select a symbol to represent it in the drawing.
To insert a symbol by part number:
1. Select Design > Insert Symbol > Insert Symbol By Part Number.
The Insert Symbol(s) dialog will appear (with the By Part Number mode
selected).
The dialog has two areas: Parts Database and Selected Item(s).
The Parts Database area lists the items in the parts database. You can sort the list of
parts in the Parts Database area by clicking on one of the column headings. The first
click will sort in alpha-numeric order, the second click in reverse alpha-numeric
order. There is also a drop-down list in each column heading that allows you to filter
entries or select from values that exist in that column.
217
The Selected Item(s) area lists information about the symbol or symbols that are
associated with the part number that is currently selected. This includes the symbol
name, connection point designations (if any) and symbol description. If the selected
part number represents a device family, there may be more than one symbol listed in
the Selected Item(s) area.
2. Select a part number to place in the drawing (as a symbol) by selecting
(highlighting) it in the Parts Database area.
If more than one symbol is associated with the part number (i.e., a device
family), they will be listed in the Selected Item(s) area. For example, in the
previous figure, you could select either the CRS symbol or the CRNO symbol to
represent the part. The default selection will be the parent symbol. If you wish to
place a child symbol, select it rather than the parent symbol.
3. To place the selected symbol in the drawing, click on the Place Symbol(s) button
or double-click the entry. The symbol will appear at the cursor position.
Position the symbol by pointing the cursor at the desired location and pressing
the left mouse button. The symbol is then placed in the diagram. The insertion
point of the symbol will snap to the nearest grid point.
Once the symbol is placed, the Device Properties dialog will appear, allowing a
device ID, part number and other items to be assigned. See page 221.
218
Insert Symbol By Device ID
Rather than selecting a symbol, you may wish to place a symbol with the same device
ID as an existing symbol in the drawing. In schematic drawing mode, this applies
only when placing a parent or child symbol from a device family (because these
symbols are allowed to have the same device ID).
To insert a symbol by device ID:
1. Select Design > Insert Symbol > Insert Symbol By Device ID.
The Insert Symbol(s) dialog will appear (with the By Device ID mode selected).
Select device ID here
Available symbols listed here
219
This dialog lists existing device IDs in your drawings that belong to a device
family. When you select a device ID in the upper area of the dialog, the symbols
of the device family will be listed in the lower area of the dialog. Symbols that
are already placed are marked with an “X” in the left column.
The Filter Devices fields on the left side of the dialog allow you to filter the list
of displayed device IDs. By selecting the appropriate radio button you can
restrict the filter to Terminal/Plugs or Devices (non-terminals/plugs). Select or
enter any combination of Installation, Location, Tag, Part Number and Function
Text and then select the Search button. Any device IDs that match all the entries
will be listed. Partial entries can be made in the fields unless the Whole Word
checkbox is selected. If the Ignore Case checkbox is selected, the case of
entered letters will not be taken into account.
There is also a group of checkboxes labeled Show Devices that, when selected,
will list IDs that meet the following criteria:
Parts Allocated in Primary Drawing Mode - Selecting this checkbox will
display all the device IDs that had part numbers assigned in the primary
drawing mode. This checkbox will be selected but unavailable if you are cur-
rently in the primary drawing mode.
Parts Allocated in Non-Primary Drawing Mode - Selecting this checkbox
will display all the device IDs that had part numbers assigned in a drawing
mode other than the primary drawing mode.
Parts Allocated in BOM Explorer - Selecting this checkbox will display all
the device IDs that had part numbers assigned in the BOM Explorer function
(see page 142).
In the Display area of the dialog, the following checkboxes are available:
Show Placed Devices in Current Drawing Mode - When this checkbox is
selected, the IDs of any placed devices will remain in the list in the upper
part of the dialog rather than being removed from the list as they are placed.
Placed IDs will be marked with an “X.”
Show Only Devices with Assigned Part Numbers - When this checkbox is
selected, only devices with part numbers assigned will be listed.
To place one of the symbols, select it from the list at the bottom of the dialog and
then select the Place Symbol(s) button. The symbol will appear at the cursor
position in the drawing. You can then click the mouse button to place the
symbol.
220
Device ID Assignment
Once the symbol is placed, the Device Properties dialog box appears. The software
automatically prompts the next available device ID based on the format that is defined
for the current project (see page 75). You can accept the prompted device tag or you
can type a different ID in the fields provided.
The drop-down list beside the Device Tag field will show the six most recently
assigned device tags in the current project.
Use the Select Device ID button to assign the device ID by clicking on an

existing symbol in the drawing that has the desired ID. This usually applies when
placing a parent or child symbol (because these symbols have the same device ID). To
use this method, place the symbol as usual. When the Device Properties dialog box
appears, select the Select Device ID button. The dialog box will then close and you
can click on the existing symbol in the drawing to use its device ID (the symbols must
be on the same page).
Use the Search button to list device IDs in the project that have the same symbol tag
mnemonic (CR or K for relay, PB for pushbutton, etc.). This is useful when assigning
parent and child symbols (auxiliary contacts).
When you place a terminal or plug symbol, the Terminal No. field displays the
terminal block number of the terminal within the terminal strip (or pin number within
a plug). You can change this number if desired.
221
Use the Family field to assign the symbol to a device family. See page 229. Select the
browse button to select from a list of available families.
Note: If you assign a part number to a symbol and there is a device family associated
with that part number, that family will be assigned automatically.
When you select a family, the Device Usage Chart dialog appears, showing you
which item in the family will be associated with the symbol you are placing. The
software disables selections that are invalid for the symbol you are currently
placing or are unavailable because they have already been placed or used.
222
The Device Usage Chart link in the Device Properties dialog also displays the Device
Usage Chart dialog, showing you where all the symbols matching the prompted
device ID are used throughout the project.
The CP Text field displays the default connection point designations for the symbol’s
connection points. You can enter new values if the symbol is not part of a family.
To assign a part number to the symbol, select the Search button above the Part
Number field. The Select Part Number dialog will appear. For more information, see
page 294. Alternatively, if you know the part number you can select the Add button
and manually enter the part number.
If you wish the device ID to be hidden on the screen and on plots of the drawing,
select the Suppress Device ID checkbox. The device ID will still be assigned to the
symbol; it will simply not be shown.
Duplicate Device IDs - The software’s error checking detects duplicate IDs. If you
attempt to assign an ID that has already been used, the software will prompt that the
ID already exists and ask if you wish to duplicate it.
If you answer Yes, the symbol will be placed with the duplicate ID and cross
referencing will appear at both symbols indicating the page and line number where
the other symbol appears. If you place more than two symbols with the same ID using
this method, there will be additional cross references appearing at each symbol. If you
wish to avoid duplicate part numbers, you should only assign a part number to one of
the symbols. If you answer No to the prompt, the symbol placement will be cancelled.
The Multiple Placement checkbox applies only when placing a series of similar
symbols (allows automatic placement on consecutive lines). See page 227. The
Duplicate Device ID checkbox is only active when using the multiple placement
function.
The Symbol Settings area of the dialog displays the symbol name and description of
the symbol being placed. Select the Settings link to make various settings that affect
how the symbol will appear on the page. See page 228.
When you have made the desired entries and settings, select the OK button in the
Device Properties dialog to complete the placement of the symbol.
223
Device BOM Assign
If you created a device ID in the BOM Explorer that is not associated with an existing
symbol (see page 145), you can use the Device BOM Assign function to assign that
device to an existing symbol. Use the following procedure:
1. Right click on an existing symbol in a drawing.

2. Select Device BOM Assign from the pop-up menu.
3. The Device BOM Assign dialog will appear.
This dialog lists device IDs created in the BOM Explorer that are unassigned to
symbols. You can filter this list by selecting a parameter (such as Installation or
Device Tag) in the Filter drop-down list, entering a filter value in the Like field,
and then selecting the Apply button. Use the Save button to save this filter. Use
the Clear button to remove an existing filter.
4. Select the item from the list that you wish to assign to the existing symbol.
5. If you want to keep the device ID that the symbol already has, select the
Drawing Device ID radio button. (The selected item will still be removed from
the pick list because it will be “placed” on the current symbol.)
6. If you want the symbol to receive the device ID from the list in the dialog, select
the BOM Explorer ID radio button.
7. If the selected item in the list has attributes assigned, they will be shown in the
lower part of the dialog. If you wish this attribute value to be assigned to the
existing symbol, select the Replace checkbox.
8. Select OK to assign the selected item to the symbol in the drawing. Select
Cancel if you do not wish to make an assignment.
224
Symbol Text
Some symbols will prompt you to enter symbol text after you enter the device ID.
These are various text attributes that were defined when the symbol was created.
You can enter values for the texts in the Value column. Select the Visible checkbox to
display the value in the drawing, or de-select it to hide the text.
225
I/O Text Definition
When you place a PLC parent symbol, the I/O Text Definition dialog will appear. This
dialog box allows you to set rack and module numbers, the address numbers and
function text for each point on the module.
1. Enter the Rack and Module/Slot numbers in the appropriate fields.

2. In the Address fields, it is only necessary to enter an address in the first field.
Press <Enter> to automatically assign the other addresses (you must have the
Automatic Addressing checkbox selected under project Options in the PLC
dialog - see page 88). The remaining addresses will be filled in automatically,
continuing from the first. The separator character used in word/bit addresses is
also specified in the project Options PLC dialog in the Input or Output Card
Format fields.
3. In each Function Text field you can enter descriptive text.
4. If you select the Import I/O Text button, entries for the Function Text fields will
be taken from an external file. This filename is specified in the PLC Import File
fields of the project Options PLC dialog.
226
5. Select the OK button. The module symbol should appear on the drawing with the
appropriate Rack and Module numbers, addresses, and function texts.
Multiple Placement
When the Multiple Placement checkbox in the Device Properties dialog box is
enabled you can automatically place symbols on parallel wires.
To place multiple symbols use the following steps:
1. Select a symbol (such as TB) using one of the insert symbol functions (see page
214).
2. Place the symbol on the first wire of the range of wires to be included.
3. The Device ID Assignment dialog box will appear. Enter the desired device ID in
the Device Tag field.
4. Select the Multiple Placement checkbox.
5. Select the OK button to continue. The symbol will appear on the wire.
6. Select a position on the last wire in the range of wires by pointing the cursor and
left-clicking the mouse. If terminal symbols are being placed, consecutively
numbered terminals will appear on all wires between the first and last selected
wires. Device IDs are assigned automatically based on the defined format.
-TB4 Place first symbol here

1
Click on last wire
Terminals 2 and 3 are placed

and numbered automatically
If you wish all of the symbols that you are placing to have the same device ID, select
the Duplicate Device ID checkbox at the same time that you select the Multiple
Placement checkbox.
227
Symbol Settings
Select the Settings link in the Device Properties dialog to display the Symbol Settings
dialog. Here you can make various settings that govern how the symbol appears on
the drawing. In general, these settings remain in effect until a different setting is
made.
Select rotation and scaling values in the Scale and Rotate fields either by selecting a
value from the drop-down list or entering a value. Rotate values allow rotation of the
symbol in degrees. When the Auto Rotate checkbox is selected, the symbol will
automatically orient itself so that the connection points fall on the wire on which the
symbol is placed. The Scale values allow the symbol to be reduced (0.500) or
enlarged (2.000).
Use the Mirror drop-down list to flip the symbol on the X or Y axis. Select No Mirror
for no mirroring (normal orientation).
No Mirroring X Axis Mirroring Y Axis Mirroring
Select the OK button to make the symbol settings active.
228
Device Families (Parent and Child Symbols)
Certain symbols can have a “parent” or “child” relationship with other symbols in a
schematic. Examples include relays and motor starters (parent) which have related
contacts (child) appearing throughout a drawing. If child symbols are given the same
device ID as the parent, the system can automatically provide cross referencing. The
software can also alert you when you try to assign more child symbols than are
available for the parent.
Parent Symbol
CR112
114
(Line 112)
Cross Reference To Child

Child Symbol
CR112
(Line 114)
112
Cross Reference To Parent
ANSI-IEEE Cross Reference
Child Symbol
21
-K1
/.6 22
A1 Parent Symbol
3
Cross Reference To Parent
-K1
4
A2
Cross Reference To Child
13 14
21 22 /.4
IEC Cross Reference
You may wonder how the system knows the number and type of children that a given
parent symbol can have. This is accomplished with a “Device Family” definition that
establishes the type and number of child symbols that are associated with the parent
and which cross reference symbol to place next to the parent symbol.
229
When you place a parent or child symbol on a drawing, you can assign the symbol to
a device family by selecting one in the Family field of the Device Properties dialog.
You can enter the name of the family or select the browse button to display the Device
Family dialog to select from a list of families.
Select browse button
Select device family
Once the system knows the family name, it can also perform error-checking functions
by keeping track of how many of the available child symbols have been used.
A number of device family definitions are provided with promis•e. You also can
create custom family definitions. The example above could use the standard family
named “20.” This device consists of a parent relay with two normally open and no
normally closed contact children. Put simply, the device family definition contains the
following information:
Family Name: 20
Parent Symbol Name: CR
Cross Reference Symbol Name: Q20
Child Symbol: CRNO
Child Symbol: CRNO
230
Over-assignment of Family
If you attempt to assign more items to a family than it is configured to contain, the
software will display an Engineering Design Consideration dialog to inform you.
You have three choices:
1. Use the Search button to choose a different family to replace the current family.
2. Append the current symbol to the device family. The appended symbol will use
the same device ID as the existing items in the family.
3. Cancel the current symbol placement and use a different device ID.
Note: You can choose to turn off the Append option in the project options mode. See page
86. If you do this, option number 2 and the Append button in the above dialog will be
grayed-out.
231
Exchange Family
If you change the family that is assigned to a symbol, the software will ask if you
wish to automatically transfer the symbols in the original family to positions in the
new family. (You can change the family assignment by right-clicking on a symbol,
selecting Device ID from the menu, and using the Family field in the Device
Properties dialog.)
If you select Yes, the software will transfer symbols to the new family automatically.
If you select No, the Exchange Family dialog will appear, allowing you to choose
where to place items in the new family.
To exchange the symbols, drag each one from the original family to the position you
wish it have in the new family. Select OK to complete the exchange.
232
Update Family
Family definitions can be stored with a project. This means that the family definition
stored with a project may not match the definition in your device family database.
This could happen if you edited the definition on your system after creating a project
or if you imported a project from another user who has a different family definition.
The Update Family function allows you to compare a selected family in a project with
a family in your family database. Use the following procedure.
1. Select Review/Revise > Update Family. The Update Family dialog will appear.
2. In the Project field select the project that contains the family that you wish to
compare with a family in your family database. Select a project from the
drop-down list or use the browse button.
3. Select the Get Family List button to obtain a list of families in the selected
project. These families will then be available for selection in the Family field.
4. Select the desired family in the Family field. The elements of the selected family
will be listed in the Family in Project (left) side of the dialog.
5. Select the Compare Families button. If there is a similarly-named family in the
family database it will be listed in the Family in Catalog (right) side of the
dialog.
Any differences between the two families will be highlighted.
233
Family on the Fly
If you find that you don’t have a family definition with the right combination of
symbols, you can create one as you work on a drawing.
Note: To use this function you need to have two or more symbols sharing the same device ID
with no family assigned.
1. Select the Manage > Family on the Fly function. The following dialog will
appear:
2. Use the Select A Device ID button to display the Select Device ID dialog
showing the duplicated device IDs used in the current project. Double click on
the ID for which you wish to create a family. This ID will then appear in the
Device ID field of the Apply/New dialog.
234
3. In the Apply/New dialog, select one of the following radio buttons:

Select the Search for compatible family radio button if you wish to assign a
family that already exists in your catalogs. After you select OK a dialog will
appear that allows you to select one of the existing families.
Select the Create new family radio button if you wish to create a new family to
meet your special requirements. Select OK and continue with the next step.
4. The Family On the Fly dialog will appear.
5. In the Family Name field enter a name for the new family you are creating.
6. In the Catalog Path field select the catalog path where the family will be stored
from the drop-down list.
235
7. Select the Description button and a dialog will appear with four text fields that
allow you to enter descriptions of the family. Enter the desired text and select
OK to continue.
8. In the Family Type field, select one of the following: Standard or

Terminal/Pin-Plug depending on the type of device that is being represented.
9. The Family area of the dialog will be populated with the existing symbols that
have the selected ID. The previous figure shows an ID with one relay coil
symbol (CR), one normally open contact (CRNO) and one normally closed
contact (CRNC).
In the Role column, select the function that each symbol serves in the family:
Parent, Child1, Child2, etc. The child number determines the order they will
appear in the cross reference symbol.
10. (Optional) If connection point text was defined on the symbol it will be
displayed in the Connection Points field. You can alter this text, if desired.
236
11. (Optional) Add any additional symbols that you want included in the family by
making entries on blank lines. If you add an unneeded symbol you can use the
delete (“X”) button to remove it.
12. (Optional) If you wish to create potential groups within the family, select the
Edit Group button. If two or more connection points on the symbol are given the
same potential group number and are connected to wires, the same potential
(wire number) will be assigned to these wires. In other words, the potential will
carry through the symbol. See page 402 for more information.
13. In the Cross Reference Symbol area of the dialog, select a cross reference
symbol in the Symbol Name field. This symbol will hold the cross reference
information for the parent/child symbols.
14. Set the position for the cross reference symbol. First, make a selection from the
drop-down list to determine how the symbol will be positioned, either Offset
from Insertion Point (of parent symbol) or Offset from 0. Typically,
ANSI-IEEE drawings use Offset from Insertion Point and IEC drawings use
Offset from 0. Then, in the X Offset and Y Offset fields, enter the distance values
between the selected insertion point and the insertion point of the cross reference
symbol.
ANSI-IEEE Distance Values IEC Distance Values
dx=0 mm
dx=1.50"
dy=-0.5"
dy=75 mm
Bottom of Page
15. Select OK to create the new device family.
237
Symbol On the Fly
The Symbol On the Fly function allows you to create a box-shaped symbol in the
drawing rather than selecting an existing symbol from a catalog. Like other symbols,
these on-the-fly symbols are assigned a device ID and have connection points.
Connection Point
A B Connection Point Text

D426
Device Tag
Symbol On the Fly
1. Select the Design > Symbol On the Fly > Draw Symbol On the Fly function or
select the first button on the Symbol On the Fly toolbar.
2. The software will prompt you to define the first corner of the box and then the
opposite corner.
3. The software will display the Device Properties dialog box and prompt you to
enter a device tag for the symbol. The device tag is entered in the same way as
for a symbol. If desired, you can also assign a part number to the symbol. Select
OK.
4. The default position for the device ID is just above the symbol. It can be moved
by right-clicking on the ID and selecting Text Position from the pop-up menu.
238
5. Next, select the Design > Symbol On the Fly > Insert Connection Point
function (or the Insert Connection Point toolbar button) and select a connection
point by pointing and clicking. You also will be prompted to select the position
for connection point text. Then you will be prompted to enter the connection
point text in the following dialog box.
Enter in the Visible Text field any connection point designations that you wish to
appear beside the connection point. If you want hidden text to be associated with
the connection point, enter it in the Hidden Text field. Select OK to enter the
connection point text. Enter additional connection points as required.
This completes the creation of the on-the-fly symbol.
Important: To delete the connection point of an on-the-fly symbol, you must select the Design >
Symbol On the Fly > Delete Connection Point function (or the Delete Connection
Point toolbar button). Then click directly on the connection point you wish to delete.
239
Update Symbol
Once a symbol has been used in a project its definition is stored within the project.
This means that the symbols stored with a project may not match the similarly-named
symbols in your master catalogs. This could happen if you modified a symbol on your
system after creating a project or if you imported a project from another user who has
a different symbol.
The Update Symbol function allows you to compare symbols in a selected project
with any similarly-named symbols in your symbol catalogs. It also allows you to
replace symbols in the project with the symbols that exist in the catalog. Use the
following procedure:
1. Select Review/Revise > Update Symbol. The Update Symbol dialog will
appear.
2. Select the desired project in the Project field. The symbols in this project will be
compared to your symbol catalogs for differences.
240
3. Select the Get Symbol List button to perform the comparison function. Any
symbols in the catalog that are different from similarly-named symbols in the
project will be listed in the Update Symbol dialog.
If no mis-matched symbols are found you will see the message, “No symbol
needs to be updated for this project.”
4. To replace (update) the symbols in the project, select the OK button. You will be
prompted with the symbols one by one in the Replace Symbol dialog. Use this
dialog to select the catalog symbol that will replace the symbol in the project.
241
5. Use the Search field in the Replace Symbol dialog to select whether the
replacement will occur on the current page, on selected pages, or in the entire
project. You can also use the checkboxes in the Maintain on New Symbol area
to select aspects of the existing symbol that you wish to preserve.
6. To replace the symbol in the project with the symbol from the catalog, select the
“catalog” symbol in the Replace with field. Use the browse <...> button to make
the selection.
The Select Symbol dialog will appear. You can distinguish between the symbol in
the catalog and the symbol in the project by looking at the Catalog column. This
column indicates whether the symbol exists in the project or in a specific catalog
as shown in the following figure.
Symbol exists in
project or in catalog
7. Select OK in the Select Symbol dialog and in the Replace Symbol dialog to make
the replacement.
As you replace symbols in a project, you will be prompted with the Device
Properties dialog in order to confirm the replacements.
After each symbol is replaced, you will be prompted with the Replace Symbol dialog
for the next mis-matched symbol. Select the Cancel button for any symbol that you
do not wish to replace.
242
Hyperlinks
Symbol Hyperlink
You can create a hyperlink between a symbol in a drawing and a web page or a file
such as a pdf or MS-Word document.
To create a hyperlink:
1. Right click on the desired symbol.

2. Select Hyperlink > Create from the pop-up menu. The Insert Hyperlink dialog
will appear.
3. In the Text to display field enter the text that will appear as a tooltip at the cursor
when the user points at the symbol.
4. In the Type the file name or web page location field, enter the URL for a web
page or the path to a file. This is the page or file that will be displayed when the
hyperlink is opened.
5. Select OK to insert the hyperlink in the drawing.
When you point the cursor at a symbol that has a hyperlink, a hyperlink icon will
appear along with the text that was entered in the Text to display field.
243
To follow a hyperlink - To go to the linked web page or file, right click on the
symbol and select Hyperlink > Open from the pop-up menu. The page or file will
open in your default application for that type of file.
To edit a hyperlink - Right click on the symbol and select Hyperlink > Edit from
the pop-up menu. The Insert Hyperlink dialog will appear, allowing you to change the
values for the hyperlink.
To delete a hyperlink - Right click on the symbol and select Hyperlink > Delete
from the pop-up menu. The hyperlink will be removed.
Part Number Hyperlink

You can assign a hyperlink to a part number record so that the hyperlink will be
available on any symbol to which the part number is assigned.
To create the part number hyperlink:
1. Open the desired part number record using the Manage > Parts Database
Manager function (see page 630).
2. Enter the complete URL (http://...) in the URL field.
3. Select Apply to save the parts record.
To use the part number hyperlink:
1. Right click on a symbol that has been assigned a part number that has a URL.
2. Select Hyperlink > Part Number URL from the pop-up menu. The assigned
URL will be displayed in this sub-menu.
3. Select the displayed URL.
244
Insert Macro
A macro is a collection of symbols, wires and other elements that can be placed on a
drawing in one step. A number of macros are provided with the software. You can
also create your own macros. See page 385 for instructions on creating a macro.
To insert a macro in the drawing:
1. Select Design > Insert Macro.

The Insert Macro(s) dialog will appear:
245
2. If you know the name of the macro that you wish to place in the drawing, you
can enter it in the Name field. As you enter the name of the macro, any existing
macros that match the entered characters will be listed in the Database area of
the dialog.
The macros listed in the Database area come from any symbol libraries that are
included in the catalog path. (Use the Elec-Tools > promis•e Setup function to
define the catalog path.) If you empty the Name field, all macros in the catalog
path will be listed in the Database area.
In addition to entering the macro name, you can search for a macro by entering
part of its description in the Description field and selecting the Search button.
Any macros with descriptions that contain the search term will be displayed.
3. Click on the name of the desired macro to select it. A thumbnail view of the
macro will appear in the Preview area of the dialog.
4. (Optional) If you do not want the device IDs of any symbols in the macro to be
automatically updated to reflect their new position, select the Maintain Device
IDs as Created when inserting Macro checkbox. (You will still be prompted
with the original device ID). You can choose to maintain the device tag only or
the complete ID.
5. (Optional) If wire links were stored as part of the macro and the Maintain Wire
Link IDs as created when inserting Macro checkbox is selected, these will
appear when the macro is placed and will not be updated automatically to reflect
their new position. You can choose to maintain the device tag only or the
complete ID.
6. (Optional) If wire numbers were stored as part of the macro and the Maintain
Wire Numbers as created when inserting Macro checkbox is selected, these
will appear when the macro is placed. If the macro’s wire numbers are connected
to existing wire numbers in the project, the existing wire numbers will take
precedence. If the wire numbers would create a duplicate wire number, they will
have “?” appended. You can choose to maintain the wire tag only or the
complete ID.
246
7. (Optional) By selecting the Macro Settings link you can display the Macro
Settings dialog. Here you can make various settings that govern how the symbol
appears on the drawing. In general, these settings remain in effect until a
different setting is made. These settings are similar to the symbol settings (see
page 228).
8. To place the selected macro in the drawing, click on the OK button. The macro
will appear at the cursor position.
Position the macro by pointing the cursor at the desired location and pressing the
left mouse button. The macro is then placed in the diagram. The insertion point
of the macro will snap to the nearest grid point.
247
Entering Text
Although promis•e automatically enters device IDs and other descriptive labels when
placing symbols, the user may wish to include additional text in the drawing to further
describe the control system. For entering general text you can use the AutoCAD text
entry functions.
Single Line Text
With single line text, each line of text entered is treated as a separate object.
AutoCAD:
1. Use the Draw > Text > Single Line function or select the Single Line Text
toolbar button on the AutoCAD Text toolbar. Follow the prompts on the
command line to set various text parameters:
2. Specify start point by clicking in the drawing.
3. Specify Text Height - by entering a value on the command line or moving the
mouse pointer and clicking to establish a height.
4. Specify Text Angle - by entering a value on the command line or moving the
mouse pointer and clicking to establish an angle.
5. When prompted to “Enter text,” type the text string that you wish to appear in
the drawing.
6. Press the <Enter> key to complete each single line text entry.
7. Press <Enter> a second time (or press <Esc>) to exit from text entry mode.
MicroStation:
1. Use the Tools > Main > Text function and select the Place Text button in the
Text tool box.
2. The Text Editor window will open if it is not already open. Enter text in this
window. (This text can be single line or multi-line.)
3. Make any desired text settings in the Place Text dialog.
4. Select a point in the drawing where you wish the text to appear.
248
Multiline Text
With multiline text, a block of text that can have more than one line is treated as a
single object.
To enter multiline text, use the Design > Multiline Text function. Follow the prompts
on the command line to set various text parameters:
1. Specify start point by clicking in the drawing.

2. Click on a first corner and opposite corner to define a text box on the drawing.
The following Multi-line Text dialog will appear.
3. Enter the desired text in the Text area of the dialog. Simply press <Enter> to start
a new line. Make any desired formatting settings in the Settings fields.
4. If you wish to use foreign language text phrases, select the Search Language
Phrases button. The following dialog will appear.
249
Select the desired language text followed by the OK button.

5. Select the OK button to enter the text in the drawing.
Editing Text
To edit text, double click on the text object that you wish to edit.
(AutoCAD) Single line text will appear in the Edit Text dialog, multiline text will
appear in the multiline text editor. Make the desired changes and select the OK button.
(MicroStation) Both single line text and multiline text will appear in the Text Editor
window. Make the desired changes and then click in the drawing to enter the changes.
Language Text
promis•e has the capability to automatically display selected text words and phrases
in multiple languages.
promis•e includes a database containing lists of commonly used technical words and
phrases in various languages. (Currently, English, German, and Chinese phrases are
provided with the software.) The words and phrases in each list are numbered, and the
corresponding term is given the same number in each language list. By selecting and
placing a word or phrase from the language text list, the software can automatically
display the word or phrase in up to three of the available languages.
The text is entered on the drawing using the Design > Multiline Text function. See
page 249.
250
The user can edit and add to any of the word lists and can create new word lists for
additional languages.
Selecting Languages
To select which languages will appear in a drawing, use the Display Languages dialog
under Project Options. See page 84.
Editing Language Text Database
To edit the lists of language text words and phrases, select the Manage > Language
Database Manager function. The Phrase and Language Edit dialog will appear.
251
To edit a phrase:
1. Use the Select Language field to select a language. The list of phrases in that
language will appear on the left side of the dialog.
2. Select the desired phrase on the left side of the dialog. All existing translations of
the phrase will be listed on the right side of the dialog.
3. Click inside the desired field on the right side of the dialog to edit the phrase in
any of the languages.
To add a phrase:
2. Select the Add button. A field will appear beside the Add button where you can
enter the name of the new phrase. This is usually a number that determines the
phrase’s position in the list.
3. Enter the phrase name and press the <Enter> key. A new position will be added
to the list.
4. Enter the desired phrase text(s) in the Translation column on the right side of the
dialog.
252
To delete a phrase:
2. Select the desired phrase from the list on the left side of the dialog.
3. Select the Delete button.
4. Select Yes when prompted to confirm the deletion.
To add a language:
1. Select the Add button on the right side of the dialog under Languages. A field
will appear beside the Add button where you can enter the name of the new
language list.
2. Enter the language name and press the <Enter> key. The new language will be
added to the list of languages.
You can then enter translations for each phrase for that language.
253
Cables
There are several methods of creating and assigning cables in promis•e. The user can
create device types and enter part numbers that represent various types of cables.
Wires can be assigned to cables either in the schematic or in the terminal plan editor.
Assigning Wires to a Cable
You can assign a group of wires to a cable by placing a cable symbol in the schematic
drawing. Cables assigned in the schematic will be listed in the terminal plan editor
mode (see page 512).
To assign a group of wires in a schematic to a cable, use the following steps:
1. While viewing the schematic, select the Design > Insert Symbol > Insert
Symbol By Name function. When prompted for a symbol name enter a cable
symbol name. The symbol named CABLE is provided with the software.
2. Select the desired cable symbol position on the first wire that you wish to assign
to the cable.
3. The Device Properties dialog box will appear. A device ID tag will be prompted
in the Device Tag field. Enter a device tag for the cable in this field.
254
4. The Multiple Placement checkbox will default to the “On” setting when placing
cable symbols. This allows you to assign multiple consecutive wires to the cable
in one step. (You can also assign wires to a cable individually by placing the
cable symbol on each wire and assigning the same device ID on each wire).
Multiple
Placement
checkbox
5. At this time, if desired, you can also assign a part number to the cable. Select the
Search button in the Part Number area of the dialog. The parts database Assign
Part Number dialog box will be displayed (see page 294). You can search the
database for cable part numbers. Select these part numbers by pointing and
clicking. Select OK to return to the Device Properties dialog box.
Note: Assign a part number to only one of the cable’s conductors.
6. To select a device family for the cable, select the browse button in the Family
field. The Device Family dialog box will appear allowing you to select a device
family for the cable. The family type determines how many conductors the cable
has and what the designation (such as color) is for each conductor. You can
create custom cable families (see page 396). Select OK.
255
Note: If you assigned a part number to the cable, and a device family was defined in
the data for that part number, the device family will be assigned automatically.
7. The Device Usage Chart dialog box will appear next, listing all the conductor
designations for the cable. The first available (unassigned) conductor will be
assigned to the cable symbol you are currently placing unless you select a
different conductor by pointing and clicking.
256
If any of the conductors have already been assigned in the schematic, a page and
line number will be indicated in the Drawing Set, Page and Line Number
columns. These conductors cannot be assigned again unless you delete the
existing cable symbol where they have been assigned.
Select the OK button to continue followed by the OK button in the Device
Properties dialog.
257
8. The Cable Text dialog box will appear. This dialog box allows you to enter up to
50 descriptive texts related to the cable.
Select the OK button when the desired texts have been entered.
9. The cable symbol will appear at the selected position with the device ID and the
designation of the first conductor.
If the Multiple Placement checkbox was selected, the software will then prompt,
“Mark position of last symbol.” By pointing and clicking, select the last wire to
be assigned to the cable.
Original symbol position
Select last wire
258
Cable conductor designations will be automatically assigned to each wire up to

the last selected wire. The cable device ID appears at the first wire; conductor
designations appear at subsequent wires (see following figure).
Conductor designations
automatically assigned
259
Cable Cross Reference Symbols
You can place a cable cross reference symbol in a drawing that will show where the
conductors of a cable are connected.
Note: The page must be in Wiring Diagram drawing mode in order to place the symbol.
= LINE1/108/=line1+EN1-TB2:1 = LINE1/108/=line1+EN1-TB9:1
BLK BLK
CAB77
WHT WHT
= LINE1/108/=line1+EN1-TB2:3 LENGTH = LINE1/108/=line1+EN1-TB9:3

RED 50 RED
GRN GRN
A number of cable cross reference symbols are provided with the software (search for
symbol type “cablexref”) or you can create your own.
When you place the cable cross reference symbol you assign the same device ID as
the existing cable. For example, if you had assigned the following cable in a
schematic, the cross reference symbol might show the information in the above
figure.
TB2 CAB77 BLK TB9
1 1
WHT
2 2
RED
3 3
GRN
4 4
The type of information that is displayed at the cross reference symbol can be
customized using the Cable Cross-References tab of the Wire Diagram Settings
dialog in the project options (see page 103).
260
Cable Manager
The Cable Manager allows you to edit cable text for all the cables in a project in a
single dialog. You can make large-scale changes to the cable texts in a project without
searching for and editing individual cables. This saves time and lessens errors of
omission or inconsistency of edits.
To access the Cable Manager, select Review/Revise > Cable Manager. The Cable
Manager dialog will appear.
The existing cables in the project are listed on the left side of the dialog.
When you select a cable, the cable text for that cable is displayed on the right side of
the dialog. If you select multiple cables that have different cable text values, the text
will be displayed as “<varies>”.
You can edit the cable text values of the selected cables. Entered values will be
assigned to all the selected cables, allowing you to edit multiple cables in one step.
Use the Best Fit buttons to optimize the column widths in the dialog.
Select the Apply button to assign the entered values without closing the dialog. Select
the OK button to assign the entered values and close the dialog.
261
Field
promis•e software has the ability to recognize devices on a schematic that originate
from a remote location, in other words, devices that exist in a different physical locale
than the other devices on the schematic page. One way the user can identify these
remote devices is by placing them in a “field.” (Another way is to right click on a
symbol’s device ID, select the Device ID function from the popup menu and change
the device ID to a different installation and location.)
Overview – promis•e is an intelligent software package that can identify locations as
well as logical connections. However, in the two-dimensional schematic world, the
user must provide the software with the means to distinguish between real-world,
physical locations and theoretical callouts on the drawing.
To allow the software to recognize remote devices, the user can assign a field as an
area of the schematic to contain the remote devices. A different Installation and
Location can then be assigned to the field.
promis•e will associate the devices in the field with this new Installation and
Location rather than the Installation and Location of the page where the field appears.
A field can be drawn around existing devices, or devices can be drawn inside an
existing field.
A field can be drawn within another field, but it must be completely inside the other
field.
Procedure for Field Creation:
1. Select the Design > Insert Field function.

2. On the command line, you will be prompted to define the first corner and
opposite corner of the field in the desired area of the drawing. A box will
indicate the field area.
3. Next a prompt will appear on the Command Line asking you to “Locate the text
position.” This means to select a point near the field where the field’s
Installation/Location name will be printed. Select the point by pointing the
cursor and clicking.
262
4. The following Field Parameters dialog box will then appear.
At the top of this dialog box you can enter the Installation and/or Location name
to which you wish the field to be assigned. This can be an existing
installation/location, or one that has not yet been used. (The field can have the
same installation name as the drawing page where it appears, but it should have a
different location name if the field is to indicate remote devices.) Use the
drop-down list to display the names of existing installations and locations.
The Rename Existing Symbols to Inst/Loc of the Field checkbox determines
whether or not any existing symbols in the field area will be renamed
(reassigned) to the field’s installation and location. When the checkbox is on,
existing symbols are renamed.
There is also a set of fields for determining the characteristics of the text that will
label the field on the drawing.
The Text-Offset values indicate the distance from the field insertion point (first
corner) to the insertion point (write position) of the text. These values can be
altered if desired.
The Line Color and Line Type fields allow the characteristics of the field border
line to be set.
Drop-down buttons are available on the right side of each field for displaying
and selecting most of these text and line parameters.
263
5. When the desired values are entered, select the OK button to complete creation
of the field.
Mixed Device Assignment – In some cases, you may wish to have some devices
within a field remain associated with the Installation and Location of the drawing
page, i.e., be local rather than remote devices. In such a case, use the following
procedure:
1. Before creating the field, draw the devices that are to remain local.
2. Draw the field around the local devices. During the field creation process, set the
Rename existing symbols to inst/loc to name of the field checkbox to off (no
checkmark). This will cause the symbols to remain associated with the
Installation/Location of the current page.
3. Add the remote devices to the field area. Any new devices will be assigned to the
Installation/Location of the field.
Note: The logic functions of promis•e ordinarily do not allow two devices with the same
name to be assigned to the same Installation/Location. However, you may wish the
devices in a field to represent devices that exist on another page, and therefore you
would give the field the same Installation name as the other page where the devices
appear.
As shown in the following illustration, the device PB123 appears in Installation A,
Location B as a local device and also as a remote device in Installation X, Location Y.
The remote field has been assigned to Installation A, Location B.
Installation A Location B Installation X Location Y
Field Assigned To
PB123 Inst. A Location B
PB123
Ordinarily, when the device ID PB123 was entered a second time for the same
Installation/Location, a “Device already exists” error would be displayed and the ID
would not be allowed.
264
This restriction can be overridden by selecting the Duplicate Device ID checkbox in

the Device Properties dialog box when both symbols are placed. Therefore in the
example above, the ID PB123 would be assigned to both pushbuttons when they are
placed (or after they have been placed by right clicking on the device ID and changing
it).
Note: To avoid duplication, part numbers should only be assigned to one of the devices.
265
Wire Link Cross References

In a typical project it is very common to show a wire in one column of a page and
continue that wire onto the next column or even the next page. With promis•e you
must make a logical connection between these wires to tell the software that this is the
same wire. This will allow you to carry the wire number throughout the potential. To
do this you must place special symbols called wire links at the ends of the wires. Wire
links can be placed on horizontal or vertical wires.
In previous versions of promis•e, wire links were referred to as “signal cross
references.”
Note: Because they are used to connect or join wires, wire links should be assigned before
wire numbers are assigned.
125 CR124 AH126
126
127
ANSI-IEEE Wire Link Symbols
128
L1/2.01 L2/2.01
IEC Wire Link Symbols
P1/1 P1/2 P1/3
N1/1 N1/2 N1/3
Page 1 Page 2
266
The following wire link symbols are provided with the software. They differ as to the
graphics that represent the symbol and where the ID appears in relation to the
graphics. The user can also create custom symbols.
Symbol Name Description

HEXIN Wire Link, Hexagon Above
HEXINL Wire Link, Hexagon to the Left
HEXINR Wire Link, Hexagon to the Right
HEXOUT Wire Link, Hexagon Below
STARHEX2L (Star type) for use with the HEXOUT2L macro
STARHEX2R (Star type) for use with the HEXOUT2R macro
STARHEXOUT5 (Star type) for use with the HEXOUT5 macro
WLINK-B Wire Link, Std., Vertical ID to Bottom
WLINK-B-AD Wire Link, Arrow Down, Vertical ID to Bottom
WLINK-B-AU Wire Link, Arrow Up, Vertical ID to Bottom
WLINK-D-BD Wire Link, Box, Vertical ID to Bottom
WLINK-L Wire Link, Std., Horizontal ID to Left
WLINK-L-AL Wire Link, Arrow Left, Horizontal ID to Left
WLINK-L-AR Wire Link, Arrow Right, Horizontal ID to Left
WLINK-R Wire Link, Std., Horizontal ID to Right
WLINK-R-AL Wire Link, Arrow Left, Horizontal ID to Right
WLINK-R-AR Wire Link, Arrow Right, Horizontal ID to Right
WLINK-T Wire Link, Std., Vertical ID to Top
WLINK-T-AD Wire Link, Arrow Down, Vertical ID to Top
WLINK-T-AU Wire Link, Arrow Up, Vertical ID to Top
WLINK-T-BU Wire Link, Box Up, Vertical ID to Top
These symbols are selected and placed using the Design > Insert Wire Link
function. After the wire link symbols are placed, they will automatically display the
current cross reference values (i.e., they will indicate where the circuit continues or
originates).
267
Types of Wire Links
There are three main types of wire links.

Pair - Two wire link symbols cross-reference to each other.
Pair
L1/1.23
L1/1.43
Star Group - A group of wire links all cross-reference back to a single, primary
link.
Star Group
L1/1.23 L1/1.23 L1/1.23
L1/1.65
2.65
3.65
Multi-Reference Group - A group of wire links cross-reference to all the other

links in the group.
Multi-Reference Group
L1/1.23 L1/1.23
2.23 1.65
3.65 2.23
L1/1.65 L1/1.23
2.65 1.65
3.65 3.65
The type of wire link is chosen when the wire link symbol is placed.
268
Wire Link Index
The software knows where the wire link continues by a combination of the wire link
ID and a link index number associated with the ID.
The link index is assigned when you place the wire link symbol. You must assign the
same link index number to the device ID of the outgoing and incoming signals (the
index number can be any number you want). The software will evaluate the
connections in ascending order based on the index number. In drawings, the link
index number appears with a slash after the link tag (example: 1264/1) until the
corresponding wire link is placed at which time the index number is replaced with the
cross reference information.
Note: You cannot use the same link index number for more than one pair or group of signals
in the same project. Each outgoing and incoming pair or group must get a unique
index number.
Pairs example - The example below shows how you would specify the wire link IDs
with index numbers to make connections within the same page and between pages
that do not follow the page number order.
L1/1 L2/1 L1/3 L2/3 L1/2 L2/2

2 24 2 2
4 26 4 4
6 28 6 6
8 30 8 8
10 32 10 10
11 34 11 11
12 36 12 12
14 38 14 14
16 40 16 16
18 42 18 18
20 44 20 20
22 46 22 22
L1/1 L2/1 L1/2 L2/2 L1/3 L2/3

Page 1 Page 2 Page 3
In this example wires L1 and L2 begin on the left column of page 1 and are continued
to the second column of page 1. Then from the second column of page 1 they connect
to page 3. From page 3 they connect to page 2. Therefore, by using the index
numbers, your wire links do not have to follow page number order.
269
Star or Multi-Reference Group Example - In the following example, the same wire
link ID and index number are used on all the linked pages.
2
L1/1 L2/1
4 2
6 4
8 6
10 8 L1/1 L2/1
11 10
12 11 2
14 12 4
16 14 6
18 16 8
20 18 10
22 20 11
22 12
14
L1/1 L2/1 16
18
20
22
P.1 P. 2
P. 3
270
Placing a Wire Link Symbol
Wire link symbols are selected and placed using the Design > Insert Wire Link
function.
This will display a dialog from which you may select and place a wire link symbol.
When you place a wire link symbol, the following Wire Link ID dialog will appear.
Wire Link ID - The software automatically prompts the next available device ID
based on the format that is defined for the current project (see page 75). You can
accept the prompted Wire Link Tag or you can type a different ID in the fields
provided. After the first wire link is placed, the same ID will be prompted for any
additional wire links that are placed.
The value in the Link Index field sets the connection order between wire links with
the same ID. (See page 269.) The software will prompt a number, but you can use any
that you want. The software will evaluate the connections in ascending order based on
the index number. In drawings, the link index number appears with a slash after the
link tag (example: 1264/1) until the corresponding wire link is placed at which time
the index number is replaced with the cross reference information.
Use the Select Device ID button to assign the device ID by clicking on an

existing symbol in the same drawing that has the desired ID.
271
The Search button displays the Select Wire Link ID dialog. This dialog allows you to
select an existing wire link ID to assign to the new symbol.
The Search & Link button displays the Wire Link Usage dialog. This dialog allows
you to manually select an existing wire link with which to connect the wire link you
are placing. See page 272.
Link Type - Select one of the three link types: Pair, Star Group or Multi-Reference
Group. See page 268. If you select Star Group, the Primary checkbox becomes
available. Selecting this checkbox designates this wire link as the primary one in the
star group. All other wire links in the group will cross reference back to the primary.
If you select the Designate as Wire Starting Point checkbox, the current link will be
the starting point for the software to assign wire links with this ID. When you place a
wire link with a previously unused ID, this checkbox is selected by default. The
starting point affects the automatic wire numbering function: if the wire numbering
format uses page/line numbers and the starting point is on a higher numbered page
that is connected through a wire link to a lower numbered page, the wire number with
the higher page number will be assigned first and carried back to the lower numbered
page.
Select the Multiple Placement checkbox if you wish to place two wire links at a time.
You will be prompted to select the direction and insertion point for the second wire
link.
Search and Link Function
The Search & Link button in the Wire Link ID dialog displays the Wire Link Usage
dialog. You can also right click on a wire link and select Wire Link Usage from the
popup menu.
272
This dialog shows how the selected wire link ID is being used in the project. The Line
# column shows where each wire link symbol is located. The symbols are organized
into Pairs, Star Groups or Multi-Reference Groups. The items that are in the same pair
or group are currently cross referencing each other.
The wire link that is currently selected is highlighted in gold. Any wire links that are
unlinked appear in red and are marked with a “broken link” icon to the left. The
primary link in a star group is marked with a red asterisk (*) to the left.
You can drag and drop a wire link row from one group to another. When you drag a
wire link into a group that already has two links, the link type for that group will be
changed to Multi-Reference.
If the user drags a connection from a star type configuration to a different group such
that there is now only two wire links left in the star group the software will
automatically convert that star group into a pair type.
Note: When you drag a wire link to a different pair or group the order of the pairs listed in
the Wire Link Usage dialog may change.
If you right click on an individual wirelink, you can move it to a separate pair or
group.
273
Changing link type - In the Wire Link Usage dialog, you can right-click on the pair
or group name and change the link type from pair to star or multi-reference group.
Wire Link Notation Configuration
You can configure the format of wire link cross references with the Project Manager
Options dialog (see page 67). Under Project Options, select Display Formats and
click in the field for Wire Link. An Edit button will appear. Select this button to
access configuration. For more information, see page 83.
Re-sequence Wire Link Function
If, by moving or inserting pages in your project, the wire links no longer follow the
page order, there is a function to re-sequence the index numbers.
1. Select Review/Revise > Re-sequence Wire Link.

The Re-Sequence Wire Link dialog will appear, listing all the wire links in the
project.
2. Select the row for the wire link that you wish to re-sequence.
3. Select the OK button.
274
The wire link indexes for the selected ID will be renumbered to follow page numbers
in numerical order and position within pages.
Note on index numbers in macros and copied pages:

When placing a macro containing a wire link pair, the software will maintain the
pairing by assigning the first unused index number. If there is a single, unpaired wire
link in the macro, the software will assign it the last unpaired index number, if there is
one.
When copying a page that contain wire link pairs, the software will maintain the
pairing by assigning the first unused index number. If there is a single, unpaired wire
link in the copied page, the software will assign the next unused index number.
275
Wire/Device Connections
A number of functions in the software require information on how devices are
connected together in the schematics. These functions include the wire list report, the
terminal plan, the shortest distance wire routing function, wiring diagrams and others.
To obtain this information, the searches along wires using a set of priorities to
determine what is connected to what. On most wires, only a “from” and “to” need to
be determined; but in some cases there may be many devices all connected to the
same potential. The software searches these wires in the following manner:
Connection Search Priorities
1. Search for diagonal connections

Each diagonal connection has three “sides,” each of which can go to a single
device or to a group of devices. If there are additional diagonal connections
within these groups, they can be further divided into more groups.
In the following figure, there are two diagonal connections. The lefthand
diagonal goes to three groups (1, 2, and 3). Group 2 can be divided into two
more groups (4, 5). The following steps can then be applied to each group.
1 2
4
3 5
276
2. Search for wire links

Within each group from the previous step, find any wire links that exist and
divide devices into groups according to which side of the wire link connection
they are on. These groups are then sorted in the following priority:
In ANSI-IEEE drawings, top priority is given to the group with the highest Y
position value (including wires). If two groups have the same maximum Y value,
priority will be given to the one with the smallest X value. In other words, the
search goes top to bottom, left to right.
In IEC drawings, top priority is given to the group with the lowest X position
value (including wires). If two groups have the same minimum X value, priority
will be given to the one with the highest maximum Y value. In other words, the
search goes left to right, top to bottom.
In the following figure, group 2 would have priority in this ANSI-IEEE drawing
because it extends higher on the page.
1
2
3. Sort connections within each group

The software will search for connections in each group. The order of
connections in each group is determined by the ANSI-IEEE or IEC X/Y position
rules given in step 2.
4. List connections in group priority order
The wire list starts from first group's first connection point and end with last
group's last connection point.
277
Example - The following (ANSI-IEEE) figures show the application of the

connection search priority steps.
As mentioned above, the software will first check your circuit for diagonal wire
symbols. In the example below, we see that we have a diagonal wire symbol. This
breaks our evaluation into 3 groups. The order in which these groups are evaluated is
a combination of the "Top to Bottom, Left to Right" rule and the diagonal wire
symbol that was chosen.
The software will evaluate Group 1 and then Group 2 and finally Group 3.
Note: All of the group evaluations follow the rules defined in the Connection Search
Priorities section.
278
Group 1:
The software starts at the top-most symbol and moves in the direction indicated by the
arrows
Group 2:
The software starts at the top-most symbol of this group and moves in the direction
indicated by the arrows; notice it evaluated all the symbols on the left before going
through the wire link. Once on the other side of the wire link symbol, the software
starts once again with the top-most symbol.
279
Group 3:
This group is very similar to group 2 except there are two symbols on the upper-most
plane, notice the software goes top to bottom, left to right.
280
Wire Numbers
promis•e schematic diagrams are created with wire lines which the system can
recognize as wires (unlike drawing lines which are not recognized as having any
logical properties). The Design > Wire Numbering > Automatic Wire Number
function allows the software to automatically assign wire numbers throughout the
project.
The format of the wire numbers is user-definable: it can be based on line numbers or
sequential numbers with alphanumeric prefixes or suffixes. Color and gauge (size)
also can be assigned to each wire.
Wire numbers can be assigned automatically or manually as described in later
sections.
Wire Number Format
To format wire numbers, go to the project Options dialog and select Wire Options.
Use the Label Formats fields. For more information, see page 110.
Automatic Wire Number Assignment
The software can assign numbers to wires and other logical lines automatically.
Important: Before the system can assign wire numbers across columns and pages, wire link
symbols must be placed in the drawing to tie together the “hot” and “common” lines
on each column and page. See page 266. If this step is performed, automatic wire
numbering can extend across the pages of a project.
To assign wires automatically, select the Design > Wire Numbering > Automatic
Wire Number function.
The Automatic Wire Number dialog will appear.
281
In the Labeling Selection field, select whether you wish the new wire numbers to
apply to one of the following:
• Project - Number wires in the entire project.
• Select Pages - Number wires on selected pages (the Select Pages dialog will
open after you select OK.
• Select Objects - Number one or more selected wires on the current page.
In the Filters area, use the Mode field to select the drawing mode in which the wires
(or pneumatic lines, etc.) will be numbered. The Use field is used in conjunction with
the wire layers defined in the wire options mode (see page 108). You can select <All>
to number wires on all layers, or select a single layer on which wire numbering will
be performed.
282
In the Label Options area, the Omit Labels On Cables checkbox causes the software
to skip any wire branches that are designated as a conductor of a cable so that they do
not get a label. The wires connected to the cable will still receive labels. Select the
Terminal = Wire Number checkbox if you wish to renumber any terminal on a wire
with the assigned wire number.
In the Overwrite Options area, you can choose whether or not the new wire numbers
will overwrite any existing wire numbers. You can choose to overwrite manually
assigned wire numbers (Overwrite Manual Labels), automatically assigned wire
numbers (Overwrite Automatic Labels), or both.
In the Label Name area select elements that will comprise the wire label. You can
choose to include installation and/or location names. The First Number field allows
you to set the value at which sequential numbering will begin. If no value is entered,
numbering will start with 1. The Text Style field allows you to set the font name, size
and other attributes of the wire labels (use the Edit button to make changes). Select
the Calculate Branch Label checkbox if you wish the software to calculate unique
numbers for each wire branch. You can specify the first number (or letter) in the First
Number/Character field. (Note: to include branch numbers in the displayed wire
number you must also include the Branch # variable in your wire number format
settings. See page 106.) Use the Position field to select where the wire number will
appear on the wire segment. The choices are “Left or Top,” “Middle” and “Right or
Bottom.”
The Edit Group Wire Number button allows you to modify the prefix and/or suffix
on a selected group of wires. These are similar to the settings you can make in the
project options wire options (see page 111) which apply globally. When you select the
button, the Edit Prefix/Suffix dialog appears.
Make the desired prefix or suffix settings. You must make settings for all of the
wire types. Select the Same as Option checkbox if you wish to use the wire
labeling defined in the project options for that wire type. When you click in the
283
Numbering Profile field, a browse button will appear, allowing you to select one
of the existing wire numbering profiles. Enter any desired prefixes or suffixes in
the Prefix or Suffix fields. Select OK to return to the Automatic Wire Number
dialog.
In the Properties area you can assign various wire parameters. In order to assign these
properties you must first select the Overwrite Existing Wire Properties checkbox;
then the various properties fields will become active. (If you do not select the
checkbox, the properties that are already assigned to the wires will be used.) The
Gauge field allows a wire gauge (size) value to be assigned which will be associated
with the wires. The Color field allows a wire color to be assigned which will be
associated with the wires. The Type field allows you to select from a list of wire types
(bare copper, tinned copper, etc.) or enter your own description. The Voltage and
Current fields allow you to enter electrical values for the wire. The Part Number
field allows you to assign a part number to be associated with the wires.
Note: If a wire property (gauge, color, etc.) for a specific wire has no value, it is not
considered an existing property. Therefore, if you enter a new property value it will be
assigned to wires that currently have no value even if the Overwrite Existing Wire
Properties checkbox is not selected (provided that those wires are selected for wire
number assignment). For example, suppose wire number 100 starts with these
properties: Gauge: 14, Color: RED, Voltage: (blank). You then enter these properties:
Gauge: 12, Color: BLK, Voltage: 120 and run wire numbering without selecting the
Overwrite Existing Wire Properties checkbox. As a result, wire 100 will have these
properties: Gauge: 14, Color: RED, Voltage: 120 (only the voltage property was
assigned).
If you select the Use Cable’s Gauge/Color If Cable Exists checkbox, any gauge or
color values that are assigned to a cable through its device family will be retained.
By selecting the More Properties button the software will display a dialog containing
ten additional property fields that the user can assign. If a wire already has a property
value assigned it should never be overwritten by the auto label function.
284
Enter any additional properties you wish to associate with the wire and select OK.
Select OK in the Auto Label dialog to execute the automatic wire number assignment.
285
Manual Wire Number Assignment
To manually assign wire numbers, select Design > Wire Numbering > Manual
Wire Number.
You can also right-click on a wire and select Assign Wire Number from the pop-up
menu.
The software will prompt you to “Select Logical Line.” Select the wire that you wish
to number by clicking the left mouse button. The following dialog box will appear.
In the Label area, select elements that will comprise the wire label. You can choose to
include installation and/or location names. The Tag field allows you to enter a value
for the wire number.
Select the Hide checkbox if you wish the wire number to be hidden on the drawing.
If you are editing a wire with multiple branches that already has a wire number
assigned, you can select the Duplicate checkbox to make the wire number also appear
on the branch you selected.
In the Assigned field you can designate how the software will treat the wire number;
either as a manually assigned number or an automatically assigned number. This is
relevant when deleting wire numbers - you can choose to delete all wire numbers or
only the automatically assigned numbers.
286
The Text Style field allows you to set the font name, size and other attributes of the
wire labels (use the Edit button to make changes).
Use the Position field to select where the wire number will appear on the wire
segment. The choices are “Left or Top,” “Middle” and “Right or Bottom.”
The Distance field allows you to set how far the wire number is offset from the wire.
In the Properties area you can assign various wire parameters: The Apply properties
by field select Potential to apply the properties to all branches of the wire. Select
Branch to allow different properties to be assigned to different branches of the same
potential. The Use field displays the wire layer of the selected wire. You can select a
different layer name to assign the wire to another layer (these layers are defined in the
Wire Layer Configuration dialog, see page 108). The Gauge field allows a wire gauge
(size) value to be assigned which will be associated with the wires. The Color field
allows a wire color to be assigned which will be associated with the wires. The Type
field allows you to select from a list of wire types (bare copper, tinned copper, etc.) or
enter your own description. The Voltage and Current fields allow you to enter
electrical values for the wire. The Part Number field allows you to assign a part
number to be associated with the wires.
By selecting the More Properties button the software will display a dialog containing
ten additional property fields that the user can assign. If a wire already has a property
value assigned it should never be overwritten by the auto label function.
Select OK to assign the wire number.
Modify Wire Number
To modify an existing wire number, right-click on a wire and select Edit Wire
Number from the popup menu.
The Edit Wire Number dialog box will appear. Change the value in the Tag field or
any other wire properties. See page 286 for more information.
287
Delete Wire Numbers
To delete wire numbers, select the Design > Wire Numbering > Delete Wire
Number function. You can also select the Delete Wire Number button on the wiring
toolbar.
The Delete Wire Number(s) dialog will appear.
Select the Entire Project radio button if you wish to delete wire numbers throughout
the entire project.
288
If you wish to delete wires only on certain pages, select the Selected Pages radio
button. The Select Pages button will then become active, which displays the Select
Pages dialog. Use this dialog to choose the pages on which wire numbers will be
deleted.
Select the desired pages and select OK to return to the Delete Wire Number(s) dialog.
If you wish to delete all wire numbers regardless of whether they were assigned
automatically or manually, select the All (including manually assigned) radio button.
If you wish to delete only the wire numbers that were assigned automatically, select
the Only Automatically Assigned radio button.
Select OK to start the delete wire number function.
289
Find and Replace Wire Properties
The Find and Replace Wire Property function allows you to change wire properties
such as color, gauge and type. The replacement can affect the entire project or it can
be restricted to a single drawing set, installation, location, page, or even individually
selected wires. Use the following procedure:
1. Select the Review/Revise > Find/Replace Wire Property function. The Find
and Replace dialog will appear.
2. If you wish to select individual wires on the currently open page, go to step 3.
select the Select Objects button. If you wish to apply the replacement to a range
of pages or to the entire project, go to step 5.
3. To make a replacement on selected wires in the current page, select the Select
Objects button. Click on the desired wires in the drawing to select them. Right
click or press <Enter> when all the wires are selected.
290
4. You will return to the Find and Replace dialog. Enter the new properties that you
wish to assign in the appropriate fields.
Select OK to assign the new value(s).
5. To apply the replacement to a range of pages or to the entire project, select the
Quick Select button. The Quick Select dialog will appear.
In the Apply to field, select the range to which you wish to apply the change. The
selections are: Project, Drawing Set, Installation and Page.
In the Mode field, select the drawing mode that you wish to include in the
replacement.
291
In the Operator column, select a logical comparitor and enter a value in the
Value column. These selections determine the wires that will be affected by
defining the existing value or range of values that is to be changed.
Select Apply when you have made the desired entries. Go to step 4.
292
Align Wire Numbers
If there are wire numbers on parallel wire segments that are not lined up and you wish
to have them so, you can use the Align Wire Number function to align them in one
simple procedure.
1. Select the Design > Wire Numbering > Align Wire Numbers function.
2. You will be prompted on the command line to “Select objects.” Select the wires
that have the numbers you wish to align. Right click or press <Enter> when all
the wires are selected.
Select wires
Select lineup point
3. You will be prompted to “Select Lineup Point.” Select the position at which you
wish the numbers to line up. The wire numbers will move to line up on this
point.
293
Part Numbers
The parts database allows promis•e users to assign part numbers to device IDs in the
project. This allows the system to generate bills of material and other informative lists
based on the items in the schematics and the information in the database.
See Section 12 for information on accessing and editing the parts database.
Note: You can also assign a part number when a symbol is created so that the part number
is always prompted whenever the symbol is placed. See page 345.
Part numbers are assigned to device IDs within a given project. They are not
automatically assigned to the same symbols in a new project unless you copy part of
an existing project with part numbers assigned.
Note: If you create a macro containing elements which have been assigned part numbers,
these part numbers will be stored with the macro. (If desired, they can be altered after
the macro is placed by right clicking on the symbol and selecting the Part Number
function from the pop-up menu.)
Part numbers can be assigned to parent or child symbols. All part numbers are
associated with the device family so that you can edit them from any parent or child
symbol associated with that device family.
When a symbol is placed, the Device Properties dialog box appears, prompting the
user with a device ID for the symbol. This dialog box also contains a Part Number
field and a part number Search button.
Part number
search button
294
To assign a part number from the parts database select the Search button. This
will display the Select Part Number dialog box, which allows you to search the
database and make part number selections.
Select parts here
Selected parts are listed here
The Select Part Number dialog has a column for each data field in the parts database.
You can scroll from side to side to see additional columns. You can adjust the width of
the columns by dragging the edges in or out. The columns can be dragged to the left
or right to change their order.
To select a part, double click anywhere on the line for the desired part. The part will
then appear in the Selected Items area at the bottom of the dialog. You can assign
multiple part numbers to a single symbol, if necessary. If you wish to assign more
than one of the same part number, you can make an entry in the Quantity column in
the lower part of the dialog. By default, the first part you select is the “primary” part
number and is marked with a key-shaped icon (see page 298).
If you change your mind and wish to “un-assign” a selected part number, double click
on its line in the Selected Items area of the dialog.
295
The display of available parts initially lists any parts that are associated with the
symbol that you are placing (for example, if you are in the schematic drawing mode,
by the value in the Schematic Symbol column).
Sorting part numbers - By clicking on the column heading you can sort the listed
parts by the values in that column.
Filtering part numbers - At the top of the Select Part Number dialog there is an area
that allows you t filter the parts listing.
Select the Apply Project Filter checkbox to use the project parts filtering that was set
up in the Default Project Properties dialog in addition to the filtering you are
performing here (see page 71). There is a drop-down list for selecting the parts
database field to which you wish the filtering to apply. In the Like field enter the
value by which you wish to filter. This can include wildcard (*) entries such as *700*
for any part numbers containing the number 700. Select the Apply Filter button to list
the part numbers that match the filter. Select the Clear Filter button to remove the
filter.
Note: When you enter the part number dialog, the software filters the parts database to only
show part numbers for the symbol type to which you are assigning the part number. If
you press the Clear Filter button the symbol name filter will also be removed.
Additional filtering can be done using the drop-down list in each column heading that
allows you to filter the listing.
Select All to display all parts. Select Blanks to display all records with no entry in that
field. Select Non blanks to display all records where that field is not empty. You can
also select any values that are already displayed in that column (TB in the example
above). Select Custom to create a custom filter. The following dialog will appear:
296
The dialog will display the name of the current data field and provides two sets
of fields for entering criteria. You can use one or both sets of fields. You can
relate the two sets with an And condition or Or condition by selecting the
appropriate radio button. The first field for each set of criteria allows you to
select whether the criteria equals, does not equal, is greater than, is greater than
or equal to, is less than, or is less than or equal to the value in the second field.
The following example would display parts that have either PBNO or PBNC in
the Schematic_Symbol field.
Select OK to apply the filter to the parts listing.

Create a new part number - If you find you need to add a part number to the parts
database, you can select the Create Part Number button in the Select Part Number
dialog. After entering the new part number, you will be taken to the Parts Database
Editor dialog (see page 630) where you can enter additional data.
Use the Panduit button in the Select Part Number dialog to display the Panduit Form
dialog which allows you to filter and select the best available Panduit wire
containment parts. See page 640.
297
When you have selected the desired part(s), select the OK button to assign parts to the
symbol. The selected symbols will appear in the Device Properties dialog.
Selected parts
By default, the first part you select will be marked as the “Primary” part number. This
is the first of the selected parts that will be prompted when panel layout drawings are
created. If you have selected multiple parts, you can choose a different one as primary
if necessary.
You can also use the Add button in the Device Properties dialog to assign a part
number. When you select this button a blank set of part number fields are added and
you can enter the desired part number here without going to the parts database.
Note: If you enter a new part number using the Add button it will only be assigned to this
part; it will not be added to the parts database and will not be available for any other
part.
Select OK to complete the placement of the symbol. If you wish to see assigned part
numbers displayed in the drawing beside the symbols, select the # button on the
Display Settings toolbar. You can also use the View Options function under User
Options in the Options dialog (see page 427).
298
Drawing Mode Manager

The Drawing Mode Manager allows the user to edit the text that appears in menus and
dialog boxes for any given drawing mode. This includes menu selections and the
labels for buttons and fields in the dialog boxes.
To activate the Mode Manager, select Manage > Mode Manager.
The following dialog box will be displayed:
Existing drawing modes are listed in the Mode area on the left side of the dialog. The
Internal Parts Database field indicates which field in the parts database contains the
symbol name that is associated with each drawing mode.
Edit an Existing Drawing Mode
To edit an existing drawing mode, use the following steps:
1. Select the desired mode in the Mode area on the left side of the dialog.
2. Select the desired language in the Language field at the top of the dialog.
3. Click on the “+” icon beside the “promis•e” entry in the center column. The
display will expand to show all the dialogs for the selected drawing mode.
299
4. Click on one of the dialog names that you wish to edit. The field labels, button
labels and prompts for that dialog will be listed on the right side of the dialog in
the Unknown Mode column.
5. If you wish to compare these entries with another mode, you can select the other
mode in the Reference Mode field. The corresponding entries for this mode will
then appear in the Reference Mode column.
If you wish to copy all the entries in the Reference Mode column into the
Unknown Mode column, select the Copy button next to the Reference Mode
field. You will be warned that this will overwrite the existing entries in the
Unknown Mode column.
6. Select Apply or OK to save your changes.
Create a New Mode
To create a new mode, use the following procedure:
1. Activate the Mode Manager (Manage > Mode Manager).

2. In the Language field, select the dialog language for the dialogs in the new
mode.
300
3. Select the New button. The New/Rename Mode dialog will appear.
4. Enter a name for the new mode. This name must include the word “Mode” at the
end (example: PID Mode).
5. Select OK. The name of the new mode will appear in the list of modes on the left
side of the Mode Manager dialog.
6. Select (highlight) the name of the new mode and follow the instructions for
editing an existing mode in order to make text changes for the new mode (see
page 300).
7. Add a symbol field for the new mode in the parts database (example:
PID_Symbol). This field will hold the names of symbols that will represent
various parts in the new drawing mode.
8. Use the database Edit function in the promis-e Setup dialog to map the new
database field to one of the unused “User” fields. See page 417.
Rename a Mode
To rename a mode:
1. Activate the Mode Manager (Manage > Mode Manager).

2. In the Mode area of the dialog, select (highlight) the mode you wish to edit.
3. Select the Rename button. The Mode Create or Rename dialog will appear with
a field showing the current mode name and a field for entering a new name.
4. Enter the new mode name in the Enter a New Name field.
5. Select OK.
301
Edit Drawing Elements

Many editing functions can be found in the AutoCAD Modify menu. Other special
functions are located in the promis•e menus.
Delete (Erase) Drawing Elements
To erase (delete) an item or items from a drawing:
1. Select the object(s) you wish to delete, then right click on the objects and select
Delete from the popup menu.
In the AutoCAD version of the software you can also use the Modify > Erase
function.You will be prompted on the command line to “Select objects.” Select the
objects you wish to delete by clicking on them or by defining a window around them.
Then press <Enter> or click the right mouse button.
In the MicroStation version of the software you can also use the Delete Element
button in the Main tool box.
Copy Drawing Elements
To copy an item or items in a drawing:
1. Select the object(s) you wish to copy, then right click on the objects and select
Copy from the popup menu.
2. You will be prompted to “Specify base point” (AutoCAD version) or “Enter first
point” (MicroStation version). Select a point on the drawing that will be the
reference point of the copied objects.
3. You will be prompted to “Specify second point of displacement” (AutoCAD
version) or “Enter point to define distance and direction” (MicroStation version).
Select the destination reference point for the copied objects. The copied objects
will then appear at the new location.
In the AutoCAD version of the software you can also use the Modify > Copy
function.
In the MicroStation version of the software you can also use the Copy button in the
Main tool box.
302
Move Drawing Elements
To move an item or items in a drawing:
1. Select the object(s) you wish to move, then right click on the objects and select
Move from the popup menu.
2. You will be prompted to “Specify base point” (AutoCAD version) or “Enter first
point” (MicroStation version). Select a point on the drawing that will be the
reference point of the selected objects.
3. You will be prompted to “Specify second point of displacement” (AutoCAD
version) or “Enter point to define distance and direction” (MicroStation version).
Select the destination reference point for the selected objects. The objects will
then be moved to the new location.
In the AutoCAD version of the software you can also use the Modify > Move
function.
In the MicroStation version of the software you can also use the Move button in the
Manipulate tool box or you can simply select the elements and drag them to a new
position.
303
Replace Symbol
With the Replace Symbol function you can replace one type of symbol with another,
on one page, on selected pages, or throughout a project.
1. Select Review/Revise > Replace Symbol.

The Replace Symbol dialog will appear.
2. Use the Search field to select whether the replacement will occur on the current
page, on selected pages, or in the entire project.
3. In the Find Symbol area, choose the symbol that will be replaced. If you select
the Select Symbols radio button, the Select button will become active and you
can select one or more symbols in the current drawing. Only the individual
symbol(s) you select will be replaced. After selecting the desired symbol(s),
right-click or press <Enter> to return to the Replace Symbol dialog. If you select
the Enter Symbol Name radio button, you can enter the symbol name or use the
browse button to select from a list of symbols.
4. In the Replace with field, select the symbol that will replace the selected
symbol(s). Use the browse <...> button to make the selection.
The Select Symbol dialog will appear. You can distinguish between the symbol in
the catalog and the symbol in the project by looking at the Catalog column. This
column indicates whether the symbol exists in the project or in a specific catalog
as shown in the following figure.
304
Symbol exists in
project or in catalog
5. Use the checkboxes in the Maintain on New Symbol area to select aspects of the
existing symbol that you wish to preserve.
6. If you select the Use New Symbol Settings checkbox you can make settings that
will apply to the replacement symbols.
7. Select OK in the Select Symbol dialog and in the Replace Symbol dialog to make
the replacement.
305
Replace Device ID
The Replace Device ID function allows you to renumber device IDs so that they
consecutively follow the project’s device ID format. This is useful if there has been
editing within the project and the symbol IDs no longer represent their positions in the
schematic, or if there are gaps in the ID sequences.
1. Select Review/Revise > Replace Device ID.

The Replace Device ID dialog will appear.
2. Use the Search field to select whether the renumbering will occur on the current
3. To renumber device tags, select the Device Tag checkbox. All the devices IDs
in the selected portion of the project will be renumbered according to the format
that was selected in the Display Formats dialog in the project Options. See page
75 for more on device ID formats.
4. To renumber terminals or pins, select the Terminal/Pin-Plug checkbox. The
First Number field will become active where you can enter the number that the
first terminal (pin) in each strip (plug) is to have.
Select either the X or Y sort direction in the Sort Direction field to determine the
direction in which terminal numbering will proceed (X=horizontal, Y=vertical).
Terminals or pins are numbered in ascending order of X coordinate and
descending order of Y coordinate. If direction X is specified, terminals on the
same X coordinate as one another are numbered first, followed by terminals on
the next higher X coordinate, and so on across the page. The same applies by
306
analogy for direction Y. Terminal or pin numbers which are part of a macro are
treated as a single unit and numbered in such a way as to indicate their
association with one another.
5. To renumber IDs to match PLC addresses, there are two checkboxes. The
Apply Schematic (PLC wired Device ID) format checkbox will assign the PLC
address to the first non-terminal device connected to the PLC. The Apply
Schematic (PLC wired Terminal ID) format checkbox will assign the PLC
address to the first terminal connected to the PLC. These formats can be edited
in the project Options, Display Formats dialog. See page 75.
6. Select the OK button to perform the renumbering operation.
Replace Part Number
The Replace Part Number function allows you to replace assigned part numbers
throughout a project.
1. Select Review/Revise > Replace Part Number.

The Replace Part Number dialog will appear.
3. There are two fields labeled Old and New. In the Old field enter the existing part
number that you wish to change. (You can select the browse button in the Old
field to see a list of existing part numbers in the current project. You can select
from this list.)
307
4. In the corresponding New field to the right, enter the new part number that will
replace the old part number. You can use the browse button in the New field to
display the Select Part Number dialog (see page 295).
After you complete a set of old and new values, you can click below them to
enter additional sets.
5. Select the OK button to execute the change. The old part number will be changed
to the new part number wherever it has been assigned in the selected portion of
the project.
Replace Text
The Replace Text function allows you to globally replace device tags, symbol text or
standard text on the currently active drawing page.
1. Select Review/Revise > Replace Text.

The Replace Text dialog will appear.
3. In the Text Type field, select the kind of text you are replacing. The choices are:
Text (normal drawing text), Device Tag and Symbol Attribute.
4. In the Old field enter the text that you wish to replace. Any text entered will be
treated as a wildcard entry. In other words, it will find the specified characters
even if they exist in a longer string of text (of the selected type).
5. In the New field enter the new text that is to replace the old text.
308
6. Select the Case Sensitive checkbox to make the replace function apply only to
text that exactly matches the upper/lower case letters entered in the Old field.
7. Select the OK button to execute the replace.
8. The software will search for the first occurrence of the old text. It will then
display the text in the dialog box.
To Replace One Occurrence of the Text – Select the Exchange button.

To Replace All Occurrences of the Text – Select the Exchange All button.
To Skip the Replace for the Current Occurrence – Select the Next button. The
current occurrence will remain unchanged and the software will seek the next
occurrence.
To Exit the Replace Function – Select the Cancel button.
309
Replace Symbol Attributes
The Replace Symbol Attributes function allows you to replace attribute text of any
existing symbols based on device ID and attribute prompt from a text file.
1. Select Review/Revise > Replace Symbol Text.

The Replace Symbol Attributes dialog will appear.
2. In the Replace In area, select the radio button for Project if you wish to replace
text throughout an entire project. Select the Active Page radio button if you wish
to replace text only on a selected page.
3. In the Selected Project field, use the browse button to select the project where
the replacement will occur.
4. In the Selected Page field, select the page of the project on which you wish the
replacement to occur. (This field is only active if the Active Page radio button is
selected).
5. In the Input File field, use the browse button to locate and select the file that
contains the replacement symbol text.
The file containing the symbol text should be an ASCII file with lines containing
the following information, each item in quotes and separated by commas:
“installation”,“location”,“device tag”,“attribute name”, “new text string”
6. Select the OK button to perform the replacement.
310
Replace Title Block
If you wish to replace the title block on one or more pages with a different title block,
use the following procedure.
1. Select the Review/Revise > Replace Title Block function. The Replace Title
Block dialog will appear.
2. In the Search field, select how many pages you wish to affect with the change.
There are three choices:
Entire project - perform the replacement on all pages containing the
selected (old) title block.
Current page - perform the replacement on the current page only.
Select pages - perform the replacement on all pages containing the selected
title block.
3. In the Old field, select the existing title block that you wish to replace. When you
click inside the Old field, a browse button will appear which you can select to
display a list of title blocks used in the project.
Click on the name of the desired title block and select OK.
Note: If there is a default entry in the Name field, you may need to clear it to see a
complete list of title blocks.
311
4. In the New field, select the name of the title block that is to replace the old title
block. Use the browse button to display the Select Title Block dialog where you
can select the desired new title block.
5. If you wish to replace more than one type of title block, you can create additional
Old/New pairs.
6. Select the OK button to perform the title block replacement.
312
Replace Page Format
The Replace Page Format function allows you to replace the page format used by one
or more pages of your project.
1. Select Review/Revise > Replace Page Format.

The Replace Page Format dialog will appear.
3. In the Old field, select the existing page format that you wish to replace. When
you click inside the Old field, a browse button will appear which you can select
to display a list of page formats used in the project.
4. In the New field, select the name of the page format that is to replace the old
page format. Use the browse button to display the Select page format dialog
where you can select the desired new page format.
5. If you wish to replace more than one page format, you can create additional
Old/New pairs.
6. Select the OK button to perform the replacement.
313
Align Components
If there are symbols in a drawing that are not lined up and you wish to have them so,
you can use the Align Components function to align them in one simple procedure.
1. Select the Design > Align Components function.

2. You will be prompted on the command line to “Select symbols.” Select the items
you wish to align. Right click or press <Enter> when all the symbols are
selected.
Select
symbols
Select lineup point
314
3. You will be prompted to “Select the first point” and then to “Select the second
point.” Select two points that define a line upon which you wish the symbol
reference points to be located. The symbols will move to line up on this line.
Select first point
Select second point
The symbols will move to line up on this line.
You can align objects horizontally or vertically according to the points that you
select.
315
Edit Components
You can use the Edit Components function to perform the same operation on a
selected group of symbols.
1. Select Design > Edit Components.

2. You will be prompted to Select Objects. Select the desired items either by
windowing around them or by clicking on individual items. Right click or press
<Enter> to complete the selection.
3. The following pop-up menu will appear.
Select the desired operation from the menu. If applicable to the selected items,
the operation will be prompted for each item sequentially.
316
Wiring Diagrams
A wiring diagram is a drawing where layout symbols represent devices in the control
system. Unlike panel layouts, the software will place connection information beside
each layout symbol in the wiring diagram to show what the device is connected to.
The connection information comes from the schematic drawings or shortest distance
routing.
Wiring diagrams are useful for installation and troubleshooting.
Schematic Diagram Wiring Diagram
CR203
1273
A1 A2
Part Number: 700-N800-A1
Parts Database
When creating a wiring diagram, you select items from a list of device IDs that have
already been used in a schematic drawing. The software knows the part number that
was assigned to the device ID. It then uses the information in the parts database to
prompt an appropriate wiring diagram symbol for that part.
You can make settings related to wiring diagrams in the Wiring Diagram Settings
dialog (Devices tab). See page 100.
317
Wiring Diagram Symbols vs. Wiring Diagram Charts
In order to be prompted with a wiring diagram symbol while creating wiring

diagrams, you must assign the symbol name in the Wire_Diagram_Symbol field in
the parts database records for the parts that you use in your projects.
A number of wiring diagram symbols are included with the software. The names of
these symbols begin with “W-”. If you create your own symbols it is recommended
that you follow this naming convention, although it is not required.
Rather than using wiring diagram symbols, you also have the option of representing
devices with wiring diagram charts. These are small tables that show each device’s
connection information. No symbol creation or parts database editing is required
when using wiring diagram charts.
Wiring Diagram Symbol Wiring Diagram Chart
You can make settings related to wiring diagram symbols in the Wiring Diagram
Settings dialog (Devices tab). See page 100.
You can make settings related to wiring diagram charts in the Wiring Diagram
Settings dialog (Wiring Diagram Charts tab). See page 104.
See page 360 for information on creating wiring diagram symbols.
318
Create Wiring Diagram
To create a wiring diagram, use the following procedure:
1. Create a new page and select the Wiring Diagram Mode for the drawing mode.
(You can also switch an existing page to Wiring Diagram Mode.)
2. Select the Design > Insert Symbol > Insert Symbol By Device ID function.
The Insert Symbol(s) dialog will appear.
See page 219 for more information about this dialog. When working on a wiring
diagram page, there is one additional checkbox, Always Place Wiring Diagram
Chart, which you can select if you wish to place charts instead of wiring
diagram symbols.
319
3. Select one or more items to place in the drawing (hold down the <Shift> or
<Ctrl> keys to select more than one item). Select the Place Symbols button.
If you select more than one item you can place them as a group. You can make
settings to determine how symbols are placed as a group. To do this, select the
Group Settings link in the lower left corner of the Insert Symbols (by Device ID)
dialog. See page 548 for an explanation of these settings.
Note: Do not use the option Use X, Y from Parts database option in the Group Settings
dialog; the X and Y values in the parts database represent the footprint of the
panel layout symbol only.
4. You will be prompted to pick an insertion point in the drawing. Click on the
desired point. The symbol or chart will appear at this point.
5. The Symbol Text dialog will appear if the symbol includes any symbol text.
Make any desired changes to the displayed text. You can de-select the Visible
checkbox for a text if you wish it to be hidden in the drawing.
6. If connection information does not appear at the wiring diagram symbol, you can
select the promis-e Output > Update Wiring Diagram function. The Update
Wiring Diagram dialog will appear.
This dialog allows you to select the pages that will be updated. There are also
checkboxes that allow you to include (by selecting the checkbox) or exclude (by
de-selecting the checkbox) Terminals/Plugs, Devices and Cable Cross
References. Select OK to update the drawing with connection information.
If you wish the connection information to appear automatically as you place
symbols, you can select the Dynamically Update Connections checkbox in the
Wiring Diagram Settings dialog (Devices tab). See page 100.
320
Creating Drawing Elements
6 Creating Drawing Elements

This section describes how users can create custom symbols, macros, and other
elements for use in promis•e drawings.
Managing Symbols and Symbol Catalogs
Symbol Catalogs and Directories
Symbols, macros and device families for a given type of application or drawing
format are organized into symbol catalogs, also known as symbol libraries. There are
available catalogs for ANSI-IEEE (electrical), IEC (electrical), ISA (process control),
hydraulic, pneumatic and various other symbols.
Symbol Catalog Path
The catalog path determines which catalogs are available when creating projects. The
catalog path is set in the promis•e setup mode (see page 407).
The first directory named in this path is the directory where all newly created symbols
will be stored. Edit the path statement if you wish symbols to be stored in a different
directory.
You can view and edit the symbol catalog path in the promis•e Setup dialog. There is
a Modify Catalog Path button in the catalog manager toolbar (see page 323) that will
take you to the setup dialog. You can also select the promis•e Setup toolbar button in
Catalog Manager
The Catalog Manager provides an easy, organized interface to promis•e symbol

catalogs that is similar to the Windows Explorer. It allows you to copy, cut and paste
items between catalogs, and create new catalogs.
The Catalog Manager also allows you to create and edit device families.
Note: The Catalog Manager has an Auto Hide button in the lower left corner of the
dialog that sets whether or not the information area of the Catalog Manager will
be hidden if you move the cursor back to the drawing area (so it is not in the
way). If auto hide is turned on, you can click on the Catalog Manager title bar to
display the full dialog.
321
Creating Schematic Elements
To access the Catalog Manager, select Design > Catalog Manager. The following
dialog will appear
There is a folder on the left side of the dialog for symbol catalogs. By clicking on the
“+” icon next to the folder, you can expand the display to show a sub-folder for each
symbol catalog on your system. Each catalog has sub-folders for symbols, macros,
title blocks and families. When you select (highlight) one of these sub-folders, the
contents of that folder will be listed in the right side of the dialog.
322
On the right side of the catalog manager is a toolbar that allows you to perform
various operations. If you hover the cursor over a button, a tooltip will appear that
identifies the function.
Toolbar
When you select an individual symbol in a catalog, a thumbnail view of that symbol
will appear at the bottom of the catalog manager dialog.
If you wish to view a folder as thumbnails (rather than file details) select the
Thumbnail button on the toolbar. Select the Details button to return to the file details
view.
323
Renaming Items
If you wish to rename symbols, macros or title blocks, right-click on the item in the
the Catalog Manager and select Rename from the pop-up menu. The Modify dialog
will appear.
Change the name of the item and the description (optional) and select OK.
Searching for Items

If you wish to search the listing of items in the Catalog Manager, select the search
button (binocular icon). The Search dialog will appear:
Select the radio button for Name or Description depending on what you wish to
search for. Then enter a search string in the Search string field. You can make
wildcard (*) entries. Select OK. The listed items will be reduced to any items that
match your search string.
Moving Items from Catalog to Catalog

Use the following procedure to copy symbols, macros, families and title blocks from
one catalog to another.
1. Using the Catalog Manager, open the folder for the catalog that contains the
items you wish to copy.
2. Select the sub-folder for the items you wish to copy (Symbols, Macros, etc.).
The items in that catalog will be listed on the right side of the dialog.
324
3. Highlight the names of the items that you wish to copy.

4. Copy the items by one of these methods:
A. Right click on the selected items and select Copy from the popup menu.
B. Use the Copy toolbar button.
5. Open the folder for the catalog where you wish to place the copied items.
6. Select the sub-folder where you wish to place the copied items (Symbols,
Macros, etc.).
7. Paste the items using one of these methods:
A. Right click on the sub-folder and select Paste from the popup menu.
B. Use the Paste toolbar button.
Note: If you are copying macros or families, either the individual symbols included in
symbol or macro should also be copied to the new catalog or the catalog path to the
original catalog should be included on the system where you will use the copied
items.
Note: If you wish to remove the items from the original catalog at the same time, use the Cut
function instead of the Copy function.
Deleting Items from a Catalog
1. Using the Catalog Manager, open the folder for the catalog that contains the
items you wish to delete.
2. Select the sub-folder for the items you wish to delete (Symbols, Macros, etc.).
The items in that folder will be listed on the right side of the dialog.
3. Highlight the names of the items that you wish to delete.
4. Delete the items using one of these methods:
A. Right click on the selected items and select Delete from the popup menu.
B. Use the Delete toolbar button.
Creating a New Symbol Catalog Path and File

In the Catalog Manager you can use the Modify Catalog Path toolbar button which
will take you to the promis•e Setup dialog. See page 411 for additional instructions.
325
Categories Inside a Catalog

“Categories” are divisions (sub-folders) that you can create within a catalog. This
allows you to group items within the catalog in a way that is convenient for you.
To create a category, open the Catalog Manager, right click on the desired catalog
name, and select New Category from the popup menu.
The New Category dialog will appear, allowing you to enter a name for the category.
Enter the name and select OK.
Once the category is created, you can copy items into it by dragging from the right
side of the dialog into the category folder.
Export and Import Catalogs
The Catalog Manager has an export function that creates a backup file of an entire
catalog or of selected elements within a catalog. This exported file is useful both as a
backup and as a way of providing catalogs to another user.
326
Export Catalog
To export catalog content:
1. In the Catalog Manager, if you wish to export an entire catalog, highlight the
name of a catalog. If you wish to export selected items in a catalog, highlight the
names of the desired symbols, macros, title blocks, or families.
2. Select the Export Catalog button on the right side of the Catalog Manger.
Export Catalog
button
3. The Export Catalog dialog will appear.
In the Export Path field, use the browse button to select the folder where the
backup file will be stored.
When you select the browse button, the Save As dialog will appear, allowing you
to select the folder and also enter a name for the backup file in the File name
field. This file will be given a .ctlg extension automatically.
327
4. Select the With Category Info checkbox if you wish to include the category
information (see page 326) in the backup file.
5. Select OK to create the backup file.
The information in this file can be restored with the Import Catalog function.
328
Import Catalog
Information stored in a catalog backup file can be restored with the Import Catalog
function.
To import catalog content:
1. In the Catalog Manager, select the Import Catalog button on the right side of the
Catalog Manger.
Import Catalog
button
2. The Import Catalog dialog will appear.
In the Catalog File field, use the browse button to locate and select the catalog
backup file (.ctlg extension).
329
In the Target Path field, use the browse button to locate and select the folder
where you wish to restore the catalog (or the folder containing the existing
catalog into which you wish to restore the items).
If you are going to restore the backup as a separate catalog, enter the name that
you wish the restored catalog to have in the Catalog Name field.
If you wish to restore the backed up items into an existing catalog, select the To
Existing Catalog checkbox, then select the desired catalog in the Existing
Catalog field.
3. Select OK to restore the backed up items.
330
Create Symbols
Symbol Elements
Creating a symbol involves drawing the symbol itself and also defining the related
information shown in the following illustration.
CR 103 Device ID
8501XD1000V02 Part Number
Reference Point
Connection Points
A B Connection Point Text
CONTROL Symbol Text

RELAY
ELEMENTS OF AN ANSI-IEEE SYMBOL
Reference Point
A1
Device ID Connection Points
-K2
8501XD1000V02
A2 Connection Point Text
Part Number
LOW TEMP RELAY Symbol Text
ELEMENTS OF AN IEC SYMBOL
Device ID – A device ID tag must be defined for intelligent symbol types. The rest of
the device ID is added to this tag at the time the symbol is placed on the drawing. In
the illustration above, “CR” is used as the tag for control relay device IDs. The rest of
the ID is filled in automatically when the symbol is placed in a drawing and might
consist of consecutive numbers, page number, line number, or a combination of these
(this is determined in the Project Parameters dialog box when a new project is
created).
Insertion Point – An insertion point must be defined. This point will be positioned on
the cursor when the symbol is placed in the drawing.
Connection Points – These points determine where wires will break when the symbol
is placed on a wires or when a wires is drawn through the symbol. Wires must be
drawn to connection points on symbols to allow the connections to appear in the wire
list.
331
If desired, Connection Point Text can be defined that will automatically label the
connection points when the symbol is placed (such as A and B terminations on a relay
coil).
Symbol Text – This is optional, additional text which will appear with the symbol.
Symbol text can be fixed text, or it can be configured to prompt the user for
information (Amp values, for example) when the symbol is placed.
Part Number (Optional) – You can enter a part number during symbol creation so
that this part number will be automatically prompted whenever the symbol is placed.
332
Symbol Creation Procedure
Symbols created with this procedure become part of a promis•e symbol catalog and
can be accessed at any time during drawing creation. The symbol will be stored in the
first catalog search path (see page 411).
To create a symbol:
1. Select Manage > Create Symbol. The following dialog will appear.
Note: The Symbol Creation Wizard dialog consists of step buttons on the left and a
settings area on the right. There is an Auto Hide button in the lower left corner of
the dialog that sets whether or not the settings area will be hidden if you move
the cursor back to the drawing area (so it is not in the way). If auto hide is turned
on, you can click on the desired step button to display the setting area again.
Auto Hide button
333
In this step you have four options for creating a symbol:

• Select the New Symbol (From Scratch) radio button if you are creating a
new symbol that will be added to the catalog and you will be drawing the
graphics as you create the symbol.
• Select the New Symbol (Import Symbol Graphics) radio button if you are
creating a new symbol that will be added to the catalog and you will be
using existing graphics (blocks or cells or elements on a drawing) while
creating the symbol.
• If you wish to select an existing symbol on which to base the new symbol,
select the New Symbol (Based on Another Symbol) radio button. A field
is provided where you can enter the existing symbol’s name or select the
browse <...> button to display the Select Symbol dialog from which you
can preview and select a symbol.
• If you merely wish to edit some aspect of an existing symbol (without
creating a new symbol), select the Modify Existing Symbol radio button
and use the browse button to select it.
Note: The step numbers shown in the Symbol Creation Wizard will vary, depending on
which radio button you selected in step 1.
Select the Next button to continue.
334
2. Import Symbol Graphics - The following dialog will appear if you selected the
New Symbol (Import Symbol Graphics) radio button in step 1 (if you did not,
continue to the next step).
In this step you define the graphic elements of the symbol. There are several
ways to accomplish this. You can:
• Select elements that already exist in the current page
• Draw the desired elements
• Use an existing block (AutoCAD) or cell (MicroStation)
To select elements in the current page, select the Select Objects button. In the
drawing screen, you will be prompted to select objects. Click on or window
around the objects that will make up the symbol. Press <Enter> when all items
have been selected. Select the Next button to continue to the next step. If you
wish to de-select the objects you have selected, click on the Clear Selection
button.
To draw elements for the symbol, go to the drawing screen, draw the symbol
graphics using the line, circle, rectangle and other drawing tools as needed.
(Note: use lines, not wires to draw symbol graphics.) When the desired graphics
are drawn, return to the Symbol Creation Wizard and use the Select Objects
button as described above. Select the Next button to continue to the next step. If
335
you are basing the new symbol on an existing symbol (selected in step 1), the
graphic elements of that symbol will appear in the drawing area when you define
the device ID in a later step.
To use an existing block, select the browse button next to the Block/Cell field.
Browse to the desired block file and select the Open button. The path and
filename for the block or cell will appear in the Block/Cell field. If the block
contains attribute text, select the Extract Block Attributes button to list these in
the Mapping Attributes area of the dialog. You can then use the right-hand
column to assign these to a corresponding promis•e attribute.
When you click in the promis•e Attribute column, a list of available attributes
will appear from which you can make a selection.
Note: If you don’t wish to map the attributes at this time you can do so later in the
Specify Attributes step.
Select the Next button to continue. A blank drawing screen will appear with the
prompt “Select block insertion point” click on a point in the drawing screen to
insert the block.
336
3. Specify Symbol Type - The following dialog will appear.

Note: If you are creating a symbol from scratch, a blank drawing screen will appear.
Draw the symbol graphics using the line, circle, rectangle and other drawing
tools as needed. Use lines, not wires to draw symbol graphics. Be aware of the
grid spacing that will be used in your drawings so that connection points are
properly spaced; connection points must always be on this grid. When the
desired graphics are drawn, return to the Symbol Creation Wizard and continue.
Define the characteristics of the symbol that determine how the symbol behaves
in drawings.
The Preferred Orientation radio buttons determine how the software will look at
the symbol when generating a connection list. It also determines how wires will
be broken or closed when the symbol is placed or moved. Select Horizontal if
the symbol is to be scanned from left to right (in other words, if the wire will be
horizontal in relation to the symbol). Select the Vertical button if the symbol is to
be scanned from top to bottom (i.e., if the wire will be vertical in relation to the
symbol, as in IEC format drawings).
337
Preferred orientation horizontal Preferred orientation vertical
As an option, you can specify a prefix for the cross reference for this symbol. In
the Cross Reference Prefix field, select a prefix from the drop-down list (NO,
NC, INPUT, OUTPUT). If you wish to accentuate this cross reference text, there
is an underscore setting in the Device Cross Referencing dialog (see page 79).
In the Symbol Type area, select the radio button for the symbol type that best
matches the symbol you are creating.
4. Import Connection Points - The following dialog will appear.
This step allows you to import connection point designations from an existing
symbol or family. These can then be used in the “Place Connection Points” step,
saving you from having to remember and re-enter this information. If you don’t
wish to import connection points, select Next to go to the next step.
Note: If you are basing the new symbol on an existing symbol (selected in step 1), the
connection points of that symbol will appear in the drawing area when you
define the device ID in a later step, so you can skip this step.
Click on the Select Symbol button to display the Select Symbol dialog from
which you can preview and select a symbol.
338
If you are creating a panel layout or wiring diagram symbol, the Import
Connection Points From a Family radio button will be available, allowing you
to import connection designations from parent and child symbols at the same
time. Use the Select Family button to select the desired family.
5. Specify Device ID - The following dialog will appear.
In this dialog you enter a tag mnemonic. This is the portion of the device tag that
will be given to every instance of this symbol, such as “K” or “CR” for a relay
(see page 77).
Select the Suppress Display of ID checkbox if you wish the device ID to be
suppressed by default. When the symbol is placed, the Suppress Device ID
checkbox in the Device Properties dialog will be selected by default. (See page
221.)
Select the Default Tag = ? checkbox if you wish the user to be prompted to enter
the device tag when the symbol is placed instead of having the software
automatically assign the device tag. Typically this is done for child symbols so
that you can associate the child symbol with the device tag of a selected parent
symbol. When the symbol is placed, the Device Tag field in the Device
Properties dialog (see page 221) will show the tag mnemonic followed by a “?”.
339
Enter the desired character(s) for the tag in the Tag Mnemonic field. Then select
the Place button to select a position for the device tag by clicking in the drawing.
(Note: you may wish to zoom in on the graphic before selecting Place.) After
you select a position, the dialog will reappear with the coordinates of the
selected point in the X and Y fields. Coordinates are from the drawing origin.
You can adjust the values, if desired.
If the symbol type you selected in step 2 was Terminal or Plug, there will also be
Terminal/Pin # fields in the dialog. The Place button for these fields allows you
to select a position for the terminal block number on a terminal symbol. In other
words, the device tag will identify the terminal strip and then you will have this
second value to identify the block within the terminal strip. Similarly, for plug
symbols you can pick a position for the pin number. After you pick a position,
the coordinates will appear in the X and Y fields.
Use the Default Text Style field to set the appearance of the device tag. Select
the Edit button to display a dialog where you can make various text settings.
Use the Text Align field to set the orientation of the text to the point that is
selected. Text will be placed in relation to the selected point as shown:
Top Left: TEXT Top Center: TEXT Top Right: TEXT
Middle Left: TEXT Middle Center: TEXT Middle Right: TEXT
Bottom Left: TEXT Bottom Center: TEXT Bottom Right: TEXT
Baseline Left: TEXT Baseline Center: TEXT Baseline Right: TEXT
Use the Insert Symbol button to place an existing symbol in the symbol you are
creating. This is useful, for example, if you wish to put contact symbols in a
cross reference symbol for a relay or add fuse symbols to a disconnect switch.
340
When you select the button, the Insert Symbols dialog appears, allowing you to
select a symbol. If you only want the graphic portion of the symbol you are
inserting, you will have to delete the unwanted connection points, etc.
6. Place Connection Points - The following dialog will appear.
If you have imported connection points in an earlier step or are basing the new
symbol on an existing symbol, the connection points will be listed. If not:
A. Enter the number of connection points that the symbol will have in the
Number of Connection Points field. Press the <Enter> key. Fields will
appear for the number of connection points that you entered.
341
B. For each connection point, enter in the Visible Text field any connection
point designations that you wish to appear beside the connection point. If
you want hidden text to be associated with the connection point, enter it in
the Hidden Text field.
C. In the Type column, select the type of connection point being defined. The
choices in the drop-down list will vary depending on the kind of symbol
being created. Choices include Schematic, Hydraulic, Pneumatic and PLC.
D. In the Potential Group field, you can assign a potential group name. Usually
each connection point has a different potential group name. If you make no
entry in this field, the software will assume the connection points have
different potential groups. However, if two or more connection points on the
symbol are given the same potential group name and are connected to wires,
the same potential (wire number) will be assigned to these wires. In other
words, the potential will carry through the symbol. This is useful when
working with flex I/Os. Note: when creating terminal symbols, the same
potential group name is assigned to all connection points by default.
E. If you are creating a terminal or plug symbol, there will be a Configuration
field for each connection point where you can designate which side of the
terminal or plug the connection point is to represent, or if it is to be a jumper.
F. (At this point you may wish to zoom in on the symbol graphic.) When you
are ready to position the connection points, select (highlight) one from the
list and select the Place button. Following the prompts on the command line,
select the position for the connection point and then the position for the
connection point text. Repeat this step for each additional connection point.
Use the Select All button if you wish to select all the connection points and
place them one after another.
Note: It is important to turn on the Snap function when placing connection points so
that they are correctly positioned on the drawing grid. Connection points must
always be on this grid.
342
G. If you check the Array checkbox you will be able to place a group of
connection points in one step. (Use the Select All button and when you place
the connection points. The Array dialog will appear.)
This dialog allows you to define the number of rows and columns, enter
spacing (offset) values for the connection points and set the placement prior-
ity for rows and columns.
Use the Default Text Style fields to set text parameters for the connection point
text (before they are placed). There are separate fields for Connection Point,
PLC Address and PLC Function Text. These settings can be overridden by the
Use Text Style checkbox under Symbol Text in the project options Text Settings
dialog (see page 98). Use the Text Align field to set the orientation of the text to
the point that is selected.
If you imported an existing block with attributes in an earlier step, you can use
the Map Connection Point Text button to select the existing text and then
choose a connection point position. Follow the prompts.
343
If you select the Connection Point Editor button, all the connection points will
be listed together in a table-format editor allowing you to easily edit various
parameters. It is possible to select multiple connection points in this editor and
assign the same value to all of them.
344
7. Specify Attributes - The following dialog will appear.
Symbol attributes can be set up to prompt for text that is entered by the user at
the time the symbol is placed. Select the desired attribute from the list and then
select the Place button (the one immediately below the attribute list) to place in
on the symbol. There are tabs that group the available attributes into Standard
Attributes, Cross Reference Attributes and Part Database Attributes.
If you wish a particular value to be assigned automatically to this symbol
whenever it is placed, scroll down to the relevant attribute and enter the desired
value in the Default Value column. For example, you can enter a part number for
the PartNumber attribute that you always want to assign to this symbol.
After you place an attribute in the drawing, it will be marked in the list with an
“X” in the left-most column.
If you are basing the symbol on imported symbol graphics with attributes, the
Map Existing Text button will be active. This allows you to map an attribute
from the list to one that exists in the drawing. Select the desired attribute from
the list, select the Map Existing Text button, and then click on the desired
attribute in the drawing.
345
If you wish to combine attributes, select the Build button to display the Build
Expression dialog. Here you can select and combine attributes into an
“expression.” Select an attribute and use the Add to Expression button to add it
to the expression displayed at the bottom of the dialog.
Select OK to return to the symbol creation wizard and then use the Place button
to place the expression.
If you wish to add an attribute to the list of attributes, select the “+” button at the
bottom of the list. The Append Attribute dialog will appear.
346
Enter values for the name of the attribute, a prompt that will appear when the
symbol is placed, a default value, and whether the attribute will be visible or
invisible in the drawing. Select the “Use same text” checkboxes to use the same
values in all languages. Select OK to enter the new attribute. It will now be
available when creating new symbols.
Use the Text Style field to set text parameters for the attribute texts (before they
are placed). Use the Text Align field to set the orientation of the text to the point
that is selected.
The cross reference attribute can be placed on a standard symbol to control the
position of cross reference text if it is a child symbol or duplicate ID.
347
8. Specify Position - The following dialog will appear. In this dialog you select the
insertion point for the symbol and for the cross reference text (if any).
The insertion point represents the cursor position when the symbol is placed in
the drawing. It determines how the symbol is placed in relation to the selected
point. Use the Pick Point button and click on the desired point in the drawing
screen. The coordinates of the selected point will appear in the X and Y fields.
These values can be adjusted if desired.
Select the Snap to Endpoint checkbox if you wish the symbol to automatically
snap to the nearest endpoint of the wire upon which it is placed. This feature is
often used for wirelink symbols and PLC child symbols.
The cross reference symbol position will determine where the cross reference
symbol for a parent symbol will appear in relation to the symbol (if there is a
cross reference symbol). Use the Pick Point button and click on the desired point
in the drawing screen. The coordinates of the selected point will appear in the X
and Y fields. These values can be adjusted if desired. Use the Delete button to
remove a selected point.
348
9. The following dialog will appear. In this dialog you enter the symbol’s name and
description and select a catalog in which it will be saved.
Enter a name for the symbol in the Symbol Name field.

Enter a description for the symbol in the Description field.
Use the Search Language Phrases button to select and place phrases from the
language database into the Description field. These phrases are displayed in the
language that is currently selected (Project Options - Display Languages).
In the Save in field, select the symbol catalog in which the symbol will be
stored.
Select Finish to save the new symbol.
349
Modify an Existing Symbol
If there is an existing symbol that you wish to modify, use the following procedure:
2. Select the Modify Existing Symbol radio button. Enter the existing symbol’s
name in the field or select the browse <...> button to display the Select Symbol
dialog from which you can preview and select a symbol.
3. Select Next to continue. The selected symbol will appear on the drawing screen
so that you can change the graphics, if desired. To change other aspects of the
symbol, go to the appropriate step of the Symbol Creation Wizard and follow the
same instructions used for creating a new symbol (see page 333).
4. When you have made the desired changes, go to the last step of the Symbol
Creation Wizard and select the Finish button to save the symbol.
5. You will be prompted that the symbol already exists and asked if you wish to
overwrite it. Select Yes.
350
Creating an Example PLC Parent Symbol
Programmable logic controllers (PLCs) are a part of many control systems. With
promis•e, symbols can be created that represent PLC input and output modules. The
symbol can be designed to prompt the user for information such as rack and module
number, and automatically place address numbers and descriptive text.
In this section we will create an example PLC symbol like the one shown below
called EXPLC8.
L1 L2
ANSI-IEEE Example
101
102 PLC102
RACK: 1 Device ID
103
MODULE: 0
104
Rack And
105 1001 Module Group
106 01
107 1002
02 Terminal Numbers
108
109 1003 Limit sw. 1 I/O Addresses

110 03
111 1004 Limit sw. 2

112 04
Descriptive Text
113 1005 Limit sw. 3
114 05
115 1006 Limit sw. 4

116 06
117 Limit sw. 5

1007
118 07
119 1008 Limit sw. 6

08
351
IEC Example
-S3 -S4 -S5 -S6 -S7 -S8 -S9 -S10
PLC102
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08
RACk: 03 1001/01 1001/02 1001/03 1001/04 1001/05 1001/06 1001/07 1001/02

8
MODULE: 02
LINE 1 START
LINE 2 START
LINE 3 START
LINE 4 START
LINE 5 START
LINE 6 START
LINE 7 START
LINE 8 START
Device ID Rack And
Module Group Terminal Numbers I/O Addresses Descriptive Text
This symbol is considered a parent symbol. Child symbols for the individual I/O
points can be located throughout the schematics in the same project.
The following procedure describes how to create a symbol for an eight point PLC
input module.
1. Select the Manage > Create Symbol function. The Symbol Create Wizard will
start. In this example we are creating a symbol “from scratch” so select the New
Symbol (from Scratch) radio button in the first step and then select Next.
352
2. In step 2, select the symbol’s orientation (how wires will connect). Usually this
is Horizontal for ANSI-IEEE drawings and Vertical for IEC drawings.
Also select the PLC radio button to define the symbol type.
Select Next to continue.

3. We will skip step 3 (Import Connection Points) of the Symbol Create Wizard
because we are not going to import connection points in this example. However,
it is possible, if you have an existing PLC symbol with a similar connection
point layout, to import them and save some time.
However, at this point we can draw the graphics of our symbol. Use the Draw >
Line function to draw the sides of a rectangle about 2 x 9 inches (50 x 230 mm.).
It must be long enough for the input lines and wide enough for the address text.
If necessary the rectangle can be redrawn before saving the symbol.
If desired, use the circle and drawing line functions to draw terminal screw
heads. (There is also a symbol named “SCREW” included in the library. You
will have to select a smaller grid size to do this, but place the screws on your
standard schematic line (grid) spacing. Leave about 1 inch (25 mm) free at one
end of the box for rack and module information.
353
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
Continue to step 4.
4. In step 4 (Specify Device ID) enter “PLC” in the Tag Mnemonic field. Select the
Place button and click on a the desired position for the device ID in the drawing.
354
5. In step 5, define the symbol’s connection points.

Enter the value 8 in the Number of Connection Points field. Press the <Enter>
key. Eight fields will appear in the dialog.
In the Visible Text column, enter a connection point designation for each
connection point: 01, 02, 03, 04, 05, 06, 07, 08. (These designations will be
overwritten if the device family that is selected when the symbol is placed
contains different designations.)
The Type field should contain the entry “PLC Address” automatically because
we defined this as a PLC symbol in step 2.
In the Input/Output column, select whether each point is an input or an output.
Text Settings - If you wish to set the default text styles, make the desired
settings in the Default Text Style area before you place the connections points.
Changes to text settings will not affect connection points that have already been
defined. These settings can be overridden by the Use Text Style checkbox under
Symbol Text in the project options Text Settings dialog (see page 98).
355
To position the connection points, select (highlight) one from the list and select
the Place button. Use the Select All button if you wish to select all the
connection points and place them one after another. Following the prompts on
the command line, select the position for:
A. Connection point - The point where the wire will attach to the symbol.
B. Connection point text - The connection point designations you entered above
in the Visible Text column.
C. Address text - The PLC address for each point. Note that the addressing
format is set in the project options PLC dialog (see page 88) - it is not part of
the symbol itself.
D. Function text - Descriptive text for each point.
E. Repeat these steps for each additional connection point.
6. In step 6 symbol attributes can be set up to prompt for and display text that is
entered by the user at the time the symbol is placed. With this symbol, we want
the user to be prompted for rack and module numbers.
First we must enter plain text on the symbol to act as labels for these values.
Enter the words “RACK:” and “MODULE:” as shown.
356
Then in the step 6 dialog, make any desired text settings for the rack and module
values in the Text Style field. Then scroll down the list of attributes (the Standard
Attributes tab should be selected) pick the Rack attribute, select the Place button
at the top of the dialog and click on a position next to the “RACK:” text that you
placed in the symbol.
Do the same for the Module attribute. The attribute value positions will be
marked by “?” characters.
357
7. In step 7, select the insertion point for the symbol.
Select the Pick Point button in the Insertion Point area of the dialog and click
on the upper left corner of the symbol. A red arrow marks the selected point.
358
8. Finally in step 8, name and save the symbol.

Enter “EXPLC” in the Symbol Name field. Enter a description of the symbol in
the Description field.
In the Save in field you can select the catalog in which to save the symbol.
Select the Finish button to save the symbol.
359
Create Wiring Diagram Symbol
Wiring diagrams are graphical representations of connection information. The wiring

diagram includes a wiring diagram symbol for each device in the schematic with
connection data appearing next to it. (Alternatively, wiring diagrams can use tables to
display connection data, in which case special wiring diagram symbols are not
required.) See page 318 for more information.
A number of wiring diagram symbols are provided with the software. These have
symbol names that begin with “W-” characters (but this naming format is not
required).
General Points About Wiring Diagram Symbols
Wiring diagram symbols are related to the schematic symbols by the connection point
text; the wiring diagram connection point must have the same value as the
corresponding connection point in the schematic.
Every connection point has a sequence number that uniquely identifies it. The
sequence number is defined by the order in which the connection points are inserted
in the symbol during symbol creation. Depending upon whether the schematic
symbol has a family or not will determine how the wiring diagram function relates the
connection points from the schematic to the wiring diagram symbol.
No family assigned - When there is no family defined the software will simply match
the connection point sequence numbers from the schematic symbol with the wiring
diagram symbol as shown below:
Schematic Symbol Wiring Diagram Symbol
Sequence Number Connection Point Sequence Number
1 X1 1
2 X2 2
Family assigned - When a family has been defined we must look at the family
definition and how the wiring diagram symbol was created. Within this case there are
two possible scenarios depending upon how the user created the wiring diagram
symbol:
1. The user creates the wiring diagram symbol with a sufficient number of
connection points to handle all the possible connection points that might exist in
the schematic. The user does not associate any particular role (parent, child, etc.)
to these connection points.
If no role is defined for the wiring diagram connection points, the software
identifies the different roles in the family and sorts the connection points in the
order that the roles are listed in the family definition. Then it sorts the connection
360
points within each role by their connection point sequence number. The software
then matches the first schematic connection point with the first wiring diagram
connection point and so on down the line. The result would be the mapping
shown in the following table:
2. The user creates the wiring diagram symbol with a sufficient number of
connection points to handle all the possible connection points that might exist in
the schematic. The user associates a role (parent, child, etc.) to each connection
point.
The most complicated example of this type would be a family like "2FC" for a
form C contact configuration. This type of family has alternate symbols defined
for it where at least one of the alternate symbols requires three connection points
whereas the other symbols only require two connection points. The only way to
make sure that the software maps the connection points correctly would be to
associate each wiring diagram connection point with a particular role in the
family.
In order to handle terminal symbols that have a family associated with them, some
special steps are required. When you have a family of terminals you will often have
one single wiring diagram symbol that represents several terminal numbers. In this
case the user can place multiple terminal number attributes and associate a role with
each terminal attribute. This will be used as the common thread to relate the
connection points with a particular terminal number attribute.
Four Pole Relay Example

In this example we will create a wiring diagram symbol for a four pole relay.
361
2. In step 2, select the Wiring Diagram radio button to define the symbol type.
(The other settings in this dialog are not relevant for wiring diagram symbols.)
362
3. In step 3 (Import Connection Points) of the Symbol Create Wizard we can

import connection points from a similar symbol or family to save time.
First, however, we will draw the graphics of our symbol. Use graphical drawing
functions (not wires). Make the symbol approximately 4 inches (100 mm) tall.
Once the graphics are drawn, select the Import Connection Points From a
Family radio button.
Then select the Select Family button. The Device Family dialog will appear.
Select the family 22, which consists of a relay with 2 normally open and 2
normally closed contacts. Select OK in the Device Family dialog.
Select Next to continue to the next step.
363
4. In step 4 (Specify Device ID) you can enter something in the Tag Mnemonic
field if you wish there to be a default device tag, but it is not required. The ID
will be taken from the schematic symbol that the wiring diagram symbol is
representing.
Enter a question mark as a default value in the Tag Mnemonic field. If desired,
you can make text settings for the device ID in the Default Text Style field.
Select the Place button and click on the desired position for the device ID in the
drawing.
Place at position
where device ID
is to be displayed
?
Place symbols
364
Use the Insert Symbol button in step 5 to select and insert the coil (CR) and
contact (CRNO, CRNC) symbols. This will visually mark the position of the
parent and child symbol data. Delete the function text for the coil symbol.
5. In step 5 we will place connection points on the symbol to set where the
connection information will be displayed.
The imported connection points from the family that we selected in step 3 are
displayed. The Visible Text entry (?) is a default value for the connection point
text. The software will replace the visible text with the connection expression
defined in the Wiring Diagram Settings dialog (see page 100). The Hidden Text
entries are the connection point designations that were defined in the family. (If
we had not imported connection points from a family or symbol we could make
an entry in the Number of Connection Points field to create the connection
points.) Because we imported connection points for this symbol from an existing
family, there are also entries in the Role column for each connection point
indicating the parent or child that the connection applies to.
365
Make the desired text settings before placing the connection points. Use Middle
Right text alignment for connections on the left side of the symbol. Use Middle
Left text alignment for connections on the right side of the symbol.
Select a connection point and then the Place button. You will be prompted on the
command line to select the connection point position and then the connection
point text position. The placement of the connection points isn’t critical, but they
should be on the same side of the symbol as the corresponding connection point
text.
After a connection point is placed, it is marked with an “X” in the symbol
creation wizard in the left-most column.
You can use the Connection Point Editor button to display all the placed
connection points in a single table for easy editing of various settings.
6. In step 6 you can specify symbol attributes. We will not be using attributes in
this example.
?
? ?
? ?
? ?
? ?
? ?
366

Enter “W-EXWDG” in the Symbol Name field. Enter a description of the
symbol in the Description field.
Select Finish to save the symbol.
367
Terminal Symbol Example
Wiring diagram symbols can be made to represent a single terminal or a group of

terminals. The following example shows how to create a symbol that represents a
group of six terminals. In this example we will import connection points from a
family called 6BLOCK. This family is not provided with the software, but can easily
be created in the Catalog Manager (see page 396). Use the following entries:
After you have created the family, use the following steps to create the wiring
diagram symbol:
368
2. In step 2, select the Wiring Diagram radio button to define the symbol type.
(The other settings in this dialog are not relevant for wiring diagram symbols.)
369
3. In step 3 (Import Connection Points) of the Symbol Create Wizard we can

import connection points from a similar symbol or family to save time.
First, however, we will draw the graphics of our symbol. Use graphical drawing
functions (not wires). Make the symbol approximately 3.5 inches (90 mm) tall.
Once the graphics are drawn, select the Import Connection Points From a
Family radio button.
Then select the Select Family button. The Device Family dialog will appear.
Select the family 6BLOCK. Select OK in the Device Family dialog.
370
4. In step 4 (Specify Device ID) you can enter something in the Tag Mnemonic
field if you wish there to be a default device tag, but it is not required. The ID
will be taken from the schematic symbol that the wiring diagram symbol is
representing.
Enter a question mark as a default value in the Tag Mnemonic field. If desired,
you can make text settings for the device ID in the Default Text Style field.
Select the Place button and click on the desired position for the device ID in the
drawing. This text will take the terminal strip ID when the symbol is placed.
The terminal numbers from the imported family are also listed in step 4. Place
these terminal number attributes in the drawing by first selecting (highlighting) a
terminal and then selecting the Place button. You can place them one at a time or
you can use the Select All button to place them one after another in the drawing.
If you have the Array checkbox selected when you use the Select All button, the
Array dialog (see page 343) will appear when you place the terminal numbers,
allowing you to enter spacing values and place all the numbers with one click.
After a terminal number is placed, it is marked with an “X” in the symbol
creation wizard in the left hand column.
371
Place at position
where device ID
is to be displayed ?
1
5
Place terminal
number attributes 6
Note: If the terminal numbers were not defined in the family, you can leave the terminal
attributes as a question mark and they will be filled in with the numbers used in
the schematic when you place this symbol.
5. In step 5 we will place connection points on the symbol to set where the
connection information will be displayed.
372
The imported connection points from the family that we selected in step 3 are
displayed. The Visible Text entry (?) is a default value for the connection point
text. The software will replace the visible text with the connection expression
defined in the Wiring Diagram Settings dialog (see page 100). The Hidden Text
entries are the connection point designations that were defined in the family. (If
we had not imported connection points from a family or symbol we could make
an entry in the Number of Connection Points field to create the connection
points.)
Because we imported connection points for this symbol from an existing family,
there are also entries in the Role column for each connection point indicating the
terminal number that the connection applies to. The terminal symbols have
multiple connection points (designated I, E, J in our example). We will only
place the “I” and “E” connection points in our wiring diagram symbol to
represent the “internal” and “external” sides of the terminals.
Make the desired text settings before placing the connection points. Use Middle
Right text alignment for connections on the left side of the symbol. Use Middle
Left text alignment for connections on the right side of the symbol.
Select a connection point and then the Place button. You will be prompted on the
command line to select the connection point position and then the connection
point text position. The placement of the connection points isn’t critical, but they
should be on the same side of the symbol as the corresponding connection point
text.
After a connection point is placed, it is marked with an “X” in the symbol
creation wizard in the left-most column.
You can use the Connection Point Editor button to display all the placed
connection points in a single table for easy editing of various settings.
6. In step 6 you can specify symbol attributes. We will not be using attributes in
this example.
373

?
? 1 ?
? 2 ?
? 3 ?
? 4 ?
? 5 ?
? 6 ?

Enter “W-EXTB6” in the Symbol Name field. Enter a description of the symbol
in the Description field.
Select Finish to save the symbol.
374
Create Panel Layout Symbol
Some special considerations are necessary when creating panel layout symbols.
To create a panel layout symbol:
2. Select the first radio button, New Symbol (from Scratch) if you intend to draw
the graphics for the symbol.
Select the second radio button, New Symbol (Import Symbol Graphics), if you
intend to import existing graphics for the symbol.
You can also base a new symbol on an existing symbol, but for these instructions
we will assume you are creating an entirely new symbol.
Note: The Symbol Creation Wizard step number will vary depending on your choice in
Step 1.
3. If you chose to import graphics, select the desired graphics. See page 335 for
more information.
375
4. In the Specify Symbol Type step, choose the Panel Layout radio button. (The
Preferred Orientation setting is not important for panel layout symbols.)
Note: If you are creating a symbol from scratch, a blank drawing screen will appear.
Draw the symbol graphics using the line, circle, rectangle and other drawing
tools as needed. Use lines, not wires to draw symbol graphics. Be aware of the
grid spacing that will be used in your drawings so that connection points are
properly spaced; connection points must always be on this grid. When the
desired graphics are drawn, return to the Symbol Creation Wizard and continue.
376
5. Import Connection Points - The following dialog will appear.
This step allows you to import connection point designations from an existing
symbol or family. These can then be used in the “Place Connection Points” step,
saving you from having to remember and re-enter this information. If you don’t
wish to import connection points, select Next to go to the next step.
Panel layout symbols need connection points if you intend to use the shortest
distance wire routing function. The connection points help establish precise
wiring distances between components.
Note: If you are basing the new symbol on an existing symbol (selected in step 1), the
connection points of that symbol will appear in the drawing area when you
define the device ID in a later step, so you can skip this step.
Click on the Select Symbol button to display the Select Symbol dialog from
which you can preview and select a symbol.
Select the Import Connection Points From a Family radio button if you wish to
import connection designations from parent and child symbols at the same time.
Use the Select Family button to select the desired family.
377
6. Specify Device ID - The following dialog will appear.
In this dialog you enter a tag mnemonic. This is the portion of the device tag that
will be given to every instance of this symbol, such as “K” or “CR” for a relay
(see page 77).
Note: If you are placing panel layout symbols using the Symbol by Device ID function,
the existing device ID will replace any tag that was defined during symbol
creation.
Select the Suppress Display of ID checkbox if you wish the device ID to be
suppressed by default. When the symbol is placed, the Suppress Device ID
checkbox in the Device Properties dialog will be selected by default. (See page
221.)
Select the Default Tag = ? checkbox if you wish the user to be prompted to enter
the device tag when the symbol is placed instead of having the software
automatically assign the device tag. Typically this is done for child symbols so
that you can associate the child symbol with the device tag of a selected parent
symbol. When the symbol is placed, the Device Tag field in the Device
Properties dialog (see page 221) will show the tag mnemonic followed by a “?”.
378
Enter the desired character(s) for the tag in the Tag Mnemonic field. When you
have entered all the data for the device tag, select the Place button (the one
below the Tag Mnemonic field) to select a position for the tag by clicking in the
drawing. (Note: you may wish to zoom in on the graphic before selecting Place.)
After you select a position, the dialog will reappear with the coordinates of the
selected point in the X and Y fields. Coordinates are from the drawing origin.
You can adjust the values, if desired.
If you are creating a terminal strip layout symbol, enter a value in the Seq No
field to define a position on the terminal strip. Enter a value in the Terminal
Number field to define the terminal number label. To create fields for additional
terminals, select the “+” button. Use the Place button (the one below the
Terminal Number field) to place these terminal designations. You can place
them individually by selecting a terminal number followed by the Place button.
You can also use the Select All button followed by the Place button to place
them one after another in order. If you select the Array checkbox, the Array
dialog will appear (see page 343) allowing you to enter settings and place all the
terminal designations with one click.
Use the Default Text Style field to set the appearance of the device tag. Select
the Edit button to display a dialog where you can make various text settings.
Use the Text Align field to set the orientation of the text to the point that is
selected.
Use the Insert Symbol button to place an existing symbol in the symbol you are
creating. This is useful, for example, if you wish to put contact symbols in a
symbol for a relay or add fuse symbols to a disconnect switch. When you select
the button, the Insert Symbols dialog appears, allowing you to select a symbol. If
you only want the graphic portion of the symbol you are inserting, you will have
to delete the unwanted connection points, etc.
379
7. Place Connection Points - The following dialog will appear. As stated earlier,
you will need connection points on the panel layout symbol in order to use the
shortest distance wire routing function.
If you have imported connection points in an earlier step or are basing the new
symbol on an existing symbol, the connection points will be listed. If not, you
can place connection points using this dialog, see page 341 for instructions.
The connection point text you enter must match the connection point text on the
corresponding schematic symbol.
On panel layout symbols, there are extra data columns available for connection
points:
Additional Wire Length - An optional field for additional wire length (in
inches or mm). This is to be added to the length of the wire going to this con-
nection point. This value can be used to account for the distance the terminal
is raised from the surface of the panel (the “Z” dimension).
Direction to Wireway - This field should contain one of the following single
upper case letters which represent the direction a wire should take from
the connection point to enter a wireway.
U - Up
D - Down
L - Left
380
R - Right
N - Find nearest wireway. This value is used as a default in most cases
and assumed when the field is blank.
X - Route without wireway. Typically used where two components must
be connected with a short flying wire without the aid of a wireway.
Role - This field is only used if you have imported connection points from a
family. The field will be populated with the roles (for example, Parent,
Child1, Child2, etc.) from the selected family. You can associate a connec-
tion point to a particular role by selecting the role. This is useful if you
would like to make a generic symbol that can be used with multipole fami-
lies where the connetion point text could change.
381
8. Specify Attributes - The following dialog will appear.
Symbol attributes can be set up to prompt for text that is entered by the user at
the time the symbol is placed. Select the attributes you wish to add to the layout
symbol. Use the Place button to position them on the symbol.
After you place an attribute in the drawing, it will be marked in the list with an
“X” in the left-most column.
If you plan on using the Wiring Rules version of the Shortest Distance wire
routing function, there are two special attributes to be added to layout symbols
for mounting panels: “PanelName”and “ExitPoint”.
The PanelName attribute prompts for the panel identifier. These names
determine the sorting order of panels and are defined in your wiring rules
file. If only one panel name will be associated with this layout symbol, enter
it in the Default Value field.
The ExitPoint attribute defines the point(s) where wires leave the panel.
Enter exit point coordinates in the Default Value field using the format
x,y;x2,y2
where x,y are the X-Y coordinates of the first exit point and x2,y2 are the
coordinates for the second exit point. Separate the coordinates with a semi-
colon. These coordinates are relative to the insertion point of the panel.
382

9. Specify Position - The following dialog will appear. In this dialog you select the
insertion point for the symbol.
The insertion point represents the cursor position when the symbol is placed in
the drawing. It determines how the symbol is placed in relation to the selected
point. Use the Pick Point button and click on the desired point in the drawing
screen. The coordinates of the selected point will appear in the X and Y fields.
These values can be adjusted if desired.
383
10. The following dialog will appear. In this dialog you enter the symbol’s name and
description and select a catalog in which it will be saved.
Enter a name for the symbol in the Symbol Name field. The symbols provided
with the software follow a naming format whereby layout symbol names begin
with “L-” but you are not required to follow this convention.
Enter a description for the symbol in the Description field.
Use the Search Language Phrases button to select and place phrases from the
language database into the Description field. These phrases are displayed in the
language that is currently selected (Project Options - Display Languages).
In the Save in field, select the symbol catalog in which the symbol will be
stored.
Select Finish to save the new symbol.
384
Create Macro
A macro is a group of schematic elements that are stored as a group and can be placed
in a drawing in one step. The macro can contain multiple symbols. If, for example,
there is a particular circuit which is needed repeatedly, you can store it as a macro and
place it quickly and easily. Symbols within the macro are recognized and
automatically addressed by the software (and can be modified by the user) just as
when individual symbols are placed in a drawing. Any part numbers assigned to the
symbols will also be saved with the macro.
Custom title blocks and drawing borders can be stored as macros and can be placed
automatically on any new drawing.
Macros can be created on a blank page, or a portion of an existing drawing can be
stored as a macro.
Macro Creation Procedure
To create a macro, use the following procedure:
1. Display an existing drawing page that contains the elements you wish to include
in the macro, or place these elements on a page.
2. Select the Manage > Create Macro function.
385
3. The Create Macro dialog will appear.
Enter a name for the macro in the Name field. No spaces are allowed in the
name.
4. Enter a description for the macro in the Description field.
5. In the Catalog field, select the symbol catalog in which the macro will be stored.
6. Select a base point for the macro. This is the insertion point that determines
where the macro will be positioned in relation to the point selected when it is
placed in a drawing. Use the Pick Point button to select a base point in the
drawing. You can also enter coordinates for the base point in the X and Y fields.
(For macros such as title blocks that are automatically placed by promis•e in the
same location, use a base point of x:0.000, y:0.000.)
7. Select the objects that will comprise the macro. Click on the Select Objects
button and then select objects by windowing them (or selecting individually) on
the drawing page. Press the <Enter> key or right-click when all items have been
selected. The Create Macro dialog will reappear.
Select the Group Terminals checkbox if you wish any terminals in the macro to
keep their current terminal numbers when the macro is placed.
8. Select OK to store the macro.
The macro will now be available when you use the Components > Insert
Macro function.
386
Create Title Block Macro
A page title block is created and stored as a macro. Variable text can be placed in the
title block when it is created, and these texts are automatically replaced with project
data (date, project name, page number, etc.) when the page is displayed.
A default title block can be named in the Default Project Properties dialog box when
a project is created (see page 71). This will be placed automatically on every page
in the project. An appropriate title block can also be specified in the New Page
dialog box when a drawing page is created (see page 158) which will override the
default title block. Existing title blocks in a drawing can be changed using the Modify
Page function (see page 169).
Title Block Creation Procedure – Use the following steps to create a title block
macro:
1. Select the Configure > Title Block Designer function. The following dialog
will appear
Note: The Title Block Designer dialog consists of step buttons on the left and a settings
area on the right. There is an Auto Hide button in the lower left corner of the
dialog that sets whether or not the settings area will be hidden if you move the
cursor back to the drawing area (so it is not in the way). If auto hide is turned on,
you can click on the desired step button to display the setting area again.
If you wish to use an existing title block as the starting point for a new title
block, use the browse button in the Existing Title Block field to locate and select
the desired title block.
In the Page Format field, select the page format with which the title block will
be used. You will be provided with a drawing screen in the size of the selected
format.
387
If you wish to create a title block completely from scratch without using an
existing title block, continue to step 2.
2. Select the Next button to continue. A blank drawing page will open. If you
selected an existing title block, it will be displayed. The following dialog will
appear:
This dialog allows you to place variables such as project name, page number,
etc. that will be filled in automatically when the title block is used in a project.
First, however, if you are creating an entirely new title block you may wish to
create the outlines of the title block using graphical lines or graphical boxes. Do
not use wires. You can bring in existing DWG files using the Insert > Block
function (AutoCAD text attributes will not be recognized). You can also place
fixed text to label the various sections of the title block. Position these elements
on the blank drawing page where you wish them to appear when you use the title
block on a new page.
PROJECT DRAWING NO.

DATE NAME
JOB NO.
DRAWN
BY
PAGE DESCRIPTION: SHEET
CKD
OF
BY
388
To add variable text, select them from the list in the Title Block Designer dialog.
The variables are divided into categories (System, Project, etc.). Click on the “+”
icon beside each category to display the available variables. If you point at the
variable name, a description of the variable will appear at the cursor. Click on the
desired variable and then select the Place button. See page 393 for a list of
variables.
After selecting the Place button, click on the position in the title block where
you wish the variable information to be displayed. The variable name will
appear at this position.
PROJECT DRAWING NO.

DATE NAME Project.Descriptions_003
ProjectName
Address_001 JOB NO.
DRAWN Project.Descriptions_001
Page.Description_004
Page.Description_002 Address_002 Project.Descriptions_002
BY
Address_003 PAGE DESCRIPTION: SHEET
Address_004 Page.Description_001
CKD Page OF Project.TotalPag
BY Page.Description_003
Although the variables may appear to overlap or extend outside the desired area,
keep in mind that the data that is displayed in the drawing may be shorter than
the variable name.
To format the text in the title block, use these steps:
A. First select the Edit button in the Text area of the Title Block Designer dialog
to display the Edit Text Format dialog.
389
B. Make the desired settings here. This dialog is similar to the Edit Text Style
dialog (see page 99). One important difference is the Text Align field which
allows you to set in which direction the data will be placed from the
variable’s insertion point. Select OK when the desired settings are made.
C. Then select the Select Texts button in the Text area of the Title Block Wizard
dialog. Click on the variable name(s) in the drawing that you wish to format.
Press <Enter> or right click when you have selected the desired variables.
D. Then select the Apply Text Style to Selected Texts button in the Text area of
the Title Block Designer dialog to apply the new style.
390
3. Select Next to continue. The next dialog will appear, allowing you to specify and
position a logo file in the title block. This file must be in the DWG format.
Select the logo file using the browse button next to the Logo field.
Once you have selected the file you can position and size it in the title block
using one of two methods. You can enter two coordinates (X1,Y1 and X2,Y2)
that define a rectangular area, or you can select the Specify on Screen button and
define an area on the screen by windowing it (click to select the opposite
corners).
If you wish to remove a logo that has already been placed, select the Remove
Logo button.
391
4. Select Next to continue. The next dialog will appear, allowing you to name and
save the title block.
Enter a name for the title block in the Name field.

In the Catalog field, select the catalog in which you wish to store the title block
from the drop-down menu.
In the Description field, enter a description for the title block.
5. Select the Finish button to store the title block macro.
To use the new title block, you can select it in the Title Block field of the New Page
dialog or you can set it as the default title block for a project in the Default Project
Properties dialog (see page 71).
Note: To change the title block on an existing page, you must use the Review/Revise >
Replace Title Block function.
392
Available Title Block Variables
System Variables
Variable Description
Today Displays current date when page is created or plotted
Now Displays current time when page is created or plotted
Address_001 to Address file lines 1 to 20. Entered in Project Options,
Address_020 Address File dialog.
UserName User Name. Entered in User Options, User Name dia-
log.
Project Variables
ProjectName Name of project. Entered in New Project dialog.
Project.TotalPages Total drawing pages in project.
Project.DateCreated Project creation date
Project.Descriptions_001 (Project Project Description. Entered in first field of Project
Description) Description dialog accessed from New Project or
Modify Project dialog.
Project.Descriptions_002 (Job Job Number. Entered in second field of Project
Number) Description dialog accessed from New Project or
Project.Descriptions_003 (Draw- Drawing Number. Entered in third field of Project
ing Number) Description dialog accessed from New Project or
Project.Descriptions_004 to Additional project description fields. Entered in
Project.Descriptions_020 Project Description dialog accessed from New
Project or Modify Project dialog.
Project.RevisionNo_001 to Project revision number. Entered in the New Revision
Project.RevisionNo_005 Number field of the Add Project Revision dialog.
Project.RevisionUser Name_001 to User who created project revision. User name is
Project.RevisionUser Name_005 entered in User Options, User Name dialog
Project.RevisionCheckedBy_001 Project revision checked by user name. Entered in
to the Edit Project Revision dialog accessed from the
Project.RevisionCheckedBy_005 Project Manager.
Project.RevisionCheckedDate_001 Project revision checked date. Entered in the Edit
to Project Revision dialog accessed from the Project
Project.RevisionCheckedDate_00 Manager.
5
393
Project.RevisionDateCreated_001 Date the project revision was created.
to
Project.RevisionDateCreated_005
Project.RevisionDescription_001 to Project revision description. The short description
Project.RevisionDescription_005 entered in the Add Project Revision dialog.
Project.LastPageNo Page number of last drawing page in project.
Drawing Set Variables
DrawingSet Current drawing set.
DrawingSet.TotalPages Total number of pages in current drawing set.
DrawingSet.Description_001 to Drawing set descriptions 1 to 5. Entered in Project
DrawingSet.Description_005 Manager, Drawing Set tab.
Installation Variables
Installation Current installation.
Installation.TotalPages Total number of pages in current installation.
Installation.LastPageNo Page number of last drawing page in current installa-
tion.
Installation.Description_001 to Installation descriptions 1 to 5. Entered in Project
Installation.Description_005 Manager, Installation tab.
Location Variables
Location Current location.
Location.TotalPages Total number of pages in current location.
Location.LastPageNo Page number of last drawing page in current location.
Location.Description_001 to Location descriptions 1 to 5. Entered in Project Man-
Location.Description_005 ager, Location tab.
394
Page Variables
Page Name of current page. Entered in New Page dialog.
Page.DateCreated Page creation date
Page.Next Next page number.
Page.Previous Previous page number.
Page.Description_001(Description) Page Description. Entered in the Description field of
the New Page or Modify Page dialog.
Page.Descriptions_002(Date Page date drawn. Entered in second field of Page
Drawn) Description dialog accessed from New Page or Mod-
ify Page dialog.
Page.Description_003(Date Date checked. Entered in the Date Checked field of
Checked) the New Page or Modify Page dialog.
Page.Description_004(Drawn By) Drawn By name. Entered in the Drawn By field of the
New Page or Modify Page dialog.
Page.Descriptions_005(Checked Checked By name. Entered in the Checked By field of
By) the New Page or Modify Page dialog.
Page.Descriptions_006(Date Date Revised. Entered in the Date Revised field of the
Revised) New Page or Modify Page dialog.
Page.Descriptions_007(Revised Revised By name. Entered in the Revised By field of
By) the New Page or Modify Page dialog.
Page.RevisionNo_001 to Page revision number. Entered in the New Page
Page.RevisionNo_005 Revision Number field of the Add Page Revision dia-
log.
Page.RevisionUser Name_001 to User who created Page revision. User name is
Page.RevisionUser Name_005 entered in User Options, User Name dialog
Page.RevisionDateCreated_001 to Date the Page revision was created.
Page.RevisionDateCreated_005
Page.RevisionDescription_001 to Page revision description. The short description
Page.RevisionDescription_005 entered in the Add Page Revision dialog.
395
Create Family
You can create a device family in the Catalog Manager.
Note: You can also create a family while working on a drawing using the Family on the Fly
function (see page 234).
Use the following procedure.
1. Open the Catalog Manager (select Design > Catalog Manager).

2. Open the folder for the catalog in which you wish to create a family.
3. Select the Families group inside the catalog. The existing families in the catalog
will be listed on the right side of the dialog.
396
4. Select the New Family function either by selecting the New Family toolbar
button or by right-clicking on one of the existing family names and
selecting New Family from the popup menu. The New/Modify Family dialog
will appear.
5. In the Family Name field, enter a name for the new family.
397
6. Select the Description button and a dialog will appear with four text fields that
allow you to enter descriptions of the family.
Enter the desired text and select OK to return to the New/Modify Family dialog.
7. In the Family Type field, select one of the following: Standard, Cable, or
Terminal/Pin-Plug depending on the type of device that is being represented.
If you selected the Terminal/Pin-Plug type, there will be a With Parent checkbox
next to the Family Type field. If you select this checkbox you will be able to
create a terminal family that includes a parent symbol.
398
8. Once you enter a name for the new family and select a type, fields will appear in
the lower part of the dialog that allow you to specify the symbols that will be
included in the family.
These fields will be labeled differently depending on the type of family that you
selected. For standard type you will be defining parent and child symbols. For
cables you will be defining conductors and for the terminal type you will be
defining terminals/pins (with a parent symbol optional).
A. When you click inside the Symbol Name field you will see a browse button.
Click this button to display the Select Symbols dialog from which you can
preview and select a symbol.
399
B. When you click inside the Connection Points field, the Connection Points
dialog will appear. Here you can enter connection point text for each
connection point. If you wish the text to appear in the drawing enter it in the
Visible field. If you wish the text to be invisible, enter it in the Hidden field.
Select OK when you have entered the desired texts.
Note: The software will concatenate the visible and hidden text together to form a
unique connection point name that is used by certain functions of the software.
C. If you are creating the terminal/pin-plug type of family, there will also be a
Number field. This field gives you the option to define a terminal or pin
number for each child symbol.
400
D. (Optional) If you wish to have alternate symbols, you can select the “+”
button to create additional columns for entering symbols, connection points
and numbers. By entering alternate symbol names in the family, the user will
have a choice of symbols in the Device Usage Chart dialog when placing
members of the family. One example is a Pin-Plug family where you may
wish to have a choice of pin symbols pointing in different directions.
In the following figure, the first set of symbols has been entered.
Select “+” button
When you select the “+” button, a new set of columns is created which you
can use to enter alternative symbols and connection point text. You can
define more than one alternative symbol.
If you wish to remove one of these alternative symbols, click on one of the
columns for that symbol and select the “X” button. When prompted, select
“Yes” to confirm the deletion.
401
9. (Optional) If you wish to create potential groups within the family, select the
Edit Group button. If two or more connection points on the symbol are given the
same potential group number and are connected to wires, the same potential
(wire number) will be assigned to these wires. In other words, the potential will
carry through the symbol. This is useful when working with flex I/Os. Note:
when creating terminal symbols, the same potential group number is assigned to
all connection points by default.
When you select the Edit Group button the Edit Potential Group dialog appears.
A default potential group name is assigned to each connection point. To cre-

ate a group where the potential will pass through the symbol, edit the group
names so that both connection points have the same group name. Select OK
to save the changes.
Note: Potential groups defined in a family will override any potential groups that were
defined during symbol creation (see page 342).
10. In the Cross Reference Symbol area of the dialog you can define a symbol to
hold the cross reference information for the parent/child symbols. When you
click inside the Symbol Name field you will see a browse button. Click this
button to display the Select Symbols dialog from which you can preview and
select a cross reference symbol.
402
In the X Offset and Y Offset fields enter values to determine where the cross
reference symbol will appear on the drawing. For the Y offset value there is an
additional field where you must select from the drop-down list whether the
values represents Offset From Insertion Point (the parent symbol’s insertion
point - typical for ANSI drawings) or Offset From 0 (the bottom of the page -
typical for IEC drawings).
11. When you have entered all the family information, select the OK button to save
the family in the catalog.
403
Modify Family
If there is an existing family that you wish to modify, use the following procedure:
1. Select Design > Catalog Manager. The Catalog Manager dialog will appear.
2. If it is not already selected, select the Families folder of the desired symbol
catalog. Select the Detailed view to see the list of available families.
404
3. Right click on the name of the family you wish to modify and select Modify
from the popup menu. The New/Modify Family dialog will appear with the
information for the selected family. All the fields will be accessible except
Family Name and Catalog Path.
4. Enter or change information as described in the section on creating a family (see

page 396).
5. Select OK to save the modified family information.
405
406
Options
7 Options
There are a variety of parameters that can be set that determine how the software will
operate. Most of these system-related settings are found in the promis•e Setup dialog
and in System Options and User Options. (Project-related settings are described in
Section 3. See page 67.)
promis•e Setup
Select Configure > Setup. (You can also select the promis•e Setup toolbar button in
the Project Manager.)
The following dialog will appear.
407
Options
The following settings can be made:
Setup Configuration
You can save and load different setup configurations for use under different
conditions. For example, if you have a laptop computer that accesses projects and
catalogs over a network at the office, you may need a different configuration if you
wish to work at home or on the road. The drop-down list shows the configurations
that are available. By default the software includes two predefined setup
configurations: ANSI-IEEE and IEC. These allow you to easily switch between
ANSI-IEEE and IEC versions of the software.
To create a new configuration:
1. Select the New button.
2. Enter the new configuration name in the dialog that appears.
3. Select OK.
4. With the new configuration name selected, make the desired settings and select
the Apply button to save them.
Project Database
Make settings here to set the connection to the project database.
Select the appropriate radio button for the project database server. You may choose
between SQL Server/MSDE and Oracle.
Server name field - By default, the software installs an instance of SQL Server 2005
on your local machine. The promis•e Setup dialog is automatically configured to use
this local server. In this case, the server name will be set to: (local)\ECTECAD. The
parameter (local) is a special variable that automatically matches the name of your
computer so it is not necessary to enter your computer name if you use this parameter.
If you wish to configure the software to look at a different database server then you
must enter the appropriate server and instance name. The format should be as follows:
YourServerName\Instance
Example: MyServer\ECTECAD
Database field - Enter the name of the promis•e database to which you wish to
connect. By default, the software creates a database named, “promise.”
Note: If you install the software again without deleting the original database, the
installation will connect to your existing database provided that the new version of
promis•e does not require a newer version of the database. If the installation does
require a newer version of the database, it will create a new database named
"promise1" so that it does not overwrite your previous database.
408
Options
Connect using settings - If you previously selected the SQL Server/MSDE radio
button, you may choose between using Windows Authentication or SQL
Authentication by selecting the desired radio button. Windows Authentication will
use your Windows login name to determine what security rights you have to the
promise database. If you specify SQL Authentication then your database
administrator will have to create a login and password for you in SQL server and you
should enter this login and password in the login and password fields shown below:
If you previously selected the Oracle radio button then the connection settings will
change as shown below:
You must now enter a valid Oracle login name and password which should be
provided by your database administrator.
409
Options
System Paths
In this part of the dialog you set the paths to important files used by the software.
In the Select System Path Management Method field, select either Manage Data
Folder Path or Manage Individual Paths. If you select Manage Data Folder Path
you set a path to the promis•e data folder (and therefore to the project folder,
templates, page formats, and project profiles that are within this folder). If you select
Manage Individual Paths you can set these paths individually.
Manage Data Folder Path
Manage Individual Paths
The following paths can be set.

Parts Database - Select the name of the parts database that you wish to use in the
Parts Database field. Select the Edit Parts Database button to make configuration
settings related to the parts database. For more information, see page 413.
Language Databases - This path goes to the file that defines the foreign language
text. The default filename is Multi_Language_UI.mdb.
410
Options
System Option Profile - Path to the file that contains the default System Options (see
page 418). The default filename is default.SystemOptions.xml. This path can be
shared on a network so that all users are using the same settings.
Project Option Profile - Path to the file that contains the default Project Options (see
page 67). The default filename is ANSI-IEEE.ProjectOptions.xml or
IEC.ProjectOptions.xml. This path can be shared on a network so that all users are
using the same settings.
User Option Profile - Path to the file that contains the default User Options (see page
423). The default filename is default.UserOptions.xml. This path can be shared on a
network so that all users are using the same settings.
Project Profiles Path - Path to the folder that contains the predefined formats for IDs,
cross references, etc.
Page Format Path - Path to the folder that contains the drawing page formats.
Templates Path - Path to the folder where templates for reports and graphical plans
are stored.
Default Project Folder - Default path to the folder where projects are stored. Select
the Restrict Project Creation to Default Project Folder checkbox to prevent new
projects from being created in other folders.
Note: Select the Restore Defaults button to reset the System Paths to their default settings.
Catalog Paths
The Catalog Paths area of the promis•e Setup dialog contains paths to symbol
catalogs. To see the entire path, point your cursor at the path and it will pop up as a
tooltip. You can have multiple paths; the order of the paths determines the search
priority that the software uses when accessing symbols and families. The Add
Catalog Path function also allows you to create a new catalog file.
To add a new catalog path:
1. Select the “+” button in the Catalog Paths area of the promis•e Setup dialog. The
Add Catalog dialog will appear.
411
Options
2. Use the browse button beside the Catalog Path field to locate and select the
desired catalog folder.
3. Select OK.
To create a new catalog folder:
1. Select the “+” button in the Catalog Paths section of the promis•e Setup dialog.
The Add Catalog dialog will appear.
2. Select the New button in the Add Catalog Path dialog. The Create Catalog
dialog will appear.
3. In the Path field enter the path or browse to the folder (such as the Program
Files\ECT\CommonData\Catalog folder) where the new catalog will be located.
If you wish to create a different folder to hold the new folder, there is a Create
New Folder button available after you select the browse button.
4. In the Name field enter a name for the catalog.
5. Select OK in the Create Catalog dialog. In the specified folder, the software will
create a sub-folder for the new catalog (using the name you entered. Inside this
will be sub-folders for symbols, macros, families and title blocks.
6. After you select OK in the Create Catalog dialog, the Add Catalog Path dialog
will re-appear. You can now add a path to the new catalog to make it available in
promis•e.
To change the order of the paths, highlight the path in the Catalog Paths section of
the promis•e Setup dialog and use the up or down arrow button in the dialog to move
it up or down the list. Paths at the top of the list are first in the search priority.
To delete a path, highlight the path and select the delete (“X”) button in the dialog.
412
Options
Parts Database Path

The software can be configured to access different parts databases. The Parts
Database Path field and its associated buttons in the promis•e Setup dialog allow you
to select, define and edit access to these databases.
To select a database - Select the desired database name in the Parts Database Path
field drop-down list. The selected database is the one the software will use when you
assign part numbers, generate reports, etc.
To edit a database name - First select the database name in the Parts Database Path
field. Then select the Edit button. The Edit Parts Database dialog will appear.
In this dialog you can (if applicable) change the path to the database file, change the
connection string, change the table or change the SQL query.
413
Options
To create a database name:
1. Select the New button in the promis•e Setup dialog. The Add Parts Database
dialog will appear.
2. Enter a name for the new parts database in the Parts Database Name field.
3. In the Database area of the dialog, either
A. Select the Use File radio button if you wish to connect by selecting a
MS-Access database file. Use the Browse button to select the desired file.
(For SQL Server and Oracle you must select Use Connection String.)
B. Select the Use Connection String radio button if you wish to build a connec-
tion to a database. Select the Build button to begin the process. The Build
dialog will appear.
In the Database Type field select the type of database you will be using, MS
414
Options
Access, SQL Server or Oracle. Once you select the database type, additional
fields will appear.
For MS Access:
Use the browse button to locate and select the .mdb file. Select OK to return
to the Add Parts Database dialog.
For SQL Server:
For SQL Authentication your database administrator will have to create a

login and password for you in SQL server. Enter these in the Login name
and Password fields
Select OK to return to the Add Parts Database dialog.
415
Options
For Oracle:
Enter a valid Oracle user name, password and server name which should be
provided by your database administrator. Select OK to return to the Add
Parts Database dialog.
4. Once you have selected a database, you can select a table or construct a query in
the Add Parts Database dialog.
The SQL Query field can be used to access fields that belong to different tables.
416
Options
5. Select the Next button to continue. The Field Mapping function will appear,
allowing you to map the fields of the selected database in the Name column to
the promis•e parts database fields in the Internal (promis-e) Name column.
In the Display Name column, enter the label that will appear beside the field in
the Parts Database Editor dialog (see page 630). In the Category column, enter
the field grouping in the Parts Database Editor dialog to which the field should
be assigned (Price, Dimensions, etc.). If you are accessing a parts database from
an earlier version of the software (prior to promis•e 2007), you can select the
Default Mapping button to map all the fields to the corresponding new fields.
There are unused fields (labeled user1, user2, etc.) that you can use to map new
fields.
6. Select the Finish button to complete the new database connection.
417
Options
System Options
Select Configure > Options. The following dialog will appear.
Select
System options
here
Command Protection
The command protection mode allows you to restrict access to promis•e functions.
Users can be categorized into a number of levels or “roles.” A different combination
of functions is allowed or not allowed for each role. User names must match an
individual’s Windows login user name.
To configure command protection, select the Command Protection function in the
System Options dialog. The following fields will appear.
418
Options
Select the Enable Command Protection checkbox followed by the Apply button to
activate command protection.
There are two tabs in the command protection screen: Manage Users and Manage
Roles.
The Manage Users tab allows you to assign roles to users of the software. To add a
user to the list, select the Add button. Default entries will then appear in the User and
Role columns. You can edit the user name by clicking in the User field. User names
must match an individual’s Windows login user name. You can assign a role to the
user by clicking in the Role field and selecting one from the drop-down list. The
default roles are Administrator, Catalog & Database Admin, User and Viewer.
The Manage Roles tab allows you to select the functions that are available in each
role and to create or delete roles as needed.
419
Options
To change the available functions in a role, select (highlight) the role and then
select the Modify button. The Edit Role dialog will appear.
The functions are organized into groups (Catalog Management, Components, etc.).
Click on the “+” icon beside the group name to display the functions in the group.
Click the checkbox beside the function name to make it available or unavailable.
Available functions will have a checkmark beside the function name. You can use the
checkbox beside the group name to select or de-select all the functions in that group.
Select the OK button in the Edit Role dialog followed by the Apply button to enter the
changes.
420
Options
To create a new role, select the Add button in the Manage Roles tab. The Edit Role
dialog will appear.
Enter a name for the new role in the Role name field. Enter a description in the
Description field (optional).
Then select the functions that are to be available in this role. The functions are
organized into groups (Catalog Management, Components, etc.). Click on the “+”
icon beside the group name to display the functions in the group. Click the checkbox
beside the function name to make it available or unavailable. You can use the
checkbox beside the group name to select or de-select all the functions in that group.
Available functions will have a checkmark beside the function name. Select the OK
button in the Edit Role dialog followed by the Apply button to enter the changes.
To delete a role, select (highlight) the role in the Manage Roles tab and then select
the Remove button. The default roles cannot be removed.
421
Options
Symbol Texts
Symbol texts are attributes associated with a symbol that can contain a value related
to a specific property. Examples would be text that shows a value for current, VA,
RPM, etc. The Symbol Text mode in the System Options allows you to determine
whether or not symbol text will appear at child symbols.
Select the Symbol Texts function in the System Options dialog. The following fields
will appear.
For each symbol text attribute, select the Shared Value checkbox if you wish the
attribute text to appear at the child symbol in addition to at the parent symbol.
Select the Shared Value Over Sub ID checkbox if you wish the attribute text to
appear at sub IDs, i.e., symbols that share the same ID as the parent but are not part of
the device family.
Select the Apply button to save the settings.
422
Options
User Options
Select Configure > Options. The following dialog will appear.
Select
user options
here
Language On Dialogs
Select Language On Dialogs in the Options dialog. The following screen will appear.
Select the language from the drop-down list that you wish to use in the software’s
dialogs. Select Apply to use the selected language.
423
Options
Startup Interface
Select Startup Interface in the Options dialog. The following screen will appear.
The radio button that you select here determines whether the software will start with
the Welcome dialog or the Project Manager.
If you are running the MicroStation version of the software and have the Project Wise
document management software installed, you can select the Log Into Project Wise
on Startup checkbox to automatically log into Project Wise.
User Name
Select User Name in the Options dialog. The following screen will appear.
The User Name field allows you to enter the user name of the person operating the
software. This should correspond to the user’s Windows login name, especially if you
are using the Command Protection feature (see page 418). Enter the desired name and
select the Apply button.
This user name will also appear in the Project Manager “Details” view in the User
column to identify who currently has a drawing page open. See page 51.
424
Options
Validation Prompts
Select Validation Prompts in the Options dialog. The following screen will appear.
In this screen you can make selections to set whether or not the software will prompt
you for certain conditions.
In the Multi-Document Options area you can select how you wish the software to
respond when you open or switch to another document without saving the changes in
the current document. Select the Prompt for Saving Page When Switching
Documents if you wish the software to notify you when you switch documents when
you have unsaved changes. The Save Changes dialog will appear.
Select the Enable Command Log checkbox if you wish to create a text file that saves
the sequence of functions that you use in the software. This is useful for
troubleshooting. When you select the checkbox, the path field becomes active,
allowing you to browse to the desired directory and specify the filename. The default
filename is CmdHis.txt.
Select the Prompt For Device Properties checkbox if you wish the software to
display the Device Properties dialog when you place a symbol in a drawing (see page
221). This dialog allows you to change the prompted device ID, search for part
numbers, etc. If this checkbox is not selected, the software will place the symbol and
automatically assign a device ID based on the project settings.
425
Options
When you select the Prompt For Maintaining Device IDs & Wire Numbers When
Copying/Pasting checkbox you will be prompted when you copy elements using the
copy to clipboard function (Edit > Copy). A dialog will appear with checkboxes that
allow you to maintain device IDs and/or wire numbers on the copied elements. If you
de-select the Maintain Device ID checkbox, the ID will be assigned per project
defaults. If you de-select the Maintain Wire Numbers checkbox the wire number will
be omitted on the copy.
In the Suppress Duplicate Terminal Number Prompt for the Following Terminal
Numbers area you can enter a list of terminal numbers that are likely to be used more
than once in a project. The software will not flag the numbers entered here as
duplicate numbers.
Select the Apply button to save the validation prompt settings.
426
Options
View Options
The View Options mode allows you to make settings that determine how information
is shown on the drawing screen. Select View Options in the Options dialog. The
following screen will appear.
Select the Show Symbol Tooltips checkbox if you wish to see symbol information
pop up at the cursor when you point at a symbol in a drawing. Information includes
the device ID, family name, catalog name and symbol name.
In the Display Settings area you can choose to show or hide various markings and
other information. Select the checkbox for items that you wish to be displayed. Use
the All On or All Off buttons to select or de-select all the checkboxes.
In the Navigation area of the dialog you can adjust the automatic zoom that occurs
when you use the navigator function to go to a drawing element (see page 178). Enter
the percentage of zoom (0-100) in the Zoom field or drag the slider bar. The
percentage of zoom will appear in the text box as you move the slide bar. The higher
the zoom percentage, the closer the view will be to the searched element. Select the
Zoom Off checkbox to turn off the automatic zoom.
Use the Reset Dialog Boxes to Default Settings button to change the settings in this
dialog back to the default values.
There is also a group of display settings icons in the Design menu that allows you to
display or hide elements as you work on a drawing.
427
Options
Plug-in Manager
There are plug-in applications for promis•e that perform various specialized
functions. It is possible for users to create their own plug-ins with the project API
(Application Programming Interface).
The Plug-in Manager allows you to view the plug-ins that are available on your
system and activate or de-activate them.
To access the Plug-in Manager select Manage > Plug-in Manager.
The Plug-in Manager dialog will appear. Any plug-ins that are installed on your
system are listed. When you select the name of a plug-in, a description of the plug-in
appears at the bottom of the dialog.
The dialog displays plug-in name, the company that made it, the plug-in version
number and whether it is active or not. A plug-in is active when a checkmark appears
in the Active column. To de-activate (turn off) a plug-in, click on the checkbox in the
Active column so that it is not checked.
Some plug-in software functions are launched from the standard promis•e menus,
however specialized plug-in functions are launched from the Plug-Ins menu, which is
only present when you have specialized plug-in software modules installed.
428
Plotting and Publishing
8 Plotting and Publishing

This section describes how to plot drawings in promis•e software. There are also
instructions for the Project Publisher plug-in that allows you to output work in various
formats.
Plot Page Function

The plot page function allows you to select pages in the current project for plotting.
There are two ways to access this function:
• In the Project Manager, you can select File > Plot Page(s) (or the Plot Pages
toolbar button).
• In the drawing screen you can select the Plot function in the promis-e
Output menu (a page must be open when you select the button).
The Plot Page(s) dialog will appear listing the pages in the current project:
Select the page or pages you wish to plot and select the Print button.
There are columns for Drawing Set, Installation, Location and Name. By clicking on
the column heading, you can sort the column by the entries in that column. There is
also a drop-down list in each column heading that allows you to filter the listing.
Select All to display all pages. Select Blanks to display all pages with no entry in that
column. Select Non blanks to display all pages where that column is not empty.
Select Custom to create a custom filter. The following dialog will appear:
429
The dialog will display the name of the current column heading and provides two sets
of fields for entering criteria. You can use one or both sets of fields. You can relate the
two sets with an And condition or Or condition by selecting the appropriate radio
button. The first field for each set of criteria allows you to select whether the criteria
equals, does not equal, is greater than, is greater than or equal to, is less than, or is less
than or equal to the value in the second field. Select OK to load the filter.
Select the Print button to print the selected pages. The Page Setup dialog will appear
(see page 431). Select OK or Plot in this dialog to send the pages to the currently
configured printer or plotter.
430
Plot Current Page (AutoCAD Version)

Use the File > Plot function to plot the currently displayed drawing page. This
function (which is equivalent to the AutoCAD PLOT command) also displays a
dialog box that allows various plot configuration settings to be made.
The following Plot dialog box will appear. It has two tabs: Plot Device and Layout
Settings.
Layout name – (Layouts are not used in promis•e - they are the same as Paper
Space.) Displays the current layout name or displays “Selected layouts” if multiple
tabs are selected. If the Model tab is current when you choose Plot, the Layout Name
shows “Model.”
Page setup name – Displays a list of any named and saved page setups. You can
choose to base the current page setup on a named page setup, or you can add a new
named page setup by choosing Add. Selecting Add displays the User Defined Page
Setups dialog box. You can create, delete, or rename named page setups.
Plot Device tab
Use the Plotter Configuration function to select a printer/plotter driver.
431
Use the Plot style table function to edit pen colors and line weights. Assign pre-set or
customized color or monochrome pen mappings. Use the Edit or New buttons to
modify or create style tables.
Use the Plot stamp checkbox to place a plot stamp on a specified corner of each
drawing and/or logs it to a file. The Settings button displays the Plot Stamp dialog
box, where you can specify the information you want applied to the plot stamp, such
as drawing name, date and time, plot scale, and so on. (If no plot stamp file exists, you
must enter the name of a new plot stamp file before the dialog will appear.)
Use the What to plot functions to select which tabs to plot and the number of copies to
plot. Current tab plots the current Model or Layout tab. (Although promis•e does not
design in the Layout mode, layouts are supported.) If multiple tabs are selected, the
tab that shows its viewing area is plotted. Selected tabs plots multiple preselected
Model or layout tabs. To select multiple tabs, hold down <Ctrl> while selecting the
tabs. If only one tab is selected, this option is unavailable. All layout tabs plots all
layout tabs, regardless of which tab is selected.
Select the Plot to file checkbox if you wish to create a plot file of the current drawing.
You can enter the desired filename and directory.
432
Layout Settings tab
Paper size and paper units

Select the output Paper size format. Also select inches or mm as the units for the
plot settings.
Drawing orientation
Select Portrait or Landscape orientation of the drawing on the paper. Selected
orientation is indicated by the page icon. Also, select Plot upside down if
desired.
433
Plot area
In this area you can set additional plotting parameters as follows:
Limits – Select to plot entire drawing area as defined by the drawing limits.
Extents – Select to plot everything in the drawing (that part of the drawing that
currently contains entities).
Display – Select to plot what is currently displayed on the screen.
View – Not accessible unless views are created in the software (this is an
AutoCAD function). Type VIEW on the command line and you can save
different views and plot them.
Window – When selected, allows you to plot any portion of the drawing. Select
the Window button. Then define two opposite corners of the area to be plotted.
This radio button is grayed out until a window has been specified.
Plot scale
Scale – From the drop-down list, you can select Scaled to Fit to scale the plot as
large as possible for the selected paper. You can also select from a number of
scale ratios (1:1, 1:2, etc.).
Custom – Indicates the relation between plot units of length and drawing units of
length. This will change according to the selected scale.
Scale lineweights – Scales lineweights in proportion to the plot scale.
Lineweights normally specify the linewidth of printed objects and are plotted
with the linewidth size regardless of the plot scale.
Plot offset
Select the Center the plot checkbox to center the plot on the paper. Or, you can
set the origin of the plot by entering values in the X and Y fields.
434
Plot options
Plot object lineweights – If you have turned off the Plot with plot styles
checkbox, you can select this checkbox to use object lineweights in the plot.
Plot with plot styles – Select this checkbox to plot using the plot styles applied to
objects and defined in the plot style table. All style definitions with different
property characteristics are stored in the plot style tables and can be attached to
the geometry. This setting can replace pen mapping in earlier versions of
AutoCAD.
Plot paperspace last – Plots model space geometry first. Paper space geometry
is usually plotted before model space geometry.
Hide objects – Plots layouts with hidden lines removed for objects in the layout
environment (paper space). Hidden line removal for model space objects in
viewports is controlled by the Viewports Hide property in the Object Property
Manager. This is displayed in the plot preview, but not in the layout.
Plot Current Page (MircroStation Version)

Use the File > Print function to plot the currently displayed drawing page. This
function displays a dialog box that allows various plot configuration settings to be
made.
The following Print dialog box will appear.
435
To print the page, select File > Print in the Print dialog or the Print toolbar button.
To preview the page printout, select File > Preview in the Print dialog or the Preview
toolbar button.
In the General Settings area of the dialog make settings for the area or view to be
printed, the color of the printout and the number of copies.
In the Printer and Paper Size area of the dialog, select either the Windows printer or
the Bentley driver. Also select the paper size and orientation (landscape or portrait).
In the Print Scale and Size area of the dialog, you can adjust the Print Scale value and
X and Y size values for the printout.
In the Print Position area of the dialog make settings for the X and Y position
drawing origin on the page. There is also a checkbox for auto-centering.
436
Project Publisher
The Project Publisher is a function in promis•e that allows you to output drawings in
various formats. You can also include various other files from outside promis•e such
as Word documents and send them to the same folder as the published drawings.
You can output the following information using the Project Publisher:
• Send output to a printer or plotter
• Combine drawings, reports and parts data into a single PDF file
• Create DWF files with associated HTML pages
• Output a set of drawing files while remapping layers and attributes
• Include documents from outside promis•e in the folder with the drawings and
in the combined PDF project output file.
437
Starting Project Publisher
To start the Project Publisher.
1. Start promis•e and open a page in the project from which you wish to publish
drawings.
2. Select promis-e Output > Project Publisher. The Project Publisher dialog will
appear.
The dialog is divided into two main areas: the left side where you select the
function that you wish to perform, and the right side where information is
displayed and entered or selected.
In the function-select area of the dialog there are three groups of functions:
Document Management, Configure Publisher and Publish. The Document
Management functions allow you to select the drawings or other documents to
be published. The Configure Publisher Functions allow you to configure the
content, formats and destination for the output. The Publish functions allow you
to create published output in selected formats.
438
File Manager
The default function when you open Project Publisher is the file manager. You can
also select this function by clicking on File Manager on the left side of the dialog.
This function allows you to select the drawings that you wish to publish.
The file manager display has an area on the left labeled Available Items. This is a list
of all the drawings in the current project, as well as any files that are listed in the
external links dialog (see page 440). There is also an item called “contents” that will
create a table of contents of your published items. There are a number of data
columns including filename, page number, installation, location, etc. There is a scroll
bar at the bottom of the area that allows you to see them all. You can change the order
of the columns by dragging the column heading to the desired position.
To select a drawing for publication, select the box beside the drawing name and
then select the right arrow button. The drawing will be listed in the Items to Publish
area of the file manager. You can select multiple pages by <Shift> or <Ctrl> keys
while making selections. If you select the double right arrow button ( >> ), all the
pages will be placed in the Items to Publish area.
In the figure above, two drawings have been selected for publishing, along with a
Word document, a pdf document and the Table of Contents feature. When external
documents are included in the published output, they will be incorporated into the
PDF output file, and they will be placed in the same folder with DWG and Web
output.
439
Note: You must have MicroSoft Office 2007 on your system in order for the Project
Publisher to include external documents in the project PDF output file.
You can remove drawings from the Items to Publish list by selecting them and using
the left arrow button, or by using the double left arrow button ( << ) to remove
everything from the Items to Publish list.
Important: Selections made in the Build Order dialog (see page 450) will override selections that
you make in the File Manager. For example, if you include “mode:Schematic Mode”
in the Build Order, then all schematic pages will be listed in the File Manager.
Use the Open Project Document Folder to open a File Manager window showing the
project’s Publish folder. The Publish folder is a sub-folder automatically created
where the project is stored when you run the Project Publisher for that project. This
folder can be used to store documents, reports, etc., that you will be publishing with
this project.
If a document is added to the project’s Publish folder while this dialog is open you can
use the Refresh button to update the Available Items list.
Use the Reset to Build Order button to remove everything from the Items to Publish
list except those drawings that are specified in the Build Order tab (see page 450).
Manage External File Links
You may have documents created outside of promis•e that you wish to include in the
published output. These could be specifications, procedures, etc. The publisher allows
you to include these in the same folder with the published output. The following file
types are allowed:
• MS-Word documents
• PDF documents
• MS-Excel (XLS) files
The Manage External File Links function allows you to define files on your system
that are to be included with the published output.
Once you have defined the external files, you must include the file type (DOC, PDF,
XLS) in the Build Order (see page 450) in order to include them with the output.
To use the Manage External File Links function:
1. Open the desired project and start the Project Publisher.
440
2. Then select the Manage External File Links function on the left side of the
dialog. The following set of buttons will appear in the information area of the
dialog.
3. To add an external file to the published material, select the “+” button.
4. The Open dialog will appear. Use this dialog to browse to the desired file. Select
the filename (or a group of files) and select the Open button. The selected file(s)
will be listed in the Project Publisher.
441
5. Use the “+” button to add additional files as needed.

6. To remove a file from the external link list, select the file in the list and then
select the “X” (delete) button.
7. Select the Apply button to save the list of external files.
8. If you wish to save your list of external links in a separate file, select the Export
button. The Save As dialog will appear, allowing you to select a folder, enter a
filename and save the file. This file will have a .lst extension. You will then be
able to import this saved list in future Publisher work sessions. This is useful if
you have a list of links you wish to use with multiple projects.
9. To import a saved list of external links, select the Import button. The Open
dialog will appear. Browse to the desired .lst file and select the Open button. The
contents of the selected file will be added to the list of external links in the
Publisher dialog.
442
Configure Publisher - Format
This function allows you to configure the format of the outputted files.
Under the Configure Publisher heading on the left side of the dialog, select Format.
The formatting functions will appear in the information area of the dialog.
The Publish Format field allows you to save and load your publish settings in a
configuration file. Existing configuration files can be selected from the drop-down
list in this field.
To create a new format file, select the New button. The Save As dialog will
appear, allowing you to enter the name of the new configuration file. Select the
Save button in the Save As dialog to create the new file.
To save any new settings you make in the currently selected configuration file,
select the Save button below the formatting functions.
Use the Browse button to select configuration files that are outside the currently
selected configuration folder.
443
General tab
In the General tab of the Configure Publisher - Format function, you can set the
following options (see previous figure):
Index page descriptions - These three fields allow the user to select from a list of title
block variables. The values of the selected variables will be displayed in output types
that support an index page (PDF, DWF). Note: you must have “Index” included in the
build order (see page 450) before the Index page will be created.
Part document from - This field allows you to select the field in the parts database
record from which the software will get the URL to create a Part document hyperlink.
Hyperlinks - These checkboxes determine the types of hyperlinks that the software
will create in the output. The following types are available:
Connections - Create a hyperlink between wire link references that will open the
appropriate page and (when possible) zoom to the General settings zoom factor
with the object centered.
Families - Create hyperlinks for all the device family cross references in the
drawing including references between modes.
Data record - Selecting this will export each part record used in the project to a
file and for each occurrence of a part number in the drawings add a hyperlink to
the appropriate record in the parts file.
Part document - Creates a link on the symbol to take the user to the URL
specified in the parts database. (The Part document from field defines which
field in the database record is used.)
Data record include - If you selected the Data record checkbox, use this list of parts
database fields to select those fields that will be included in the data record file.
444
Mode tab
This tab allows the user to specify different title block setup and layer mapping based
on each page’s drawing mode.
The Mode column identifies the promis•e drawing mode to which the setting will
apply.
The Export Title Block column gives you the option to manually select a title block
that will be inserted whenever the page is output. In this case the current promis•e
title block is removed. If this field is left blank, the promis•e title block is exported.
When you click inside the field, a drop-down list appears, allowing you to select the
desired title block.
The Printer/pc3 column allows you to select any system printer or AutoCAD plotter
configuration (pc3) file that will be used to output the selected drawing mode. When
you click inside the field, a drop-down list appears, allowing you to select from the
available system printers and pc3 files.
The Layer Format column allows you to select one of the layer formatting files
created with the Layers tab dialog.
445
Layers tab
The Layers tab allows you to rename layers in the output or have them turned on, off,
or deleted. The settings are saved to a layer format file. The layer tab allows the user
to have layer names remapped when outputting to separate files or a DWF or PDF.
The Read promis-e layers from field allows you to select a drawing file. The default
is the promis•e default drawing name. The selected file is read by the software and
used to populate the promis-e layer column. Use the Browse button to select a
drawing. When you select a new drawing, the column is repopulated, removing the
previous entries.
The Read export layers from field allows you to select a file to use to populate the
drop-down list from which selections are made in the Export Layer column. The
default is the promis-e default drawing.
446
The promis-e layer column displays the layer names that exist in the drawing selected
in the Read promis-e layers from field. You may manually type in or edit layer
names. Right-clicking on a layer name will display a Layer Information dialog with
the layer name and the layer properties.
447
The Export Layer column is re-populated any time the promis-e layer column is
re-populated. The entries on the export layer side all default to the promis-e layer
entries. The drop-down in each layer name field displays a list of layer names from
the drawing selected in the Read export layers from field. The top of the list will
display the layer name in the corresponding promis-e layer entry followed by a line
that says “ERASE” and then the other layer names. Selecting “ERASE” will result in
the entities on the layer being removed from the drawing and turned off.
Select ERASE
to delete layer
in output
For each layer there are On and Off checkboxes which you can select to determine the
state of the layer in the output. If neither On nor Off is selected, the pages are output
with whatever status the layer has when the drawing is read in.
The Layer format file field allows you to save the layer settings in a specified file.
Use the Save Layer Settings button to save the information in the selected file.
Attributes tab
The Attributes tab allows you to replace symbol and title block attributes. For
example, if a symbol has a promis•e attribute called “horse power” when the drawing
is exported you can have the attribute changed to “HP”. The value in the attribute will
stay the same; it is only the tag that is changed. In the case of page, project,
installation and other title block attributes, the current value will be read from the
database and the value will be placed in a substituted title block in which the attribute
will exist.
448
To enter a new attribute:

In the Type field, select the type of promis-e attribute that you wish to change. Make
your selection from the list of promis-e attribute type that appears when you click
inside the Type field. This list includes:
Symbol text - All symbol text names will appear in the promis-e Attribute
drop-down list.
Symbol - Connection point text, ID, or any other attributes used on the symbols
other than user-defined symbol text will appear in the promis-e Attribute
drop-down list.
Project (TitleBlock) - Project title block variables will appear in the promis-e
Attribute drop-down list.
Installation (TitleBlock) - Installation title block variables will appear in the
promis-e Attribute drop-down list.
Location (TitleBlock) - Location title block variables will appear in the
Page (TitleBlock) - All page title block variable names will appear in the
Title Block - All other title block variable names will appear in the promis-e
Attribute drop-down list.
The Exported Attribute column is filled in with the new attribute name. For the
symbol and symbol text attribute types, the attribute will be re-tagged during the
conversion. For other types of attribute (title block attributes) the value is copied into
a new title block. If the field is left blank, the attribute is retained as is during
conversion.
449
If you select the Delete checkbox for an attribute, the software will strip off that
attribute from the symbols in the output.
Attribute settings are saved in the publish format file.
Build Order tab
The Build Order tab allows you to pre-configure a document set based on document
or drawing type. The user can select the document type and position it in the order
that it should appear in the drawing set.
Important: When you add a drawing mode (Schematic, Panel Layout, etc.) to the build order, all
the pages of that type in the project will be automatically added to the Items to
Publish list in the File Manager dialog (see page 439).
450
You select the document type(s) from the area on the left side of the dialog and use the
right arrow button to move them to the right side to determine which types will be
published. The following types are available:
All drawings - Outputs all of the drawings in the project.
mode:___ - All of the defined drawing modes appear separately so you can
change the order or restrict what modes should be printed.
DOC files - All files with a DOC extension in the publish folder of the project
folder or included in the file manager Items to Publish list.
XLS files - All files with a XLS extension in the publish folder of the project
PDF files - All files with a PDF extension in the publish folder of the project
Product PDFs - All PDFs listed for each different part number used in the
project.
Project links - All of the files (PDF, DOC or XLS) listed in the “links.txt” file in
the project publish folder.
Standard links - All of the files (PDF, DOC or XLS) listed in the “links.txt” file
in the Project Publisher application folder.
Reports - The standard reports chosen for output in the configuration file
selected in the Select Report Configuration field. Reports will be incorporated
into the PDF output file. In web output, they will be placed as separate PDFs in a
Reports subfolder and will be included as links in the Index.
Index - This is a listing all of the drawings in the final published set with
hyperlinks. You must include Index in the build order if you wish to have an
index in the output. In PDF output the index will appear as a separate Table of
Contents page. In web output, the software will create a frameset page with the
index on the left and the selected drawing or report displayed on the right.
Once the selected document types are listed on the right side of the dialog, you can set
the order of publication by moving the selected type up or down the list with the up
and down arrow buttons. You can remove a file from the list by using the left arrow
button.
Select the Edit standard links button to open an editor that allows you to browse for
files and set them in a user-specified order. The information is stored in the publisher
application folder so that the document can be added to all projects.
Use the Select Report Configuration field to select a configuration file that defines a
group of promis•e reports to include with the document set. This configuration file is
created in the promis•e Run Reports dialog (see page 463).
451
The two contents format checkboxes allow formatting of the contents page. The
default is to output a contents page listing the document types in the order they were
added to the report. Selecting the List files checkbox indents and lists the files under
each section.
The build order settings are saved in the publish format file.
Configure Publisher - Outputs
This function allows you to designate printers for different output types. You can also
make settings for outputs that go to a file.
Under the Configure Publisher heading on the left side of the dialog, select Outputs.
The output functions will appear in the information area of the dialog.

Primary Printer is the printer used for non-promis•e documents and promis•e
reports. Select the desired printer from the drop-down list.
Drawing Printer is the printer that will be used for promis•e drawings. Select the
desired printer from the drop-down list. If you select the Configure button, you will
display the AutoCAD (see page 431) or MicroStation (see page 435) plotter
configuration dialog.
452
The PDF File field allows you to define a path and name for the PDF output file.
Select the browse button to open the Save As dialog where you can select a folder and
enter a filename. If you select the Configure button, the following PDF configure
dialog will appear.
Select the Navigate Box checkbox if you wish the hyperlinks in the drawing
pages to be marked with a blue box.
Select the Drawing page size radio button if you wish the page size in the PDF
file to be taken from the promis•e drawing size.
Select the Default paper size radio button if you wish to manually select the
page size of the PDF file. Select the desired page size from the drop-down list.
Select the desired paper size from the drop-down list.
Enter the initial zoom percentage in the Zoom field.
Select OK to enter these settings.
The Drawing File field allows you to define a folder for the drawing output files.
Select the browse button to open the Save As dialog where you can select a folder. If
you select the Configure button, the following Drawing configure dialog will appear.
Select the radio button for DWG or DXF format. From the drop-down list, select
the AutoCAD version for file compatibility (AutoCAD 2000, 2004 or 2007).
Select OK to enter these settings.
453
The Web Output field allows you to define a path and name for HTML output files.
Select the browse button to open the Save As dialog where you can select a folder and
enter a filename. The software will create a DWF format file for each drawing and
also an HTML file that will display the DWF file in a browser.
Note: If you wish to have a navigation frame in the browser that allows you to select the
drawings for display, you must have the “Index” item included in the build order (see
page 450). The software will then create a frameset HTML page with the filename
that you entered in the Save As dialog.
If you select the Configure button, the following Web configure dialog will appear.
Select the Navigate Box checkbox if you wish the hyperlinks in the drawing
pages to be marked with a blue box.
Select OK to enter this setting.
454
Publish - Create Package
To publish the output from your project according to the settings you have made,
select the Create Package function under the Publish category on the left side of the
Publisher dialog. The following dialog will appear:
In the Included in Output area of the dialog you can make the following settings:
Send to Printer - Select the checkbox to send the output to a printer.
Use Drawing Specific Printer - Select this checkbox to send drawings to the
drawing printer defined in the Outputs function. See page 452.
PDF - Select this checkbox to send the output to a combined PDF file.
Note: You must have MicroSoft Office 2007 on your system in order for the Project
Publisher to include external documents in the project PDF output file. If you do
not have Office 2007, the Project Publisher will include copies of the external
documents in the same folder with the PDF output file.
Drawing Files - Select this checkbox to output the drawings to the drawing file
format defined in the Outputs function. See page 452.
Web Output - Select this checkbox to output the drawings to the web format as
defined in the Outputs function. See page 452.
In the Publishing Time Options area of the dialog you can make the following
settings:
Select the Data Filter After checkbox if you wish to only publish drawings
modified after a specified date. Then select the starting date for the output in the
date field. Drawings modified on or after this date will be included in the output.
455
Select the Publish button to create the published output. A publish progress dialog
will appear that lists each item as it is published. This dialog closes automatically
when the publishing is complete. Published output is placed in the folders and sent to
the printers defined in the Outputs function. See page 452.
456
Reports
9 Reports
This section describes how to generate reports in promis•e software.
Generate Reports Function

Reports are generated with the promis-e Output > Run Reports function.
The Run Reports dialog will appear.
457
Reports
The available report categories are listed on the left side of the dialog. Categories with
available report formats will be marked with a “+” icon. Double click on the category
name to display the reports inside.
Selecting and running a report
Click on the checkbox beside the report name so that a checkmark appears. You can
select multiple reports and print them all at the same time.
Select the Run button to generate the selected reports.
Note: You can also create and save a report output configuration file that defines a
preferred combination of reports and output formats. You can then select this file in
the Configuration field. See page 463.
458
Reports
Select the output type
There are two buttons and two checkboxes that determine the output medium. The
following selections are available (you may select more that one for each report):
Preview - Select this button to display the report on the screen.
Text On Drawing - Select this button to place the report on a drawing page.
Note: To place a report on a drawing page, you must use a report template that is
designed for this purpose. In the pre-configure reports, these are indicated by the
word “- Drawing” in the report name. For example, “BOM_Itemized - Drawing
(metric)”. To create custom Text On Drawing templates, see page 481.
Print - This checkbox will send the report to a printer. A printer selection dialog
will appear when you run the report.
Output to File - This checkbox will cause the report to be stored as a file. When
you select this checkbox, additional fields and checkboxes become active. Use
the Save As field to browse to the folder where you wish to store the file.
Checkboxes for the following file formats are available (you may select more
that one for each report):
CSV - Generates reports in the Comma-Separated Variables format. When
this checkbox is selected, the Text Delimiter field becomes active which
allows you to define the character that will separate values in the report.
HTML - Generate reports in HTML format. A “Files” subdirectory is
created for each report to hold images and other files related to the report.
TXT - Generates reports in ASCII text format.
XLS - Generates reports in the XLS format, compatible with Microsoft
Excel spreadsheet software.
MHT - Generates reports in the MHTML archived Web page format. This
combines a web page and associated images into a single file which can be
viewed using Internet Explorer.
RTF - Generates reports in the Rich Text Format, which is compatible with
Microsoft Word and other word processors.
PDF - Generates reports in the Adobe Acrobat Portable Document Format.
459
Reports
Sorting report contents
Highlight the report name in the Run Reports dialog and select the Sorting button.
The Sorting dialog will appear, listing the fields in the selected report.
If you wish to sort the report by the values in a certain field, select the desired field on
the left side of the dialog and select the “+” button. The field will then be listed on the
right side of the dialog.
You can select multiple fields to sort by, in which case the data is sorted by the first
field and when there are multiple items with the same value, these are sorted by the
values in the second field. You can select whether the sorting is in ascending or
descending order by clicking on the triangle icon so that it points up (ascending) or
down (descending).
Select ascending
or descending
order
460
Reports
Filtering report contents
You can create filters to define what should be included or excluded in a report.
Highlight the report name in the Run Reports dialog and select the Filters button. The
Filtering dialog will appear.
To create a filter:
1. Use the down arrow button in the Field field and select one of the report fields
from the list.
2. In the Relationship field choose a comparison function. The available functions
are = (equals), Like (wildcard), < (less than), > (greater than) and Not (not equal
to). “Like” is a wildcard function that will include any items that contain the
string that is entered in the Value field.
3. In the Value field enter the string that the filter function is to use to decide what
to include or exclude from the report.
4. Select the OK button to create the filter.
Filters are used until you return to the Report Filters dialog and select the Clear Filter
link for that filter.
461
Reports
Report Options
Select the Options button in the Run Reports dialog to make settings that affect report
contents.
The following options are available:

Replace multi-line character (^) with space - Select this checkbox to replace the line
break character (^) with a space in the reports to be created. This character creates line
breaks in text that is entered on a drawing. If you wish to keep the text line breaks in
your reports, de-select this checkbox.
Select parts on online pages only - Select this checkbox to include only items that
exist in online pages.
Include devices without a part number - Select this checkbox to include items that
have no part number assigned.
Include terminals - Select this checkbox to include terminals.
Include part numbers that only exist in BOM explorer - Select this checkbox to
include items that have been entered in the BOM Explorer but have not yet been used
in a drawing.
462
Reports
Only list parts used on selected pages - Select this checkbox to only include items on
selected pages. When you select the checkbox, a Select Pages button will appear. Use
this button to display the Select Pages dialog where you can choose pages.
Creating a Report Output Configuration File
You can create a configuration file that defines a combination of reports and output
settings. This allows you to quickly select and run your preferred report outputs. The
configuration file is selected in the Configuration field of the Run Reports dialog.
To create a configuration file:
1. In the Run Reports dialog, select the checkbox for a report that you wish to
include in your configuration.
2. Select the output destination(s) for the selected report (printer, output to file, file
type, path, etc.).
3. In a similar manner, select each additional report that you wish to include and the
output destinations for that report.
4. When you have selected all the desired reports, enter a name for your
configuration file in the Configuration field.
5. Select the Save button. A message window will confirm that the file was saved.
Now, when you enter the Run Reports dialog you will be able select your
configuration file from the drop-down list in the Configuration field. The stored
group of reports and output settings then will be immediately selected and will be
ready to run.
463
Reports
Compile Connection Information function
Ordinarily, the software will automatically compile the connection information that it
needs to put in the reports. If for some reason you believe the latest connection
information is not being used in the reports, you can manually update the connection
information for the current project using the Manage > Compile Connections
function. You can then generate the desired reports again.
464
Reports
Standard Reports
The following pre-configured reports are provided with the software.
Bill of Materials (Itemized) - Itemized bill of material.
Bill of Materials (Quantified) - Quantified bill of material.
Cable List - List of cables.
Dimension List - Calculates total area, maximum depth and total weight of
components used in project.
Family List - List of device families.
Field Wire List - List of cables, including connections of each conductor.
Installations - List of installations in a project.
Job Costing - Calculated cost of project including material, assembly, wiring time
and mark-up.
Manufacturers Parts - A listing of the parts records in the parts database.
Macros - List of macros in the symbol catalog.
Page Formats - List of available drawing page formats.
Page List - A table of contents of the project, listing all pages.
PLC List - A list of PLC modules in the project.
Symbols - A list of symbols in the symbol catalog.
Terminal strips - A list of terminal strips in the project.
Terminals - A list of terminals strips in the project showing connections of each
terminal.
Wire Links - A list of wire link cross references in the project.
Wire List - A list of wires including wire number, gauge, color, and From/To
connection information.
Wire Labels - A list of wire numbers which can be printed in the form of wire labels.
Note: When you see the word “- Drawing” in a report name, for example “BOM_Itemized -
Drawing (metric)”, it indicates the report is intended for Text on Drawing output.
465
Reports
Report Template Designer

You can use the Report Wizard function to create your own custom report formats.
Use the following procedure:
1. Select Configure > Report Template Designer.

466
Reports
2. You can either edit an existing template that you created or create a new
template.
To edit an existing template that you created, select File > Open or the
toolbar button for Open Report
Select the existing report from the drop-down list in the Template field and then
the OK button.
To create a new template, select File > New or the toolbar button for New
Report Template.
In this dialog you select how you will create the template.
Select the Predefined Report Type radio button if you wish to base your report
on an existing report type. Select one of the report types in the drop-down list.
Select the Customized by SQL Statement radio button if you wish to enter SQL
statements to define the data that will be included in the report. When you select
this radio button, the text field below it becomes available for entering the SQL
467
Reports
statements. A radio button, Limit recordset within project range also becomes
available. Select this radio button if you wish the data in the report to be limited
to the current project only.
When you have selected the report type or entered the SQL statements, select
OK to continue.
3. The Report Template Designer dialog will appear. The dialog has areas for
performing different functions.
Menus and Toolbar
Report Explorer,
Report Formatting and Preview area Properties and
Toolbox
Fields
Menus and Toolbar - At the top of the dialog are menus and toolbars for major
file-handling and formatting functions. See page 474.
Toolbox - On the left side of the dialog is the toolbox area that provides a
selection of standard controls that you can drag into the report template. This
includes elements such as labels, lines, picture boxes, tables, and so on. See page
474.
Report Formatting and Preview - The central area of the dialog is where you
place and arrange the elements of the report. Select the Designer tab at the
bottom of this area when you are placing or editing report elements. The report
formatting area is divided into horizontal bands that represent different parts of
the report page (header, body, footer, etc.). Select the Preview or HTML View
tabs when you wish to see what the report output will look like. If you have a
page open, data from that project will appear in the preview.
468
Reports
Report Explorer, Properties and Fields - On the right side of the dialog is an
area that has several purposes. Select the Report Explorer tab to see an outline
view of the report’s structure and the elements used in the report. You can use
this view to select individual fields or controls and view their properties or delete
them by means of the right-click menu. Select the Property Grid tab to set the
properties of the currently selected report element. Select the Field List tab to
display a list of available data fields. You can drag these fields into the report
formatting area.
You can adjust the size of these dialog areas by pointing the cursor at the edge of
the area and dragging. You can close the dialog area by clicking on the “X”
button for that area and re-display it using the View > Window menu. You can
drag the Toolbox and the Report Explorer/Fields/Property Grid area so that they
are free-floating windows. To dock them again with the Report Template dialog,
drag them to either the right or left end of the ruler bar.
4. Global settings for the report. To do this, select the global settings button,
which is the small button marked with a “>” character at the upper left corner of
the Report Formatting area.
Global Settings
button
When you select the button, a limited group of fields will appear beside the
button. However, you can select the Property Grid tab and access all global
settings for the report.
469
Reports
Note: You must select the global settings button first before you will see these fields in
the Property Grid tab.
The important fields here are:
Landscape - Select True in this field if you wish the report to be in
landscape mode. Select False if you wish the report to be in portrait mode.
Margins - Sets the page margins for the report. If you click the “+” icon
beside the Margins field, you will see separate fields for top, bottom, right
and left margins.
PageHeight, PageWidth - Set the paper size here. Units are hundredths of an
inch or tenths of a millimeter as set in the Report Unit field.
Report Unit - Here you select whether the space units you enter for margins,
paper size, etc., will represent hundredths of an inch or tenths of a
millimeter.
470
Reports
5. In the Report Formatting area, create the bands that will make up the main
areas of the report page. The different bands are marked by horizontal bars
with the name of the band type.
Bands
The following band types are available:

TopMargin - The area defined by the top margin value. Used for placing
content at the top of each report page.
ReportHeader - For content that will only appear at the beginning of the
first page of the report, below the top margin.
PageHeader - Used for placing content at the top of a report page, below the
TopMargin. Mainly intended for displaying the header of a table, which has
been continued from the previous page.
Detail - The main content area of the report.
GroupHeader - A header for a sub-section of data within the Detail band of
the report (example: one cable within a field wiring report). The group
header appears above the Detail band.
GroupFooter - A footer for a sub-section of data within the Detail band of
the report. Appears below the Detail band.
ReportFooter - Used for placing content at the end of a report.
PageFooter - Used for placing content at the bottom of a report page, above
the BottomMargin band. Mainly intended for displaying the footer of a table,
which is continued on the following page.
BottomMargin - An area defined by the bottom margin value. Used for
471
Reports
placing content at the bottom of each report page.

To insert a new band, right click in the desired part of the report formatting area
and select Insert Band from the popup menu, followed by the desired band type.
If a band type is greyed-out in the menu, that means that it already exists in the
report and cannot be placed again.
To delete a band, right click anywhere in the band and select Delete from the
popup menu.
6. Define the content of each band. You can make fixed entries or variable entries
that will be replaced with project data or other information.
Drag elements such as text boxes, picture boxes and lines from the Toolbox area
into any of the bands. You can also select the Field List tab to display a list of
available data fields and drag these into the bands.
Configure the report elements by selecting the element and then making settings
in the Property Grid tab.
See page 475 for some examples of defining common report elements:
472
Reports
7. Preview the report by selecting the Preview or HTML View tabs. If you have a
drawing page open, data from that project will appear in the preview.
8. Save the report. Select the File > Save function or the Save toolbar button.
The Save As dialog will appear, allowing you to enter a name for the report and
select a folder in which to save it. The default folder is
promis•e Data/Templates/Reports.
To generate the report, select the promis-e Output > Run Reports function. See
page 457.
473
Reports
Report Template Designer Toolbars
Hover the cursor over a toolbar button to see a tooltip that describes its function.
Main Toolbar (editing functions)
Formatting Toolbar (text functions)
Layout Toolbar (element positioning functions)
Most toolbar functions are also available from the Report Wizard pulldown menus.
Report Template Designer Controls (Toolbox)
The following controls are available in the Toolbox area. To use them, drag them into
one of the bands in the report formatting area. Once there, you can select them and
format them in the Property Grid tab like other report elements.
Pointer - A tool that allows you to select bands and report elements.
Subreport - Subreport controls are used if there is a particular report structure that
needs to be included in many reports and it needs to have a consistent appearance and
functionality. A good example is a report header that always contains the same
company information, who generated the report, the date, etc.
Barcode - Represents a barcode in reports.
Chart - Inserts a chart in reports. Use this control to show different data in a report
using one or several Series View Types. A chart wizard allows you to format the chart
once inserted.
Checkbox - Inserts a check box in reports. Use this control to allow a user to display
a true/false or Checked/Unchecked/Indeterminate state.
Label - Inserts a label in reports. Use this control to place single-line or multi-line
text in a report.
Line - This control places a line in your report.
PageBreak - Inserts a page delimiter into the report.
474
Reports
PageInfo - Use this control to display auxiliary information on report pages such as
page numbers, the current date or user information.
Panel - Inserts a control that can contain other controls. Use this control to group
controls together which makes it easier to manipulate them.
PictureBox - Inserts a control that can be used to insert images into your report.
RichTextBox - Inserts a control that can be used to display, enter, and manipulate
formatted text.
Table - Inserts a table into the reports.
ZipCode - Inserts a control that displays a zip code in a report.
Report Configuration Examples
Here are some examples of defining common report elements:
Project Name
Drag a Label box from the Toolbox into the desired band.
Double click inside the label box and enter the text “Project Name:”. Stretch the
box to the desired size by dragging one of the square handles on the edges of the
field. You can format the text for font, size, etc., using the text functions in the
formatting toolbar or in the Property Grid tab.
475
Reports
Select the Field List tab and open the “Project Fields” group. Drag the “Project”
field into the report next to the label box. Resize this box as needed and format
the text.
When the report is generated, the Project field will be replaced with the name of
the current project. Example:
Project Name: Paintline 2
Table (Columns)
A table defines columns for data, causing the information in each row of the report to
line up properly.
To create a table, begin by dragging the Table control from the toolbox into the
desired band of the report.
476
Reports
The default table has three cells (columns). You can resize the table by dragging the
handles on the edge. You can also set the width and height of the table using the Size
fields in the Property Grid tab.
Note: If the entire table is selected, the size settings will apply to the table. If a single cell is
selected, the size settings will apply to that cell. Making a single cell larger may
reduce the size of the other cells because the total size of the table will remain the
same.
To add more columns, cells or rows to the table, select one of the cells, right click, and
use the Insert function from the popup menu.
Page Numbers
To add page numbers to the report pages, begin by dragging the PageInfo control
from the toolbox into the desired band of the report. The PageFooter band would
usually be the best place for page numbers.
477
Reports
You can make many formatting settings in the Property Grid tab. The PageInfo box
you inserted must be selected (handles visible) in order to see its properties. If you
click the “+” icon in the Font field, a variety of font setting fields become available.
If you click in the PageInfo field, a drop-down list will be available that provides a
number of predefined formats. NumberOfTotal is the default format.
RomLowNumber is a lowercase roman numeral. RomHiNumber is an uppercase
roman numeral.
You can make additional settings in the Format field of the Property Grid tab.
Clicking in this field displays a browse [...] button which, if clicked, displays the
Format String Editor dialog.
478
Reports
Here you can select an appropriate data type in the Category column and then select
from various formats in the Standard Types tab. You can also go to the Custom tab
and see a list of individual elements which you can type in the field at the top of this
tab. The Sample field shows an example of what that format will look like with a real
value.
If you want to use the “Number of Total” format but don’t like the default “/”
character that divides the two values, you can select NumberOfTotal in the PageInfo
field, and make the following entry in the Format field:
{0} of {1}
When the report is run, the {0} will be replaced with the current page number and the
{1} will be replaced with the total number of pages in the report. If you prefer, you
can use any word or character in place of “of”.
479
Reports
Date-Time
Drag a PageInfo control into the desired band.

Select the PageInfo box so that the handles are visible. Then, in the Property Grid tab,
click in the PageInfo field. A drop-down list will be available that provides a number
of predefined formats. Select DateTime.
Click in the Format field of the Property Grid tab to display a browse [...] button.
Click this button to display the Format String Editor dialog.
Select DateTime in the Category list. You will then be able to select various date and
time combinations in the Standard Types tab. You can also go to the Custom tab and
see a list of individual date/time elements which you can type in the field at the top of
this tab. The Sample field shows how your selected format will appear in the report.
480
Reports
Text on Drawing Templates
Special conditions must be met for creating templates that will place a report on a
drawing page (Text on Drawing). The predefined Text on Drawing reports provided
with the software are indicated by the word “- Drawing” in the report name.
Follow these rules when creating Text on Drawing report templates:
1. Each column heading must be in the cell of a table and this table must be inside
the PageHeader band.
2. Each data column must also be in the cell of a table and this table must be inside
the Detail band.
Column headings in table
Data columns in table
3. Any variables placed outside of these tables will be ignored.

4. You can use plain text entries in other bands of the report, but variables will be
ignored.
5. An exception to rule 2 is a Quantified Bill of Materials report. In this report the
table containing the data columns must be placed in the GroupHeader1 band.
This allows the sum of quantities to function properly.
6. Also in the Quantified Bill of Materials report provided with the software, the
“Item” heading corresponds to a blank cell in the data table; no variable is used
in this cell of the data table because the value of this field is automatically
calculated by a script.
481
Reports
Engineering Design Considerations Report

The Engineering Design Considerations function allows you to check for various
conditions in your project that could cause problems if not corrected.
1. Select Review/Revise > Engineering Design Considerations.

2. Select a Range radio button to determine how much of the project you wish to
include in the check. The choices are: Current active page, Whole Project and
Pages. If you choose Pages, the Select Pages button becomes active, allowing
you to display the Select Pages dialog.
3. The conditions for which you can check are grouped into three categories:
Connections, Cable and Symbol. Select the desired conditions so that a
checkmark appears beside the condition name. You can select the category name
to automatically select all the conditions in that category.
4. Select the Check button to check for the selected conditions.
482
Reports
5. The result of the check (Consideration Report) is displayed in the same dialog.
You can leave this report open as you work on correcting the various conditions.
If you select the checkbox in the Status column, the item will appear with
strikethrough characters, allowing you to “cross off” items on the list.
If you wish to save the report, select the Export link. This will display the Save
As dialog where you can save the report as a MS Excel (xls) file.
To run another check, select the Options tab to display the list of conditions
again.
483
Reports
Graphical Parts List

The promis-e Output > Graphical Parts List function produces a parts list on one
or more drawing pages. This report includes a graphical representation of the symbols
associated each part number. Cross referencing information is included to show where
each instance of the symbol is located including parent and child symbols.
To create a graphical parts list you must do the following things first:
• Create a page macro that contains the desired columns and headings.
• Create a graphical parts list macro for each symbol.
• Create a cross reference macro for each symbol.
• In the parts database, assign the name of the corresponding graphical parts list
macro to each part number using the Macro_List field.
484
Reports
Create page macro
This macro contains the column headings of the list. See the following example.
1. On a blank page, enter the desired text and dividing lines.

2. Select Manage > Create Macro.
3. Enter an appropriate name for the macro.
4. Select or enter a base point of X=0, Y=0.
5. Select the Select Objects button and select the items to include in the macro.
6. Select OK to save the macro.
Create graphical parts list macro and cross reference macro
These macros contain the desired fields from the parts database to identify the part
number and the corresponding schematic symbol. You must create these for each
component type. For positioning and sizing reasons it is probably easier to draw both
macros at the same time and save the parts as separate macros. See the following
example:
{
{
Cross reference macro
Graphical parts list macro
The graphical parts list macro has information about the part number and symbols.
The cross reference macro shows where the part number is used in the project. It
contains the device ID as well as a cross reference to indicate the location where the
device ID occurs.
485
Reports
Use the following procedure:
1. On a blank page, enter the desired text, symbols and dividing lines for the
graphical parts macro.You may also wish to draw separate lines for area that will
be the cross reference macro.
In the graphical parts list macro area, use variable names for description, part
number, etc. You must include the question mark.
The following variables are available:
?descr Description
?techdate_1 First extended description field (Detailed_Description1)
?manufact Manufacturer
?partnumber Part number
2. Place the schematic symbol that is used to represent the part number. Delete the
device ID after placing the symbol; in this case, it doesn't have a function.
3. In the cross reference macro area, enter the variables for the cross references.
The following variables are available:
?devid Device ID
?inst Installation
?loc Location
?inst_loc_devid Installation - Location -Device ID
?page_inst Installation in which the component was placed
?cr0 Cross reference to the position of the symbol in the schematic
diagram. For symbols with parent/child relationships, it refers
to the parent.
?cr1,?cr2,?crx Cross references of the device child symbols. The order
and quantity corresponds to that in the family definition.
?ftext0 Function text of the parent symbol.
?fext1-?ftextx Function text of the child symbols.
4. Select Manage > Create Macro .
5. Enter an appropriate name for the graphical parts list macro.
486
Reports
6. Select a base point in the upper left corner of the macro.
Graphical parts list macro base point

Cross reference macro base point
7. Select the Select Objects button and select only the items to include in the
graphical parts list macro.
8. Select OK to save the graphical parts list macro.
9. Select Manage > Create Macro to create the cross reference macro.
10. Enter the same name you used for the graphical parts list macro but add “_CR”
to the end of the name. For example, if you called the graphical parts list macro
“GRAPH-RELAY” you must name the cross reference macro
“GRAPH-RELAY_CR”.
11. Select a base point in the upper left corner of the cross reference macro.
12. Select the Select Objects button and select only the items to include in the cross
reference macro.
13. Select OK to save the cross reference macro.
487
Reports
Edit parts database
Add the graphical parts list macro name in the parts database to all matching parts in
the Macro_List field.
Assign graphical parts list macro name

to parts records
488
Reports
Run the Graphical Parts List
To run the Graphical Parts List:
1. Select promis-e Output > Graphical Parts List. The New Page dialog will
appear.
2. Enter or select the desired drawing set, installation, location, page name, page
format for the drawing. If the list occupies multiple pages, the entered page name
will be the first page.
3. In the Page Macro field, select the page macro (header) you created for the
graphical parts list. See page 485.
4. Select the OK button to continue. The Graph Setting dialog will appear.
489
Reports
Use the Filter fields to limit the graphical list to the parts used in a selected
installation or location.
Use the Page Margins fields to define the area of the page that will used for the
list.
5. Select OK to generate the drawing pages that contain the list.
490
Reports
Forced Routing Manager

The Forced Routing Manager allows you force the sequence of connections between
devices without using diagonal wires. This forcing affects the output of the wire list
and the shortest distance routing function.
You may wish to use the Forced Routing Manager because, in some cases, the
connections determined by the shortest distance routing function may not be the most
efficient or practical for a layout, or you may find it difficult to use diagonal wire
connections in your schematic. Also, you may need to add terminals or plugs that
don’t exist in the schematic drawings but are required to assemble the equipment in
the real world. By using forced routing to define specific connections where needed
and then running the shortest distance routing function you can generate a more
accurate wire routing list.
To access the Forced Routing Manager you can:
• Select Review/Revise > Forced Routing Manager, or
• Right-click on a wire and select Forced Routing Manager from the pop-up
menu
The Forced Routing Manager dialog will appear. If the user selects this function from
the drop-down menu the dialog will list all the potentials in the project with the first
potential in the list highlighted by default. If, however, the user right clicks on a
particular wire in the schematic, the software will only load that wire in the list.
491
Reports
The Forced Routing Manager dialog has three tabs: Arrangement View, Wire List
View, and Split View.
Arrangement View tab
In the Arrangement View tab of the Forced Routing Manager dialog (see previous
figure), potentials are listed in alphanumeric order by name. Potentials that have not
been named will be given an identifier of “Unnamed.”
You can also type in the complete name or part of the name of a potential (wildcards *
should be recognized) into the Search Potential field and select the “->” button to
jump to that potential in the arrangement view and automatically expand that
potential. Clicking the search button again will jump to the next potential that
matches it.
492
Reports
Potential Groups
In the Forced Routing Manager, connections are listed under each wire number,
organized in “potential groups.” A potential group represents all the devices that are
daisy-chained off one side (internal or external) of a terminal block or pin. (If there
are no terminals or pins on a wire, then the potential group will contain all the
connections on that wire. In the Arrangement View of the Forced Routing Manager
you can expand or collapse each potential group by clicking on the “+” or “-” icons to
show or hide the connections in the group.
Changing the Order of Groups and Connections

You can change the order of the connections within the groups and move connections
from one group to another.
To change the order of groups and connections:
1. In the Arrangement View tab, highlight the potential group or connection that
you wish to move.
2. Select the up arrow or down arrow button to move the item up or down in the
listing.
Note: You can also change the order of connections by dragging them up or down and
dropping them at the desired position. You cannot move a connection from a
sub-group to a higher level or vice versa.
493
Reports
Adding a Potential Group

You can add a potential group when you need an additional terminal or plug.
1. There are two ways to add a new potential group in the Forced Routing
Manager:
• Select a potential (wire) name and click the Add Group (the large “+”) button
or right click on the potential name and select Add Group from the pop-up
menu. The Insert Device dialog will appear, where you can create the
potential group with an existing unused terminal/plug connection point or add
a new terminal/plug. The new group will be added to the end of the potential
after the existing potential group(s).
• Select a potential group name or a connection within a group and click the
Add Group (the large “+”) button. The Insert Device dialog will appear,
allowing you to create the potential group with an existing unused
terminal/plug connection point or to add a new terminal/plug. You will be
asked if the new connection group is to be inserted before or after the current
potential group.
494
Reports
2. The Insert Device dialog appears when you add a group. Select a radio button for
the type of device you are inserting: Terminal device, or Pin/Plug device.
3. Select the radio button to determine whether you will use a New ID or and
Existing ID for the terminal or pin/plug.
4. If you are using a new ID, enter its device tag in the Device Tag field and select
the desired installation and location.
If you are using an existing ID, select the Search ID button. The Search dialog
will appear, allowing you to select one of the available terminal or pin/plug IDs.
Select the desired ID in the Search dialog followed by OK. The selected ID will
appear grayed out in the Insert Device dialog.
5. (Optional) If you are using a new ID, you can select a device family for the new
group in the Family field. If you pick a family you will be prompted to pick a
role in the device usage chart which will automatically populate the symbol
name.
6. Select a symbol for the new group in the Symbol field. Use the browse button to
display the Select Symbol dialog.
7. Enter a terminal or pin number in the Terminal Number field. If you are using an
existing device tag, you will be prompted automatically with the first available
terminal number.
8. Select the connection point for the new group in the CP Text field.
9. (Optional) Select a part number for the new group in the Part Number field.
10. Select the OK button to add the new group.
495
Reports
Connections that don’t exist in the schematic are marked with double angle brackets
(<< >>) in the Forced Routing Manager.
Add a Device to a Potential Group

To add a device to a potential group:
1. Highlight the potential group heading or a connection within the group and
select the Add Device (small “+”) button. You can also right click on the
potential group heading or on a device in the group and select Add Device from
the pop-up menu.
2. The Insert Device dialog will appear (see page 494). Fill in the dialog fields the
same as when adding a group. In addition to terminal device and pin/plug device,
you have a radio button for Normal device which consists of
non-terminal/pin/plug symbols.
3. Select OK to add the device.
Create a Single Point Connection

In the Forced Routing Manager you can designate a connection as a “single point
connection.” This indicates a device with only one connection. This kind of device
must be at the end of a daisy chain.
To create a single point connection:
1. In the Arrangement View tab, select the desired connection. (A connection must
be at the end of the potential group before it can be made a single point
connection.)
2. Select the Single Point Connection (red asterisk *) button. You can also right
click on the connection and select Single Point from the pop-up menu.
Single point connections are marked with an asterisk.
496
Reports
To remove the single point connection designation, select the connection and select
the Single Point Connection button again. The asterisk will be removed from the
connection.
Star Groups and Wirelinks
When a connection is made through a wirelink of the star group type, any connections
that go through the wirelink are highlighted in red.
497
Reports
Wire List View tab
The Wire List View tab of the Forced Routing Manager dialog displays details of the
connections within the potential group that was selected in the Arrangement View tab.
Any changes that you made in the Arrangement View tab are reflected in the wire list
view.
In the Wire List View, potential groups are separated by a shaded bar.
498
Reports
Forcing Connections
In the Wire List View tab you can force connections.

To force a connection:
1. Select the connection (row) that you wish to force. You can select more than one
at a time by holding down the <Shift> or <Ctrl> keys while selecting.
2. Select the Force button.
Forced connections are indicated in the Wire List View by blue text and by a
forced connection icon in the left-most column.
Note: The use of diagonal wires in the schematics is considered to be a forced connection
that can only be changed in the schematics. These wires have a text color of green to
indicate these are forced connections that can only be changed in the schematics.
They are also marked by a diagonal wire icon in the left-most column.
To remove forcing from a connection - Select the forced connection and then select
the Unforce button.
Changing Wire Properties
In the Wire List View tab you can change the wire properties.
There are columns in that display various wire properties. You can determine which
properties are displayed by right-clicking in the Wire Properties heading. The
available properties are listed. If you select the checkbox for the desired property, it
will be displayed. Similarly, you can hide a property by de-selecting its checkbox.
499
Reports
When you click in one of the property fields for a given connection you will be able to
either enter a value or select from the available values. Values in the drop-down lists
are the default values from the Wire Options dialog (see page 105).
Note: If you set the value in the Use field, that may pre-define certain other wire properties
that you won’t be able to change without changing the Use value.
500
Reports
Split View tab
The Split View tab of the Forced Routing Manager dialog is a combination of the
Arrangement View tab and the Wire List View tab. It allows you to perform the
functions of both tabs, however you have to do more scrolling to see the wire list
information.
When you highlight a connection in the Arrangement view, the software highlights
the related connection in the Wire List view.
Import Legacy Connection List
If you have used the Forced Routing Module in legacy versions of promis•e, you can
import your previous forced connection files into the current version of the software.
First you must convert the legacy project to the latest format using the Migration
Wizard (see page 118). The Migration Wizard will make a copy of the "CLIST" folder
from the legacy project to the new project inside the “Legacy Data” folder.
501
Reports
You can then click the Import Legacy Connection List button in the Force Routing
Manager. This will display a browse dialog that allows you to browse to your Forced
Connection List files. The browse dialog will filter for *.xml file types.
Select a file and click the OK button. The software will read the XML connection list
file and search by wire number and device ID to identify the connections and update
the promis•e database to match the forced connections specified in the legacy
connection list. It will update wire properties and add virtual devices that may not
have existed in the schematic based upon the connection list file. The Alerts window
will print any errors or problems encountered with the import.
502
Reports
Panduit Labels Function

The Panduit Labels function allows you to generate labels for the wires, cables and
devices in your project. You can select a Panduit label part number so that the output
will be correctly formatted for use in the Panduit Easy-Mark label-printing software.
Use this procedure:
1. Select the promis-e Output > Panduit Labels function. The Panduit Labels
dialog will appear.
2. Select the radio button for the category of label that you wish to print: Wire
Labels, Cable Tags or Device Labels.
3. Select a Panduit part number for the label. To do this, click on the Select Label
button. The Panduit Form dialog will appear. This is a special parts selection
form for Panduit parts.
503
Reports
The form will be filtered automatically for part numbers that correspond to
Panduit labels. For more information on how to select parts in this dialog, see
page 640.
Once you have found the desired part number, highlight it and select the OK
button.
4. The Panduit Labels dialog will re-appear with the selected part number
displayed. Enter a value in the Quantity Per Wire (or Per Device or Per Cable)
field to determine how many labels will be created with each wire number or ID.
5. The filter fields in the center of the dialog will vary depending on the label
category you selected in step 2. These allow you to filter the range of items in
your project that will be included in the output.
504
Reports
For wires, define a range of wire sizes by selecting an upper and lower value in
the Gauge1 and Gauge2 fields. If you have assigned wire colors, you can limit
output to a selected color in the Color field. You can also limit the output to a
selected Installation or Location using the provided fields.
For cables, you can define a range of cable diameters by selecting an upper and
lower value in the Diameter <= and Diameter >= fields. You can also limit the
output to a selected Installation or Location using the provided fields. In the
Export Full ID field you can select when the full ID
(Installation-Location-Device Tag) will be included on the label rather than just
the Device Tag. Select Never, Always, or When Cable Leaves Enclosure.
For devices, you can limit the output to a selected Installation or Location using
the provided fields. In the Device Group area, you can select checkboxes for
categories of devices (this corresponds to the values in the Category field of the
505
Reports
parts database). Select the top (blank) checkbox for items that have no entry in
the Category database field. In the Label area select whether the label will
include only the device tag or the full device ID (Installation-Location-Device
Tag).
6. If you are going to use Panduit’s Easy-Mark label printing software, select the
Config Easy-Mark button. (The Easy-Mark program allows you to see labels
on-screen as they will appear when printed.) The Panduit Easy-Mark
Configuration dialog will appear.
In the Location of Easymark.exe field, use the Browse button to locate and
select the path to this file. In the Labels per row field, enter the number of labels
you wish to print per row in the Easy-Mark software. Select Save to save your
settings.
7. Also, if you are going to use the Easy-Mark label printing software, select the
Start Easy-Mark checkbox. When this is selected, the output will be sent to the
Easy-Mark software when you select the Export button.
8. If you wish to export the label information to a CSV (comma-separated variable)
file, use the Browse button beside the Export To field, browse to the desired
folder, and enter the desired file name. This information will then appear in the
Export To field
Note: If you select an existing CSV file, the contents will be overwritten.
9. Select the Export button in the Panduit Labels dialog to send the selected label
data to the Easy-Mark software, to a CSV file, or to both, depending on your
settings.
506
Terminal and Pin-Plug Plan
10 Terminal and Pin-Plug Plan

promis•e has functions that automatically compile information on all the terminals
that exist in the project drawing pages. The user can view and edit this information in
a table format. Graphic drawings of terminal strips can also be generated
automatically.
There are also Pin-Plug Plan functions that operate in the same manner as the terminal
plan functions except that they gather and display pin and plug information rather
than terminal and terminal strip information.
Terminal Plan Overview
Steps of Terminal Plan Creation
Once the schematics in the project are complete, use the following steps to create a
terminal/cable plan. (More detailed information is given in the following sections.)
1. Open a page in the desired project.

2. Activate the Review/Revise > Terminal/Pin-Plug Manager function. This
function automatically generates a list of terminals and terminal connections
according to the information in the project schematics.
3. The Terminal/Pin-Plug Manager dialog box will appear. (See page 512.) Select
the strip(s) that you wish to edit.
4. The connections for the selected terminal strip(s) will be displayed in the
Terminal/Pin-Plug Manager dialog box. Changes can now be made, such as
cable assignment, assigning connection designations, sorting terminals, inserting
spare terminals, and other operations.
507
5. Use the promis-e Output > Run Graphical Plan function to automatically
create drawing pages showing a representation of selected terminal strips.
Terminal Plan
CREATE SCHEMATICS
Creation Steps
EDIT TERMINALS
New destinations
Change terminal numbers
Assign part numbers
Assign cables
GRAPHICAL TERMINAL PLAN

& TERMINAL LISTS
Customization – Default formats for terminal lists and graphical terminal plans are
included with the software. These formats can be customized to suit the user’s
requirements. Use the Configure > Graphical Plan Designer function.
Connection Point Designations and Jumpers
Connection Designations – Generally, terminals have connections on two sides. The

terms “internal and external,” “from and to” or “source and destination” may be used
to describe these two “sides” of connections to terminals. The assignment of a “side”
designation to a terminal connection can be based on positioning in the schematic
(left or right of the terminal symbol) or by manual assignments made by the user.
Terminal connections also can be designated as jumpers.
Default connection designations are defined at the connection points of terminal
symbols. In other words, a connection point can be “set” so that anything connected
to it is considered an internal connection, external connection, or a jumper. This
setting can be made in several different ways:
1. The designation of terminal connection points can be defined when the terminal
symbol is created by entering visible or hidden text for each connection point.
See page 510.
508
2. Connection points can be designated after the symbol is placed in a schematic by

right clicking on the symbol and selecting Connection Point on the popup
menu. The Modify Connection Point Texts dialog will appear.
You can change the type of connection point by changing the letter that appears
in the Visible Text column. In this example, I is for Internal, E is for External and
J is for Jumper. Selecting the Reverse Order button will reverse the order in
which the connections are listed in the dialog.
In the Configuration column there is an entry that indicates the side of the
terminal plan on which information for this connection will appear. This is
defined when you create the symbol. If you change the entry in the Visible Text
column to one that is not defined in the symbol, you will be able to change the
entry in the Configuration column.
Connection Search Priorities

The Review/Revise > Terminal/Pin-Plug Manager function causes the system to
look along the wires in both directions from each terminal in the schematics. Wire
link references are also analyzed. The software uses search priorities in cases where a
potential has more than two devices connected. These priorities are the same as those
used for other functions that require device connection information. See page 276.
509
Connection Point Designation Display on Drawing
You can view terminal designations on the drawing.
1. First, zoom in on the terminal symbol. Select the toolbar button for display
connection points (if it is not already selected).
2. Then select the toolbar button for display terminal connection point texts.
The connection point designations will appear beside each terminal connection
point.
510
Terminal Plan Functions
Functions related to the terminal plan:

Review/Revise > Terminal/Pin-Plug Manager – Terminal plan editor (table
format). See page 512.
promis-e Output > Run Graphical Plan – Generates a graphical terminal plan. See
page 532.
Configure > Graphical Plan Designer – Create and store custom configurations for
graphical terminal plans. See page 537.
In addition, terminal lists can be generated under the promis-e Output > Run
Reports function with the Terminals and Terminal Strips reports.
511
Terminal/Pin-Plug Manager
The terminal/pin-plug manager compiles a list of terminals in the current project and
allows the user to select and edit the terminal information.
To enter the terminal plan editor, first open a page in the desired project and then
select Review/Revise > Terminal/Pin-Plug Manager.
The Terminal Manager dialog will appear.
The terminal strips in the current project are listed on the left side of the dialog in a
tree view grouped by installation and location.
512
To edit a terminal strip, select the strip’s ID on the left side of the dialog so that it is
highlighted. The terminal information for that strip will then appear on the right side
of the dialog.
For each terminal in the strip, there is a series of columns with different types of
information. Information about the terminal is in the center group of columns and
information about the devices connected to the terminal appears to the left and right.
513
You can right-click in the column group headings to determine which columns are
displayed. Select the checkbox for those columns that you wish to see.
When you select a terminal on the right side, you can also see this information in the
Properties tab on the left side of the dialog. You make assignments in the Part
Number(s) field in this tab. If you select multiple terminals you can make the same
assignment to them all.
514
The following columns are available:

Target Data
Wire Label - Indicates the wire label of the wire connected to the connection
point.
Wire Use - Indicates the wire use (layer) on which the wire is located. See page
108.
Gauge, Color - Properties of the wire connected to the terminal.
Cable - If the terminal is connected to a cable, the cable device ID and conductor
are identified here.
Device ID - Indicates the device ID of the device to which the terminal
connection point is connected.
CP - Indicates the connection point text of the device to which the terminal
connection point is connected.
Terminal Data
Position - Indicates the position of the terminal in the terminal strip.
CP - Indicates a connection point on the terminal symbol and the designation of
the connection point. See page 508.
Terminal # - The terminal number assigned to the terminal.
Jumper - If a jumper connection exists, the terminal number of the terminal to
which the jumper connects will be listed.
Page Line # - Indicates the line number on which the terminal is placed.
Part Number - The part number assigned to the terminal.
Family - If the terminal is part of a device family, it will be indicated here. This
is particularly useful for devices such as 3-tier terminals to be assigned to a
family.
Graphical Plan Symbol - The symbol that will represent the terminal in a
graphical terminal plan.
515
Terminal Editing Functions
You can access the terminal editing functions through the menus or through the
toolbar at the top of the Terminal/Pin-Plug Manager dialog.
The following functions are available:
Change Terminal Order
You can change the order in which the terminals are listed in the terminal manager by
using the up and down arrow buttons in the terminal manager toolbar.
Select (highlight) the desired terminal and then select the up or down arrow button to
move it up or down the list.
You can also change a terminal’s position by dragging it and dropping it in the list.
Note: Terminals that belong to a family cannot be moved.
If you wish to actually change the terminal numbers to reflect the order in which they
are listed, use the Renumber > Incrementally function (see page 517).
Sort Terminals
Use the Sort menu in the Terminal/Pin-Plug Manager dialog to change the order in
which terminals are listed in the terminal manager.
The following choices are available:

By Terminal # - Sort in numerical order by terminal number.
By Part Number - Sort terminals alphanumerically by part number.
By Potential - Sort terminals by the potential to which they are connected.
By Position - Sort terminals by position number. Select submenu for left or right side.
516
By Target Device ID - Sort alphabetically by the target device ID. Select submenu
for left or right side.
By Wire Label - Sort terminals alphanumerically by wire label. Select submenu for
left or right side.
By Wire Use - Sort terminals by wire use column.
If you select the same function again, the order will switch between “lowest to
highest” and “highest to lowest.”
Renumber or Rename Terminals

Use the renumber functions in the Edit menu in the Terminal Manager dialog to
renumber or rename terminals in the selected strip. There are also toolbar buttons for
these functions.
The menu allows you to:

Renumber Incrementally - To renumber terminals incrementally:
1. Select a terminal strip.

2. Select (highlight) the terminals that you wish to renumber.
3. Select the Edit > Renumber Incrementally function. You will be prompted to
enter a start number.
4. Enter the lowest number to be assigned to the selected terminals and select OK.
517
Renumber by Potential - This function will renumber terminals using the order of
the potentials connected to each terminal.

2. Select (highlight) the terminals that you wish to renumber.
3. Select the Edit > Renumber By Potential function. You will be prompted to
enter a start number.
4. Enter the lowest number to be assigned to the selected terminals and select OK.
Rename Terminals - This function will rename the terminal strip of any selected
terminals. This has the effect of moving the terminals to another strip. This function is
in the Edit menu and in the toolbar.

2. Select (highlight) the terminals that you wish to assign to a different terminal
strip.
3. When you select the Edit > Rename function, you will be prompted to enter a
terminal strip name including installation, location and device tag.
4. Select OK. The selected terminals will be moved to the specified terminal strip.
If the strip did not previously exist, the strip now will be listed in the terminal
manager.
Clip Jumpers
You can designate two terminals on the same strip as being connected with a clip
jumper. Use the following procedure:

2. Select (highlight) a terminal connection that you wish to connect with a clip
jumper. This terminal must be one that can be legitimately connected to another
terminal or terminals, i.e., there must be a direct connection between them in the
schematic.
518
3. Select the Jumpers > Clip Jumper function. The connection will be indicated
by a blue line to the left of the data columns that connects the two terminals.
Clip jumper
Wire Jumper
If two terminals have been connected by a clip jumper and you wish to return to a
wire connection, you can use the wire jumper function.
1. Select one of the terminals that has a clip connection.

2. Select the Jumpers > Wire Jumper function.
The Wire Jumper dialog will appear.
The terminal you selected will appear in the From column and the terminal it
connects to will appear in the To column. You must specify which connection
point on each terminal should be connected. For each terminal you can only
select one connection point, either on the left or right side. When you click in the
Left or Right fields, the available connection points will appear in a drop-down
list.
519
3. When you have selected the desired connection points, select the OK button. The
blue clip jumper line will be removed from the left column and the target
columns will be updated with the wire connection.
Insert Device
The Insert Device function allows you to insert a part number into the terminal strip
that represents an additional component of the terminal strip such as a spacer or end
block. By inserting such a device that might not appear in the schematic, its part
number will be included in the bill of materials and it can also appear in the graphical
terminal plan.

2. Select (highlight) the terminal after which you wish to insert a device.
520
3. Select the Accessories > Insert Device function (or the Insert Device toolbar
button). The Select Part Number dialog will appear.
4. Select the desired device part number by double-clicking on it. Selected part
numbers appear in the lower, Selected Items area of the dialog. Select OK to
assign the part number.
The part number will be included in the terminal strip after the selected terminal.
You can remove a device that you added with the Accessories > Delete Device &
Spare function.
521
Insert Spare Terminal
The Insert Spare function will insert one or more extra terminals into the selected
terminal strip.

2. Select the Accessories > Insert Spare function (or the Insert Spare toolbar
button). The following dialog will appear.
3. In the Enter First Number field enter the starting (lowest) number for the
terminal(s) you are inserting.
4. In the Enter Quantity of Spares field enter the quantity of terminals you wish to
add.
5. The Specify Type of Spare field lists the existing terminals in the strip. If you
have more than one type of terminal in the strip you can select the type that you
wish to use as spares.
6. Select OK.
522
The spare terminals are added to the terminal strip. They are labeled as “Spare” in the
Type column.
If you enter the number of an existing terminal in the Insert Spares dialog, the
software will ask if you wish to duplicate the terminal. If you answer Yes it will create
a spare terminal with the same number.
You can remove spare terminals that you added with the Accessories > Delete Device
& Spare function.
Once you create a spare terminal, you can define targets for it by clicking inside the
Device ID field on the Left Target or Right Target side of the terminal. A browse <...>
button will appear in the field. Select this button and the Define Target dialog will
appear:
Select or enter the desired target for the spare terminal including Installation,
Location, Strip and Number. Select OK to enter the target information.
523
Delete Device or Spare Terminal
You can delete a device or spare terminal that you have added to a terminal strip.

2. Select (highlight) the spare terminal(s) or devices that you wish to delete.
3. Select the Accessories > Delete Device & Spare function.
4. You will be asked if you wish to delete the items. Select Yes. The selected items
will be removed from the strip.
Swap Terminal Targets
You can switch terminal targets from the left side to the right side of the terminal
manager:
1. Select the desired terminal.

2. Select the Edit > Swap Targets function or the Swap Targets toolbar button.
The target data will change positions from one side of the terminal to the other.
Hide/Show Rows
You can choose to hide rows in the terminal manager if there is information you
would rather not see.
1. Select the desired row(s).

2. Select the Hide/Show Rows button in the toolbar.
The selected rows will be removed from the terminal manager display.
To show the hidden rows, select the Hide/Show Rows button again.
524
Assign Cable
You can assign the conductors of a cable to a group of terminals using the Assign
Cable function. Cables assigned in the terminal manager will be added to the
schematic drawing automatically.

2. Select the Cable field (either right or left side) for the terminal connections to
which you wish to assign a cable. Select an individual connection on each
terminal (hold down the <Ctrl> key while making the selections).
525
3. Select the Assign > Cable function. A dialog will appear prompting you to
select a cable symbol
You can select a symbol from the list, enter a symbol name in the Name field, or
you can search for a symbol by entering part of its description in the Description
field and selecting the Search button. Any symbols with descriptions that
contain the search term will be displayed.
When you have selected the symbol, select the Place Symbol button.
4. The Device Properties dialog will appear. Enter a device ID for the cable. If
desired, use the Search button to assign a part number. You must also select a
device family for the cable in the Family field. This determines the number of
available conductors in the cable. Select OK to continue.
526
5. The Device Usage Chart dialog will appear.
6. The Device Properties dialog will re-appear. Select OK to continue.
527
7. The Cable Text dialog will appear. Here you can enter descriptive texts related to
the cable.
Enter any desired descriptions and select OK to continue.

The cable conductor assignments will be indicated in the Cable column of the
terminal manager. The cable will also appear in the schematic diagram.
528
Assign Part Number to Terminal
You can assign a part number to one or more terminals using the Assign Part Number
function. When you view terminals in the terminal manager, any assigned part
number will be will be listed in the Part Number column.
To assign a part number in the terminal manager:

2. Select (highlight) the terminal(s) to which you wish to assign a part number.
You can also use the Properties tab to assign part numbers.
529
3. Select the Assign > Part Number function or the Part Number toolbar button.
(Alternatively, you can click inside the Part Number field for the terminal and
select the browse button.) The Select Part Number dialog will appear listing the
available terminal part numbers.
Select the desired part number by double-clicking on it. Selected part numbers
appear in the lower, Selected Items area of the dialog. Select OK to assign the
part number.
4. The selected part number now will be listed in the terminal manager. It also will
be shown in the schematic, bill of material, etc.
To delete an assigned part number:
1. Click inside the Part Number field and select the browse button.
2. Double-click on the part number listed in the Selected Items area of the Select
Part Number dialog so that the part number is removed.
3. Select OK.
530
Graphical Terminal Plan

The software can create a graphical terminal plan, automatically generating drawing
pages that show terminal strips with connection information for each terminal. In
other words, it is a visual representation of a terminal strip along with useful
connection information that a technician would need to wire the devices and terminals
together.
To do this, the software uses a designated graphical plan template, which graphically
represents each terminal strip. Appropriate terminal information is then automatically
placed at each terminal position.
The user can select from a number of graphical templates provided with the software,
or the user can create a custom template using the Configure > Graphical Plan
Designer function.
531
Graphical Terminal Plan Generation
Use the following procedure to generate a graphical terminal plan.
1. Open a page in the desired project. This page must be set to the Graphical Plan
drawing mode.
2. Select the promis-e Output > Run Graphical Plan function. The Run
Graphical Plan dialog will appear.
3. Make settings for the graphical plan. The following settings are available:
A. Create plan automatically or by selection - Select the Automatically radio
button if you wish the software to place strips on a page. Select the By Selec-
tion radio button if you wish to select a position for the terminal strip on the
page that is currently open.
532
B. If you create the graphical plans automatically you can select the Allow Mul-
tiple Strips Per Page checkbox to allow multiple strips on a single page if
they fit.
C. Graphical Plan Orientation Settings - In the Rotate Symbols field you can
enter a rotation value so that the terminal strip or other symbol will run either
vertically or horizontally.
D. Cable Heading Options - In this part of the dialog you can select whether a
cable connection is indicated by the conductor color (select Show Cable
Conductor) or by a symbol such as an “X” (select Show Symbol). The sym-
bol CROSS is included in the catalog for this purpose.
E. Jumper Options - Use the Jumper Symbol field to select a symbol that will
represent a jumper connection in the graphical plan. The symbol JUMPER is
included in the symbol catalog for this purpose.
F. Page Margins - In this part of the dialog you can define margins for the
graphical plan page.
G. Default Row Height - You can enter a default height value for table rows.
4. Select the strips that you wish to include in the graphical plan in the Select
Strip(s) area of the dialog. In the Graphical Plan Template column you can
select the template to use for the selected strip.
5. Select the Suppress Target Connection Point checkbox if you wish to omit the
connection point from the from/to target information in the graphical plan.
6. Select the Place Strip(s) button. If you selected the automatic method of
generating the graphical plan, the New Page dialog will appear.
533
Enter a drawing set, installation, location and page number for the first page that
will be created for the graphical plan. If additional pages are required they will
follow the first page. You can also select a title block, page format and make
other settings for these pages. Select OK to generate the graphical plan. You can
view the plan by opening the pages that are created.
534
If you selected the “by selection” method of generating the graphical plan you
will not see the New Page dialog, you will go to the currently open page and you
will be prompted on the command line to select an insertion point. Select a point
on the page that will be the upper left corner of the graphical plan for the strip.
The strip will be placed on the page and the software will return to the Run
Graphical Plan dialog, allowing you to select the next strip.
When you return to the Run Graphical Plan dialog, strips and terminals that have
been placed in a drawing are marked with a red “X” mark.
If terminals are marked with an exclamation point (!), it indicates that no part number
has been assigned to the terminal symbol. You can click inside the Part Number field
to get a browse button that will take you to the part number assignment dialog. A part
number (with wiring diagram symbol) is required to ensure proper generation of the
graphical plan.
How the software generates a graphical plan
A graphical terminal plan is composed of a group of wiring diagram symbols, one for
each terminal block. The symbol name is defined in the parts database in the
Graphical_Plan_Symbol field. By using wiring diagram symbols, the software is
able to update the connection information from the compiled connection list or from
the shortest distance output. By having a separate field in the database to name a
graphical plan symbol (in addition to a wiring diagram symbol), the same terminals
can be placed in wiring diagrams and terminal plans at the same time.
The format of the graphical plan is determined by a graphical plan template which
defines the position of the wiring diagram symbols and the variables that will be filled
in with connection information and other data. Templates may also include fixed text
or variables that provide column headings.
535
The page margins entered in the Run Graphical Plan dialog are offsets from the Top,
Bottom, Left, and Right sides of the page. These margins control the placement of the
header blocks on the page and they also tell the software how many terminals in a
strip can be placed on the page before a new page must be created. Assuming a
vertical plan and automatic generation of the plans, the top margin will determine the
vertical starting position relative to the boundary box of the header block. In other
words, if the top margin is set to 1 inch then the top of the header block will be placed
one inch from the top of the page. The left margin is used to position the header block
in the horizontal direction.
Once the wiring diagram symbols representing the terminals are placed, the software
can add connection information to each symbol. If the Dynamically Update
Connections checkbox is selected in the project Wiring Diagram Settings dialog (see
page 100), the information will be added automatically. If this setting is not turned on,
you can also use the promis-e Output > Update Wiring Diagram function to update
the connection information on the drawing.
If the user has already generated a graphical plan and he or she runs this graphical
plan again using the Automatically radio button, the software will automatically
delete the old terminal plan pages and regenerate them again. If, however, the user
picks By selection when trying to regenerate this plan the software will check to see if
there are additional terminals that have not been placed yet, and if this is so, the
software will place the remainder of the terminals and not regenerate the entire plan.
The user would have to manually delete the existing strip before he would be allowed
to regenerate the whole strip at one time.
When regenerating terminal plans or even creating new ones the software will
perform error checking to make sure that the software doesn't overwrite existing
pages that belong to other terminal strips or that contain other logical data besides the
terminal plans the user is trying to regenerate. If this action would result in such an
overwrite of a page the user will be given an error and not allowed to proceed.
Compile Connection Information function

Ordinarily, the software will automatically compile the connection information that it
needs to put in the terminal plan. If for some reason you believe the latest connection
information is not being used in the terminal plan, you can manually update the
connection information for the current project using the Manage > Compile
Connections function. You can then generate the desired terminal plans again.
536
Graphical Plan Template Designer
The Graphical Plan Template Designer allows you to create custom templates for
graphical plans.
1. Select Configure > Graphical Plan Designer. The following dialog will appear.
Note: The Graphical Plan Template Designer dialog consists of step buttons on the left
and a settings area on the right. There is an Auto Hide button in the lower left
corner of the dialog that sets whether or not the settings area will be hidden if
you move the cursor back to the drawing area (so it is not in the way). If auto
hide is turned on, you can click on the desired step button to display the setting
area again.
Select the New Graphical Plan Template radio button if you wish to create a
completely new template.
Select the Modify Existing Graphical Plan Template radio button if you wish to
create a new template by editing an existing template. When you select this
button, the filename field will become active. Use the browse button to locate
and select the existing template file.
537
2. Select the Next button to continue. If you chose to create a new template, a blank
drawing page will open. If you chose to modify an existing template, the file for
that template will open.
In the Select a page format field, select a page format to view while designing
the template. Use the browse button to select from the available formats. This
format appears as a visual reference only and is not saved as part of the template.
(In other words, when you generate the graphical plan you can choose a different
page format, if you wish.)
The Variables area of the dialog provides a list of terminal plan variables that
will act as place holders for information when placed in the template drawing.
The variables are grouped into two categories: "Content" and "Header.” Content
variables are for the body of the terminal plan. Header variables are used for
column headings and similar purposes. Select the “+” icon to open either of
these categories and display the variables inside. Select the desired variable,
select the Place button, and then click at the desired position in the drawing. See
page 541 for a list of variables.
538
In the Header variables list, there is a variable called <CableCombo>. This

variable allows you to create header entries that identify cables that are
connected to the terminals. When you place this variable, the Cable Combo
dialog will appear:
This dialog provides buttons for a variety of cable-related variables. When you
select a button, that variable is added to the expression in the Variables field.
This is the information that will be displayed in the graphical plan header. Make
a numeric entry in the Cable Index field (1, 2, 3, etc.) to distinguish between the
different cables that you place in the plan. When you are ready to place the
expression in the plan, select the OK button and then select a position for the
text.
The Text Style field displays the text style that will be used for the variables. If
you want to change the text style, use the Edit button to display the Edit Text
Format dialog.
In the Formatting area of the dialog, you can make a number of settings:
539
Select the Vertical Plan radio button if you wish terminal information to be
displayed from top to bottom on the page. Select the Horizontal Plan radio
button if you wish information to appear from left to right on the page.
Select the Place Column Separator button to define a column dividing line in
the template. Click on a point where the line should begin. This will be marked
in the template with an “X”. When the graphical plan is generated, the line will
be extended from this point to match the amount of information in the column.
Use the Place Table Start button to define a starting point for the data rows of
the graphical plan. Select the button and click on the desired point.
Use the Specify Insertion Point button to define the insertion point for the
graphical plan template on the page. Select the button and click on the desired
point in the drawing. Generally, you should select a point at the upper left corner
of the template. When you generate graphical plans automatically, the insertion
point will be placed on the page at the upper left as defined by the top and left
page margins.
3. Select Next to continue.
Enter a filename for the template. If you are modifying an existing template, the
existing name and path will be prompted and you can change it. You can also use
the browse button to select the desired folder and then enter a filename. The
default path for graphical templates is
\promis•e Data\Templates\GraphicPlan.
4. Select the Finish button to save the new template.
540
Graphical Plan Variables
The following is a list of variables that can be used in a graphical plan template.
Variable Name Description

TC_<Strip_Inst> The installation name of the terminal/plug strip
TC_<Strip_Loc> The location name of the terminal/plug strip
TC_<Strip_Tag> The device tag of the terminal/plug strip
TC_<Strip_ID> The complete device ID of the terminal/plug strip
TC_<Part_Number> The part number of the terminal/plug
TC_<Xref> The page.line number where the terminal is located
TC_<Xref_inst> The Installation/page.line number where the terminal is located
TC_<Term_Att01> to Symbol text attributes associated with the terminal symbol
TC_<Term_Att10>
TC_<Term_Symbol> This attribute is used as the insertion point of a graphical
symbol that can be placed along with this terminal symbol. The
insertion point is the intersection of this variable with the wiring
diagram attribute. This is commonly used to indicate a diode or
capacitor being jumpered across two adjacent terminals. The
symbol to insert is specified in the Terminal Manager.
TC_<Term_Jumper> This is the insertion point for a terminal jumper symbol (usually
a filled in circle). The insertion point is the intersection of this
variable with the wiring diagram attribute.
TC_<Wire_Number> The value of the wire number that is assigned to this wire in the
schematic.
TC_<Wire_Gauge> The gauge of the wire used in the schematic.
TC_<Wire_Color> The color of the wire used in the schematic
TC_<Wire_Type> The “Type” property assigned to the wire such as THHN
TC_<Wire_Voltage> The voltage of the wire used in the schematic
TC_<Wire_Current> The current of the wire used in the schematic
TC_<Wire_PartNumber> The wire part number used in the schematic
TC_<Wire_User01> to The 10 user-definable wire properties
TC_<Wire_User10>
TC_<Target_Inst> The installation of the symbol connected to a particular
connection point of the terminal
TC_<Target_Loc> The location of the symbol connected to a particular connection
point of the terminal
TC_<Target_Tag> The device tag and connection point of the symbol connected
to a particular connection point of the terminal
TC_<Target_ID> This is the complete device ID and connection point of the
symbol connected to a particular connection point of a terminal
541
Variable Name Description

TC_<Target_ The function text of a PLC I/O point connected to a particular
PLCFunctionText> terminal
TC_<Target_Att01> to Symbol text attributes associated with the symbol connected to
TC_<Target_Att10> the terminal connection point
TC_<Cable_Inst> The installation of the cable that is associated with the wire
connected to a particular connection point of a terminal
TC_<Cable_Loc> The location of the cable that is associated with the wire
TC_<Cable_Tag> The device tag of the cable that is associated with the wire
TC_<Cable_ID> The complete device ID of the cable that is associated with the
wire connected to a particular connection point of a terminal
TC_<Cable_Core> The name of the cable core/conductor color (connection point
text) of the cable associated with the wire connected to a
particular connection point of a terminal
TC_<Cable_Type> The cable type defined in the family definition of the cable
TC_<Cable_Gauge> The gauge of the cable defined in the family definition of the
cable
TC_<Cable_PartNumber> The part number of the cable defined in the family definition of
the cable
TC_<Cable_Length> The length of the cable specified in the cable text attributes
TC_<Cable_#Cores> The total number of cable conductors in the assigned cable
<CableCombo> Places a user-defined combination of cable information
TH_<Strip_Inst> Places the terminal/plug strip installation in the graphical plan
header
TH_<Strip_Loc> Places the terminal/plug strip location in the graphical plan
header
TH_<Strip_Tag> Places the terminal/plug strip device tag in the graphical plan
header
TH_<Strip_ID> Places the complete terminal/plug strip device ID in the
graphical plan header
TH_<DateTime> Places the date and time in the graphical plan header
TH_<UserName> Places the user name in the graphical plan header
TH_<ProjectName> Places the project name in the graphical plan header
542
Panel Layout and Wire Routing
11 Panel Layout and Wire Routing

This section describes how to generate panel layout drawings in promis•e software.
There are also sections describing the functions that allow the software to route wires
between devices.
Overview
The automatic functions in promis•e allow you to quickly create a panel layout
drawing based on existing information in your project, such as a control diagram or
parts list. Alternatively, you can start by creating a panel layout drawing and then use
that as a source for generating other things like schematics or parts lists.
The parts database record for each part number has a field that allows you to specify
which symbol should represent that part in schematic drawings. There is another field
that allows you to specify which layout symbol should represent the part in panel
layout drawings. Therefore, whichever you create first, -- schematic, panel layout,
parts list, etc. -- the symbols you specify will appear in a “pick list” when creating
another kind of drawing and the software will prompt you with the appropriate
symbol, provided this information is in the database.
Symbols that
represent the
part number
A number of layout symbols are included with promis•e. The names of these symbols
all begin with the letters “L-”. You can also create custom layout symbols.
The parts database also contains dimensional information about components that is
applicable to panel layouts.
In addition, promis•e includes special drawing functions in the Panel Layout menu
that make it easier to create layout drawings.
543
Create Panel Layout First

If you wish to begin your design by placing components in a panel layout drawing,
use the following procedure:
1. Create a project and drawing page. When you create the page, use an appropriate
scale factor in the Scale Factor field.
2. Set the software’s drawing mode to Panel Layout Drawing. You can select the
drawing mode when you create the page, or you can select it from the drawing
mode field on the drawing screen.
3. Place devices in the drawing using either the Design > Insert Symbol > Insert
Symbol By Name or the Design > Insert Symbol > Insert Symbol By Part
Number function. A number of layout symbols are included with promis•e. The
names of these symbols all begin with the letters “L-”. You can also create
custom layout symbols.
You must assign a part number to each symbol if you later wish to place items
from the panel layout into a schematic or other diagram by means of a pick list
using the Insert Symbol By Device ID function.
4. If you have no preference for device IDs, simply accept the IDs that are
prompted by the software. Later, when you create a schematic or other type of
diagram, you can use the Design > Insert Symbol > Insert Symbol By Device
ID function to select and place the items from the panel layout. If you have made
the schematic mode the primary mode (see page 87), then the device ID will be
converted to the format used in the schematic diagram (such as page/line
number). This conversion will occur both in the schematic and in the panel
layout.
544
Create Panel Layout Later

If you wish to create a control diagram or parts list first and use that to generate the
panel layout, use the following procedure:
1. As described on page 543, ensure that the parts database records specify an
appropriate panel layout symbol for each part number.
2. Create a schematic or other diagram (hydraulic, pneumatic, etc.). You must
assign a part number to each item if you later wish to select these items to place
in a panel layout.
Instead of a drawing, you can also create a parts list using the BOM Explorer in
3. Create a drawing page for the panel layout. When you create the page, use an
appropriate scale factor in the Scale Factor field.
4. Set the software’s drawing mode to Panel Layout Mode. You can select the
drawing mode when you create the page, or you can select it from the drawing
mode field on the drawing screen.
5. Use the special drawing functions in the Design menu to create wireways, DIN
rails, etc. You can do this at any convenient time while creating the layout
drawing. See page 551 for more about these functions.
545
6. Select the Design > Insert Symbol > Insert Symbol By Device ID function to
select and place the items from the diagram or parts list. The Insert Symbol(s)
dialog will appear.
This dialog lists the items in the project having a device ID. You can sort the list
by device tag, part number, etc., by clicking on the desired column heading. The
Filter Devices fields on the left side of the dialog allow you to filter the list of
displayed device IDs. By selecting the appropriate radio button you can restrict
the filter to Terminal/Plugs or Devices (non-terminals/plugs). Select or enter any
combination of Installation, Location, Tag, Part Number and Function Text and
then select the Search button. Any device IDs that match all the entries will be
listed. See page 219 for more about this dialog.
7. Select one or more items to place in the drawing (hold down the <Shift> or
<Ctrl> keys to select more than one item). Select the Place Symbols button. The
software will prompt the appropriate layout symbol for the selected item
(assuming this information is in the parts database). You will be prompted on the
command line to “specify insertion point.” Click at the desired position to place
the layout symbol in the drawing.
546
The Device Properties dialog will appear for the symbol that you are placing.
The device ID fields are filled in automatically. Select the OK button to assign
the ID.
If the item you wish to place has more than one part number assigned to it, there
will be a checkbox in the Multiple Symbols column.
When you select this checkbox, the multiple part numbers are listed in a separate
area at the bottom of the dialog. You can then select one or more of these for
placement. If you do not select the checkbox, only the layout symbol for the
primary part number will be placed.
547
If you select more than one item you can place them as a group. You can make
settings to determine how symbols are placed as a group. To do this, select the
Group Settings link in the lower left corner of the Insert Symbols (by Device ID)
dialog.
Placement options allow you to select whether the symbols will be placed in a
line from Left to right or from Top to bottom. If you choose Prompt for each
symbol the software will allow you to pick a position for each symbol. If you
place the symbols automatically in a line, the spacing options allow you set the
distances between symbols. Use the X and Y fields to set a fixed distance
between symbol reference points. Select Use X, Y from Parts database to use
parts database height and width values to space symbols. You can also choose
the Place on wires radio button to place symbols on existing wires, however this
applies more to schematic drawings. Select OK to apply the group settings.
If you place an item with a part number that does not have a layout symbol
assigned in the parts database, the software will draw a box to represent the item
in the layout drawing using the dimension data for that part. If the database does
not contain dimension information for that part, the following dialog will appear,
prompting you to enter X, Y and Z dimensions.
548
After you select OK, the software will draw a box in the layout using the entered
dimensions. The box will be labeled with the device tag.
8. To select more items for placement, you can click the right mouse button or
select the Design > Insert Symbol > Insert Symbol By Device ID function
again to return to the Insert Symbol(s) dialog.
If the Show Place Devices in Current Drawing Mode checkbox is selected, any
items that have been placed in the layout drawing will be marked with an “X” in
the left column. If this checkbox is not selected, items will removed from the list
as they as they are placed.
549
9. As with schematic drawings, you can choose to display or hide part numbers,
connection point text, etc., by selecting the appropriate buttons on the display
settings toolbar.
10. If you wish to reposition any of the text associated with a layout symbol, right
click on the text and select Text Position from the popup menu. You will then be
able to move the text.
550
Balloons
You can create a numbered balloon beside a symbol in a drawing that indicates the
position of that component in the bill of materials list. Balloons can be placed in any
type of drawing, not just panel layouts.
Create Balloons
To create a balloon, use the following procedure:
1. Display the drawing page.

2. Select the Design > Insert Balloon function.
3. The software will prompt you to “Select component for balloon.” Click on the
desired layout symbol to select it. The following dialog will appear showing the
part number of the selected symbol and a field for entering a balloon number.
4. Enter the desired balloon number in the Balloon Number field. You can also
automatically enter the next available number by selecting the Next Available
button.
5. Select OK in the Balloon Number dialog to continue.
6. The software will prompt “Pick leader start or balloon insert point.” Click on the
point where you wish the head of the arrow from the balloon to appear.
551
7. The software will prompt “To point...?” Click where you wish the other end of
the leader from the balloon to end. You can click on multiple points to create
segments in the leader. (If you wish the balloon to appear with no leader, simply
press <Enter>, do not define any additional points.)
For a straight leader, click

twice and press Enter.
For a segmented leader, click

multiple times and press Enter.
For no leader, click once

and press Enter.
8. Click the right mouse button or press <Enter> to place the balloon itself.
552
Assign Balloon Number in Device Properties Dialog
Once you assign a balloon number to a symbol by placing a balloon, you will see the
balloon number displayed in the Device Properties dialog if you edit the device ID of
the corresponding symbol.
Balloon number
If desired, you can edit the balloon number in the Device Properties dialog.
You can also assign a balloon number in the Device Properties dialog when entering
or editing a part number for a symbol before you place the balloon itself. This balloon
number will then be entered automatically when you add a balloon to the symbol
later.
553
Modify or Delete Balloons
Use the following procedure.
1. Point to the balloon in the drawing and click the right mouse button. A pop-up
menu will appear with Move, New, Modify and Delete options.
2. Select Move if you wish to reposition the balloon and leader. They will move
with the cursor and you can click the left mouse button to set the new position.
Select New if you wish to redraw the balloon and/or leader. You will be
prompted to select the leader start and end points as before.
Select Modify if you wish to change the balloon number. The Balloon Number
dialog will appear. Enter the new number and select OK.
Select Delete to remove the balloon from the drawing.
Set Balloon Appearance
You can set the size of the balloon for various drawing modes and the size and color
of the balloon number using the project options balloon dialog. See page 69.
Clear All Balloons
In the project options balloon dialog, select the Clear All Balloons button to remove
all assigned balloon numbers in the project. This will delete the balloons in the
drawings and remove the item numbers from the project database. See page 69.
554
Panel Layout Design Functions

In the Panel Layout drawing mode, the Design menu contains a number of special
functions that are useful for panel layout drawings.
Note: This version of the Design menu is only displayed when the software is in the Panel
Layout drawing mode.
Insert DIN Rail
The Insert DIN Rail function allows you to place a mounting rail for DIN devices in a
panel layout drawing.
To use the Draw DIN Rail function, select Design > Insert DIN Rail.
The Draw Panel Layout Accessories dialog will appear.
Select one of the available DIN rail parts in the Select DIN Rail area. A preview of
the selected part will be displayed in the Preview area.
555
Enter a device tag for the DIN rail in the Device Tag field. You can hide this tag in the
drawing by selecting the Suppress Device Tag checkbox. If you plan to use balloons
in the drawing, you can assign a balloon number for the DIN rail in the Balloon field.
Select the Next Balloon No button to automatically assign the next available balloon
number.
In the Note field you can enter descriptive text that will appear next to the DIN rail in
the drawing. You must select the User Definable radio button to enable this field. If
you select the Default to Name radio button, the description in the Name field of the
parts database record will be used.
In the Length field, enter a length for the rail. If you select <user definable> you will
define the length of the rail by picking points in the drawing.
556
To draw the rail select the Place button. You will be prompted on the command line to
pick a position to insert the rail. If you selected <user definable> in the Length field,
you will be prompted to pick a start point and an end point to define the rail’s
position. If you entered a length in the Length field, you will be prompted to select an
insertion point and a direction point which determines the direction in which the rail
will extend from the insertion point.
Note: You cannot define a length greater the value assigned in the parts database. The
length value for panel layout accessories is stored in the database Z field.
Device tag
Note
Once a DIN rail is placed you can change its properties by right-clicking on it and
selecting Din Rail Properties from the popup menu.
Note: If you create a DIN rail symbol, it should be drawn to the same length as the part
number that is assigned to it in a drawing. For example, if you define a new part
number for a DIN rail that comes in a specific length like 72 inches, you must create
the DIN rail symbol to also be 72 inches long. If you don’t do that the software size
calculations will be wrong when the you attempt to draw DIN rails. The length value
for panel layout accessories is stored in the database Z field.
557
Snap to DIN Rail
The Snap to DIN Rail function causes layout symbols placed on a DIN rail symbol to
automatically align their reference points to the center line of the DIN rail.
To use the Snap to DIN Rail function, select Design > Snap to DIN Rail so that a
checkmark appears beside the menu item.
When placing a layout symbol that is to mount on the DIN rail, click on the rail and
the symbol will align its reference point to the center line of the rail.
Note: Layout symbols to be used with the snap to DIN rail function should have their
reference points located near the center of the symbol (vertically) so that they align
properly with the center of the rail.
To turn off the Snap to DIN Rail function, select Design > Snap to DIN Rail again.
Mounting Accessories Function
The Mounting Accessories function provides an interface to the parts database for
adding or editing parts data for items such as DIN rails.
Select the Design > Mounting Accessories function.
The Routing/Mounting Accessories dialog will appear.
558
To add a new DIN rail part, select the New button. To edit an existing part record,
highlight the part number and select the Edit button. The New/Edit DIN Rail dialog
allows you to enter or change information.
559
Panduit Wire Containment Tools
There are a number of functions in the Design menu (when you are in Panel Layout
drawing mode) that relate to panel layouts, wireways, and Panduit products.
Panduit Auto Size Space
Edit Wire Path Properties
The Panduit Wire Containment function is a placement tool that allows you to
place the wire path in a panel layout drawing and assign the hardware components to
the path.
The Panduit Auto Size Space function re-selects components based on the size
requirement that the shortest distance program returns.
The Edit Wire Path Properties function allows you to set various parameters
relating to the wire path.
The Panduit Wire Containment function is used to draw a wire path on a panel layout
drawing. The wire path is a line that represents the center line of a bundle of wires or
cables (or a duct, conduit, etc.). There are two purposes for the wire path:
• It defines a physical wireway on a panel which will contain the wires and
route them between the devices.
• It defines an allowed route for wires that can be used by the Shortest Distance
Wire Routing function. The shortest distance function analyzes the wire paths
to create the optimum wire routing for each wire.
Selection of components is aided by a Panduit selection tool that allows you to select
and assign the parts (duct, conduit, ties, mounts, abrasion protection, clips, etc.) that
will confine the wires on this path.
Note: The first time you run the Panduit Wire Containment function you will be prompted
with a message “Current promis-e catalog does not contain symbol PANDUITWIRE.
This symbol will be added to the catalog automatically.” This symbol is needed for
the function to operate.
560
Drawing a wire path
To draw a wire path:
1. Open a panel layout drawing page on which you wish to define a wire path.
2. Select Design > Panduit Wire Containment. The Panduit Wire dialog will
appear.
3. The Device ID entries in the Installation, Location and Device Tag fields will be
assigned to all components assigned to the wire path being drawn. You can
accept the prompted values or enter new values.
4. In the Color field select a color for the wire path as it will appear in the drawing.
5. In the Radius field, you can enter a radius value when components such as wire
ties or wraps are used to produce a wire bundle that will create a curved, 90
degree bend rather than a right angle. When components such as wire duct are to
be used the radius should be 0.
6. If you wish to segregate wires by voltage, enter the minimum and maximum
voltages to be used for the current wire path in the Min Voltage and Max Voltage
fields. Enter only numbers in these fields. These values will be used by the
Shortest Distance Routing function.
561
7. Select the Draw Wire Path button. You will be prompted to start selecting points
for the wire path. Select a new point each time you wish to change the direction
of the path. After the final segment is drawn select the <Esc> or <Enter> key to
end the sequence. The radius (if any) will appear once the path is complete.
Select point 1 Select point 2
Select point 3
Select point 4
Note: If you are using a radius and draw a segment in the middle of the path that is too
short to accommodate the radius, the curve will be “broken.” If the short
segment is at the end of the path, the segment will be joined at a right angle with
no curve.
The wire path should only include segments which will use the same hardware
part numbers. If the path will require two different sizes of components, it must
be drawn as two separate connected or intersecting wire paths. This is normally
based on the number of wires that will be routed on a particular wire path. This
means that if wire ducts will be meeting at a “T” intersection, the user should be
placing at least two, and possibly three separate wire paths because two or three
different wire duct sizes will be needed. If an angle is used, the duct on both
sides of the angle will be given the same size. This also occurs with cable ties; at
the point where a significant number of wires may enter or leave a bundle a new
path should be created so that a different size tie can be assigned.
Important: For the shortest distance program to correctly route wires, separate wire paths MUST
meet or intersect to allow the wires to leave one wire path and enter another.
562
8. After you draw the path, the Panduit Wire dialog will reappear. The ID of the
path you just drew will appear in the Wire Path list. The total path length is
displayed in the Wire path length field. You can delete the path that is currently
selected in the Wire Path list by selecting the Delete button.
You can select another path on the current page for display or editing either by
selecting it from the Wire Path drop-down list or by selecting the Pick Path
button and clicking on the ID or line of the desired path in the drawing.
Assigning Part Numbers to Wire Paths
After a wire path is placed, you can start assigning parts to the wire path. This can be
done before or after the shortest distance routing is run. You can specify the exact
hardware you wish to use, or you can make a preliminary selection and allow the
program to resize the components based on the shortest distance output. The wire
areas can also be calculated manually using the fill area calculator.
The parts to be used must be entered into the Panduit.MDB file located in the
plugins\Panduit folder under your installation of promis•e (for example, Program
Files\Bentley\promis-e\plugins\Panduit). The parts must also exist in the main
promis•e parts database.
If the software displays the message “records with missing part numbers are missing
from the promis-e parts database” it means that part records exist in the Panduit.MDB
file but not in your general parts database. This may occur if you have not merged
your Panduit part records into your promis-e parts database. The Panduit part records
exist in the table “parts_database to add to main database” in
plugins/panduit/panduit.mdb. You may use the database merge tool or manually paste
the records into your promis•e parts database using MS-Access.
To assign part numbers to a wire path:
1. Open the page containing the desired wire path.

2. Open the Panduit Wire dialog.
3. Select the desired path ID in the Wire Path field.
563
4. Select the Select Panduit Parts button. The Part Number Assignment dialog will
appear. This dialog allows you to pick a part number and to specify offset or
spacing requirements for how the graphics will appear on the layout drawing.
5. To enter a part number, click on the Select button beside the Part Number field.
564
6. The following dialog will appear. Select the type of component you wish to
assign to the path (Ties, Duct, etc.) and then select OK.
7. A part number selection dialog will then appear. The fields in the upper part of
this dialog will vary depending on the type of part you selected in the previous
dialog. If you wish to change the dialog to a different type of component, use the
Change Type button and make the selection.
For more on using this dialog, see page 643.
565
8. When you locate the proper part, highlight it and select OK (or double-clicked
on it) to add it to the Part Number Assignment dialog.
566
9. The other fields in the Part Number Assignment dialog allow you to make
settings that determine how information is displayed in the drawing:
The Justification field setting will determine where the part number will be
drawn on the wire path:
Start - This will place a single copy of the selected part number at the begin-
ning of the wire path.
End - This will place a single copy of the selected part number at the end of
the wire path.
Both - This will place two copies of the part, one at each end of the wire
path.
Continuous - This is used for components that do not require spacing. This
would be true for wire duct or wraps which are one continuous piece.
Spaced - This will place a part at the start of the wire path and at the end and
at the spacing specified by the user.
Spaced From Start - This will use the user-defined spacing from the start of
the wire path.
Spaced From Center - This will center the spacing.
Space From End - This will space the devices from the end of the wire path.
567
Start Position and End Position - The wire path is the center line for the wire
bundle. Frequently the end point of the wire path will land within or beyond the
actual wire ducts that may intersect. The start and end position values allow the
user to specify that the hardware should start or end at an offset from the wire
path. The user can enter numbers to offset either end, or the user can use the
Select Point button and pick a point with the mouse. Selecting the Use First
Point as Start or the Use Last Point as End checkboxes will align the hardware
with the endpoints of the wire path.
Balloon - The user may associate a balloon number to the part if required. Select
the Get Next button to insert the next unused balloon number.
Spacing - In this field the user can enter a distance value to define a spacing
interval for spaced type components.
Quantity - Use this field to assign a quantity if more than one of the selected part
number is being assigned to the wire path.
The Redraw checkbox is used with the auto-size/auto-space function. Not
checking this option will result in the graphics not being updated when
components are automatically resized or re-spaced based on wire fill.
The AutoSelect checkbox allows parts to be automatically changed or the
quantity to be changed in the auto-size/auto-space function.
568
Select the OK button to complete the part number assignment. The selected part
number information appears in the bottom half of the Panduit Wire dialog for the
selected path.
If a duct part number is assigned to a wire path, it will appear in the panel layout
as a green rectangle centered on the path.
Manually Calculating Fill Area
The shortest distance module will properly route all wires and determine the area
needed for routing the wires. If the user does not have access to the shortest distance
module, the Panduit Wire Containment utility allows the user to manually calculate
the wire areas for each wire path. This tool allows you to assign the number of wires
for each gauge and the number of each cable part number that will run through the
wire path. The calculator then does the calculation to find the wire fill area for the
wire path.
Important: The calculations do not fully take into account packing factors, additional airspace
caused by non-uniform shapes, interlacing, bending radii or other factors that may
affect the total area needed to pack the cables and wires. The results are only an
approximate estimate and the user should err on the side of caution in selecting part
numbers or specifying a percent fill factor. The user should always specify a percent
fill of 50% or less.
Setup
You must enter the diameters for all of the cable part numbers used in the project into
the parts database. The user must also enter all of their wire diameters into the wire
lookup table. All wires in the project should have their gauges defined and all cable
should have part numbers assigned. The calculator will list any gauges and cable part
numbers used in the current project.
Operation
1. Select a wire path in the Panduit Wire dialog (see page 561) and then select the
Calculate Fill Area button.
569
2. The Wire Calculator dialog will appear. This dialog lists all wire gauges and
cable part numbers used in the project.
3. Enter a quantity value in the Quantity field for each wire gauge and cable part
number that you to expect to pass through the currently selected wire path.
4. If you have used the Shortest Distance program, select the Refresh From
Shortest Distance button to overwrite the displayed quantities based on the
shortest distance routing. The quantities can be edited further if required.
5. The Recalculate button will perform the calculations and fill in the displayed
area and weight. The formula used is to add the diameters of each cable and
wire, divided by the total number of wires and cables to yield an average
diameter. The wire area equals the number of wires and cables multiplied by the
average diameter squared.
See your Panduit catalog for the details of the formula used. The recalculate
button must be used to reflect any changes. You can edit the weight and area
values for each gauge using the Configure > Gauge Table Editor function.
6. Use the Save To Wire Path button to save the area and weight values for the wire
path to use it for the Auto size/Auto space function.
570
Panduit Auto Size-Space
When you first place a wire path, you can assign a preliminary part selection to it.
This preliminary selection should indicate the type of component. You can then use
the Auto Size-Space function to automatically replace the preliminary selection with
an appropriately sized part of the same type as the preliminary selection.
This feature is especially useful when using the shortest distance function. At the time
you place a wire path for the shortest distance program to use for routing, the number
of wires going through a given wire path is usually unknown. The user can assign a
preliminary part number to specify the type of hardware to use. Then the shortest
distance program can compute the wire paths and the Auto Size-Space function can
re-size the component.
In the case of devices like cable ties mounts, the criteria of weight is used. You have
the option to change the number of mounts OR the size of the mounts to account for
the change in weight. If you choose not to use shortest distance output you can use the
wire fill calculator to specify the exact number of wires to auto size-space for.
Setup
You must enter in the parts database the diameters for all of the cable part numbers
used in the project. See the Configuration File Formats section of this manual (page
575) for information on which field to use. You must also enter all of their wire
diameters into the wire lookup table. All wires in the project should have their gauges
defined and all cables must have part numbers assigned. The calculator will list any
gauges and cable part numbers used in the current project (see page 569). You should
have either used the wire fill calculator OR run the shortest distance program to route
the wires.
Operation
1. Select the Design > Panduit Auto Size-Space function (you must be in the
Panel Layout drawing mode).
571
2. The Panduit Auto Size and Space dialog will appear.
3. Selecting either the All or Select One Path radio buttons determines if all wire
paths on the current page should be analyzed or if one particular path is to be
analyzed. If one path is to be analyzed, select the ID from the drop-down list (or
you can use the Pick Path button and then click on the desired path in the
drawing).
4. Select the Use Shortest Distance Output checkbox if the shortest distance
routing is to be used. If this checkbox is unchecked, the number of wires and
cables in the path is taken from the fill area calculator (see page 569).
5. In the Select Part Number Type area of the dialog, select checkboxes for the
types of components to analyze. For example, you may want to resize duct but
not cable ties. Additionally, parts that were not marked with the AutoSelect
checkbox when the preliminary part was selected will not be analyzed (see page
566).
6. The Auto-space checkbox only affects calculations for mounts and weight-rated,
spaced devices. If Auto-space is on, the quantity of parts is changed to the total
weight of the wires and cables, divided by the percent fill, divided by the weight
rating of the selected part number. If Auto-space is off, the software will attempt
to find a different size mount to carry the calculated weight. In either case,
percent fill acts as a safety rating. A 50% fill would provide twice as many
mounts or the same number with twice the capacity as would theoretically be
572
required. This is in addition to the margin for error that is built into the
calculations because no adjustment is made for the density of the insulator being
less than the density of copper.
7. Select the Change All radio button if you wish the software to automatically
make all of the required changes to the wire paths being analyzed without giving
you the opportunity to review or change the automatic selections.
8. Select the Step Through Changes radio button if you wish the software to stop
execution at any wire path which does not have the parts or spacing that the
program recommends. A dialog will appear that shows the changed values and
you may cancel all changes, accept all, or make your own modifications and then
accept the changes.
9. Select the Step Through All radio button if you wish the software to display a
dialog at each analyzed wire path, even if no change was detected by the
software.
10. The Preferred Duct Height (Z) value determines the selection of rectangular
duct part numbers when there are multiple selections that would fit the area
requirements. For example if a preliminary part with dimensions of 2 inches
high and 2 inches wide was selected, the auto size might have a requirement for
6 square inches. This requirement could be met by a 2 inch high by 3inch wide
duct, or 3inch high by 2 inch wide duct. Entering a preferred duct height of 2
would result in the 2 inch high part number being selected.
11. The Max % Fill field should have the percent fill to be allowed for duct and also
provides a safety factor for mounts or other auto sized parts. For duct
calculations the actual cross sectional area available is maintained in the
database. (Nominal area calculated from the outside nominal dimensions is not
used.)
12. Select the Start button to begin the analysis.
573
13. The software will select an appropriate part number based on your settings and
the number of wires assigned to this path. If you selected the Change All setting,
the software will run until all paths have been assigned parts. If you selected Step
Through Changes or Step Through All, the software will display the following
Part Number Modification dialog, either through paths requiring a different part
number assignment or for all paths.
Select OK to accept the listed part. If you need to assign additional Panduit parts
to the wire path, select the Select Panduit Parts button to display the Part
Number Assignment dialog (see page 564). If you need to assign additional
non-Panduit parts to the wire path, select the Select Other Parts button.
Select the Cancel Auto-change button if you wish to skip the current wire path
and continue with other paths (assuming you have selected all paths for the Auto
Size-Space function).
Select the Cancel Autosizing button if you wish to exit the Auto Size-Space
function without making further assignments.
When the Auto Size-Space function is complete, a “Finished” message is
displayed.
574
Configuration File Formats
There are a number of configuration files that affect the operation of the Panduit
utilities.
CableFilter.xml
This file allows the user to specify a field in the parts database to use for the diameter
of cables. The path is plugins\Panduit\PanduitLabels\CableFilter.xml.
To change the name of the field to use, change the name on the fourth line between
<colDiameter> and </colDiameter>
Example set to look for the field user2:
<?xml version="1.0"?>
<Setting xmlns:xsi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XMLSchema-instance"
xmlns:xsd="http://www.w3.org/2001/XMLSchema">
<colDiameter>user2</colDiameter>
</Setting>
Panduit.mdb
The Panduit.mdb file holds the part information for Panduit components in several
different tables. Most of this information is specified by Panduit and should not
require user modification, but there are some areas where users may want to make
minor modifications.
Component substitution - The Auto Size-Space function needs to know which
components are can be substituted if a different size is required. This is done with a
SUBTYPE field located in the Panduit_Duct, Panduit_Cable_Ties,
Panduit_abrasion and Panduit_Wiring_Acc tables. Parts with the same values in
these fields are considered to be of the same Type and the software will substitute
parts with matching values. If the user wants to broaden or narrow the group of parts
that can be substituted, these values can be edited. The current format is the first letter
of the type of component, a “-” and a number (example: D-14). This format is not
required and any characters can be used to define a Subtype.
Part selection form modification - The user can modify the forms used for selecting
part numbers by editing the index table. There are utilities in the Configure menu for
editing the IndexTable and ButtonTable.
575
Gauge Table Editor

The Gauge Table Editor allows you to define diameters for the gauges used in your
project. The names used for gauges can vary from company to company and this
function ensures that your preferred gauge names have defined values. This
information is used by the Shortest Distance Routing function and the Panduit Auto
Size-Space function to make percent fill calculations.
Select Configure > Gauge Table Editor. The Gauge Table Editor dialog will appear.
This dialog presents a list of multiple names for various wire gauges. The gauge
names are listed in the Gauge column.
The OD column lists Outside Diameter values for each gauge name.
The Primary column indicates if this gauge name is the primary name of this Outside
Diameter (OD) value. When the checkbox is selected the gauge name is the primary
name. For example, say that the diameter 0.008 has four gauge names, “32AWG”,
“32# AWG”, “32#”, “32”. If you select the Primary checkbox for “32AWG”, then
“32AWG” will be displayed in the drop-down list of gauges when you assign or edit a
wire number in promis•e. (The checkbox can be selected using the Edit function.)
To edit gauge table values:
1. (Optional) Select the desired diameter value in the Outside Diameter List field.
This will filter the display to include only gauge names that have the selected
diameter assigned.
2. Select (highlight) the gauge name that you wish to edit.
576
3. Select the Edit button. Additional editing fields will appear in the dialog.
4. Make any desired changes to the Outside Diameter (OD) and Gauge (name)
fields. You can also select or de-select the Primary checkbox.
5. Select the Apply button to enter the changes. Select the Cancel button to cancel
entry of the new data.
6. Select the Save button to permanently save the new data in the list.
Creating a new gauge name:
1. Select the New button. Additional editing fields will appear in the dialog.
2. Enter the wire diameter value in the Outside Diameter field.
3. Enter the gauge name in the Gauge field.
4. Select the Primary checkbox if you wish the software to consider this gauge
name to be the default name for the entered diameter value.
5. Select the Apply button to enter the changes. Select the Cancel button to cancel
entry of the new data.
6. Select the Save button to permanently add the new gauge name to the list.
Deleting a gauge name:
1. Select (highlight) the gauge name that you wish to delete.

2. Select the Delete button. The selected gauge name will be removed from the list.
577
3. Select the Save button to permanently remove the gauge name from the list
Note: If you have selected one diameter value in the Outside Diameter List field and wish to
return to displaying all diameters, select the blank entry at the top of this list.
578
Shortest Distance Routing

The Shortest Distance Routing Module creates a promis•e connection list that takes
into account the physical location of components used on a layout page in order to
minimize wire length. This shortest distance connection list is useful to those who do
the actual wiring and troubleshooting of the components.
The shortest distance wiring list can include multiple layout drawings (i.e., multiple
panels). There are two methods of defining connections between panels:
• The “standard method” which uses defined regions for each panel and
requires the user to create a region connection diagram to specify the
connections from one region to another.
• The “wiring rules” method which uses an XML file that contains rules for
how wires are to be routed between panels. The wiring rules version also
permits the user to define cases where additional terminals or plugs should be
added to the connection group even though they are not shown in the
schematics.
The output from the Shortest Distance Module is an optimized wire list based on the
physical layout of components and defined routes between panels that achieves a true
“shortest distance” wire routing scheme. Wire lengths are calculated and provided as
a field in the resulting connection list. In addition, the path that each wire takes
through the wireways to establish a “From-To” connection is available for output in a
report. The resulting connection list can significantly reduce the time required for the
fabrication of the control panel. Also, the information from this list can be graphically
reproduced on a termination (wiring) diagram.
579
Shortest Distance Procedure - Standard Method
The steps for the shortest distance routing function using the standard method are:
1. Create electrical schematics with wire connections between components. This

allows the software to determine which devices are connected.
2. Create a panel layout that defines the spacial relationship between the
components. This allows the software to measure the distance between
components.
3. Create wire paths on the panel layout. This tells the software where it is
permissible to route a wire on a panel. See page 561 for more on creating wire
paths.
Important: For the shortest distance program to correctly route wires, separate wire paths MUST
meet or intersect to allow the wires to leave one wire path and enter another.
4. Define regions on the panel layout drawing.
A region typically represents a single panel. You might have one region for the
items mounted on the door and another region for the items mounted on the back
panel. Therefore, by defining regions you are telling the software which items
are on the same panel.
To create a region on a panel layout page:
A. Display the desired panel layout page.
B. Select the Design > Shortest Distance > Insert Region function.
C. Define a rectangular region on the drawing by selecting two opposite corner
points. This region should enclose all the items that share the same panel,
including the panel symbol, if there is one.
580
D. The Region Editor dialog will appear.
Enter an identifying name for this region in the Region Name field.
In the Boundary Coordinates area of the dialog, the X and Y coordinates
you selected for the region will be displayed. If desired, you can change
these values as well as entering Z coordinate values.
E. Also in the Region Editor dialog are controls for defining exit points for the
region. An exit point is where the wires will enter or leave the panel. The
Exit Point Name field prompts the name of the next exit point that will be
placed. This is a sequential name; the default first exit point name is “1.”
You can change this to another number or to a letter if you prefer.
To define exit points, select the Add button. The Region Editor dialog will
close and you can select one or more exit points on the panel drawing for the
current region. These points will be marked by a red circle with cross inside.
Press the <Enter> key or right click to return to the Region Editor dialog.
Note: You must place the exit point on or inside the boundary of the region.
The exit points you have defined will be listed in the drop-down list below
the Exit Point Name field. You can delete an exit point by selecting it from
the list and then selecting the Delete button.
581
5. Define the additional regions in the project using the same steps. The regions can
be on the same layout page or on a different page.
Region
Exit point
582
6. Next you must define the connections between regions so that the software
knows how to route wires from panel to panel. Select the Design > Shortest
Distance > Edit Region Connection function.
The Region Connection Editor dialog will appear. This dialog will contain a
series of boxes that represent the regions you have defined. Each box is labeled
with the name of the region and the name of the exit point(s) that you created for
that region.
A. Drag each region box to a convenient position for creating connection lines
between them (you will be able to re-position the boxes later if necessary).
B. To create a connection between panels, drag an exit point from one panel to
the desired exit point on the next panel. A line will appear between the two
exit points. The line represents the route (raceway, conduit, etc.) between the
two regions. This line is elastic, so that if you move the region boxes around
in the dialog it will stay connected to the two exit points.
583
You can also add junction boxes to the connection diagram. These are useful
if you wish each region to have only one exit point. To add a junction box,
select the Add Junction button. Junction boxes will be labeled Junction-1,
Junction-2, etc., by default.
Junction boxes are also useful if you wish to provide a path to connect a
region to several other regions.
584
C. Next, assign properties to the connection. Double-click on the desired con-

nection line. The Raceway Properties Editor dialog will appear.
In this dialog you can:

Use the Raceway Name Field to assign a name to the connection.
Select the Shipping Split checkbox if there is a shipping split in the panels.
A shipping split requires that connections will be made to spare terminals
located on each side of the split before routing through raceways. (These
spare terminals are not shown on schematic diagrams. See page 603 for more
information.)
Use the Part Number field to assign a part number to the connection. Select
the browse button to open the part number selection dialog.
Use the Description field to enter a description for the connection.
Length, Height, Width, Diameter - Use these fields to enter dimensional
measurements for the raceway. The Height and Width fields will be active
only when the Rectangular Duct radio button is selected. The Diameter
field will only be active when the Conduit radio button is selected. An entry
in the Length field is required.
Voltage: Minimum, Maximum - You can set an allowable voltage range for
the connection by making entries in these fields. These fields will be evalu-
ated if you activate the Segregate Wires by Voltage setting when running
585
shortest distance routing (see page 591).

Select the Save button to save the connection information and close the dia-
log.
D. Once your region connections are created, you can run the validity check,
which will test the region connections for the following conditions:
• Verify each junction box has at least two region connections connecting to
it.
• Verify each region connection has a defined length attribute.
• Verify each connection point has a corresponding exit point on the layout
pages.
• Verify that each region has at least one region connection connected to it.
• Verify that exit points fall within the boundary of the region.
• Any problem conditions will be listed in the dialog.
To run the check, select the Validity Check button in the Region Connection
Editor dialog. The Validity Check dialog will appear. Select the Validate but-
ton to start the check. Use the Save button to save a text file of the results.
Select the Save button in the Region Connection Editor dialog to save your
region connection information.
586
7. Next, make settings for the Shortest Distance Routing function. Select the
Review/Revise > Shortest Distance function. The Shortest Distance Routing
dialog will appear.
A. Select the Setup button. The Setup dialog will appear. Select the shortest dis-
tance method you will be using - in this case, Standard Version. Select OK.
B. Select the Route Project radio button if you wish to include all the panel lay-
out pages in the project in the shortest distance routing. Then select whether
your routing will be based on Panel Layout Pages or Wiring Diagram
587
Pages. Wiring diagram pages should only be selected if you are using a leg-
acy project from an older version of promis•e that allowed wiring diagrams
to contain layout information.
C. Select the Route Specified Pages radio button if you wish to limit the rout-
ing to selected panel layout pages. Use the Select button to display a dialog
where you can select pages.
D. Select the Connect to spare terminals at shipping split checkbox if there is a
shipping split in the panels. (This checkbox does not appear when you use
the Wiring Rules method.) A shipping split requires that connections will be
made to spare terminals located on each side of the split before routing
through raceways. (These spare terminals are not shown on schematic dia-
grams.) See page 603 for more information.
E. Select the Create Log File checkbox if you wish to create a log file that
records the progress of the shortest distance routing function when it is run.
Select the Create Standard Log File radio button if you wish the log file to
contain brief descriptions of each step. Select the Create Verbose Log File
radio button if you wish the log file to contain detailed descriptions of each
step.
F. Select the Maintain Previous Shortest Distance Routing Result checkbox
to keep the previous routing information for all potentials that have not been
edited since the last time that shortest distance routing was run. Selecting
this will reduce the time it takes to run the shortest distance routing and less-
ens the chance of an unexpected routing change.
588
8. To make additional settings for the shortest distance routing function, select the
Setup button in the Shortest Distance Routing dialog. The Routing Options
dialog will appear. This dialog has three tabs.
A. In the Connection Options tab, you can make these settings:

Minimum Wire Length - The value entered in this field sets the minimum
wire length. If the Shortest Distance Routing function calculates any wires to
be shorter than this value, the minimum length will then be assigned.
589
Maximum Direct Wire Length - If you have defined that a connection point
should be wired direct rather than going through a wireway, but the direct
wire length distance ends up being larger than the Maximum Direct Wire
Length value entered here, then the program will route the connection
through wireways even though it is marked as direct.
Additional Length - This area contains two fields to enter values for addi-
tional wire length. If the wire length calculated by the Shortest Distance
Routing function will be used for wire cutting, you may wish to add such an
additional length to every wire to ensure there will be sufficient wire to reach
the device. Use the Add Fixed Length field to add an absolute value. Use the
Add % of Total Length field to add a percentage of the total wire length. You
can enter values in both fields. If you enter values in both fields, the program
will add both additional lengths to the total length of the wire. This allows
you, for example, to use a percentage adder to compensate for the amount of
winding and turning a wire does inside a wire duct while the absolute value
is for connection-based compensation such as strip length or bending radi-
uses. When you enter a percentage value, enter it as a decimal fraction, not a
whole number (for example, enter 0.10 not 10%).
Connection Settings - In this area, when you select the Connect Single Wire
Devices to Ends of Wire checkbox, devices that have connection points that
can only accept one wire are connected at the beginning or end of a daisy
chain.
Note: You can create single wire connections in the Forced Routing Manager (see page
496) or in the Parts Database in the Single_Wire_Connection field (see page
633).
If you select the Treat Cables as Forced Connection checkbox, then you
can represent a wire harness in your schematics by placing a cable symbol
on each wire that is a part of a harness. Before running shortest distance, you
can select this checkbox and the shortest distance program will treat every
cable connection as a forced connection to ensure that the routing is done
properly for the harnesses.
590
Branch Labels - Select the Automatically Assign checkbox to assign branch

labels to each branch of a wire in the shortest distance wiring list. These
labels do not appear in the schematic. Select either the Alphabetic or
Numeric radio button to set the format of the branch label, either Alphabetic
(A, B, C...) or Numeric (1, 2, 3...). Select the Settings button to make addi-
tional branch label settings. The Automatically Assign Branch Label dialog
will appear. This dialog shows the list of allowable letters (if you selected
Alphabetic) and the first number (if you selected Numeric) that will be
assigned to branches. You can change the list of letters or the first number as
desired. Select OK to continue.
B. In the Raceway and Wireway Options tab, you can make these settings:
Select the Segregate Wires By Voltage checkbox if you wish wires with dif-
ferent voltage ranges to be routed through separate wireways.
591
C. In the Compatibility Options tab, you can make these settings:

Select the Legacy Terminal CP checkbox if you are using a legacy project.
In these projects, connection points for terminals were identified as a combi-
nation of terminal number and then the Internal (I) or External (E) designa-
tion. For example, the external connection point of terminal TB2-1 would be
“1E”. In current versions of the software, this combination is not necessary.
D. Select the OK button in the Routing Options dialog to load your settings.
9. Use the Template button in the Shortest Distance Routing dialog to save your
shortest distance settings. The Template Editor dialog will appear.
Enter a name for the template in the Template Name field and select the Save
button. Previously saved templates are listed in the lower part of the dialog. You
can designate one of these as the default template by selecting it and the
selecting the Load button.
592
10. After you have made your settings, run the Shortest Distance Routing function
by selecting the Start button in the Shortest Distance Routing dialog. When the
function has finished analyzing your pages, the Validation Report dialog will
appear.
This dialog will list any errors that occurred during the shortest distance
analysis. You can also display the contents of the log file (if you chose to create
one) by selecting the Log link. If any unexpected program errors occur, use the
Internal link to view program information.
You can save the validation results to an HTML file by selecting the Save As
button.
You can display the most recent validation report by selecting the Validation
Report button in the Shortest Distance Routing dialog.
11. Run the wire list report to view the shortest distance routing that was created.
The wire list contains fields for Route and Length that will be filled in with data
from the shortest distance routing function.
593
Shortest Distance Procedure - Wiring Rules Method
Note: This section applies only to the Wiring Rules method, not the Standard method. For
instructions for the Standard method, see page 580.
The wiring rules version of the Shortest Distance Routing function reads an XML file
containing rules that determine how wires are routed between panels. This version is
often used by switchgear companies who edit the rules file to suit their particular
methods and requirements. These companies typically wire to terminals that are not
shown in the electrical schematic diagrams.
The steps for the shortest distance routing function using the wiring rules method are:
1. Create a wiring rules XML file that defines how panels or enclosures are to be
connected. See Appendix B on page 671.
2. Create panel layout symbols for panels that include special attributes for panel
name and exit points. See page 382 for more information.
The PanelName attribute prompts for the panel identifier. These names
determine the sorting order of panels and are defined in your wiring rules file. If
only one panel name will be associated with this layout symbol, enter it in the
Default Value field when creating the symbol.
The ExitPoint attribute defines the point(s) where wires leave the panel. Enter
exit point coordinates in the Default Value field using the format
x,y;x2,y2
where x,y are the X-Y coordinates of the first exit point and x2,y2 are the
coordinates for the second exit point. Separate the coordinates with a semicolon.
These coordinates are relative to the insertion point of the panel.
3. Create special panel layout symbols for the extra terminals that will be placed on
the panel layout. These are terminals that do not appear in the electrical
schematics. The software will automatically assign these terminals for
panel-to-panel connections. These symbols must include the attribute
SDWReservedTerminal with an assigned value of SDW. Only terminals with
SDW assigned to this attribute will be assigned automatically by the Shortest
Distance program. (This attribute can be placed anywhere on the symbol as a
“hidden” attribute.)
There are two kinds of terminal symbols that you can create to add to the layout.
One kind consists of a single layout symbol that represents multiple terminals.
You would place multiple terminal number attributes on this symbol in the
device ID step of the symbol creation process (see page 378). On this kind of
symbol there must be two connection points for every terminal labeled with the
594
terminal connection designation (such as I or E for internal and external).

Alternatively, you can use separate individual symbols for each terminal. This
type of symbol would only have one terminal number attribute.
I 1 E I 1 E
I 2 E I 2 E
I 3 E I 3 E
I 4 E I 4 E
Multiple separate terminal symbols

One terminal symbol with multiple connection points
When creating these symbols you must use the same connection point text used
by the schematic symbol or family.
4. Create electrical schematics with wire connections between components. This
allows the software to determine which devices are connected. You must also
assign wire numbers to the wires.
5. Create layout diagrams using the special panel layout symbols for panels and
terminals.
A. When placing the panel symbols, the device ID will correspond to your
naming convention for sections, compartments, etc. For example, the
installation name of a panel symbol can represent the name of the section
(unit, stack). The location name can represent a compartment within a
section, if your designs make use of compartments. You can set this naming
convention in the Wiring Rule Configuration dialog (see page 597).
(Example)
Section name
Compartment name
(optional)
595
B. If your wiring rules require them, include extra terminals on these layouts
that don’t exist in the schematics. Use the special terminal symbols you
created in step 3. The software will automatically assign these terminals for
panel-to-panel connections. These terminals must be placed inside the
boundary of a panel (enclosure) symbol.
6. Create wire paths on the panel layout. This tells the software where it is
permissible to route a wire on a panel. See page 561 for more on creating wire
paths.
7. If you wish certain wires to be wired directly between devices (i.e., without
going through terminals), assign the letter “D” to the wire in the User7 field, see
page 600).
8. If you wish to group certain wires so that they are forced to connect to spare
terminals sequentially, assign the same group number to each wire in the User8
field, see page 601).
9. Next, make settings for the Shortest Distance Routing function. Select the
Review/Revise > Shortest Distance function. The Shortest Distance Routing
dialog will appear.
A. Select the Setup button. The Setup dialog will appear. Select the shortest dis-
596
tance method you will be using - in this case, Wiring Rule Version.
B. In the Setup dialog, select the Configure button. The Wiring Rule Configura-
tion dialog will appear.
In the Wiring Rule File field, enter the path and name of your wiring rules
file (see page 671). You can use the Open File button to browse to and select
the file. Use the New File button to save a new, empty wiring rule file.
The remainder of this dialog is used to define how the device ID of your
panel symbols corresponds to your naming convention for sections and com-
partments.
Use the Section fields to define part of the device ID as the name of the sec-
tion (unit, stack). In the Lookup Field, select either Installation or Location
from the drop-down list. In the Type field, select whether the section names
are Alphabetic or Numeric. In the # of Characters field enter the number of
characters used by the section name.
Use the Compartment fields to define part of the device ID as the name of
the compartment. In the Lookup Field, select either Installation or Location
from the drop-down list (leave blank if not used). In the Type field, select
597
whether the compartment names are Alphabetic or Numeric. In the # of

Characters field enter the number of characters used by the compartment
name.
In the Panel/Enclosure field specify whether the device tag or the Panel-
Name attribute of the panel symbol will hold the panel name. Select either
Device Tag or Panel Name Attribute (leave blank if not used).
Select OK to save your settings. These are saved in a file named EctR-
way.xml located in the Shortest Distance directory of the current project. See
page 680 for more information.
10. Next, make additional settings in the Shortest Distance Routing dialog.
Note: The following two settings only appear when you have selected the Wiring Rules
method.
C. In the Shipping Splits field, enter the name of the section (or “stack” or
“unit” depending on your terminology) where the shipping split will occur.
Enter the lower number of the two sections that are divided by the split (for
example, enter 2 if the split will occur between 2 and 3). If you have more
than one shipping split, separate the names with a comma, for example: 2,5.
D. In the Rule Set field, select the wiring rules set that you wish to use when
generating the shortest distance data. Sets are defined within the wiring rules
file (see page 673).
E. The remainder of the settings in the Shortest Distance Routing dialog are
described beginning with step B on page 587.
11. After you have made your settings, run the Shortest Distance Routing function
by selecting the Start button in the Shortest Distance Routing dialog. When the
function has finished analyzing your pages, the Validation Report dialog will
appear.
598
This dialog will list any errors that occurred during the shortest distance
analysis. You can also display the contents of the log file (if you chose to create
one) by selecting the Log link. If any unexpected program errors occur, use the
Internal link to view program information.
You can save the validation results to a file by selecting the Save As button.
You can display the most recent validation report by selecting the Validation
Report button in the Shortest Distance Routing dialog.
12. Run the wire list report to view the shortest distance routing that was created.
The wire list contains fields for Route and Length that will be filled in with data
from the shortest distance routing function.
599
Direct Wiring (Wiring Rules Method)
Typically, connections between devices in different enclosures go through a terminal

block. However the user may wish to have exceptions to this for certain types of wires
so that they are directly wired from one device to another.
In the wiring rules method, there are two ways the user can specify a direct
connection: by defining a wiring rule for a certain wire type or by assigning the direct
wire attribute to an individual wire.
Direct Wire Rule - The wiring rules file (see page 671) can contain a <DirectWire>
rule that defines any wire gauges that will always be directly wired. You can also
enter a part number for a cable that is to directly connect two devices.

- <DirectWire>
<Gauge gauge="#2" rule="D" />
<Gauge gauge="1/0" rule="D" />
<PartNo partNo="8719" rule="D" />
</DirectWire>
Direct Wire Attribute - You can specify direct wiring for any wire by assigning the
value of “D” to the wire in the User7 attribute field. To do this, right click on the wire
and select Edit Wire Number from the popup menu. The Edit Number Manual
dialog will appear. (You must select the More Properties button to see the User
fields.)
Enter “D”
600
Enter “D” in the User7 field. Select OK.
Grouping and Sequencing Terminal Connections - Wiring Rules Method
In cases where the software will automatically connect wires to terminals that are not
shown in the schematic there may be situations where you wish to group certain wires
together to ensure that they connect to spare terminals in a sequential manner.
For example, suppose there are two wires connected to a battery, a positive and a
negative, and they are connected to a device located in a different enclosure.
Normally this would mean the software will daisy chain from the battery to a spare
terminal before connecting to the device in the other enclosure. Most users would
want the positive and negative wires connected to consecutive terminals with no other
wires in between.
To ensure that a group of wires are assigned to sequential terminals you can assign a
group number in the User8 attribute field for each wire to be included in the group. To
do this, right click on the wire and select Edit Wire Number from the popup menu.
The Edit Number Manual dialog will appear.
Enter group number or name
Enter a unique group number or alphanumeric name in the User8 field. (You must
select the More Properties button to see the User fields.) Select OK.
601
When making connections, the software will determine how many sequential
terminals are required in order accommodate the group and will route connections to
those terminals in sequential order. If not enough sequential terminals are available,
the software will alert the user after routing is performed.
602
Guidelines and Routing Rules
This section contains information that you should be familiar with when using the
Shortest Distance Routing function. Special rules that Shortest Distance uses when
routing wires are described.
Connect to Spare Terminals at Shipping Split (Standard Method)
Spare terminals are created and assigned part numbers in the Terminal Manager. They
can then be placed on a layout drawing like any other terminal symbol.
Only wires that pass through region connections designated as shipping splits (when
you edit the region connection properties - see page 585) will be forced to route to
spare terminals before leaving a panel.
When connecting to spare terminals, the software always routes to the closest unused
spare terminal to the panel exit point. It then determines what side of the terminal to
connect to based on what would be the shortest distance.
The following figure shows how the Shortest Distance Routing function might route
to spare terminals when this function is enabled. The dashed lines indicate the routing
calculated by the program. The program routed from device A to the internal side of
the spare terminal then left the external side of that terminal to the panel exit point
since this would make the shortest connection. It then routed to the internal side of the
spare terminal on the other panel page. It routed a second wire from the internal side
of the spare terminal to device B since this was shorter than routing from the external
side of the spare terminal.
603
Panel Exit Points
1*
2*
A 1*
3*
2*
4
3*
B I E
4
I E
Spare Terminals
* Not a spare terminal
Single Wire Connections
If there are too many single wire devices on a potential with no way for the program
to connect them together without routing more than one wire to a single wire
connection, the program will generate an error. For example, if A, B, and C in Figure
1 below are all single wire devices, the program cannot connect the devices without
routing more than one wire to a connection point. To correct this, you must insert a
terminal somewhere in the potential to make it possible to connect these devices as
shown in Figure 2.
A A
B B
C C
Figure 1 Figure 2
604
Terminal Stacker Feature (Standard Method only)

The terminal stacker feature offers a solution to situations where you have multiple
single wire connections that can’t be daisy-chained, as with conductors of a plug.
To use the terminal stacker feature, place multiple terminals connected anywhere on
the potential. The terminals must be clip-jumpered to each other.
Clip-jumpered terminals
Single wire connections
When you run the Shortest Distance Routing function, the software will automatically
use the jumpered terminals for the single wire connections.
Voltage Separated Wire Routes
The Shortest Distance Routing program allows you to separate wires based on
voltages to prevent your high voltage wires from passing through the same wireways
as your low voltage wires (see page 591).
To use this functionality, you must enter a voltage value in the Voltage field when you
assign wire numbers to your schematics. Only enter numerical values in this field.
When placing your wireways, you must assign a minimum and maximum voltage to
each wireway.
When Shortest Distance Routing is performed, it will look at the voltage assigned to
each wire and route it through wireways that have a voltage range that supports the
wire voltage. The range of acceptable voltages includes the minimum and maximum
numbers.
605
In the following example, wire number 100 connects devices A and B together and
has a voltage of 480. Wire number 200 connects devices C and D together and has a
voltage of 120. The wires will be routed as shown.
WW1
480-600V
A C
WW5
120-240V
WW2 WW3
120-240V 480-600V
WW6
480-600V
B D
WW4
120-240V
Wire 100 Wire 200
606
Terminal Jumper Connections
If two terminals are connected together, the Shortest Distance output will depend on
the terminal designations that were specified. Generally, terminals have connections
on two sides. The terms “internal and external,” “from and to” or “source and
destination” may be used to describe these two “sides” of connections to terminals.
The assignment of a “side” designation to a terminal connection can be based on
positioning in the schematic (left or right of the terminal symbol) or by manual
assignments made by the user. The left or right designation also applies to the
connection’s position in the terminal plan. Terminal connections also can be
designated as jumpers. See page 508 for more information.
The following table lists different combinations of connections between terminal
designations and how they will be handled by the Shortest Distance Module. The
terminal device tags TB:1 and TB:2 are used as examples.
TB:1 TB:2 Shortest Distance Output

Left side Right side From: TB:1:I to TB:2:E
(Internal or I) (External or E)
Left or right side Jumper Error condition
(Internal or
External)
Jumper Jumper TB:1:J to TB:2:J, Path = Jumper,
Length = 0
Pin/Plug Connections
The Shortest Distance Routing Module treats pin/plug connections like single-wire
devices by allowing only one wire to connect to each connection point. Similar to a
terminal layout symbol, each connection point on the plug layout symbol is identified
by connection point text which distinguishes the male and female sides of the plug.
Note: If several pin connections of a plug are jumpered together, the Shortest Distance
Routing program may encounter problems when attempting to connect the devices
together. For a solution, see the Terminal Stacker feature, 605.
607
Panduit Wire Terminations

The Panduit Wire Terminations software is a set of tools that provides the following
functionality:
• It can take the physical routing and wire length information generated by the
Shortest Distance Routing function (see page 579) and place it in a file that
can be read by your wiring department or an automated wire-cutting machine.
It also allows you to error-check for any oversized or undersized wires based
on the components’ uses.
• The Panduit Wire Terminations software will also assign the correct
terminator (lug, ferrule, or terminations such as rings, fork, spades, etc.).
Note that some of the functionality can be used without using the Shortest Distance
Routing program but in this case data such as wire length may not be available and
routing of daisy chained wires will be based on the schematics which may not reflect
“real world” routing.
Overview
The Panduit Wire Terminations software has a number of utilities and features. The
software is located in the PanduitWireTerminations folder located in the promis•e
Plugins folder. When this folder is present, three functions are added to the promis•e
menus:
• Panduit Data Editor
• Panduit Termination Editor
• Panduit Wire Terminations
The functionality works as follows:
Using the Panduit Data Editor, you enter information into a parts database for all
components. The information will specify exactly which type of termination is
acceptable on every wired device and every connection on the device. This will later
tell the software what types of termination are acceptable on the devices. The user
also enters the size of the terminal. This will allow the software to select the right size
of termination.
Instead of having to select every possible termination part type that a terminal will
accept in the Data Editor, you may also select “classes.” A class is a user-defined
group of terminal types. For example, if your company commonly uses five different
types of ring termination, you can create a class called “Ring.” Then, when using the
Data Editor, instead of having to individually assign five different Panduit ring types
to a device, you can just select the “Ring” termination class. The software then knows
that the device can accept any of the five types assigned to the class. Maintaining
classes is done through the Panduit Termination Editor.
608
The Panduit Wire Terminations utility does the actual determination of

components. As the project is completed, you must assign part numbers to devices
and assign gauges to their wire connections. With this information, the software can
look up the part number and connection point of each device and find the types of
terminations that the part can accept. It can get the stud size and wire gauge needed to
do proper sizing. All that is required is a method that will allow the software to select
exactly which of the terminals allowed on a device will be used in the connection list.
This is done through the Panduit Wire Terminations utility which allows you to set
which types of connectors you “prefer” to use for the current project. You rank your
preferences and the software will then select the highest ranking termination type
from the allowed terminations and assign it to the wire.
The final portion of the Panduit Wire Terminations utility is to create the actual
output. The user may want a text report, and Excel file or to output the information
directly to a wire cutting machine. All of these are possible through a formatting
dialog.
Create or Edit a Class with the Panduit Termination Editor
The Termination Editor allows you to combine several part number types into a single
selectable Class. For example, instead of selecting five different types of Panduit ring
terminals, you can just select a class called “Ring.” This greatly reduces the data entry
that is required when editing the parts database to assign the types of terminations that
a part will accept. It also allows you to assign your own preferred terminology for
types of terminations instead of using the predefined Panduit part type codes. Lastly,
it allows groups to be created that are tailored to the parts used at your company.
Note: This function requires that you have the Panduit.mdb database file in your
plugins\Panduit folder.
609
To start the Termination Editor:
1. Select the Configure > Termination Editor function. The Termination Editor
dialog will appear.
Filters
Parts type selection area
Selected types in the current class
The top part of the dialog allows you to select a class and filter the list of
termination part types. The center part of the dialog lists the Panduit termination
catalog types. The lower part of the dialog lists the types that have been assigned
to the selected class.
Use the Select Class field to select from a list of existing classes.
The Description field contains a short description of the selected class.
The filter area of the dialog operates in the same manner as the standard Panduit
part selection utility (see page 643). When you select a filter, the part types that
are listed are filtered accordingly.
The Panduit Types area of the dialog displays the filtered Panduit Catalog type
610
designations. Double-click a catalog type to define it as valid for the current

class. Items that are selected in this way are listed in the Selected area in the
lower part of the dialog.
The Selected area in the lower part of the dialog shows any types assigned to the
current class. To remove a type, double-click on the type designation.
To create a new class:
1. Select the New Class button in the Termination Editor dialog. The New Class
dialog will appear.
2. Enter a name for the new class in the Class field.

3. Enter a brief description of the class in the Description field.
4. Select the OK button. The New Class dialog will close. The new class name and
description will appear in the Termination Editor dialog.
5. Filter the list of termination types as desired and assign types to the new class.
Types are assigned by double-clicking on a type in the center of the dialog. The
types that have been assigned to the class are listed in the Selected area of the
dialog.
6. Select the Save button. The new class will be saved and will now be available in
the list of classes in the Select Class field.
To edit a class:
1. Select the desired class in the Select Class field in the Termination Editor dialog.
2. Change the information for the class as desired. Selected types can be removed
by double-clicking on the type in the Selected area of the dialog.
3. Select the Save button. The changed information will be stored.
To delete a class:
1. Select the desired class in the Select Class field in the Termination Editor dialog.
2. Select the Delete Class button.
611
3. A dialog will appear prompting you to delete the class. Select the OK button in
this dialog to delete the class. The class will be removed from the list of classes.
Edit Parts Database with Panduit Data Editor
Gauge checking, termination assignment, and wire stripping are all based on
information stored in the parts database. The program reads the shortest distance
output to get the device ID and connection point text for each connection. It then
looks at the project to get the first part number assigned to each device ID. It then
looks into the parts database to find the connection point text on the part. The
maximum gauge, minimum gauge, strip length, screw (stud) size and supported
terminator types must exist for every connection point on every part to allow the
software to provide the full export file. The Panduit Data Editor provides a method
for entering the data that is much faster than entering the data as plain text.
To use the Panduit Data Editor:
1. Select the Configure > Panduit Data Editor function. All of the entries for the
parts database will appear in the Select Part Numbers dialog. The dialog
functions the same as the standard promis•e part selection dialog, allowing the
user to sort, group or move and filter by right clicking on the field heading.
612
2. Because parts with identical device families may have the same values for
terminator types and gauges it is useful to sort by device family and then edit
several part numbers at the same time. You can do this sorting by clicking on the
header of the Device Family column.
3. Select the part numbers to be edited. You can use the <Shift> or <Ctrl> keys to
select several parts at the same time.
4. Select the Assign Connection Points button and the Assign Connection Points
dialog will appear with data for the first part number you selected.
5. If the first part number selected includes a device family in the database record,
the program will automatically fill in the connection point texts available for the
device family. You may also manually enter the connection point texts into the
CP column.
6. If you wish to use the gauge checking function for selecting wire terminations,
fill in the minimum and maximum wire gauge values that the connection will
accept in the Min Gauge and Max Gauge columns. When you click inside one
of these fields, a drop-down list of available gauge values will appear from
which you may select.
7. The Stud column indicates the screw size of the terminal or a tab size and is used
for sizing terminations. In this field also you may click to get a drop-down list of
available values.
613
8. The Single Wire field contains a checkbox that can be selected to indicate single
wire devices. This can be used with the shortest distance program to specify
connections that only allow a single wire. This feature only works if your single
wire database field is named “Single_Wire_Connection”.
9. Use the Strip Length field to define the strip length to be used on the wire. You
may enter a length here or you can assign a generic strip length based on Gauge
using a lookup table. This field is only used for display purposes on your report
output and is not used in any selection criteria.
10. The Classes and Types field is used to assign classes and types to the
connection. To do this, click inside the field and then select the Assign Classes
and Types button. The Select Classes and Types dialog will appear.
11. In the Classes tab of the Select Classes and Types dialog you can select one of
the classes you have previously defined by double-clicking on it. It will then
appear in the lower, Selected area of the dialog. You can assign it to the
connection by selecting the Apply button. In the Types tab you can see
information on the existing Panduit catalog types.
12. In many cases the same type of wire and terminators are allowed on all or most
of the connections on a device. If this is true, be sure all of the connection points
are listed, then define the settings for the first connection point in the Assign
614
Connection Points dialog. You can then use the Repeat CP 1 for All button. This
will duplicate the settings of the first connection point on all of the other
connection points. If only a few of the points are different, you can then
manually edit them.
13. If you selected several part numbers for editing and they will have the same
connection points and connection specifications, you can use the Update All
Selected Parts button to copy the values displayed to all of the selected parts.
14. You can use the Next Part button to start editing the next selected part.
15. Select the Finished button when you are done editing the selected parts. You
will return to the Select Part Numbers dialog.
Special terminal block entry
In the case of terminal blocks, the connection point text in promis•e will change for
each block on the strip. Therefore it would be impossible to place down every
possible terminal number. For terminal blocks, place a connection point text of “I” or
“E” in the database and be sure that the Part_Type field in the promis•e parts
database for the terminal block part number has “TB” or “TER” entered to designate
that the part number is a terminal block.
Creating an Export File with the Wire Terminations Utility
The function to create an export file will take connection information from the
shortest distance program and the project. It will assign termination hardware to the
wires and output the data in a user-specified format.
Setup
To create an export file you will need to have finished the schematics and panel
layout, and have run the shortest distance routing program (see page 579). If you have
not run the shortest distance program you will get output, BUT the length information
will not be returned and therefore daisy-chained connection routing will be
schematic-based. You will also need to have completed formatting files.
Create an export file
1. In promis•e, open the project to be exported. The shortest distance routing

program should have been executed.
615
2. Select the Review/Revise > Wire Terminations function. The Project

Preferences dialog will appear.
3. The software will search for all part numbers used in the project. It will find all
allowed classes and types assigned to those part numbers and display them in the
dialog. Terminations will be assigned to wires based on the display order. For
example, if a part accepts the first type listed, that type will be assigned to the
wire connected to that device. If the device does not have the first entry listed in
its database record, the next type listed in the dialog is used. The software
proceeds down the list until a supported termination type is found.
4. To move a selection higher or lower in the preferences, highlight a row and use
the up and down arrow keys to the right.
5. Selecting the Show all checkbox will display all types even if none of the parts
in the project will accept those terminations. This allows the user to create a
general set of preferences and save them. The saved preferences can then be
used over and over for any project. This is useful for setting up a company or
customer standard set of preferences.
6. Preferences can be saved or reloaded by using the file Save As and Open
buttons.
616
7. The speed sort method allows you to rank the preferences by terminator
characteristic. The standard sort method allows easy sorting when the user is
familiar with the Panduit part types. The speed sort method is more useful if you
want to set preferences based on the characteristics of the terminators. (See the
following section on Speed Sort Method, page 617.)
8. The Use multiple connection substitution table checkbox allows you to use
different terminations when a connection has two wires going to it instead of
one. This is a typical scenario for tab/disconnect connections. This allows a
standard disconnect to be used if a single wire is needed but if two wires are
needed, the original part number is replaced with an alternate pair of part
numbers which could be a regular disconnect and a “piggy-back” disconnect.
See “Multiple connection Substitution.”
9. Selecting the Output button will open the Panduit Wire Terminations dialog to
process the wire information and preferences and send the data to a file that is
used during report generation. See the following section, Output the Wire
Terminations, page 619.
Speed Sort Method

The Speed sort method allows the user to assign preferences based on criteria.
1. From the Project Preferences dialog choose the Speed Sort button. The Speed
Sort dialog will appear.
2. Drag and drop the column heading to place your most important criteria to the
left.
617
3. Drag and drop sub-branches within each branch so that your preferred types of
lugs are at the top of the branches in the order that you want them assigned to
connections. Dragging branches is done by selecting on a row with the mouse
while pressing the <Shift> key.
4. Select the OK button. The preferences will be translated to Panduit types and be
displayed in the order of preference in the Project Preferences dialog.
618
Output the Wire Terminations

The Panduit Wire Terminations dialog has all of the functionality to format and
create the final report output that will include the termination information. The
Panduit gauge check program will read your connection list and based on
maximum and minimum gauges entered into your parts database, it will report
any wires that are oversized or undersized.
1. After you have assigned preferences in the Project Preferences dialog, select the
Output button. The Panduit Wire Terminations dialog will appear.
This dialog has four tabs. The Create tab is used for actual file creation. The
other tabs are for setup information.
619
2. In the Create tab, make the following settings:

In the Output file field, enter the path and filename for the output file that will be
created by the export tool.
In the Output format field, enter the path and filename of a formatting file that
specifies the structure of the export file. A large variety of formats are possible.
See “Creating Format Files” on page 621.
In the Header file field, enter the path and filename for the header file. A header
file is a text file that serves as a heading to create column names in the output
file.
The Gauge Check button will return an error report for wires that are incorrectly
sized. See “Checking Gauges” on page 625.
Select the Assign Terminators button to create an MDB file of the assigned
connection information. This file is created as an intermediate step so that you
may manually or automatically modify the results before the final output.
Select the Update BOM checkbox to send all of the assigned terminations to the
project’s Bill of Materials. Any terminations previously written to the project are
first deleted.
The Post Process button allows you to write custom code to manipulate the
Access database used to temporarily store the connection information. Selecting
this button will run any EXE file named POST_PROCESS.EXE, which must be
created by the user and placed in the PanduitDataEditor folder inside the
Plugins folder of your promis•e installation.
3. The File Format tab is used to structure and filter the information in the
exported file. See “Creating Format Files” on page 621.
4. The Wire Lookups tab allows the user to assign new values to wires based on
existing values entered into promis•e. This could be done to select a wire
number based on gauge and color or a strip length based on wire gauge. See
“Wire Lookup Values” on page 626.
5. The Location Lookups tab allow locations to be sorted in a non-alphanumeric
sequence. See “Location Lookup Values” on page 627.
6. Select the Create button (in the Create tab) to create the specified output file.
620
Creating Format Files

The formatting tool allows you to select all of the connection information from
promis•e and place it into a file in the format that you need. The tool will allow for
creation of comma-separated files, fixed field width files, XML files, INI files and
many other formats. It will also provide “lookup” capabilities. For example, a spool
number can be assigned to a wire based on its gauge and color.
1. Open the File Format tab from the Panduit Wire Terminations dialog. The
dialog is used to format the information for one wire. When the output file is
created, the format is used over and over for each wire. The dialog also allows
the user to filter out certain wires or to have them sorted with up to 15 nested
sorts.
2. The Field column shows all of the data available from promis•e for the export
file.
Field value Description
Wire Number Wire number
seq. Wire Number A sequential number starting at 1 for each wire in the
output file.
SD Wire Number A sequential number applied to each wire coming
621
from the shortest distance file.

Wire Color Wire Color
Wire Gauge Wire Gauge
Length Length calculated by shortest distance routing
From Strip Length From Strip length assigned from parts database
To Strip Length To Strip length assigned from parts database
Diameter (Use lookup 1) From the first value in the lookup table
Type (Use lookup 2) From the second value in the lookup table
Part Number (Use lookup 3)From the third value in the lookup table
From Terminator Part number
To Terminator Part number
From Installation From device installation name
From Location From device location name
From ID Device tag of the From Device
From Connection Point From Device connection point text
Full ID:CP From Full From Device ID with CP text
To Installation To device installation name
To Location To device location name
To ID Device tag of the To Device
To Connection Point From Device connection point text
Full ID:CP To Full To Device ID with CP text
Wire Attribute 1 to 5 Five user wire attributes
From Terminator From Terminator description assigned by program
To Terminator To Terminator description assigned by program
Komax header When “Y” is in the Use field creates a file header
suitable for Komax wire cutting machines.
Error Connection which could not be terminated because of
missing part numbers or missing connection point
information in the database connection point
information will have the word error in this field.
Using a filter value of “error” will filter out these
wires.
From Location lookup The lookup value associated with the “from” location
name
To Location lookup The lookup value associated with the “to” location
name
Branch Number A sequential number starting with 1 that is assigned to
each existing wire number within a potential
Use The Use assigned in the wire numbering dialog
Voltage Voltage assigned in the wire numbering dialog
Current Current assigned in the wire numbering dialog
Part Number Part Number assigned in the wire numbering dialog
Type Type assigned in the wire numbering dialog
Cable Installation Installation of cable to which wire is assigned
622
Cable Location Location of cable to which wire is assigned

Cable ID ID of cable to which wire is assigned
Cable Family Family of cable to which wire is assigned
Cable Type Type of cable to which wire is assigned
Cable Length Length of cable to which wire is assigned
Cable Conductor Conductor of cable to which wire is assigned
Cable Part Number Part Number of cable to which wire is assigned
Cable Gauge Gauge of cable to which wire is assigned
Wire Attribute 6 - 10 Additional user attributes assigned to wire
3. Click in the Use column to select which fields you will want in the export file. A
“Y” will appear for all variables that are selected to be exported. (Click again to
remove the “Y”.)
4. If a variable is supposed to use a specific number of characters, place the field
width in the Fixed Width column. Entries that are too long will be truncated to
this number and entries that are too small will be padded with extra spaces.
5. The Prefix field is for constant text that should be output before the value of the
variable. For a comma separated file the lead text would be “ (a single quote) for
the first variable and “,” (quote comma quote) for the remaining variables. For
an XML or INI file format you would put in the label for the variable.
6. The Suffix field is for fixed text to place after the value of a variable. A “^”
character should be used to specify that a new line should be inserted.
7. The Supp if from – to field allows you to suppress the installation and location
variables when wires are routed entirely within a given installation/location.
8. The Sup. Prefix field allows the “ = + –” characters to be suppressed from the
complete device ID (=installation+location-device tag).
9. The Sort field allows you to enter a number from 1 to 15 to specify levels of
sorting in the file. 15 levels of filtering are supported.
10. The New File field specifies if a new file should be created when the value for
this variable change. For example if you set part number to have the sort value of
“1” and set the new file option, you will get a separate export file with each wire
part number. The additional files will use the user specified output file name
with a sequential number appended to the end. If you wish to use this option,
click inside the field so that a “Y” appears.
11. The Swap option can be used for one value in the Field column. It will swap all
“from” and “to” values based on what is alphanumerically higher in this field.
This is most often used for swapping based on the terminator field so that a wire
would have an “A” termination on the “from” side and the “B” termination on
the “to” side. Without the use of the swap toggle, half of the wires would have an
“A” termination on the “from” side and roughly half would have a “B”
623
termination on the “from”. The result would be setting up the machine twice as
often as required. If you wish to use this option, click inside the field so that a
“Y” appears. This toggle should be used for only one field.
12. The Prioritize field option causes the “from” and “to” to be temporarily swapped
based on which value is higher in the prioritized field. This is only done to
properly evaluate sorting and does not physically change the output of the
individual lines as the Swap option does. This would typically be used for the
“from” installation sort. If installations were named A through D, setting the
prioritize and sort for from installation would insure that all wires within, or
leaving installation A, were together. Without the prioritize option selected, wire
from installation A to D would appear near the top of the sort and wires from D
to A would appear near the bottom. Using the prioritize option allows the actual
wiring to occur in a more orderly fashion.
13. The Filter field allows removal of records from the export. The entered values
will be used for exclusion. For example: entering “SH,6,8,10” in the filter
column for Gauge would exclude all records with a gauge of “SH”, 6, 8 or 10.
Values should be comma separated and will be used as a string comparison with
the exception of the Length field. A filter in the Length field will eliminate all
records with a length shorter than the entered number.
14. The Sup. Field if empty option will suppress everything on that line if the
variable has no value.
15. Use the Delete button to delete duplicated fields from the format.
16. Use the Duplicate button to place a variable more than once. This may be
used when one end of the wire is to be labeled with the “to-from” targets and the
other end of the wire is to receive the “from-to” targets.
17. Select each variable and use the up and down arrow buttons to put the variables
in the order needed for the export file.
18. A line at the bottom of the dialog displays a sample line of output.
19. Use the Save button to save the settings to a specific file name or load already
created files for further editing.
20. At the very bottom of the field listings is a field for “Komax”. Placing a “Y” in
the use field will place a wire quantity and unique article name in each new file.
This is required when exporting to a Komax wire-cutting machine.
624
Checking Gauges
The Panduit Gauge Check program will read your connection list and based on
maximum and minimum gauges entered into your parts database, it will report any
wires that are oversized or undersized. This can be especially useful for catching
sizing errors on devices like fuses or motors which have a minimum gauge
requirement or component that have a physical limit on wire size.
For this function to work properly you must have the connection point texts for all of
your parts entered into the parts database and the Gauge range. See the “Database
Editor” for how to enter the data.
Operation:
1. Complete the schematic by assigning wire gauges to the wires and part numbers
to the devices.
2. Select the Gauge Check button in the Panduit Wire Terminations dialog (Create
tab).
3. You will be prompted to display the created error file.
4. The file will display any wires listed in the shortest distance connection list that
are outside of the range specified in the parts database. If connection point data
is missing from the parts database it will also display an error.
625
Wire Lookup Values

Lookup values allow the user to specify values in the export file based on a
combination of wire variable. For example, a color and gauge can be used to specify
the part number for a specific wire spool. The gauge can be used to specify the wire
diameter. This avoids having to fill these values into the wire attributes on every wire.
However, if the values cannot be determined from a simple lookup, you may need to
use wire attributes and place data on every wire. For example, if you require Outside
Diameter and you are using two different types of wire, Gauge alone would not be
enough to determine the correct diameter to use. You would have to use one of the
wire attributes to specify wire type, when you create your schematics.
Operation:
1. Select the Wire Lookups tab in the Panduit Wire Terminations dialog.
2. Fill in the values in the Lookup 1, Lookup 2 and Lookup 3 columns and the wire
attributes that should correspond to them.
3. Use the Save button to save the entries.
626
Location Lookup Values

Location Lookup Values allow the user to modify sorting based on location. Normally
all sorts are alphanumeric. If you have set location names and want to create wires in
a non-alphanumeric sort, by entering lookup values for the set location names a
non-alphanumeric sort can be achieved. For example: locations could be named for
sub-panels within the enclosures. The locations names may be TOP, LEFT, MAIN,
RIGHT, DOOR, and BOTTOM. With a normal alphanumeric sort the wires would be
sorted in the order BOTTOM, DOOR, LEFT, MAIN, RIGHT, TOP. If users want the
wires for the Door to be listed first and then the main panel, they can enter the
location names in the Location Lookup dialog and enter a lookup value of “A” next to
the “DOOR” and “B” next to the “MAIN”, etc. The wire sort will now list wires in
location “DOOR” at the top and then location “MAIN”.
Operation:
1. Select the Location Lookups tab in the Panduit Wire Terminations dialog.
2. Fill in the names of the locations in the Location column.

3. In the Lookup Value column place letters that when sorted alphanumerically will
put the corresponding locations in the desired order.
4. Use the Save button to save your entries.
627
Komax Wire Cutting Machines
The Panduit Wire Terminations assignment can be used for exporting to Komax wire
cutting machines. A default Komax formatting file is included in the plugins folder.
This formatting file will export wire to the Komax machine. Additional custom
programming can be done by Komax. The developers at Komax can read in a CSV
export from the Panduit Wire Terminations program and provide additional
processing. This can be done to achieve further optimization to minimize machine
setup and change over time. See your Komax representative for further details.
It may also be useful to have a separate formatting file for listing out wires that will
have to be created manually because they are too short or require gauges outside of
the machines range. The second file should set filters to exclude the wires not
exported to the Komax machine. It can be sent out as a text file or as a CSV file,
readable by MS-Excel.
Note that the Komax import requires metric dimensions. Use the conversion factor in
the WDEsetting.CFG file to convert from your standard units.
628
Parts Database
12 Parts Database
This section describes the promis•e parts database. This database contains part
numbers and related information about the physical devices that will be used to build
the projects that are designed with promis•e. As the user creates drawings, the user
can assign part numbers to each symbol. Then, when the drawings are completed, the
software can use the information in the database to generate an appropriate bill of
material, purchase order list, etc., based on the schematic.
Alternatively, the user can create a parts list first and pick from this list to place items
in a drawing.
For information on assigning part numbers to symbols, see page 294.
629
Parts Database
Parts Database Editor

The Manage > Parts Database Manager dropdown menu provides access to the
parts database editor.
This form displays the data fields for each part in the database. You can search for and
display parts records, edit or delete existing records and create new records.
Database Data Fields
Part_Number – This 30 character field holds the number by which the part is
identified in the database and when assigning part numbers. Part numbers can include
spaces.
Category - Use this 50 character field to enter a description of the part.
Manufacturer – Use this 30 character field to enter the manufacturer’s name.
630
Parts Database
URL - You can enter a complete URL (http://...) in this field. When you assign this
part number to a symbol you can then right-click on the symbol in the drawing and
select from the pop-up menu Hyperlink > Part Number URL to display and go to
the URL.
Catalog_Number - Use this 30 character field to enter the manufacturer’s catalog part
number for the part.
Supplier – Use this 30 character field to enter the name of the company from which
you purchase the part.
Part_Type - Use this field to assign the part a part type group of up to 3 characters.
You can filter parts data by the Part_Type field so that only the parts from the selected
group(s) will be listed in the Assign Part Number dialog box. Usually this field is
used to distinguish different types of parts such as “TB” for terminal blocks, “PB” for
pushbuttons, etc.
Additional_Part - Use this field for additional part numbers that are associated with
this part. This is useful for parts that are assemblies of multiple parts. These additional
part numbers should have their own data records elsewhere in the parts database.
When you click inside the Additional_Part field, a browse button will appear. This
button will display the Select Part Number dialog allowing you to select one or more
additional parts.
Percent_Spare - Use this field to enter a percentage value to determine how many
spares will be ordered for the quantity that is actually used in the design. For example,
enter 10 for 10%. These spares are listed in the Project Manager Spare Parts tab (see
page 53).
Quantity_Per_Unit - This field allows you to determine how many items are
represented by the part number when the part number is assigned. The default value is
1. An example for using this field is if you use connector pins that are provided in a
bag holding 100 pins. By entering a value of 0.01 in the Quantity_Per_Unit field, you
can assign the part number to a single pin in the schematic and it will be counted
correctly as one pin rather than one bag of pins.
Use_Unit - The units in which the item is used. For example, in the case of pins that
are used individually but ordered in boxes, you might enter “Pins.”
Order_Unit - The units in which the item is purchased. For example, in the case of
pins that are used individually but ordered in boxes, you might enter “Boxes.”
Buying_Price - Use this field to enter the billing price that the manufacturer charges
for the part.
Selling_Price - Use this field to enter the selling price that you charge for the part.
Discount - Use this field to enter the percent discount.
631
Parts Database
Detailed_Description1 (to Detailed_Description5) - Use these five fields for

extended descriptions of the part.
X - Enter the X dimension (width) of the part. X and Y values are used to create a box
in a panel layout drawing if no layout symbol is named in the Layout field.
Y - Enter the Y dimension (height) of the part. X and Y values are used to create a box
in a panel layout drawing if no layout symbol is named in the Layout field.
Z - Enter the Z dimension (depth or length) of the part.
Diameter - Use this field for a diameter dimension for items such as conduits.
Location - Use this field to identify the location of components in an enclosure such
as “panel” or “door.”
Weight - Use this field to enter the weight of the part.
Power_Consumption - Use this field to enter the power consumption of the part.
Assembly_Time - Use this field to enter an assembly time value in minutes.
Wiring_Time - Use this field to enter a wiring time value in minutes.
Hour_Cost - Enter an hourly labor cost. This value can be used in job costing reports.
Date_Created - This field holds the date that the part data was entered in the database.
Date_Modified - This field holds the date that the part data was altered (edited).
Device_Family - You can assign a device family to the part. If this is done, when the
part is assigned to a symbol the device family is automatically assigned to the symbol
and there is no need to select a family. In other words, it saves a step when placing
parent symbols. (You have the option of changing this automatically assigned device
family after the symbol is placed.)
632
Parts Database
Attribute_Text - Use this field to select a symbol attribute and assign a value to it.
Once this is done, if the part is assigned to a symbol that includes this attribute, the
attribute value will be assigned to the symbol automatically. To enter a value, click
inside the Attribute_Text field and select the browse button that appears. The
Attributes dialog will appear.
First select the “+” button to create an attribute entry. Then click inside the Attribute
column to display a drop-down list of attributes. Select an attribute and then enter a
value of up to 255 characters in the Value column. If you wish to assign another
attribute to this part, select the “+” button. Use the “X” button to delete assigned
attributes.
Single_Wire_Connection - A comma-separated list of connection points that will
only accept one wire connection. This information is used by the shortest distance
wire routing function.
Schematic_Symbol - Use this field to enter the name of the symbol that will represent
the part in schematic diagram. For example, enter the symbol name PBNO for parts
that are normally open pushbuttons (ANSI-IEEE format). This ensures that when the
symbol is used in a schematic, the part will be listed in the Assign Part Number dialog
box. If a part number applies to more than one symbol, you can enter multiple symbol
names in the Schematic_Symbol field separated by commas up to the maximum
width of the field (example: TBC1,X1).
Layout_Symbol - Use this field to name the symbol that will represent the part in
panel layout diagrams. If no symbol is named here, the part will be shown on panel
layouts as a box having the size entered in the Dimensions fields.
Wire_Diagram_Symbol - Use this field to enter the name of a wire diagram symbol
that will represent the part in wiring diagrams.
633
Parts Database
Hydraulic_Symbol - Use this field to name the symbol that will represent the part in
hydraulic diagrams.
Pneumatic_Symbol - Use this field to name the symbol that will represent the part in
pneumatic diagrams.
Single_Line_Symbol - Use this field to name the symbol that will represent the part
in single-line diagrams.
Graphic_Plan_Symbol - Use this field to name the symbol that will be placed when a
graphical plan is generated if the user includes the "terminal symbol" variable in his
graphical plan template. The symbol itself is defined as a wiring diagram type
symbol.
Parts Database Editor Functions
There are a number of functions in the Parts Database Editor dialog for accessing
and editing data records. Most of these are available in the toolbar at the top of the
dialog.
Select Parts Database
Use the Select Part Database field to select the database that you are accessing.
Database connections are defined in the promis•e Setup mode (see page 407).
Record Forward/Backward
Use the “>” button to move forward through the database one record at a time. Use
the “<” button to move forward through the database. Use the “<<” button to move to
the first record in the database. Use the “>>” button to move to the last record in the
database.
If you use the filter function to find a group of parts, these buttons will move you
through the filtered group rather than the entire database.
634
Parts Database
Add Record
To add a new parts database record:
1. Select the “+” button in the Parts Database Editor dialog. The Add Record
dialog will appear.
2. Enter the part number of the new part.

3. If you wish to use the data of the currently displayed part for the new part, select
the checkbox labeled Apply part information from the current record to new
part number. If this checkbox is not selected, a new record with blank fields is
created.
4. Select the OK button to create the new record.
Adding and Renaming Categories
The data in a parts record is divided into categories such as Parts Data, Price,
Dimensions, etc. You can rename these categories or add new categories by using the
buttons in the category name bar.
Category names Rename and Add buttons
To rename a category:
635
Parts Database
Select the rename button in the desired category name bar. The Rename Category
dialog will appear.
Enter a new name for the category and select OK.

To add a category:
Select the add category button in the the category name bar that is nearest to where
you wish to place the new category. The Add Category dialog will appear.
Enter a name for the new category. Then select the radio button to determine whether
the new category will appear above (before) or below (after) the selected category.
Select OK to create the new category.
636
Parts Database
Filter (Search) Parts Database
You can find and filter parts in the parts database by using the filter function.
1. Select the filter toolbar button in the Parts Database Editor dialog.
The Filter Parts Database dialog will appear.
2. The Custom Filter area of the dialog has three fields:

A. In the left-most field, select the parts database field whose value you wish to
use for filtering.
B. In the center field, select the comparison function to be used in the filter. The
available comparisons are:
like
equals
is greater than
is greater than or equal to
is less than
is less than or equal to
C. In the right-most field, enter the character string that you wish to filter or
search for. The “like” comparison function allows you to use wildcard (*)
strings such as PB* for entries beginning with “PB” or *101* for entries
containing “101”.
3. Select the Filter based on previous results checkbox if you have already
performed a filter operation and wish to filter these results rather than the entire
database.
637
Parts Database
4. Select the Filter button to perform the filtering operation. Any parts that match
the filter criteria will be listed in the lower part of the dialog.
5. To display any of the filtered parts in the Parts Database Editor dialog, select
(highlight) the desired part and select OK.
Removing a filter - If you have performed a filtering operation, and the filter is
currently in effect, the filter toolbar button will be highlighted and the number of
records shown at the top of the dialog will be marked with the word “(Filtered).” If
you wish to remove this filter and access the entire database again, simply click on the
filter button.
638
Parts Database
Show Differences in Parts Data
Data for parts that are assigned in a project is stored with other project information. If
the information in the parts database is edited, then differences can exist between the
data for a given part number as it exists in the project and in the parts database.
The Show Differences function will list the parts in the current project where a
difference exists between the parts data stored with the project and the data in the
master parts database.
1. Select the Show Differences toolbar button in the Parts Database Editor dialog.
The Show Differences dialog will appear.
If any differences are found in the current project, the affected part numbers are
listed. The fields where differences exist are marked in red.
2. To update the parts data in the project, select the Update button. This will copy
the data from the master parts database to the parts data in the project.
639
Parts Database
Structure of a promis•e parts database Data Record
This is the structure of a database record in the main promis•e parts database.
Field Name Data Type Field Size Description:

Part_Number Text 30 Part number
Category Text 50 Description of part
Manufacturer Text 30 Manufacturer
URL Text 255 Hyperlink for part number
Catalog_Number Text 30 Catalog part number
Supplier Text 50 Supplier of part
Part_Type Text 3 Part type group
Additional_Part Text 255 Additional part numbers
Percent_Spare Floating Point Percent of spare parts
Quantity_Per_Unit Floating Point Quantity in part number
Use_Unit Text 12 Unit in which part is used
Order_Unit Text 50 Unit in which part is ordered
Buying_Price Floating Point Supplier’s price
Selling_Price Floating Point Price charged to customer
Discount Floating Point Percent discount
Detailed_Description1 - Text 128 Extended descriptions of
Detailed_Description5 part
X Floating Point X Dimension of device
Y Floating Point Y Dimension of device
Z Floating Point Z Dimension of device
Diameter Floating Point Diameter of part
Location Text 128 Location of part
Weight Floating Point Weight of part
Power_Consumption Floating Point Power consumption
Assembly_Time Int16 32767 max. Assembly time
Wiring_Time Int16 32767 max. Wiring time
Hour_Cost Floating Point Hourly labor cost
Date_Created Date 10 Date part record was created
Date_Modified Date 10 Date part record was edited
Device_Family Text 50 Device family of part
Attribute_Text Text 255 Symbol attribute and value
Single_Wire_Connection Text 128 Conn. points for single wire
Schematic_Symbol Text 128 Symbol for schematics
Layout_Symbol Text 128 Symbol for panel layouts
Wire_Diagram_Symbol Text 128 Symbol for wiring diagrams
640
Parts Database
Hydraulic_Symbol Text 128 Symbol for hydraulic dwgs

Pneumatic_Symbol Text 128 Symbol for pneumatic dwgs
Single_Line_Symbol Text 128 Symbol for single line dwgs
Graphic_Plan_Symbol Text 128 Symbol for terminal plans
641
Parts Database
Panduit Part Selection
The Panduit Part Selection Tool allows you to find the proper Panduit components
based on user-defined criteria selection. The selected part numbers can be added to
any symbol in a promis•e drawing. This allows search criteria specific to individual
product groups to be stored and searched.
To use the Panduit Part Selection Tool:
1. Enter the standard Select Part Number dialog (see page 295). This can be done
from the Device ID assignment dialog or by right clicking on an existing part
and selecting Part Number from the pop-up menu.
2. Select the Panduit button from the bottom of the dialog.
Select
Panduit
button
642
Parts Database
3. A dialog will appear that lists different types of Panduit components. Choose the
desired type and select the OK button.
4. A Panduit dialog will appear with selection criteria for the selected component
type.
You can switch the dialog to a different component type by selecting the Change
Type button.
643
Parts Database
The top half of the dialog displays the user-defined filters. As each filter is set,
the lower, selection portion of the dialog will reduce the displayed parts based on
the entered filter. Each additional filter that is applied builds on the previous
filtering.
Note: Note if you see the message "Records with missing part numbers are missing
from the promis-e parts database" it means that part records exist in the
Panduit.MDB database but not in your general parts database. This may occur
if you have not merged your Panduit part records into your promis-e parts
database. The Panduit part records exist in the table “parts_database to add to
main database” in the file plugins/panduit.mdb. You may use the database
merge tool or manually paste the records into your promis-e parts database
using MS-Access.
5. Several filter boxes using different types of filters will be displayed.
A. List filter – A list will display parameters for all of the parts currently in the
selection area of the dialog. The list itself is filtered to only show values that
will exist based on previously entered filters.
B. Text Filter – The text type filter will return all records that have the
user-entered text in any part of the selected field. For example, entering
“round” would return any descriptions containing the word “round” in any
part of the description.
C. Max and Min filters – These filters allow you to enter in a specific value and
will return all records that have a Maximum above the entered value or a
Minimum value below the entered value.
644
Parts Database
The selection portion of the dialog shows the parts that remain after the
combined filters are applied.
Specific parts within the selection can also be found by sorting. Selecting any
column heading will sort by that field. Selecting the field again will reverse the
sort.
Columns may also be dragged left or right to change the order. Columns can also
be resized to display the desired fields.
6. When you locate the proper part, highlight it and select OK (or double-clicked
on it) to add it to the Select Part Number dialog.
Panduit Database Structure
The Panduit Part Selection Tool uses an open design that allows the user to easily
re-design the dialogs with new or different filter criteria or even completely different
component groups. This requires the use of Microsoft Access.
Note: Always backup this file before trying to make your own modification. Many changes
cannot be undone.
Files and Tables

The data and dialog structures for the Panduit Plug-ins are stored in the Panduit.mdb
file located in the Plugins\Panduit folder.
645
Parts Database
Product Tables
Each product has its own table containing data and fields that are specific to that
product group. “Panduit” precedes all the standard product group tables. For example:
Panduit_abrasion
Panduit_cable_ties
Panduit_duct
Product Queries
Corresponding to the Panduit product tables are the Panduit product queries. The
queries link fields in the standard promis•e parts database to the product group tables.
This allows standard part fields like “Description” or “Color” to be stored in the main
parts database and product-specific fields like “Duct area” to be stored in part-specific
tables. The main parts database, currently being used by your promis•e project, is
dynamically linked to the Panduit.mdb. This makes the Panduit.mdb file portable,
and once changes are finalized, the file can be transferred to another machine without
resetting links and queries to a new set of file paths. Example query names:
Panduit_abrasion_query
Panduit_cable_ties_query
Panduit_duct_query
The Button Table

The Button table (ButtonTable) allows the user to specify a dialog name for
displaying the query information.
The entry in the Button_Name column is the name of the button to display in the
main part selection dialog or in one of the other Panduit tools. Button names should
be single words without spaces, commas, colons, etc.
The entry in the Dialog_Title column is the name of the dialog that will be
dynamically created to show the query.
The checkbox in the Show column determines if the button will be displayed in the
main parts dialog and if the table name will appear in the first selection list after the
button is selected. Entire dialogs can be enabled or disabled by toggling the Show
field.
646
Parts Database
The entry in the Table_Name column is the query or table name that is displayed by
the dialog.
A tool is provided in promis•e for editing the button table. Select Configure >
Button Table Editor. The Button Table Editor dialog will appear.
When you select a button in the Button Name field, the database columns for that
button will appear.
To edit the displayed information, select the desired row and then select the Edit
button. Editing (Setting) fields will appear for the selected row.
Edit the information as desired and select the Apply button.
647
Parts Database
To add a new row to the button table, select the New button. Blank setting fields will
appear for the new row. Enter the desired information and select the Apply button.
To delete a row from the button table, select the row and then select the Delete button.
Select Save to save your changes to the database.
The Index Table

The Index table (IndexTable) allows control of the fields to display and the types of
filter to use in each dialog.
The ID number determines the order in which the fields appear in the dialog. The
lowest number is the first field to appear in the dialog.
The entry in the Dialog_Title column must match the dialog title in the button table
which in turn tells the software which query to use.
You can take data from more than one table. In the Table_Name column, give the
name of the table from which the data is coming.
The Field_In_Database entry is the name of the field in the query.
Show_In_Filter determines that that part will be displayed as a filter in the dialog.
Filter_Type determines the type of filter that will be applied to that field.
“Text” as a filter type indicates the records will be filtered for all records with the
user-entered text as any part of the field. This is typically used for a description
field where there are too many different entries to easily display in a list format.
“Set” as a filter type will create a filter list that shows all possible entries that are
available in the database for that field. Use this when the possible selections will
fit in a manageable list.
“CSV” is used when multiple entries may be available for a part. For example a
lug may accept 12, 14, or 16 gauge wire. The data could be entered into the
database as “12,14,16”. The software would create a list filter but it would see
648
Parts Database
this as three possible entries instead of one and 12, 14 and 16 would appear as
separate selections in the list. The user could select any one of them and the part
would be included in the filter.
“Max”/”Min” are used when the user is expected to enter an actual value and all
parts returned need to be above or below the user entered value.
“URL” is used to designate a hyperlink field.
The Filter_Label and Select_Label fields are used for the field name that will appear
in the dialog.
The toggles Show_In_Filter and Show_In_Selection determine if the field will be
displayed as a filter field (such as the upper part of the dialog, selection field, neither
or both.
A tool is provided in promis•e for editing the Index table. Select Configure > Index
Table Editor. The Index Table Editor dialog will appear.
When you select a button in the Button Name field and a dialog name in the Dialog
field, the database columns for that button and dialog will appear.
649
Parts Database
To edit the displayed information, select the desired row and then select the Edit
button. Editing (Setting) fields will appear for the selected row.
Edit the information as desired and select the Apply button.

To add a new row to the Index table, select the New button. Blank setting fields will
appear for the new row. Enter the desired information and select the Apply button.
The up and down arrow buttons allow you to move a selected row up or down in the
list of rows (which affect the order in which the fields appear in the dialog).
The Exchange button allows you to the switch the positions of two selected rows.
(Hold down the <Ctrl> key to in order to select the second row.)
To delete a row from the Index table, select the row and then select the Delete button.
Select Save to save your changes to the database.
Customization
There are a number of customizations that can be done to the software to tailor it to
your company.
Adding product groups and dialogs
The Button table can be edited to add additional selections under the Panduit button
or create new buttons. This can be used to add new product groups or to divide up the
current groups into smaller groups. This can be done to make the parts tables more
manageable with better performance or to make separate product dialogs that are even
more part-specific.
1. Create the new part tablesin the Panduit.mdb database.

2. Create a query to link the new table to the main promis•e parts database.
650
Parts Database
3. Enter a record for the new dialog in the Button table. You can do this either
directly in MS-Access or by using the Button Table Editor (see page 647).
3 4 5 6 7
4. Create a name for the button to appear in the part selection dialog in promis•e.
5. Create a name for the dialog box for the custom table.
6. Place a check box in the Show field to make the button appear in the dialog.
7. Enter all of the fields from the query just entered in the Button table into the
Index table. You can do this either directly in MS-Access or by using the Index
Table Editor (see page 649).
8 9 10 11 12 14 15 13 14
8. Enter a unique number ID for the field to be displayed in the dialog.

9. Enter the same dialog title used in the Button table.
10. Enter the name of the table that the data is coming from.
11. Enter the field name from the database or query listed in the button table.
12. Enter a column heading for the field in the select (lower) portion of the parts
dialog.
13. Enter a label for the Filter field in the filter (upper) portion of the parts dialog.
14. Turn on the fields that are to be displayed as Show_In_Filter and
Show_In_Select columns.
651
Parts Database
15. Enter the type of filter to use:

Text – allow the user to enter any text and return records that contain that text
Max – Return all records that have values under the user-entered number.
Min – Return all records over the user-entered number.
Set – Display all possible entries in a list and return the records that match the
user’s selection.
CSV – Allow the files to contain comma-separated values. The values are
displayed separately in a list and all records containing the selected value are
returned.
URL – A hyperlink is used in the column (Show In Filter should be set to on).
Note: A maximum of 15 filters may be used per dialog.
Changing the order of the filters
The order of the filters in the dialog box is based in the ID number. The easiest way to
rearrange the order is to:
1. First, right-click in the Dialog_Title field and filter the name of the dialog you
are working with.
2. Copy and paste each existing record to the bottom of the table in the order you
want the fields displayed.
3. Delete the original entries.
Display or hide filter or selection fields in the dialog
The filters displayed may not be appropriate for your company. For example you may
not want to display both inch and metric dimensions.
1. Toggle the “Show” settings in the Index table for the appropriate dialog and field
to hide or display it.
Adding buttons to the promis•e Part Selection Dialog
You may divide separate groups of components into multiple buttons in the promis•e
part selection dialog. The dialog will support up to four buttons.
652
Project API Builder
13 Project API Builder

The Project API (Application Programming Interface) Builder can be used to
automate the building of new projects or for changing existing ones. This tool
requires that you have MS-Excel on your computer as the input file is an MS-Excel
file with the ending "xls".
When activated, the Project API Builder executes a series of functions that are
defined in the Excel file. For complex applications, such as the building of
attachments that are based on variables, additional software is necessary. This can be
made with any development environment that runs on the operating system and can
create or edit Excel files. For example, for databases, all that is necessary is an
interface that changes the data into the Excel format of the project API builder.
653
Project API Builder
Project API Command File Format

The Project API Builder supports two formats for the Excel command file: a legacy
format and the standard file format.
Legacy File Format
The first format is a legacy format used by the Project-API function of earlier
versions of promis•e. This format can be recognized by a header row in line 1 that
consists of “COM” in column A, “PAR1” in column B, “PAR2” in column C, and so
on. Column A is for comments while subsequent columns contain function codes and
parameter values.
For more information on this format consult the system manual for earlier versions of
the software.
Standard File Format
The second format is the format introduced with promis•e 2007. It supports some of
the newer features of the software such as drawing sets.
This format can be recognized by the second line which contains function code
“SCRIPT” in column B with a value of “2” in column C.
As with the legacy format, the first line is a header row that consists of “COM” in
column A, “PAR1” in column B, “PAR2” in column C, and so on.
Column A is for comments. Column B holds function codes while subsequent

columns contain parameter values related to the function.
654
Project API Builder
Available Functions
The following functions are available for use in the Project API Builder.
PRJ - Create/Open Project
Column B contains the function code PRJ.

Column C contains the name of the project that will be opened or created. If you enter
only the project name the software will use the default project folder specified in the
promis•e Setup dialog. You can also enter a complete path for the project if you wish
to use a different folder.
Column D contains the name of a project from which the project settings will be
taken. It's useful to define a master project with all necessary project parameters and
use it here. This eliminates the need to define all the project parameters in the Project
API Builder command file. If you leave the field blank, the software will use the
default settings for new projects.
Column E and above can contain project descriptions. You can enter as many
descriptions as you wish.
INS - Create/Open Installation
Column B contains the function code INS.

Column C - Installation name.
Column D and above - Installation descriptions. You can enter as many descriptions
as you wish.
655
Project API Builder
PAG - Create/Open Page
Column B contains the function code PAG.

Column C - Drawing set name
Column D - Installation name
Column E - Location name
Column F - Page number
Column G - Page format
Column H - Page scale (enter “1” for 1:1, enter “2” for 1:2, etc.)
Column I - Title block
Column J - Drawing mode
Column K - Use or overwrite existing page. Enter “0” to use an existing page. Enter
“1” to overwrite an existing page.
Column L - Page macro
Column M - Device ID update mode. This setting determines how IDs and wire
numbers are updated on macros when they are placed on the page. This setting affects
all macros placed on the page unless the MAC function (see below) includes a similar
setting, in which case the setting in the MAC function will override the setting in the
PAG function for that particular macro. Enter one of the following values (0, 1, 2, 4,
8, 16 or 32):
0 = Maintain Nothing
1 = Maintain Device ID Tag Only
2 = Maintain Wire Number Tag Only
4 = Maintain Wire Link Tag Only
8 = Maintain Device ID Complete
16 = Maintain Wire Number Complete
32 = Maintain Wire Link Complete
Column N - Set page online or offline. 0 = Online page; 1 = Offline page
Column O and higher - Page descriptions. You can enter as many descriptions as you
wish.
656
Project API Builder
MAC - Insert Macro
With this function you can insert a macro in a drawing.
Column B contains the function code MAC.

Column C - Macro name
Column D - Macro insertion point X coordinate
Column E - Macro insertion point Y coordinate
Column F - Macro insertion point Z coordinate
Column G - Snap To Grid. 0 = No; 1 = Yes
Column H - Device ID update mode. This setting determines how IDs and wire
numbers are updated on macros when they are placed on the page. This setting will
override the setting in the PAG function for this particular macro. Enter one of the
following values (0, 1, 2, 4, 8, 16 or 32):
0 = Maintain Nothing
1 = Maintain Device ID Tag Only
2 = Maintain Wire Number Tag Only
4 = Maintain Wire Link Tag Only
8 = Maintain Device ID Complete
16 = Maintain Wire Number Complete
32 = Maintain Wire Link Complete
Column I - Allow sub-ID. If a device ID is assigned that belongs to a family that is
already full, this setting allows the new item to be added to the family as an auxiliary
child (sub-ID). 1 = Allow sub-ID. 0 = Do not allow sub-ID (device ID will contain a
“?”).
657
Project API Builder
TXT - Replace Texts
With this function, you can exchange various kinds of texts in a project with new
values. You can enter codes to specify the type of texts that are to be replaced. If used
after the MAC function, the TXT function will only affect the macro that was placed.
You can reset the TXT function so that it affects the entire project by using the
SPARE function.
Column B contains the function character TXT.

Column C - #_OldText where “#” is the selection code that determines which type of
text is to be replaced and “OldText” is the existing text to be replaced. See the section
below for an explanation of the selection code.
Column D - The new text string that is to replace the old text.
Column E - The connection point and device ID replacement method. Enter one of
the following values:
0 = Question mark on error
1 = Try alternate child on error
2 = Force new sub-ID on error
Column F - Text attribute name. If you wish to limit the replacement to a single text
attribute (see page 345) enter the attribute name here.
Selection Code
This number, used in the TXT function, defines the categories of text that will be
included in the replacement. It consists of a number between 1 and 4095. Examples:
4_F1 means search for device ID F1
2048_X1:100 means search for the terminal block X1:100
You can combine multiple categories into a single code number by adding two or
more codes and using that value. Example:
96_Stop means search Symbol text and Free texts for “Stop.” (32+64=96)
658
Project API Builder
The following are the individual codes:

1 Installation
2 Location
4 Device ID
8 Part number
16 Connection Point
32 Symbol text
64 Free texts
128 Potential number
256 Logical field texts
512 Title block texts
1024 Cable texts
2048 Terminal blocks
4095 All information that can be found in the project
SPARE - Reset the TXT function
When you use the TXT function following the MAC function, the TXT function will
only apply to the last macro that was placed. By putting the SPARE function in the list
of functions, the TXT function will be reset so that it applies to the entire project.
659
Project API Builder
SYM - Place Symbol
With this function, you can place a symbol in a drawing.
Column B contains the function code SYM.

Column C - Symbol name
Column D - Family name
Column E - Symbol insertion point X coordinate
Column F - Symbol insertion point Y coordinate
Column G - Symbol insertion point Z coordinate
Column H - Symbol scale. Scale values allow the symbol to be reduced (0.5 for half
size) or enlarged (2 for double size).
Column I - Symbol rotation value.
Column J - Mirror symbol
0 = No mirror
1 = Mirror on X axis
2 = Mirror on Y axis
Column K - Auto ID assignment
0 = Yes - assign device ID automatically using the project’s default format.
1 = No
660
Project API Builder
LINE - Draw Wire
Use this function to draw a wire in a drawing.
Column B contains the function code LINE.

Column C - Drawing mode
Column D - Wire X1 coordinate
Column E - Wire Y1 coordinate
Column F - Wire X2 coordinate
Column G - Wire Y2 coordinate
Column H - Wire color (on the drawing page)
Column I - Line style
661
Project API Builder
Running the Project API Builder

To run the Project API Builder, use the following procedure.
1. Select the promis-e Output > Project API Builder function. The following
dialog will appear.
2. In the Instruction File field, enter or browse to the Excel instruction file.
3. (Optional) In the Log File field, enter or browse to the name of the log file. This
file logs the functions executed by the Project API Builder as it runs. If there are
problems you can examine the contents of the log file to see where the problems
occur. If you enter the name of a log file that does not exist it will be created. If
you enter or browse to the name of a log file that already exists, its contents will
be overwritten when you run the Project API Builder.
4. Select the OK button to run the Project API Builder.
662
Appendix A - Engineering Design Considerations
A Engineering Design Considerations
As you work, the software may display an Engineering Design Consideration dialog.
These dialogs call attention to conditions in your project that may cause errors or
other undesirable results. You then have an opportunity to take an appropriate action.
This section lists the various Engineering Design Consideration messages that you
may see. They are listed alphabetically.
All instances of this symbol in the selected family have already been used in this
project. Please select from the following choices:
You are attempting to assign this symbol to a family where all the available positions
have been filled. Your choices are:
1. Use the Search button to select a different family with more available
positions.
2. Use the Append button to add the new symbol to the family as an auxiliary
device.
3. Use the Cancel button to assign the symbol to a different device ID.
Are you sure you want to assign a wire number to a cable?

You are attempting to assign a wire number to the conductor of a cable. Select
Yes if you want to do this. Select No to cancel the wire number assignment.
Cannot create macro from a read only page.

You are attempting to create a macro on a page that is set for read only. You must
make the page writable before you can create a macro on this page.
663
Device family of the part number does not match the family you assigned.
The selected part number is associated with a family. You are attempting to
assign it to a symbol that is associated with a different family.
Device ID _____ already exists on page _____ line _____. Do you want to
duplicate it?
Using the same device ID for two different symbols could be a mistake. Select
Yes if you wish to use the same device ID again for the current symbol. Select
No if you wish to use a different device ID.
Do you want to automatically exchange the symbols in the original family with
the ones in the new family.
Select Yes if you wish the software to transfer the symbols in the current family
to positions in the new family. Select No if you wish to manually select where
the symbols should go in the new family using the Exchange Family dialog.
Do you want to delete all occurrences of this wire number throughout the
project?
The selected wire number exists elsewhere in the project, for example through a
wirelink connection.
Do you want to update all related symbols that share this Device ID?
There are other symbols with this device ID. Select Yes if you wish to make the
same change to all of them. Select No if you only wish to apply the change to the
symbol you selected.
If you change this setting, all branches of wire on this potential will be changed
to the same wire properties. Are you sure you want to do this?
The wire has more branches than the one selected. Select Yes to assign this
property to all branches of the wire. Select No to cancel the property change.
“_____” is reserved.
This layer is required by the software.
664
Layer “_____” contains wires. Deleting this layer will cause these wires to be
moved to a general layer. Are you sure you wish to do this?
If you delete this layer the wires it contains will be moved to a different layer.
Select Yes to delete the layer. Select No to cancel the deletion.
Note: “_____” could not be exchanged to the new family. It will remain in the
original family.
The software could not automatically find a position for the specified symbol in
the new family.
Part Number _____ does not exist in parts database.
You cannot navigate to a part number that is not in the parts database.
Please be aware that you are trying to connect a drawing line to a wire.
Drawings can have two types of lines: wires and drawing lines. Drawing lines
are simple graphic lines with no logical properties. Wires allow the software to
recognize the connections between symbols and perform other functions such as
automatic wire numbering. Use the functions in the Wiring menu to create wires.
Some Wire Link IDs may need to be renamed since you have now changed the
potential over a terminal setting. The connection information needs to be
rebuilt. This could take a few minutes.
Changing the potential over terminal setting can affect wire link IDs, requiring
project connection information to be rebuilt.
Terminal number already exists. Please specify a different terminal number.
The terminal you entered already exists. You cannot define a duplicate terminal
number in the Force Routing Manager.
Terminal number _____ already exists on page _____, line _____. Do you want to
duplicate the terminal number?
The terminal you are placing has already been assigned to another terminal.
Select Yes to duplicate the terminal number on the terminal you are currently
placing. Select No to cancel assigning this terminal number.
Terminal number _____ already exists on page _____, line _____. You cannot
include duplicate terminal numbers in a family.
The terminal you are placing belongs to a family. The terminal number you are
assigning has already been used on the indicated page.
665
Terminals with the same device ID were found vertically. Do you wish to update
them all?
Select Yes if you wish to apply this change to all terminals with the same device
ID. Select No if you only wish to affect the selected terminal(s).
The command cannot apply to all selected symbols.

You are attempting to perform a function that is not appropriate for one or more
of the symbols that you selected.
The length you have entered exceeds the maximum length defined for this part
number.
The parts database record for this part includes a (maximum) length value. You
have entered a value that exceeds this length. Enter a shorter length or select a
part number with a greater maximum length.
The part number you have selected does not match the existing family. Are you
sure you want to do this?
The parts database data for this part number indicates that it is associated with a
different device family than the family currently assigned to the selected symbol.
Select Yes to assign the part anyway. Select No to cancel the part number
assignment.
The software is attempting to mend two wires together that have different wire
properties. You can choose to leave a gap between the wires or mend the wires
together. If you choose to mend the wires you must select which set of wire
properties you want the new wire to have.
A device has been removed that separated two wires with different wire numbers
or other properties. You can choose to leave a gap between the wires or mend
them together. If you choose to mend them together, select the wire whose
properties you wish to keep on the new, combined wire.
The symbol you are trying to place is not compatible with the _____ drawing
mode that you are currently in. You must switch into the correct mode before
placing this symbol or place a different symbol that matches this drawing mode.
The software is placed in different drawing modes to create different types of
drawings. See page 196 for more information.
666
The wire number(s) in the macro you are placing has already been used in the
project. Please choose from the following options:
The wires in the macro you are placing have wire numbers assigned that are
already used elsewhere in your project. You can choose to have the software
automatically assign new wire numbers to the macro or simply delete the wire
numbers from the macro.
There is already a symbol at position (_____).

The function you are using will place a symbol where another already exists.
Only one symbol can occupy a given position in the drawing.
There is already a symbol at this position; you cannot insert another symbol
here.
Only one symbol can occupy a given position in the drawing.
There is no active project to perform navigation.

No project is currently active. Open a page in the project where you wish to
navigate to make that project active.
This command is protected by command protection. You do not have permission

to use this function.
The command protection mode allows functions to be restricted. Users are
categorized into a number of levels or “roles.” A different combination of
functions is allowed or not allowed for each role. Your current role does not
allow the selected function. See page 418.
This device ID already has another part number assigned to it. Please choose
from the following options.
This message occurs when you have two symbols with different device IDs and
different part numbers assigned and then you change one device ID so that the two
symbols now have the same ID. You now have two part numbers associated with the
same ID. Your choices are:
1. Select the Replace button to replace the part number originally assigned to the
device ID with the new one.
2. Select the Append button to append the new part number to the device along
with the original part number.
3. Select the Discard button to discard the new part number and keep the original
part number.
667
This part number specifies a symbol name that does not match the symbol
already used in the project. Are you sure you want to append this part number
to this device ID.
The selected part number is associated in the parts database with a different
symbol than the one to which you are currently assigning it.
This symbol does not belong to the selected family. Please select from the
following choices:
You are attempting to assign a symbol to a family when that symbol is not
included in the family’s definition. Your choices are:
1. Use the Search button to select a different family that includes the new
symbol.
2. Use the Append button to add the new symbol to the family as an auxiliary
device.
3. Use the Cancel button to assign the symbol to a different device ID.
Unable to update the existing family definition in this project because the new
family definition does not contain the currently used symbol. You must change
the family or the symbol to correct the problem.
This message can occur when you edit a family definition that is currently used
in the project and remove a symbol from the family definition that is currently
used in the project with that family.
Wire number _____ already exists on page _____, line _____. Please select a
different wire number.
Duplicate wire numbers are not allowed. Enter a different wire number that is
not already in use.
Wire number _____ already exists on page _____, line _____. The wire number
you are pasting will be deleted to resolve the problem.
Duplicate wire numbers are not allowed. This wire number will be deleted from
the content you are pasting. You can assign a new wire number to the copied
wire.
You are trying to connect wires that have different wire layers. Please select
which wire layer you wish to use for these wires.
You are connecting wires that exist on different wire layers. Choose which layer
you wish the wires to use.
668
You cannot assign a part number that calls out a different family.
The part number you are attempting to assign is associated with a different
device family than the family to which the selected symbol belongs.
You cannot assign a wire number to a wire that is not connected at both ends.
One end of the wire is not connected to anything. Connect it to a device or to
another wire.
You cannot assign a wire number to a wire that is not connected to a device.
The selected wire is not connect to any devices. Place devices on the wire first or
connect it to existing devices in the drawing.
You cannot insert balloon along with a symbol until part number is specified.
Select a part number for this symbol before you assign a balloon.
You cannot specify part number which calls out family without definition of
symbol “_____”.
The selected part number is associated with a family. You are attempting to
assign it to a symbol that is not included in this family definition.
You have changed a part number that was related to one or more symbols that
have already been placed in the project. Please indicate whether or not you wish
to maintain the link between these symbols for each drawing mode shown below.
A symbol in one drawing mode (such as schematic mode) can be related to a
symbol in another drawing mode (such as panel layout) because they have the
same device ID (i.e., they represent the same device). If you change the part
number assigned to the device ID in one drawing mode, the software will prompt
you with this dialog to ask if you wish the symbols in the other drawing modes
to receive the new part number assignment also. For each drawing mode, select
in the Link column whether you wish to Maintain or Unlink the relation between
the symbols. Where you select Maintain, that mode will receive the new part
assignment. Where you select Unlink, that mode will not receive the new part
assignment, in which case a “?” will be appended to the device ID in that mode.
You have drawn a wire in a diagonal direction. The software will not break this
wire if you place a symbol on this diagonal wire segment and it will not recognize
it as a valid connection.
In order for a symbol to connect properly to a wire, the wire segment must be
horizontal or vertical.
669
You have no database connection, please go to the setup dialog and configure the
project database connection.
Your software does not specify a database type. Use the Configure > Setup
function and make settings in the Project Database area.
670
Appendix B - Wiring Rules XML File
B Wiring Rules XML File
This appendix describes the contents of the wiring rules file and how to edit the
contents for your own application. The file is used to set rules for panel-to-panel
connections when generating the shortest distance routing information. The file is
used with the Wiring Rules method for shortest distance, not the Standard method.
See page 594 for more information.
Structure of Wiring Rules File

The wiring rules file is an XML file that is structured as shown below:
Here is a generic outline of the structure:
Version Header Line
Name of Rule Set1
Rule1
Rule2, etc.
Direct wire exceptions
Rule1
Rule2, etc.
End of direct wire exceptions
WireSequencing
Enclosure1
Enclosure2
End of WireSequencing
Terminal Designations
Designation1
Designation2
End of Terminal Designations
End of Rule Set1
671
Here is a specific example of a wiring rules file, ExampleWiringRules.xml (which you

can find in the folder where the Shortest Distance plug-in is installed):
- <WiringRules version="2">

- <WiringRule description="Low Voltage" noSSTerminals="next">
<Enclosure from="DOOR" to="LEFTPANEL" location="@SameSection@" rule="L" fromTermSide="I-E" />
<Enclosure from="DOOR" to="BACKPANEL" location="@SameSection@" rule="L" fromTermSide="I-E" />
<Enclosure from="DOOR" to="RIGHTPANEL" location="@SameSection@" rule="L" fromTermSide="I-E" />
<Enclosure from="LEFTPANEL" to="BACKPANEL" location="@SameSection@" rule="L" fromTermSide="I-E" />
<Enclosure from="LEFTPANEL" to="RIGHTPANEL" location="@SameSection@" rule="L" fromTermSide="I-E" />
<Enclosure from="BACKPANEL" to="RIGHTPANEL" location="@SameSection@" rule="R" fromTermSide="I-E" />
<Enclosure from="*" to="*" location="@DifferentSection@" rule="T" fromTermSide="I-E" />

- <DirectWire>
</DirectWire>

- <WireSequencing>
- <WinthinSection order="listed">
<Enclosure>DOOR</Enclosure>
<Enclosure>LEFTPANEL</Enclosure>
<Enclosure>BACKPANEL</Enclosure>
<Enclosure>RIGHTPANEL</Enclosure>
</WinthinSection>
<BetweenSections order="sequential" />
</WireSequencing>

- <TerminalDesignations>
<TerminalDesignation terminal="L" enclosure="LEFTPANEL" />
<TerminalDesignation terminal="R" enclosure="RIGHTPANEL" />
<TerminalDesignation terminal="T" enclosure="TOP" />
</TerminalDesignations>
</WiringRule>
</WiringRules>
The rules file can be edited with an XML editor. A number of XML editors are
available online including Cooktop and XMLSpy®.
672
How to define a new rule set

You can create a new wiring rule set for a particular product line by defining a new
node in the XML File such as this:
<WiringRule description="Low Voltage">
The entry in quotes is the name of the rule set, which will appear in the Use Wiring
Rules for dropdown list in the Shortest Distance dialog.
Define all your rules below this entry in the XML file. When you have finished
entering your rules you will end the rule set by entering this line:
</WiringRule>
This marks the end of this particular rule set. All your rules for this product line
should appear between the two lines.
Defining Panels
In order for the wiring rules to work you must define names for your different panels
that will be used when creating the wiring rules. The panel names need to be entered
on your enclosure layout symbols using the PanelName attribute. You will then refer
to those names in the wiring rules file.
673
Defining Available Terminals For Wiring

If you do not show certain terminals in your schematics that are actually a part of the
circuit you must declare those terminals in the wiring rule file and create a rule for
them. You must create the terminal layout symbols that include the attribute
SDWReservedTerminal with an assigned value of SDW. Only terminals with SDW
assigned to this attribute will be assigned automatically by the Shortest Distance
program. Then in the wiring rule file you must create a section under your rule set
where you declare your terminals. Here is an example:
- <TerminalDesignations>
<TerminalDesignation terminal="L" enclosure="LEFTPANEL" />
<TerminalDesignation terminal="R" enclosure="RIGHTPANEL" />
<TerminalDesignation terminal="T" enclosure="TOP" />
</TerminalDesignations>
You begin the section with the <TerminalDesignations> heading and end it with
</TerminalDesignations>.
terminal="Terminal Designation" (This can be any letter designation that you want
to use to represent a terminal located in the enclosure)
enclosure="Name of the panel that the terminal is located in" (The enclosure
value should be the name of the panel where the terminal is located.)
Optional commands for plugs:

maxConnections=1 (This designates a plug rather than a terminal.)
Example:
<TerminalDesignation terminal="LEFT_P" enclosure="LEFT" maxConnection="1" />
match = “match_type:group_name=regular_expression”
(match_type=”DeviceID”, which means the program should use an expression named
“regular_expression” to interpret the device ID.)
Example:
<TerminalDesignation terminal="H_P" enclosure="HORIZONTAL_HARNESS"
maxConnection="1" match="DeviceID:P=^P.*"/>
(Here “P” is the group name which matches any plug where the device ID begins with
the letter P.) One possible use for this would be to ensure that two plugs always
connect male to female based on device ID.
674
Defining Rules
You are now ready to define your wiring rules. You must define a rule for every
possible connection that requires the program to wire to a terminal that may not be
shown in the schematic.
Here is an example rule:
<Enclosure from="DOOR" to="LEFTPANEL" location="@SameSection@" rule="L" fromTermSide="I-E" />
Rule Parameters
Here is a definition of each parameter in the above rule:
from - The name of the panel that you are wiring from.
to - The name of the panel that you are wiring to.
location - This parameter takes four possible values:
@SameSection@: Enter this if the two panels are located in the same section.
@DifferentSection@: Enter this if the two panels are in different sections.
@SameCompartment@: Enter this if the two panels are located in the same
compartment.
@DifferentCompartment@: Enter this if the two panels are located in different
compartments.
rule - The rule is used to define which terminals the program should wire to. Use the
terminal designations defined earlier to create the rule. You can define the rule that
you need by using the appropriate syntax. The program recognizes the following
operator characters:
Operator Description
, (comma) Used as a delimiter to separate alternative terminals
that can be used if the first terminal designation is not
available. Example: T,R
- (dash) Used to indicate a connection between two different
terminal designations on the same side (either the
“from” or “to” side). Example: T-R
: (colon) Used to separate terminal designations on the “from”
side of the connection from the terminal designations
on the “to” side.
675
Example rules:
Wire to one terminal on the “from” side designated as T:
Rule="T:"
Wire to one terminal on the “to” side:
Rule=":T"
Wire to two different terminals designated as C and T in different sections:
Rule="C:T"
Wire to two terminals in the “from” side and to two terminals on the “to” side:
Rule="C-T:C-T"
Note: You can use combinations of operators to define more complicated rules than the
examples above.
fromTermSide - In this parameter you specify which sides of the terminal should be
wired to (Internal vs. External). Enter an "I" for internal and an "E" for external,
which represent the left and right sides of the terminal, respectively. Additional
operators can be used to handle cases where you wire to both sides of a terminal and/
or wire between multiple terminals. Here are some examples and their meanings:
Value Meaning
I Single terminal with both connections on the internal
side.
E Single terminal with both connections on the external
side.
I-E The wire coming into the terminal connects to the
internal side and the wire going out connects to the
external side.
I,E When you have more than one terminal connected
together you can separate them with a comma. In this
case it wires into and out of the first terminal on the
internal side and into and out of the second terminal
on the external side.
Note: You can combine the different examples to handle other situations.
toTermSide - This parameter accepts the same syntax as the fromTermSide
parameter. You only need to enter a value for this parameter if there is a second
terminal in a different section on the destination side that requires a terminal. This is
commonly the case when going from one section to another.
group - This parameter is used to group connections on a plug. If two rules use the
same group name, the software will allow them to wire to the same plug. If no group
name parameter is specified, the software will assume all rules to have the same
group name.
676
Example:
<Enclosure from="*" to="*" location="@DifferentSection@" rule="H_P:H_C"
fromTermSide="E-I" toTermSide="I-E" group="cab2-A"/>
In the following example, group P is defined as a horizontal harness (H_P), and group
C as a horizontal harness (H_C). A match is done to find device IDs that start with
“P” and these are in group P.
Example:
<Enclosure from="*" to="*" location="@DifferentSection@" rule="H_P:H_C"
fromTermSide="E-I" toTermSide="I-E" group="H_P=P, H_C=C"/>
(and under TerminalDesignations)
<TerminalDesignation terminal="H_P" enclosure="HORIZONTAL_HARNESS"
maxConnection="1" match="DeviceID:P=^P.*"/>
677
Specifying Direct Wire Connections

Any connections between panels that do not have a defined rule will automatically be
directly routed from the device in the first panel to the device in the second panel.
In some cases, however, you might have a rule defined to wire to terminals not shown
in the schematic that you may want to override for certain wires. For example, large
gauge wires will often need to be wired direct since the terminals may not be able to
handle the wires. You may also have certain cables that you want wired direct. You
can declare these exceptions in your wiring rule file by creating a new section under
your wire rule set:
<DirectWire>
<PartNo partNo="8719" rule="D" />
</DirectWire>
In the above example you can enter the gauges that should be routed direct (#2) and
enter "D" as the rule to force it to direct wire these devices. You can also enter a cable
part number (8719) and use the same rule.
Shipping Splits
Rules for using Shipping Splits:
1. A rule in the following format must exist. Otherwise the program will not add
any shipping split terminals.
<Enclosure from="*" to="*" location="@ShippingSplit@" rule="T" ... />
2. Attribute "rule" in the above rule specifies the terminals will be used as first
choice. If no such terminals are available, the code will look for the attribute
“noSSTerminals” of the WiringRule element (the parent node).
The “noSSTerminals” attribute can be
A. "next" : the code will look at the next section of the same terminal type.
B. other terminal type: in this case the format is the same as the rule attribute,
which makes the code use a different type(s) of spare terminal.
3. If “noSSTerminals” is empty and both sections have no available spare
terminals, then no shipping split will be added.
4. Neither the attribute "rule" nor the attribute “noSSTerminals” adds spare
terminals to the connection. The code only inserts an empty panel to the panel
list and marks the panel type as "@shippingSplit@".
Other rules like from="*" to="@ShippingSplit@" and from="@ShippingSplit@" to
= "*" should follow. ("*" can be explicitly specified as a different panel type. And
these rules will add spare terminals to the connection according to the "rule" attribute
specified.
678
Let's look at an example to illustrate how the program handles shipping splits.
Suppose we have a connection from panels 1:A to 2:A, and the shipping split should
use T terminals.
To start with, we have panel 1:A and 2:A sorted in order.
If we specifiy
<Enclosure from="*" to="*" rule="T:" fromTermSide=""
toTermSide=""location="@ShippingSplit@"/>
And a spare terminal in T panel is available, now we have
1:A -> 1:@ShippingSplit@ -> 2A.
Then the code passes the process for handling generic spare terminals. In this process
the program finds that there is a connection from 1:A to 1:@ShippingSplit@. It looks
for the rule from="A" to="@ShippingSplit@" location="@SameSection@" and adds
a terminal specified by this rule. If this rule is not found, it looks from="*"
to="@ShippingSplit" ...
If the user’s requirement is that if T terminal is not available in the first stack then use
T terminals in the next stack, we need to specify
noSSTerminals="next" or noSSTerminals=":T"
Now we have panels as 1:A -> 2:@ShippingSplit@ -> 2:A.
Then either
From="*" to="@ShippingSplit@" location="@DifferentStack@" rule=":T"
or
From="@ShippingSplit@" to="*" location="@SameStack@" rule="T"
will work for this situation.
In short, the program adds a new panel type @ShippingSplit@ for handling shipping
splits. Rules for how to handle connections to/from panels typed @ShippingSplit@
need to be added.
679
Section and Compartment ID Format in EctRway.xml

When you create layout diagrams for the wiring rules version of the Shortest Distance
Routing function, you use special layout symbols for each panel. These symbols must
be given a device ID which is used by the program to identify the section and
compartment to which the panel belongs. For example, the installation name of a
panel symbol can represent the name of the section (unit, stack). The location name
could represent a compartment within a section, if your designs make use of
compartments.
1 2 3
Sections Use IDPattern1

(Units, Stacks) in EctRway.xml
1 2 3
A A A
Sections Use IDPattern2
with Compartments B B B in EctRway.xml
C C C
To set how the how the device ID of your panel symbols corresponds to your naming
convention for sections and compartments, use the Wiring Rules Configuration dialog
(see page 597). The settings made here are stored in EctRway.xml located in the
Shortest Distance directory of the current project.
In the parameters section of the EctRway.xml file, there re entries using the
<IDPattern> tag as shown in the following example.


<IDPattern1>([0-9]*)\+</IDPattern1>
the Compartment Name (leave blank if not used) -->
<IDPattern2 />
the Panel Name (leave blank if not used) -->
<IDPattern3 />
680
The IDPattern tags set a “regular expression” using VBScript and ASP.NET syntax.
The regular expression defines an pattern that is then compared to a string, in this case
a complete device ID including installation and location, for example
=installation1+location2-pb123.
Use IDPattern1 to define part of the device ID as the name of the section (unit,
stack). In the preceeding example, the pattern looks for any integer in the device ID
between the = character and the + character, in other words, the installation part of the
complete device ID.
Use IDPattern2 if you are using compartments within sections. This tag will define
the part of the device ID that will be used for the compartment name. In the
preceeding example this tag has been left empty, therefore compartments will not be
used.
Use IDPattern3 if you wish to specify part of the device ID as a name for the panel
symbol. Use of this tag is optional because if you are using the PanelName attribute
on the panel symbols the panel name will be provided from there. In the preceeding
example this tag has been left empty, therefore the panel name must come from the
layout symbol PanelName attribute.
Regular Expression Syntax
There are several special metacharacters and sequences to allow you to do complex
pattern matching, including the following:
^ Stands for the beginning of a string , so "^i" will match "is" but not
"mi".
$ Indicates a match at the end of a string, so "$i" will match "mi" but not
"is".
* Matches the preceding character zero or more times, so the regular
expression "fo*" matches both "f" and "foo". "+" matches the preceding
character one or more times, so "fo+" matches "foo" but not "f". The
question mark ("?") matches the preceding character zero or just one
time, meaning "a?ve?" matches the "ve" in "never".
. The period (".") matches any single character except the newline
character, so "a.b" matches "aab" and "a3b", but not "ab". The bar "|" is
used for alternative matching, as in "a|b", which will match either "a" or
"b".
{} The expression "{n}" matches against the target string exactly n times.
For example, "e{2}" will match "feed" but not "fed". The expression
"{n,m}" will match against the target string at least n times but not more
than m times. "o{1,3}" will match all the o’s in "food" or "sod", but will
only match the first three o’s in "soooooie".
[] Brackets are used to express character and digit sets and ranges. For
example, the expression "[abcd]" will match any of the enclosed
characters in the target string. The whole lower-case alphabet can be
681
expressed using "[a-z]". To include both upper- and lower-case letters in

the regular expression, write the expression like this: "[a-zA-Z]". To
search for digits in a string, use "[0-9]".
Negative character and digit sets and ranges can also be expressed. "[^abc]" will
match any characters not enclosed in brackets. You can also write an expression for a
negative range, such as "[^m-q]". Note: in this case the “^” character is inside the
brackets, so it does not mean “the beginning of a string.”
682
Appendix C - ProjectWise Plug-in
C ProjectWise Plug-in
The promis•e ProjectWise plug-in is a standard module in promis•e that can be used
for the document management of promis•e projects. The module allows management
of the project as a whole, and “publishes” individual drawing files. The tool depends
on the promis•e backup restore function to create a project PRJ file. The PRJ file is a
container for all of the individual drawings of a project along with an extract of the
entire set of project database entries. This allows an entire project to be restored with
all of the content in the state that existed at the time the project was backed up and to
use symbols and parts database records that were used in the original project.
The document management functionality is provided by ProjectWise software from
Bentley Systems, which must be purchased and installed separately.
The project operations supported with ProjectWise include:
• Check in project
• Copy in project
• Check out project
• Copy out project
• Undo project checkout
In addition to the project-based function, the ProjectWise plug-in includes an export
of all project DGNs or DWGs at the time the project is placed into ProjectWise. These
drawings are no longer used by promis•e after entry into ProjectWise but they may be
used within ProjectWise for viewing or plotting. The promis•e page descriptions are
exported to ProjectWise with the drawings.
The promis•e software uses a project backup method because a normal working
environment for promis•e has multiple users sharing project data simultaneously.
Information is shared in the database and across multiple drawings. Drawing data on
one drawing can be edited from another drawing or edited directly in the project
database with the Data Editor. Keeping all of the drawings available on the network
facilitates this type of setup. promis•e internally keeps track of the entities in all of
the drawings and stops users from simultaneously editing the same device or the same
drawing.
683
Using ProjectWise with promis•e

See the Setup section later in this chapter for information on how your ProjectWise
software should be configured to operate with promis•e. Once this is done, you use
promis•e as follows:
Logging in
When promis•e is started, a ProjectWise login dialog will appear that prompts the
user for the data source, their user name and password.
Creating new projects
After logging in, access to the ProjectWise functionality is through the promis•e
Project Manager. The ProjectWise options are selected by right-clicking on the
folders and projects in the tree view.
Creating promis•e projects and drawings is currently only done through the promis•e
Project Manager. You cannot create projects in ProjectWise. Right-clicking on a
folder will allow a new project to be created. The project may be checked into
ProjectWise at a later time.
684
Checking in a project
To check in a project, right click on the project in the tree view of the Project
Manager. Select Check In from the pop-up menu.
The project backup file will be created with all of the project files and project
database entries, so that the project can be completely restored at a later date. A dialog
will allow the user to select where the backup should be placed. Just select OK to
select the default folder.
685
The ProjectWise Explorer can be opened to see that the project has been placed in
ProjectWise and the promis•e project descriptions have been transferred to
ProjectWise.
The individual drawing files are also checked in. These drawing files are for read-
only purposes. They drawings with the required database links to be used in a
working promis•e project have been compressed into the ".PRJ" file with the project
database.
If you have chosen to leave a copy of the project on your system you will receive a
message that the drawings are now available in a read only mode for viewing or
copying from.
686
Checking out a project
Checking a project out from ProjectWise can be done from either the ProjectWise
Explorer or the promis•e Project Manager. To check out the project from the
ProjectWise Explorer, select the project and the promis•e Restore Project dialog will
display and allow the user to restore the project. This will place all of the working
drawings and the associated database records back on the user’s system. In a multi-
user environment it is recommended the project be restored to a shared network
location and the project should remain checked out until the revisions have been
completed.
Project checkout can also be done directly from the promis•e Project Manager
environment, by right-clicking on the read only copy of the project or the main
project folder and selecting Check Out from the pop-up menu.
A dialog will allow you to search ProjectWise for the promis•e project.
687
Undo Project Check Out
If a project is checked out and changes are made but the user does not want to keep
the changes, the promis•e Project Manager right-click menu can be used to Undo
Check Out. This makes the copy that still exists in ProjectWise the checked-in
version and all of the user's changes are not saved.
Copy In
The user may want to keep their project checked out for further changes but update
the ProjectWise version for viewing or saving their work. The Copy In right-click
option saves their work to ProjectWise while leaving the project checked out to them.
Copy Out
The user may want to base a new project on an existing one or they may want to
update their local read only version. The Copy Out right-click command in the
promis•e Project Manager will place a copy of the project in the specified folder but
leave the master version of the project checked in to ProjectWise.
Setup
The following steps must be followed by the ProjectWise administrator to set up an
environment in ProjectWise for promis•e to use. ProjectWise itself should already be
set up and working with a datasource.
1. Assign promis•e environment.

In the folder [promis-e program folder] >Plugins> DMSManager, there is an xml
file named DMSManager.dll.xml. In this xml file there are two init attributes in
node “INIT”. The first is "Environment" and the second is "ProjectTypes". The
default value for both is "Electrical". This name must match the environment
name used in ProjectWise. The following is a copy of the file with the default
variable values in bold.
<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8" ?>
<root>
<DMS Name="ProjectWise" ProgID="PromiseDocManager.PWDocManager.1"
status="current" DefaultLocPathID="130" DefaultLocPath="promisoe"
RemPrjWhenCheckIn="False" DefaultInitVersion="1"
RegReq="Software\Bentley\ProjectWise Explorer\08.11"
DllDependence="bin\PWDocMDLL.dll">
<INIT Environment="Electrical" ProjectTypes="Electrical" />
</DMS>
</root>
688
2. Modify the promis•e AAM file in the promis•e plug-ins folder.

The file [promis-e program folder] >Plugins> DMSManager/promisoe.AAM
contains the default page attributes that will be exported from the promis•e page
information to ProjectWise. At the end, it has the default environment name of
"Electrical". See your ProjectWise documentation for the format of this file if
the defaults are not adequate. The document attributes entered in this file are the
promis•e Page Descriptions entered in Project Manager: Tools > Options >
Default Project Properties > Page Descriptions.
The user can add additional page description in promis•e and add them to the AAM
file or directly in the ProjectWise. (This information can also be modified in
ProjectWise Administrator after the default file is imported.)
Note that all of the document attributes are string types with lengths of 255
characters.
Also note that ProjectWise does not support the space character ' ' in the attribute
names. Any spaces in your promis•e attribute names will have to be replaced with an
underscore '_'.
689
3. Import the environment into ProjectWise

Open your ProjectWise Administrator Software. Select the datasource, database
and right click on "Environments". Select Import and browse to the AAM file in
the promis•e Plugins folder.
If required, the attributes can be further modified within ProjectWise by

selecting “Environments” and “Attributes”.
690
4. Create Project Type

Right click on Project Types and select New > Project Type. Follow the wizard
to create the “Electrical” project type.
5. Customize Project Type

Right click on the newly created “Electrical” project type and select Add
Properties to add the additional project descriptions that should be used in
ProjectWise.
This is a default list to add:
Name Description Data type Length

Description 10 Description 10 String 255
691

Job Number Job Number String 255
Project Description Project Description String 255
Revision Number Revision Number String 255
6. promis•e workstation setup
promis•e should be installed and running on the workstation. The Project
Manager will have a menu item for ProjectWise.
Select Options from the ProjectWise menu and fill in a default location for
storing the promis•e projects.
There is a toggle for removing the promis•e project files and database records
when a project is checked in. One of the benefits of promis•e is its internal
project management which allows users to easily copy sections from other
projects. To easily copy data from other projects it is best to leave the project on
the network and available to other users without having to first restore it from
ProjectWise. For long term archiving of projects that are not needed for
reference, this option should be turned on.
692
7. Viewing page variables in ProjectWise.

In promis•e the user can add many additional page descriptions to the defaults.
The new page descriptions are added through the promis•e Project Manager and
ProjectWise Administrator as already outlined. To create a custom view for these
descriptions, open the ProjectWise Explorer and select View > Manage Views.
Create a new view and with the “Electrical” environment. Select the page
descriptions to display from the left side and move them to the right side in the
order that they should display.
When viewing the drawings within ProjectWise select the new view name under
Document Properties to see the selected Page Descriptions exported from
promis•e.
At this point setup is complete.
693
694
Appendix D - Plant Exchange Plug-in
D Plant Exchange Plug-in
AutoPlant P&ID and other Bentley Plant products store information that is related to
the electrical components that will be used in the promis•e project. The Plant
Exchange plug-in will read the data for any electrical devices in the Plant database
and place these devices in the promis•e BOM Explorer (see page 142). Part numbers
can be assigned in Plant or in the BOM Explorer. Once part numbers are assigned, the
Insert by Device ID function can be used to place the symbols for the components
onto the promis•e drawings.
Plant Software Plant

Database
Tags
Attributes
Part Numbers
Plant
Exchange
Plug-in
promis-e Software BOM promis-e Drawings

Explorer Parts
Database
Attribute information can be edited on the drawings, in the promis•e Data Editor, or
in the BOM Explorer and be transferred back to the Plant database. The exchange of
attribute information with Plant is bi-directional through the Plant Exchange plug-in
and you have the ability to specify which data should be the master.
The Plant Exchange plug-in is installed with the promis•e software.
695
Importing Data from Plant
Preliminary setup: In order for the attributes to carry over from the Plant database,
you must use the System Options > Symbol Text function in promis•e to select the
attributes you plan to use. Select the Shared Value Over SubIDs checkbox for each
attribute that you plan to use. You only need to do this once.
Select for each attribute you will import
696
To use the Plant Exchange plug-in to import data:
1. Open the promis•e project to which you wish to import the data.
2. Select the Manage > Plant Exchange function. The Plant Data Exchange
welcome dialog will appear.

3. In the next dialog, your first step is to select a Plant project from which to import
data.
Select the Open a Plant project button.
697
4. The Open Project dialog will appear, listing any Plant projects that the software
has found on your system.
You can filter the listed projects by unit type by making a selection in the
Projects of Units Type field. There are also buttons at the top of the dialog for
selecting a different project folder and changing the way the projects are
displayed.
Click on the desired project and select OK to continue.
698
5. The previous Plant Data Exchange dialog will reappear, displaying the name of
the project you selected.
In the Import Device Types area of this dialog, select checkboxes for the types of
component parts data that you wish to import.
699
6. The device mapping dialog will appear. In this dialog you define how the data
fields from the Plant database will correspond to promis•e attributes and also
how IDs will be handled.
A. In the Device Type field select the first Plant data type for which you wish to
do mapping.
B. In the Plant Field column, use the drop-down list to select the name of the
first Plant data field that you wish to map.
700
C. Then click in the corresponding Promis-e Attributes field and select the
name of the desired symbol attribute from the drop-down list.
Note: You should always map the KEYTAG plant field to the UniqueID promis-e
attribute. This value maintains the link between items in the Plant database and
items in the promis-e project and allows data to be exported back to the Plant
database.
D. Continue in this manner until you have mapped all the Plant fields that you
wish to import.
Note: You can also enter text inside quotes in the Plant Field column. This text string
will then be mapped to the selected promis-e attribute.
To remove a row from the mapping list, select that row and then select the
Delete button. Select the Delete All button to remove all the rows from the
mapping list.
E. Select the Save Mapping button to save your mapping for future work
sessions.
F. Select the Use Temporary ID checkbox if you wish the IDs that the items
receive in the promis•e BOM Explorer to be considered “temporary IDs.” A
temporary ID is an ID that is only used in the BOM Explorer; when you
place the item in a drawing, promis•e will assign a new ID based on the
project settings. If you do not select this checkbox, the ID that is imported to
the BOM Explorer will also be used in the drawing. The Plant tag may be
mapped to a promis•e symbol attribute. This will allow symbols and reports
to show both the promis•e and Plant tags.
701
G. In the Device Tag Format field, define a format for the IDs that will be
assigned to the imported items in the BOM Explorer. To do this, select from
the Plant field tags that are listed in the PlantTagFields list. When you
double-click on one of these tags, it will appear in the Device Tag Format
field. You must also select a delimiter character from the Delimiters list to
separate selected tags.
Note: You must make an entry in the Device Tag Format field in order for the software
to operate properly. Remember you can use the temporary ID option and change
the ID later when the symbol is placed.
H. If you are importing more than one type of device, select the next type in the
Device Type field and enter the desired mapping. Repeat as necessary. Use
the Save Mapping button to save.
I. Select the Next button to continue.
7. An import dialog will summarize the data types you have selected and indicate
how many records will be imported.
Select the Next button to execute the data exchange.
702
8. A dialog will appear indicating that the data exchange has finished.
Select OK to close the Plant Data Exchange dialog.
Using the Imported Data
BOM Explorer
The imported data can be viewed in the BOM Explorer (see page 142).
You will need to assign a part number from the promis•e parts database to each
imported item so that the software will know what symbol to use when you place the
item in a drawing.
If you do not yet know the final part numbers that will be used, you can create generic
parts records that consist of a descriptive part number such as “50HP-MOTOR” and
information on the correct symbols to use for this part. You can assign the generic part
number initially and change it later when the true part number is known.
You can also add or change attributes on the imported items in the BOM Explorer
(right-click on the ID and select Attribute from the pop-up), or you can do this when
you place the symbol.
703
Insert Symbol by Device ID
To place the imported items in a drawing, use the Design > Insert Symbol > Insert
Symbol By Device ID function.
A list of unplaced device IDs will appear from which you can select items and place
them in a drawing. See page 219.
When placing the symbol you can change the prompted device ID and symbol
attributes.
Synchronizing Data to Plant
If you have changed any of the imported data in promis•e or made changes in Plant
you can use the Plant Exchange function to export or synchronize this information
with the Plant database.
To use the Plant Exchange function to export data:
1. Open the promis•e project to which you wish to synchronize the data.
2. Select the Manage > Plant Exchange function. The Plant Data Exchange
welcome dialog will appear.
3. In the next dialog, first select a Plant project from which to synchronize data.
Select the Open a Plant project button.
704
4. The Open Project dialog will appear, listing any Plant projects that the software
has found on your system.
Click on the desired project and select OK to continue.

5. The previous Plant Data Exchange dialog will reappear, displaying the name of
the project you selected.
In the Import Device Types area of this dialog, select checkboxes for the types of
component parts data that you wish to import back into the Plant database.
705
6. The device mapping dialog will appear. Your existing mapping should be
displayed.
706
7. The Import dialog will appear. If the software finds imported records where the
data does not match the Plant database, it will indicate the number of records that
require “manual synchronization.”
707
8. The Data Synchronize dialog will appear. This dialog will list any data values
that differ between promis•e and the Plant database for a single device ID which
is displayed at the top of the dialog.
There are three radio buttons at the bottom of the dialog that determine which
values will be synchronized:
Select the Selected Attributes radio button if you only wish to synchronize
the attributes that you manually select (highlight) in the list. You must then
highlight the rows for the desired attributes.
Select the This Device radio button if you wish to synchronize all attributes
for the currently displayed device.
Select the All Devices radio button if you wish to synchronize all attributes
for all devices that have different values in the Plant database.
9. Select which value you wish to overwrite the other:
Select the Use promis-e button if you wish to write the value that is currently
in promis-e to the Plant database.
Select the Use Plant button if you wish to write the value that is currently in
the Plant database to promis•e.
708
10. If you did not previously select the All Devices option, you will be prompted for
the next device (if any) and you can again select the attributes to synchronize.
11. Select the Next button to complete the synchronization.
709
710
Index
Index
Numerics Automatically Assign Branch Label dialog
3 Phase function 204 591
3DBox Settings dialog 548 B
90 Degree Down function 206 Backup
90 Degree Up function 206 Catalog 326
A Project 115
Activation 16 Backup Project dialog 115
Active project 50 Balloon
Add Catalog Path dialog 411 Clear all 69
Add Category dialog 636 Create 551
Add Page Revision dialog 95 Delete 554
Add Parts Database dialog 414 Insert 551
Add Project Revision dialog 92 Modify 554
Add Record dialog 635 Move 554
Address File Project Settings 69
Create and edit 68 Base Revision dialog 92
Aerial View 177 Bill of Materials 465
Align Components 314 BOM 465
Align Wire Numbers 293 BOM Attribute dialog 149
Alternate symbols 401 BOM Explorer 142, 224
ANSI-IEEE standard 86, 408 Build dialog 414
API Builder 653 Build Expression dialog 346
Append Attribute dialog 346 Button Table Editor dialog 647
Appending devices to families 86, 231 C
Array dialog 343 Cable 254
Assign Connection Points dialog Assign to terminals 525
Wire Terminations 613 Assign wires to 254
Attribute List dialog 149 Cross Reference 103, 260
Attributes Labels 503
Assign in parts database 633 Manager 261
dialog 633 Cable Combo dialog 539
in BOM Explorer 149 Cable Manager 261
Symbol text 345 Cable Text
Automatic page save 161 Dialog box 258
Automatic Wire Number dialog 281
711
Index
Case sensitive Connection Points dialog 400

Device ID 75 Connection search priorities 276
Catalog 321 Continuous Wire 203
Create 412 Copy
Migrate from AutoCAD to MicroSta- Drawing elements 302
tion 137 Page 166
Restore 329 Project 63
Catalog Manager 321 Copy Page dialog 166
Catalog Path 321 Create
Catalog Paths 411 Field 262
Category Macro 385
Inside a Catalog 326 Schematic elements 321
Child Symbol 229 Symbol 333
Class Create Catalog dialog 412
Create or Edit 609 Create Macro dialog 386
Clean Screen 177 Cross Reference
Clear Cable 103
Page 174 Device 79
Clip Jumper 518 Position at parent and child symbols 81
Clip Jumper Prefix 102 Wire Link 266
Command Log 425 Custom AutoFilter dialog 296, 429
Command Protection 418
Commuter License 21
D
Compare Data Editor dialog 139
Families 233 Data Manager dialog 139
Symbols 240 Database
Compile Connection Information 464, 536 See also Parts Database
Complete Device ID 77 Date format 90
Component list macro 485 Decimal places 90
Conduit Default
Draw 560 Project Properties 71
Connection designations 508 Default Page Properties 71
Connection List Default Project Properties 71
Import Legacy 501 Default Wire Properties dialog 110
Connection Point 331 Define Target dialog 523
Designation 508, 510 Delete
Display/Hide 427 Drawing elements 302
Text 332 Project 66
712
Index
Delete Project Revision dialog 94 Diagonal wire connector 206

Delete Wire Numbers dialog 288 Diagonal Wire Orientation dialog 207
Design Considerations 43 Dialog
Device BOM Assign dialog 224 Language 423
Device Cross Reference 79 Dialogs
Device Cross Referencing dialog 80 Edit text 299
Device Family dialog 222 DIN Rail
Device Family. See also Family Draw 555
Device ID 331 Snap to 558
Adjust when moving 75 DIN Rail Properties dialog 557
Assignment 221 Direct Wiring 600, 678
Case sensitive 75 Display Formats 74
Complete 77 Display Languages 84
Device Tag 77 Display Settings 427
Duplicate 223, 264 Downloading 13
Format 74, 75, 76 Draw
Identifier 77 Ladder 207
Installation/Location display or hide 77 Wire
Nested 75 3 Phase 204
On Copied Pages 167 Continuous 203
On Moved Pages 172 Single 201
PLC Wired 76, 307 Wire Number
Prompt for 425 Manual 286
Renumber 306 Draw Ladder 207
Replace 306 Draw Panel Layout Accessories dialog 555
Separators 77 Drawing
Suppress 223 Naming Convention 86
Symbol 221 Drawing Configure dialog 453
Tag 331 Drawing Lines 197
Device ID Format dialog 76 Drawing Mode 159, 196
Device Labels 503 Create 300
Device Properties dialog 221 Edit 299
Device Tag 77, 339, 378 Manager 299
Replace 308 Drawing Naming Convention 86
Device Tag Format dialog 75 Drawing Set 47
Device Type. See also Family Descriptions 52
Device Usage Chart dialog 222 Re-assign Page 158
DExportToDWG dialog 164
713
Index
Duplicate Export to DWG 164

Terminal number 426 Expression Builder dialog 101
Duplicate Device ID 223 Extract Page Format dialog 184
DWG
Export page to 164
F
Naming Convention 86 Family 229
Appending devices to 86, 231
E Compare 233
ECTECAD 408 Create 234, 396
Edit Exchange 232
Components 316 in Catalog Manager 321
Text 250 Modify 404
Wire 210 Over-assignment 231
Edit Components 316 Update Family 233
Edit Page Revisions dialog 97 Family Description Edit dialog 398
Edit Part Number Quantity dialog 145 Family on the Fly
Edit Parts Database dialog 413 dialog 235
Edit Potential Group dialog 402 Family on the Fly dialog 234
Edit Prefix/Suffix dialog 283 Favorites dialog 55
Edit Project Revisions dialog 93 Favorites folder 54
Edit Role dialog 420 Field
Edit Text Format dialog 187, 190 Create 262
Edit Text Style dialog 99 Mixed device IDs in 264
Edit Wires 210 Field Parameters
Engineering Design Considerations 43, 663 Dialog Box 263
Reports 482 Filter
Erase Parts Database 637
Drawing elements 302 Project parts filter 72
Error check 482 Filtering dialog 72
Page 175 Find and Replace dialog 290
Error messages 663 Force Connection dialog 211
Evaluation period 16 Forced Routing Manager 491
Exchange Family dialog 232 Forcing Connections 499
Exit Point 581 Foreign Language Text 250
Export Functionality 26
Catalog 326
promis-e Publisher 437
Export Catalog dialog 327
714
Index
G Insert Symbol
Gauge Table Editor dialog 576 By Device ID 219
Generate Report dialog 457 By Name 215
Graph Setting dialog 489 By Part Number 217
Graphical Parts List 484 Insert Symbol dialog 215
Graphical Plan Insertion Point 331
Template assign 533 Display/Hide 427
Template Designer 537 Installation
Template path 411 Definition of 48
Variables 541 Descriptions 52
Graphical Plan Template Designer 531 Device ID display/hide 77
Graphical Terminal Plan 531 Installation (of software) 13
Grid Settings 70 Installation and Location 48
Group Settings dialog 548 Installation and Start-up 13
Grouping wires 601 Introduction 25
H J
Help Screens 41 Jumper 508
Hyperlink 243 Clip 518
On Part Number 244 Wire 519
On Symbol 243 K
I Komax Wire Cutting Machines 628
I/O Device ID 76, 307 L
I/O Text Definition dialog 226 Label
Identifiers 77 Wire Number 110
IEC standard 86, 408 Labels 503
Import Ladder
Legacy Project 118 Draw function 207
Page formats 126 Language
Symbol Catalog 120 In dialogs 423
Import Catalog dialog 329 Language Text 250
Import Legacy Connection List 501 Display on Drawing 84
Index Table Editor dialog 649 Edit Database 251
Insert Device dialog 494 Import legacy 129
Insert Hyperlink dialog 243 Path 410
Insert Macro dialog 245 Layers
Insert Spares dialog 522 Wire 108
715
Index
License Manual (instructions) 41

Activation 16 Markers 503
Check out 21 Menu
Commuter 21 Edit text 299
Line Menus 29
Adjusting Length 202 MicroStation 115
Line Number Migration dialog 118
Continuous 73 Migration Wizard 118
Include page number 73 Mirroring 228
Number of digits 73 Mode Create or Rename dialog 300
Regions 186 Mode Manager dialog 299
Line Settings dialog 211 Modes
Line Style 203, 211 Drawing 196
Lines vs. Wires 197 Modify
Link Index 269 Family 404
Location Function 169
Descriptions 52 Page 169
Log Project 65
Commands 425 Symbol 350
Logical box Modify Connection Point Text dialog 239
See Symbol On the Fly Modify dialog
Logical Line 197 Catalog Manager 324
Labels 281 Modify Page dialog 169
See also Wire More Properties dialog 284
Move
M Drawing elements 303
Macro Page 171
Component list 485 Move Page dialog 171
Create 385 Multi-line Text dialog 249
Insert 245 Multiple Placement
Title Block 387 Cable Conductors 255
Macro Settings dialog 247 Multiple placement of symbols 227
Manage Multi-polywire 200
Page MultiWire 199
Modify 169
Manual 28 N
Conventions 28 Navigation function 178
Function 286 New
716
Index
Page 157 Next Page 156

Project 61 Online 160, 169
New Class dialog 611 Open 155
New Page dialog 158 Previous Page 156
New Report Template dialog 467 Refresh 175
New/Edit dialog 559 Rename 170
New/Edit DIN Rail dialog 559 Save 161
New/Modify Family dialog 397 Save As 162
New/Rename Mode dialog 301 Save Automatic 161
Storage 154
O Update 175
Online Page 160, 169 Validate 175
Open Project dialog Page Format 159
Plant Exchange 698, 705 Create 183
Open Report Template dialog 467 Default 73
Options 407 Designer 183
Project 67 Import legacy 126
System 418 Modify 183
User 423 Path 411
Options dialog 418 Replace 313
Oracle 408 Page Format Designer 183
Overview 25 Page Macro
P Default 71
Page Page revisions 95
Automatic Save 161 Pan 177
Clear 174 Panduit Auto Size and Space dialog 572
Close 156 Panduit Auto Size Space 571
Copy 166 Panduit Data Editor 612
Default Properties 71 Panduit Easy-Mark 506
Export to DWG 164 Panduit Form dialog 643
Filename Format 86 Panduit Labels dialog 503
Filenames 154 Panduit Part Selection 642
Format 159, 183 Panduit Termination Editor 609
Management 151 Panduit Wire Containment Tools 560
Modify 169 Panduit Wire dialog 561
Move 171 Panduit Wire Terminations 608
New 157 Panduit Wire Terminations dialog 619
Panel Layout 543
717
Index
Create first 544 Command Protection 418

Create later 545 Paste Options dialog 426
Design functions 555 Paths
Menu 555 System 410
Symbol 375 PDF Configure dialog 453
Parent Symbol 229 Percent Spare field 631
Part Number 630 Phrase and Language Edit dialog 251
Assign 294 Pin plug connection rule 607
At child symbol 84 Pin-Plug Plan 507
Default for symbol 345 Plant Data Exchange dialog 697, 704
Display configuration 84 Plant Exchange Plug-in 695
Display/Hide 427 PLC
Duplication 265 Address in Device Tag 78
Position 84 Addressing 89
Quantity Delimiter Character 84 Addressing, Automatic 89
Replace 307 I/O Text 226
Text 332 Import File 88
URL 631 Parent symbol 351
Part Number Assignment dialog (Panduit Settings 88
wire path) 564 Text 88, 226
Part Number Modification dialog (Panduit) PLC Text 226
574 PLC Wired Device ID 76, 307
Parts Database 410, 629 PLC Wired Terminal ID 76, 307
Add Category 635 Plot
Add record 635 Configuration 431
Compare with project 639 Current Page (AutoCAD) 431
Data fields 630 Current Page (MicroStation) 435
Default for project 72 Dialog Box 431
Editor 630 Layout Settings 433
Field names 640 Multiple Pages 429
Filter 637 Settings 433
Import legacy 130 Plot Pages dialog 429
Path 413 Plotting 429
Routing/Mounting Accessories 558 Plug-in Manager 428
Search 637 Polywire 199
Show Differences 639 Potential Group 342, 402
Parts Database Editor dialog 630 Primary Mode
Password Drawing Mode
718
Index
Primary 87 Project Manager 49

Programmable Logic Controller. See PLC Project Options
Project Path 411
Active 50 Project Preferences dialog
Backup 115 Panduit Wire Terminaltions 616
Copy 63 Project Profiles
Data Editor 139 Path 411
Database 408 Project Wise software 424
Default Folder 411 ProjectWise Plug-in 683
Default Properties 71 promis-e Publisher 437
Delete 66 Publisher
Description 65 Configuration file 443
Display Formats 74 Create Package 455
Favorites folder 54 External files 440
Find 58 File manager 439
Folder 411 Format 443
Grid Settings 70 Printers 452
Import Legacy Project 118, 131 Starting 438
Management 45
Manager 49
Q
Migration Wizard 118 Quantity-Delimiter 84
Modify 65 Quick Select dialog 291
New 61 R
Options 67 Raceway Properties Editor dialog 585
Organization 46 Real Time Pan
Parts filter 72 Function 177
Profiles 411 Rebuild Project Database 117
Rebuild Database 117 Record structure 640
Rename 64 Redraw 176
Restore 115 Refresh Page 175
Revision Control 91 Regen 176
Sample projects 43 Region Connection Editor dialog 583
Save As 60 Region Settings 90
Search 58 Regions 580
Project API Builder 653 Registration 16
Project Database
Path to 408
Project Description dialog 62
719
Index
Rename Options 462

Page 170 Output to file 459
Project 64 Pre-configured 465
Terminal 517 Template Designer 466
Terminals 518 Template path 411
Rename Category dialog 636 Text on Drawing 459, 481
Rename Page dialog 170 Wire Labels 503
Rename Project dialog 64 Re-sequence Wire Link dialog 274
Renumber Restore
Device ID 306 Catalog 329
Terminals 517 Restore Project dialog 116
Replace Revision Control 91
Device ID 306 dialog 95
Device Tag 308 Page revisions 95
Page Format 313 Revision List dialog 94
Part Number 307 Roles 418
Symbol 304 Rotate
Symbol Attributes 310 Symbol 228
Symbol Text 310 Routing/Mounting Accessories dialog 558
Text 308 Run Graphical Plan dialog 532
Replace Device ID dialog 306 Run Project Builder dialog 662
Replace Page Format dialog 313
Replace Part Number dialog 307
S
Replace Symbol Attributes dialog 310 Sample projects 43
Replace Symbol dialog 304 Save
Replace Text dialog 308 Page 161
Replace Title Block dialog 311 Save Project As dialog 60
Report Filters dialog 461 Scale
Report Options dialog 462 Symbol 228
Report Template dialog 468 Schematic Drawing Elements 195
Reports 457, 482 Search
Configuration file 463 Project 58
Custom 466 Search tool 180
Engineering Design Considerations Search (project) dialog 58
482 Search dialog 495
Filtering 461 Catalog Manager 324
Generate Reports 457 Search dialog (search tool) 180
Graphical Parts List 484 See Page Pending Status 59
720
Index
Select Classes and Types dialog 614 Database field 631

Select Device ID dialog 234 Tab 53
Select Legacy Data Files dialog 119 Spare terminal, shipping split connection
Select Page Format dialog 159 rule 603
Select Pages dialog 289 Speed Sort dialog 617
Select Pages dialog (reports) 463 SQL Server/MSDE 408
Select Part Number dialog Start Number dialog 517
While drawing 295 Starting the software 14
Wire Terminations 612 Startup Interface 424
Select Server 16 Stretch
Select Title Block dialog 312, 313 Wire 208
Select Wire Layer dialog 213 Suppress Device ID 223
Select Wire Link ID dialog 272 Symbol
Separators 77 Assign part number 294
Sequencing terminal connections 601 Catalog 321
Settings 407 Catalog Manager 321
Setup Configuration 408 Catalog Path 321, 411
Setup dialog 407 Create 333
Shipping split Device ID 221
Wiring rules version 678 Elements of 331
Shortest Distance Routing 579 in Catalog Manager 321
Guidelines and routiing rules 603 Insert by Device ID 219
Single wire connection 604 Insert by Name 215
Standard Method 580 Insert By Part Number 217
Terminal stacker feature 605 Insert in Drawing 214
Wiring Rules 671 Library 321
Wiring Rules Method 594 Mirroring 228
Shortest Distance Routing dialog 587, 596 Modify Existing Symbol 350
Show Differences dialog 639 Multiple Placement 227
Signal Cross Reference. See also Wire Link On the Fly 238
Single Panel Layout 375
Function 201 Place as group 548
Single Point Connection 496 Replace 304
Snap to Endpoint 348 Rotate 228
Sort Rotation (Automatic) 216
Terminals 516 Scale 228
Sorting (reports) dialog 460 Settings 228
Spare Parts Signal Cross Reference
721
Index
JIC 266 Sort 516

Text 332, 422 Spare 522
Update 240 Wire number on 283
Wizard 333 With Parent 398
Symbol Attributes Terminal and Pin-Plug Plan 507
Replace 310 Terminal jumper connection rule 607
Symbol Catalog Terminal Plan 507, 531
Create 412 Basic Steps 507
Path 411 Editing Functions 516
Symbol Libraries 321 Functions 511
Symbol On the Fly 238 Internal vs. External 508
Symbol Settings dialog 228 Overview 507
Symbol Text 332, 422 Terminal/Pin-Plug Manager
dialog 225 dialog 512
Replace 310 Termination Editor 609
Symbols Termination Editor dialog 610
Alternate 401 Text
System Options 418 Align 340
Path 411 Attributes 345
System Paths 410 Edit 250
System Settings 407 Entering 248
Language 250
T Multiline 249
Tag Mnemonic 77, 339, 378 Replace 308
Template Editor dialog 592 Settings 98
Terminal Single Line 248
Assign to cable 525 Text Align 340
Connection point designations 508 Text on Drawing (reports) 459, 481
Delimiter Character 102, 104 Text Window 40
Display connection designation 510 Three Phase Wire 204
Duplicate number prompt 426 Time
Editing Functions 516 Parts Database fields 632
Internal vs. External Connection 508 Time format 90
Move 518 Title Block
On Copied Pages 167 Create 387
On Moved Pages 172 Default 71
Rename 517, 518 Replace 311
Renumber 517 Variables 393
722
Index
Title Block Wizard 387 Connector type 106, 206

Tool Boxes 39 Containment 560
Toolbars 38 Continuous 203
Copy 210
U Crossing type 105
Units of Measure (Default) 86 Default Properties 110
Update Family dialog 233 Delete 210
Update Page function 175 Draw ladder 207
Update Symbol dialog 240 Edit 210
Update Wiring Diagram dialog 320 Edit properties 212
URL 631 Force Connection 211
User Guide 41 Gauge 284, 287
User Name 51, 424 ID 106
User Options 423 Jumper dialog 519
Path 411 Labels 465, 503
Using the software 27 Layers 108, 213
V Line Style 203, 211
Validate Page 175 List 465
Validation Prompts 425 Move 210
Validation Report dialog 593, 598 MultiWire 199
Validity Check dialog 586 Options 105
Variables Polywire 199
Graphical Plan 541 Property Display 106
Title Block 393 Settings 105
View Size 284, 287
Redraw 176 Stretch 208
View Options 427 Tag 106
Viewing Pages 176 Uses 108
Voltage separated wire routes 605 Wire Calculator dialog 570
Wire Fill Calculator 569
W Wire Labels 503
Welcome dialog 14, 424 Wire Layer Configuration dialog 108
Wire 197 Wire Layers
3 Phase 204 Select 213
90 Degree 206 Wire Link 266
Attributes 284, 287 Changing type 274
Color 211, 284, 287 Display Configuration 83
Connection Points 206 Index 269, 274, 275
723
Index
Notation Configuration 274 Wire Properties Display dialog 106

Placing symbol 271 Wire Routing 543
Re-sequence 274 Wire routing
Search and Link 272 voltage separated 605
Types of 268 Wire Tag Format dialog 112
Wire Numbering and 281 Wire Terminations 608
Wire Link Cross Reference Format dialog Wire/Device connections 276
83 Wired Device ID 76, 307
Wire Link ID dialog 271 Wires
Wire Link Usage dialog 272 Drawing 198
Wire List 465 Wireway
Wire Number 281 Draw 560
Align 293 Wiring Diagrams 317
Automatic 281 Charts 104
Branch label 283 Create 319
Delete 288 Settings 100
Display/Hide 427 Symbol Create 360
Duplicate 210 Wiring Rule Configuration dialog 597
Duplicate checking 110 Wizard
Hide individual wire number 210 Symbol Creation 333
Manual 286
Modify 287
Z
On branch 210 Zone
On Copied Pages 167 Regions 189
On Moved Pages 172 Zoom 176
on Terminal 283 All 177
Position 106 Center 177
Replace 290 Dynamic 176
Same Potential Over Terminal 107 Extents 177
Tag Format 110 In 177
Wire starting point 272 Navigation function 427
Wire Options 105 Out 177
Wire Path Previous 176
Assign wires to 569 Real Time 176
Wire path 560 Scale 176
Wire Properties Window 176
Edit 212
Find and Replace 290
724

Promis-E User Guide

Transféré par

Informations du document

Description originale:

Titre original

Copyright

Formats disponibles

Partager ce document

Partager ou intégrer le document

Options de partage

Avez-vous trouvé ce document utile ?

Ce contenu est-il inapproprié ?

Droits d'auteur :

Formats disponibles

Promis-E User Guide

Transféré par

Droits d'auteur :

Formats disponibles

promis•e V8i ®

Rename Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170

Single Line Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248

Replace Page Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313

Plot Current Page (MircroStation Version) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435

Terminal Editing Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 516

Parts Database Editor Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 634

1 Installation and Start-up

Downloading the Software

This screen allows you to choose a variety of functions:

Activating the Software License

License Activation Procedure

Use the following procedure to activate the software:

1. After installing promis•e, start it (see page 14).

You have the following choices:

F. A message will appear indicating that your product activation is complete.

Checking Out a License

4. Select the Use a checked out license checkbox.

2 Introduction and Overview

The promis•e Concept

This chart shows the interrelationship of promis•e functions.

1. If the parts database is to be used to allow the automatic generation of support

Using This Manual

promis-e ribbon menu tabs

AutoCAD 2006 - 2008

promis-e menu tabs

MicroStation and MicroStation PowerDraft

Design menu group (Schematic mode)

Design menu group (Schematic mode continued)

Design menu group (Panel Layout mode)

Design menu group (Panel Layout mode continued)

Design menu group (Hydraulic and Pneumatic modes)

Design menu group (Hydraulic and Pneumatic modes continued)

Review / Revise menu group

promis-e Output menu group

Manage menu group

Configure menu group

promis-e Help menu group

Command Line / Text Window

Help Screens and User Guide

Engineering Design Considerations

Schematic diagrams Bill of materials

DRAWING SET 1 DRAWING SET 2

Installations and Locations

LOCATION LOCATION LOCATION LOCATION

The Project Manager window will open.

The Project Manager is divided into the following sections:

Active project icon

Drawing Sets - A list of drawing sets in the selected project is shown. By

Favorites Project Folder

2. The Search dialog will appear.

See Page Pending Status

Create New Project

1. There are two ways to open the New Project dialog:

2. The New Project dialog will appear.

1. Open the Project Manager.

1. Open the Project Manager.

5. Select OK to rename the project.

1. Open the Project Manager.

1. Open the Project Manager.

Select Yes to delete the project or select No to cancel the deletion.

• Select the Options toolbar button in the Project Manager.